CDM-570/570L

CDM-570 – 70/140 MHz Satellite Modem

CDM-570L – L-Band Satellite Modem
Optional IP Module
Installation and Operation Manual
For Firmware Version 1.7.0 or higher
IMPORTANT NOTE: The information contained in this document supersedes all previously published
information regarding this product. Product specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

Part Number MN/CDM570L.IOM Revision 9

 Errata Page 1 of 10

Errata A
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update

Subject: Replace Flash Upgrading Procedure

Date: April 28, 2010

Original Manual
Part Number/Rev: MN/CDM570L.IOM Rev 9

Errata Number/
Agile Document ID: ER-MNCDM570L.EA9

Agile CO Number: CO 11665

Comments: Affected manual page content will be updated, as indicated below,

upon next formal manual revision.
Affected content: Chapter 4. FLASH UPGRADING

Replace Chapter 4. FLASH UPGRADING (pp. 4-1 through 4-8) in its

entirety with the content provided in this Errata on pages 3 through 10.

AGILE DOC ID ER-MNCDM570L.EA9 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! AGILE CO11665
 Errata Page 2 of 10

This page is intentionally blank.

AGILE DOC ID ER-MNCDM570L.EA9 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! AGILE CO11665
 Errata Page 3 of 10

Chapter 4. FLASH UPGRADING

4.1 F las h Updating via Internet

The CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem eliminates the need for updating firmware by physically
replacing EPROMs. Instead, the CDM-570/570L uses ‘Flash memory’ technology internally. This
makes software upgrading very simple, and updates can now be sent via the Internet (Figure 4-1),
via E-mail, or on CD.

This chapter outlines the complete upgrading process as follows:

• New firmware can be downloaded via the Internet to an external PC.
• The upgrade can be performed without opening the CDM-570/570L by simply connecting
the unit to the serial or Ethernet port of a computer.
• The firmware update is transferred, via File Transfer Protocol (FTP), to the CDM-570/570L.

Figure 4-1. Flash Update via Internet

4–1
AGILE DOC ID ER-MNCDM570L.EA9 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! AGILE CO11665
 Errata Page 4 of 10

4.2 About F irmware F iles , Naming, Vers ions and F ormats

The CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem stores its firmware in flash memory which allows the unit
to upload firmware downloads from an external PC once Ethernet connectivity has been
established.
All CEFD products are shipped configured with the current version firmware release. Firmware
upgrades may be obtained from Comtech EF Data via download from the Internet to an external
PC, via e-mail, or on CD.
Comtech EF Data’s Web site catalogues its firmware
upgrade files by product type (e.g., modem,
converter, etc.) and specific model/optional
configuration. The hyperlinks appear as per the
example to the right. In this example, the
F10805XX_V### firmware download hyperlink is
depicted (the linked file applies to the base modem
firmware), where ‘XX’ denotes the revision letter,
and ### represents the firmware version.
In addition to the download for the base modem bulk firmware, downloads are available for the
Ethernet IP Module which, with or without 3xDES Encryption, is an option for the
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem. It requires separate firmware upgrade (the upgrade procedure
for the optional IP Module interface is also provided in this document). Firmware upgrades are
available from Comtech EF Data per the following table:
Web Hyperlink EXE/ZIP Filename Contains Image File (* denotes revision letter)
F10805XX_V### FW10805XX FW10805*.bin – Base modem firmware.
F0000120X_V### FW0000120XX FW-0000120*.bin – IP Module Ver. 1.6.3 (and earlier) with HDLC
Encapsulation, without 3xDES option.
N/A Contact CEFD FW10875*.bin – IP Module Ver. 1.6.3 (and earlier) with HDLC
Encapsulation, with 3xDES option.
F0000358X_v### FW0000358X FW-0000358*.bin – IP Module Ver. 1.7.0 (and later) with Streamline
Encapsulation, without 3xDES option.
F0000355X_v### Contact CEFD FW-0000355*.bin – IP Module Ver. 1.7.0 (and later) with Streamline
Encapsulation, with 3xDES option.

1. Ver. 1.7.0 firmware (featuring Streamline Encapsulation) is not

compatible with Ver. 1.6.x firmware (featuring HDLC Encapsulation).
IMPORTANT 2. Only firmware for the CDM-570/570L base modem and IP Module
without 3xDES is available for download from the CEFD Web site. To
obtain the firmware upgrade for the CDM-570/570L IP Module with the
3xDES option, contact Network Product Customer Support:
Phone: 480.333.2433
E-mail: cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com.
The firmware download files are available from Comtech EF Data in two file formats: *.exe (self
extracting) and *.zip (compressed). Some firewalls will not allow the downloading of *.exe
files; in this case, download the *.zip file instead. If applicable, one version prior to the current
release is also available for download.

4–2
AGILE DOC ID ER-MNCDM570L.EA9 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! AGILE CO11665
 Errata Page 5 of 10

(Note: For additional help with "zipped" file types, refer to the help files provided with the
"PKZIP for Windows", "WinZip", or "ZipCentral" file archiving programs. “PKZIP for DOS” is
not supported due to file naming conventions.)
To verify the correct firmware number, see Step 1 in the next section/ Base Modem of this guide,
Sect. 4.3 Preparation for the Base Modem Ethernet FTP Upload Procedure.

4.3 P reparation for the B as e Modem E thernet F T P Upload P rocedure

Step Procedure
1 Identify the reflashable product, firmware number, and version for download.
The current modem M&C version and/or firmware number can be viewed as follows:
• Via the front panel: The firmware version is available from the VFD’s top-level
screen. To view this screen, press the [CLEAR] key several times.
The firmware number can also be found within the SELECT: UTIL  Firmware 
Info  Image#1 or Image#2 menu trees.
• Via serial remote control: The firmware number, versions, and revision level
can be queried as follows:
Abbreviated: <0/SWR? or: Detailed: <0/FRW?
• Via the Base Modem Web Server Interface: The Bootrom, Bulk1 and Bulk2
firmware loads may be viewed after selecting the Unit Info hyperlink (available
under the Maint [Maintenance] page tab). For more information, refer to Chapter
7. BASE MODEM WEB SERVER INTERFACE.
2 Create a temporary directory (folder) on the PC:
Windows: Select File  New  Folder and rename the “New Folder” to "temp" or another
unused name. A "c:\temp" folder should now exist.
Note: The c: is the drive letter used in this example. Any valid, writable drive letter can be
used.
CMD prompt: At the command prompt (c:\>) type "MD temp" or “mkdir temp” without
quotes (MD and mkdir stand for make directory). A "c:\temp" subdirectory should now
exist, where c: is the drive letter used in the example.
3 Download the correct firmware file to this temporary folder. As shown in Figure 4-1:
a) Go online to: www.comtechefdata.com;
b) Click on: Support tab;
c) Click on: Software Downloads drop-down or hyperlink from Support page;
d) Click on: Download Flash and Software Update Files icon;
e) Click on: Flash and Software Update Files Select a Product Line: Satellite
Modems hyperlink;
f) Select the CDM-570 and CDM-570L product hyperlink;
g) Select the appropriate firmware hyperlink for download.
Refer to the table in Sect. 4.2 About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and Formats in
this chapter for the naming and availability of the firmware download hyperlinks, archive
files, and downloaded image files.

4–3
AGILE DOC ID ER-MNCDM570L.EA9 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! AGILE CO11665
 Errata Page 6 of 10

4 Extract the files to the temporary folder on the PC. A minimum of three files should be
extracted:
• FW10805x.bin: The bulk image file (where ‘x’ is the revision letter);
• CDM570_570L Release Notes.pdf (or a variation of this filename);
• Readme_vx.txt: Firmware installation notes (where ‘x’ is the revision letter);
• FLG-CDM570L_rx.pdf: The Firmware Upgrade Guide (where ‘x’ is the
document revision number).
5 Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC. In
DOS, use “cd c:\temp” to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2, then use
the “dir” command to list the files extracted from the downloaded archive file.

4.4 B as e Modem B ulk F irmware Upgrade – E thernet F TP Upload P rocedure

Step Procedure
6 Connect the external PC to the CDM-570/570L modem 10/100 Ethernet M&C port via a
hub or a switch, or directly to a PC with a crossover cable.
BASE MODEM firmware can be loaded via the Ethernet M&C port; when
the optional IP Module is installed, via the Ethernet Traffic port; or over
the satellite link when the modem data interface is set to IP.
IMPORTANT
Note that the command used to load the BASE MODEM firmware is as
follows (where ‘x’ is the firmware revision letter):
• Via Ethernet Port: Type "put FW10805x.bin bulk:"
• Via Traffic Port or over satellite using IP Module: Type "put
FW10805x.bin”
7 Send a “ping” command to the modem to verify the connection and communication.
First, determine the IP address of the modem as follows:
• Via the front panel – use the SELECT: CONFIG  Remote  Remote 
Ethernet menu.
• Via serial remote control: Use the <0/IPA? query.
Then, use DOS to “ping” the modem:
From Windows, click “Start” on the Windows toolbar, then select the “Run...” option (as an
alternative, use the “DOS Prompt” or “Command Prompt” icons in the Start Menu):
• Using Win95 or Win98 – Type “command”.
• Using WinNT, Win2K or WinXP – Type “cmd”.
At the DOS prompt, type “ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the modem IP
address). The results should confirm whether or not the modem is connected and
communicating.
8 Initiate an FTP session with the modem (this example uses a DOS window):
a) From the PC, type "ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address
of the CDM-570/570L.
b) Enter the Admin User Name and Password to complete login.
c) Verify the FTP transfer is binary by typing "bin".
d) Type "prompt", then type "hash" to facilitate the file transfers.

4–4
AGILE DOC ID ER-MNCDM570L.EA9 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! AGILE CO11665
 Errata Page 7 of 10

9 Transfer the files from the temporary folder on the PC:

• Upgrade via Ethernet M&C port: Type "put FW10805x.bin bulk:" to begin the file
transfers (where ‘x’ is the revision letter). The destination “bulk:” must be all lower
case. It will take approximately one minute to transfer the file.
• Upgrade via Traffic Ethernet port or over satellite using IP module: Type "put
FW10805x.bin" to begin the file transfers (where ‘x’ is the revision letter). It will take
approximately one minute to transfer the file when done locally and several minutes
when done over the satellite.
10 Verify the file transfer:
a) The PC should report that the file transfer has occurred, and the display on the
modem will report:

Programming flash sector #xx

Please wait…
b) The process sequences through several blocks – this will take several minutes.
When it has finished, the modem front panel will display:

Bulk FTP done. Press CLEAR.

c) Terminate the FTP session by typing "bye" and close the DOS window.
d) Confirm that the new file was loaded by using the procedure in Step 1.
11 Change the desired image to boot from the modem front panel menu: SELECT: UTIL 
Firmware  Select (use ◄ ► arrows to change to the other image), then cycle power to
reboot the modem.
12 Verify the new firmware versions are booting by observing the following messages on the
modem front panel display:
Comtech CDM-570/570L Modem
Ver 1.x.x
Note: To load the second image, repeat Steps 8 through 11.

4–5
AGILE DOC ID ER-MNCDM570L.EA9 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! AGILE CO11665
 Errata Page 8 of 10

4.5 E thernet IP Module F T P Upload P rocedure

Step Procedure
1 Identify the reflashable product, firmware number, and version for download.
The current modem M&C version and/or firmware number can be viewed as follows:
• Via the front panel: The firmware version is available from the VFD’s top-level
screen. To view this screen, press the [CLEAR] key several times.
The firmware information can also be found within the SELECT: UTIL  Firmware
 Info  MP550 menu trees.
• From the Serial Console port: View the IP Module information by selecting
Operations and Maintenance  Unit Information.
• From Telnet via the 10/100 Ethernet Traffic port: View the IP Module
information by selecting Operations and Maintenance  Unit Information.
• From HTTP via the 10/100 Ethernet Traffic port: View the IP Module
information by selecting Operations and Maintenance  Unit Information.
2 Create a temporary directory (folder) on the PC:
Windows: Select File  New  Folder and rename the “New Folder” to "temp" or
another unused name. A "c:\temp" folder should now exist.
Note: The c: is the drive letter used in this example. Any valid, writable drive letter can be
used.
CMD prompt: At the command prompt (c:\>) type "MD temp" or “mkdir temp” without
quotes (MD and mkdir stand for make directory). A "c:\temp" subdirectory should now
exist, where c: is the drive letter used in the example.
3
Download the correct firmware file to this temporary folder:
a) Go online to: www.comtechefdata.com;
b) Click on: Support tab;
c) Click on: Software Downloads drop-down or hyperlink from Support page;
d) Click on: Download Flash and Software Update Files icon;
e) Click on: Flash and Software Update Files Select a Product Line: Satellite
Modems hyperlink;
f) Select the CDM-570 and CDM-570L product hyperlink;
g) Select the appropriate firmware hyperlink (i.e., CDM-570/570L with IP Module
without 3xDES) or contact CEFD Customer Support to obtain the download with
3xDES.
Refer to the table in Sect. 4.2 About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and Formats
in this chapter for the naming and availability of the firmware download hyperlinks,
archive files, and downloaded image files.

4–6
AGILE DOC ID ER-MNCDM570L.EA9 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! AGILE CO11665
 Errata Page 9 of 10

4 Extract the files to the temporary folder on the PC. A minimum of three files should
be extracted:
• Without 3xDES – FW-0000120x.bin (Ver. 1.6.3 and earlier) –or– FW-
0000355x.bin (Ver. 1.7.0 or later). Note that ‘x’ denotes the revision letter of
the image file.
–or–
• With 3xDES – FW10875x.bin (Ver. 1.6.3 and earlier) –or– FW-0000355x.bin
(Ver. 1.7.0 or later). Note that ‘x’ denotes the revision letter of the image file.
• CDM570_570L Release Notes.pdf (or a variation of this filename);
• FLG-CDM570L_rx.pdf: The Firmware Upgrade Guide (where ‘x’ is the
document revision number).
5 Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC. In
DOS, use “cd c:\temp” to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2, then use
the “dir” command to list the files extracted from the downloaded archive file.
6 Connect the external PC to the CDM-570/570L modem 10/100 Ethernet M&C port via
a hub or a switch, or directly to a PC with a crossover cable.
IP MODULE firmware can only be loaded via the Ethernet Traffic port;
do not use the Ethernet M&C port. Also, IP MODULE firmware can be
IMPORTANT loaded to a remote modem over the satellite link when the modem data
interface is set to IP.
• For upgrades to a local CDM-570/570L IP Module: It is recommended
that this upgrade be performed with a PC that is locally attached to the IP
Module CLI via the RS-232 Serial Console Port to monitor the progress of
the upgrade.
• For upgrades to a remote CDM-570/570L IP Module over a satellite
link: It is recommended that this upgrade be performed with a PC that
has a Telnet session connection (in addition to the FTP session) to the IP
Module via satellite to monitor the progress of the upgrade.
7 Send a “ping” command to the modem to verify the connection and communication.
First, determine the IP address of the modem by using either the CDM-570/570L front
panel or serial remote control:
• Via the front panel: Use the SELECT: CONFIG  Remote  Remote 
Ethernet menu.
• Via serial remote control: Use the <0/IPA? query.
Then, use DOS to “ping” the modem:
From Windows, click “Start” on the Windows toolbar, then select the “Run...” option (as
an alternative, use the “DOS Prompt” or “Command Prompt” icons in the Start Menu):
• Using Win95 or Win98 – Type “command”.
• Using WinNT, Win2K or WinXP – Type “cmd”.
At the DOS prompt, type “ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the modem
IP address). The results should confirm whether or not the modem is connected and
communicating.

4–7
AGILE DOC ID ER-MNCDM570L.EA9 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! AGILE CO11665
 Errata Page 10 of 10

8 Initiate an FTP session with the modem (this example uses a DOS window):
a) From the PC, type "ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP
address of the CDM-570/570L.
b) Enter the Admin User Name and Password to complete login.
c) Verify the FTP transfer is binary by typing "bin".
d) Type "prompt", then type "hash" to facilitate the file transfers.
9 Transfer the files from the temporary folder on the PC:
Type “put FW#######x.bin” (where ‘#######’ is the designated image file number,
and ‘x’ is the revision letter) to begin the file transfers. It will take several minutes to
transfer and write the files to flash memory.
10 Verify the file transfer:
a) The PC should report that the file transfer has occurred, and the display on
the CLI or Telnet will indicate that the image is being written to flash memory.
b) Terminate the FTP session by typing "bye" and close the DOS window.
c) Confirm that the new file was loaded by using the procedure in Step 1.
11 Change the desired image to boot. By default, the IP Module will boot to the version
with the latest date (Boot to – Latest). “Boot to” can also be set to force the modem to
boot up using either Image #1 or Image #2. The IP Module will then need to be reset
(i.e., rebooted or power cycled) from the serial console, Web Server Interface, or
CLI/Telnet for the firmware upgrade selection to become active:
• To reset from the serial console, use serial remote command ‘FRB=’ (Force
Reboot).
• To reset from the IP Module Web Server Interface, select the Maint | Reboot
page, then click [Yes, Reboot].
• To reset from the CLI/Telnet Main Menu, select Operations and Maintenance
[O], then Reset [R].
If the file transfer is not successful for any reason, do not reset or
power down the CDM-570/570L. Restart the FTP session and repeat
Steps 7 through 9. If the file transfer is still not successful, contact
IMPORTANT
Comtech EF Data Network Product Support:
Telephone: 480.333.2433
Email: cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com

4.6 US B P rocedure

USB reflash is not available in this firmware release – please consult Comtech
EF Data Customer Support for release schedule.
IMPORTANT

4–8
AGILE DOC ID ER-MNCDM570L.EA9 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION/UPDATE! AGILE CO11665
CDM-570/570L
CDM-570 – 70/140 MHz Satellite Modem
CDM-570L – L-Band Satellite Modem
Optional IP Module
Installation and Operation Manual
For Firmware Version 1.7.0 or higher
Part Number MN/CDM570L.IOM
Revision 9
April 1, 2010

Copyright © 2009 Comtech EF Data. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
Comtech EF Data, 2114 West 7th Street, Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA, 480.333.2200, FAX: 480.333.2161
This page is intentionally blank.
 Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS .............................................................................................................. III 

TABLES .................................................................................................................................. XVIII 

FIGURES ................................................................................................................................ XVIII 

PREFACE ............................................................................................................................... XXIII 

About this Manual ................................................................................................................................. xxiii 

About the Revision Level for this Manual ........................................................................................... xxiii 
Reporting Comments or Suggestions Concerning this Manual ........................................................... xxiii 

Conventions and References ................................................................................................................. xxiii 

Metric Conversion ............................................................................................................................... xxiii 
Recommended Standard Designations................................................................................................. xxiv 
Cautions and Warnings ........................................................................................................................ xxiv 

Electrical Safety ..................................................................................................................................... xxiv 

Fuses .................................................................................................................................................... xxiv 
Environmental ....................................................................................................................................... xxv 
Installation............................................................................................................................................. xxv 

Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive .......................................................................... xxv 

RoHS Compliancy ................................................................................................................................... xxv 

EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) ................................................................................................ xxvi 

Warranty Policy .................................................................................................................................... xxvii 

Limitations of Warranty ...................................................................................................................... xxvii 
Exclusive Remedies ........................................................................................................................... xxviii 

Customer Support .................................................................................................................................. xxix 

Online Customer Support .................................................................................................................... xxix 

CHAPTER 1.  INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 1–1 

1.1  Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 1–1 

1.2  Functional Description ............................................................................................................... 1–2 

1.3  Features ........................................................................................................................................ 1–3 

1.3.1  Physical Description ............................................................................................................. 1–3 
1.3.2  Compatibility ........................................................................................................................ 1–3 

iii
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

1.3.3  Major Assemblies ................................................................................................................. 1–3 

1.3.4  Dimensional Envelope .......................................................................................................... 1–4 
1.3.5  Physical Features .................................................................................................................. 1–5 
1.3.5.1  Front Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 1–5 
1.3.5.2  Rear Panel ......................................................................................................................................... 1–5 
1.3.6  Hardware Options ................................................................................................................. 1–7 
1.3.7  Data Interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 1–7 
1.3.8  Verification ........................................................................................................................... 1–7 
1.3.9  AUPC .................................................................................................................................... 1–7 
1.3.10  EDMAC ................................................................................................................................ 1–8 
1.3.11  Flash Upgrading Modem Firmware ...................................................................................... 1–8 
1.3.12  Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST) ......................................................................... 1–8 
1.3.13  Supporting Hardware and Software .................................................................................... 1–10 

1.4  Summary of Specifications ....................................................................................................... 1–11 

1.4.1  Modulator ............................................................................................................................ 1–11 
1.4.2  Demodulator ....................................................................................................................... 1–13 
1.4.3  Automatic Uplink Power Control ....................................................................................... 1–15 
1.4.4  Data and Miscellaneous Interfaces ..................................................................................... 1–16 
1.4.5  Data Rate Ranges ................................................................................................................ 1–16 
1.4.6  Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................................... 1–17 
1.4.7  Approvals ............................................................................................................................ 1–17 

CHAPTER 2.  INSTALLATION .............................................................................................. 2–1 

2.1  Unpacking .................................................................................................................................... 2–1 

2.2  Mounting ...................................................................................................................................... 2–2 

2.2.1  Optional Rear-Mounting Support Brackets .......................................................................... 2–2 

2.3  Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 2–4 

2.4  Select Internal IF Loop ............................................................................................................... 2–4 

2.5  Connect External Cables ............................................................................................................ 2–4 

CHAPTER 3.  REAR PANEL CONNECTORS ....................................................................... 3–1 

3.1  Connector Overview ................................................................................................................... 3–1 

3.2  IF Connections ............................................................................................................................ 3–3 

3.2.1  Rx IF Connectors .................................................................................................................. 3–3 
3.2.2  Tx IF Connectors .................................................................................................................. 3–3 

3.3  Terrestrial Data Connections ..................................................................................................... 3–4 

3.3.1  Data Interface Connector, DB-25F ....................................................................................... 3–4 
3.3.2  G.703 Connectors ................................................................................................................. 3–5 
3.3.2.1  Balanced E1/T1 G.703 Interface Connector, DB-15F................................................................... 3–5 
3.3.2.2  Unbalanced G.703 Interface Connectors (Tx/Rx), 75Ω BNC ...................................................... 3–7 

iv
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

3.3.3  10/100 BaseT Ethernet Management Port Connector (M&C), RJ-45 .................................. 3–7 
3.3.4  10/100BaseT Ethernet Traffic Port Connector (with Optional IP Module only) ................................... 3–7 

3.4  Utility Connections...................................................................................................................... 3–8 

3.4.1  Remote Control Interface Connector, DB-9M ...................................................................... 3–8 
3.4.2  Form-C Traffic Alarms Connector, DB-15M ....................................................................... 3–8 
3.4.3  1:1 Control Interface Connector, DB-9F .............................................................................. 3–9 
3.4.4  Ext Ref Connector, BNC .................................................................................................... 3–10 
3.4.5  Async-Serial Console (with Optional IP Module only), RJ-11 .......................................... 3–10 

3.5  Power / Ground Connections ................................................................................................... 3–11 

3.5.1  Alternating Current (AC) Power Connector (Standard) ..................................................... 3–11 
3.5.2  Direct Current (DC) Power Connector (Optional) .............................................................. 3–11 
3.5.3  Ground Connector ............................................................................................................... 3–11 

CHAPTER 4.  FLASH UPGRADING ...................................................................................... 4–1 

4.1  Flash Updating via Internet ....................................................................................................... 4–1 

4.2  Base Modem Ethernet FTP Upload Procedure ........................................................................ 4–2 

4.3  Ethernet IP Module FTP Upload Procedure ............................................................................ 4–5 

4.4  USB Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 4–7 

CHAPTER 5.  FRONT PANEL OPERATION ......................................................................... 5–1 

5.1  Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 5–1 

5.1.1  LED Indicators ...................................................................................................................... 5–2 
5.1.2  Keypad .................................................................................................................................. 5–3 
5.1.3  Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) .................................................................................... 5–4 

5.2  Opening Screen ........................................................................................................................... 5–4 

5.3  SELECT: (Main) Menu .............................................................................................................. 5–5 

5.3.1  (SELECT:) Config (Configuration) Menus .......................................................................... 5–7 
5.3.1.1  CONFIG: Rem (Remote Control)................................................................................................... 5–8 
5.3.1.1.1  CONFIG: Remote Æ Serial ........................................................................................ 5–8 
5.3.1.1.2  CONFIG: Remote Æ Ethernet .................................................................................... 5–9 
5.3.1.2  CONFIG: All .................................................................................................................................. 5–11 
5.3.1.3  CONFIG: Tx (Transmit)................................................................................................................ 5–11 
5.3.1.3.1  CONFIG: Tx Æ FEC (FEC Type) ............................................................................ 5–12 
5.3.1.3.2  CONFIG: Tx Æ Mod (Modulation) ......................................................................... 5–13 
5.3.1.3.3  CONFIG: Tx Æ Code (Code Rate) .......................................................................... 5–13 
5.3.1.3.4  CONFIG: Tx Æ Data (Data Rate) ............................................................................ 5–14 
5.3.1.3.5  CONFIG: Tx Æ Frq (Frequency) ............................................................................ 5–15 
5.3.1.3.6  CONFIG: Tx Æ On/Off ............................................................................................ 5–15 
5.3.1.3.7  CONFIG: Tx Æ Pwr (Power) ................................................................................... 5–16 
5.3.1.3.8  CONFIG: Tx Æ Scram (Scrambling) ....................................................................... 5–17 

v
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.3.9  CONFIG: Tx Æ Clk (Clock Source) ........................................................................ 5–18 

5.3.1.3.10  CONFIG: Tx Æ Inv (Inversion Functions)............................................................. 5–18 
5.3.1.4  CONFIG: Rx (Receive) ................................................................................................................. 5–19 
5.3.1.4.1  CONFIG: Rx Æ FEC (FEC Type)............................................................................ 5–20 
5.3.1.4.2  CONFIG: Rx Æ Dem (Demodulation) ..................................................................... 5–20 
5.3.1.4.3  CONFIG: Rx Æ Code (Code Rate) .......................................................................... 5–21 
5.3.1.4.4  CONFIG: Rx Æ Data (Data Rate) ............................................................................ 5–22 
5.3.1.4.5  CONFIG: Rx Æ Frq (Frequency) ............................................................................. 5–23 
5.3.1.4.6  CONFIG: Rx Æ Acq (Acquisition Range) ............................................................... 5–23 
5.3.1.4.7  CONFIG: Rx Æ Descram (Descrambling) ............................................................... 5–24 
5.3.1.4.8  CONFIG: Rx Æ Buf (Buffer) ................................................................................... 5–24 
5.3.1.4.9  CONFIG: Rx Æ Inv (Inversion Functions) .............................................................. 5–25 
5.3.1.4.10  CONFIG: Rx Æ Eb/No ........................................................................................... 5–25 
5.3.1.5  CONFIG: CEx (G.703 Clock Extension)..................................................................................... 5–25 
5.3.1.6  CONFIG: Frame (Framing Mode)................................................................................................ 5–26 
5.3.1.6.1  CONFIG: Frame Æ Unframed ................................................................................. 5–26 
5.3.1.6.2  CONFIG: Frame Æ EDMAC or EDMAC-2 ............................................................ 5–26 
5.3.1.7  CONFIG: Intfc (Interface) ............................................................................................................. 5–27 
5.3.1.7.1  CONFIG: Intfc Æ RS422 or V.35 or RS232 ............................................................ 5–28 
5.3.1.7.2  CONFIG: Intfc Æ IP................................................................................................. 5–28 
5.3.1.7.3  CONFIG: Intfc Æ G.703 .......................................................................................... 5–28 
5.3.1.7.4  CONFIG: Intfc Æ WAd (E1 RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation) ..................... 5–29 
5.3.1.8  CONFIG: Ref (Reference)............................................................................................................. 5–31 
5.3.1.9  CONFIG: Mask .............................................................................................................................. 5–31 
5.3.1.9.1  CONFIG: Mask Æ Transmit .................................................................................... 5–31 
5.3.1.9.2  CONFIG: Mask Æ Receive ...................................................................................... 5–32 
5.3.1.9.3  CONFIG: Mask Æ Ref ............................................................................................. 5–32 
5.3.1.9.4  CONFIG: Mask Æ BUC (CDM-570L ONLY) ........................................................ 5–32 
5.3.1.9.5  CONFIG: Mask Æ LNB (CDM-570L ONLY) ........................................................ 5–33 
5.3.1.9.6  CONFIG: ODU (CDM-570L ONLY) ...................................................................... 5–33 
5.3.2  SELECT: Monitor Menus ................................................................................................... 5–33 
5.3.2.1  MONITOR: Alarms ....................................................................................................................... 5–33 
5.3.2.1.1  MONITOR: Alarms Æ Unit ..................................................................................... 5–34 
5.3.2.1.2  MONITOR: Alarms Æ Receive (Receive Traffic Status) ........................................ 5–34 
5.3.2.1.3  MONITOR: Alarms Æ Transmit (Transmit Traffic Status) ..................................... 5–34 
5.3.2.2  MONITOR: Stats (Link Statistics)................................................................................................ 5–34 
5.3.2.2.1  MONITOR: Stats Æ View........................................................................................ 5–35 
5.3.2.2.2  MONITOR: Stats Æ Clear-All ................................................................................. 5–35 
5.3.2.2.3  MONITOR: Stats Æ Config (Configure) ................................................................. 5–36 
5.3.2.3  MONITOR: Event-Log (Stored Events) ...................................................................................... 5–36 
5.3.2.3.1 MONITOR: Event-LogÆ View ............................................................................... 5–36
5.3.2.4 MONITOR: Event-Log Æ Clear-All ........................................................................................... 5–36
5.3.2.5 MONITOR: Parameters................................................................................................................. 5–37
5.3.2.5.1 MONITOR: Parameters Æ Rx-Params (Receive Parameters) ................................. 5–37
5.3.2.5.2 MONITOR: Parameters Æ WAd-Params (WAN Adapation Parameters) ....................... 5–37
5.3.2.6 MONITOR: Parameters Æ AUPC ............................................................................................... 5–38
5.3.2.7 MONITOR: Parameters Æ ODU (CDM-570L ONLY) ............................................................ 5–38
5.3.3 SELECT: TEST Menus ...................................................................................................... 5–39
5.3.4 SELECT: Info Menus ......................................................................................................... 5–41 
5.3.4.1  INFO: All ........................................................................................................................................ 5–41 

vi
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.4.2  INFO: Tx (Transmit)...................................................................................................................... 5–41 

5.3.4.3  INFO: Rx (Receive) ....................................................................................................................... 5–42 
5.3.4.4  INFO: Buf (Buffer) ........................................................................................................................ 5–42 
5.3.4.5  INFO: Frame (Framing and EDMAC) ......................................................................................... 5–42 
5.3.4.6  INFO: Intfc (Interface) ................................................................................................................... 5–43 
5.3.4.7  INFO: Rem (Remote Control)....................................................................................................... 5–43 
5.3.4.8  INFO: Msk (Alarm Mask) ............................................................................................................. 5–43 
5.3.4.9  INFO: Ref (Frequency Reference)................................................................................................ 5–43 
5.3.4.10  INFO: ID (Circuit ID) .................................................................................................................... 5–44 
5.3.4.11  INFO: 1:1 (1:1 Redundancy) ......................................................................................................... 5–44 
5.3.5  SELECT: Save/Load Menus ............................................................................................... 5–44 
5.3.5.1  Save/Load: Save ............................................................................................................................. 5–44 
5.3.5.2  Save/Load: Load............................................................................................................................. 5–45 
5.3.6  SELECT: Utility Menus...................................................................................................... 5–45 
5.3.6.1  UTIL: Buffer (Buffer Re-center)................................................................................................... 5–45 
5.3.6.2  UTIL: Clock (Set Real-time Clock) .............................................................................................. 5–46 
5.3.6.3  UTIL: Ref (Reference)................................................................................................................... 5–46 
5.3.6.4  UTIL: Ref Æ Adjust ...................................................................................................................... 5–46 
5.3.6.5  UTIL: Ref Æ Warm-up Delay ...................................................................................................... 5–46 
5.3.6.6  UTIL: ID (Circuit ID) .................................................................................................................... 5–47 
5.3.6.7  UTIL: 1:1 (Manual 1:1 Switchover) ............................................................................................. 5–47 
5.3.6.8  UTIL: VFD (Video Fluorescent Display Brightness) ................................................................. 5–48 
5.3.6.9  UTIL: Firmware ............................................................................................................................. 5–48 
5.3.6.9.1  UTIL: Firmware Æ Info ........................................................................................... 5–48 
5.3.6.9.2  UTIL: Firmware Æ Select ........................................................................................ 5–49 
5.3.6.10  UTIL: FAST (FAST Code Options)............................................................................................. 5–49 
5.3.6.10.1  UTIL: FAST Æ Cnfg (FAST Configuration) ......................................................... 5–49 
5.3.6.10.2  UTIL: FAST Æ View ............................................................................................. 5–51 
5.3.7  SELECT: ODU Menus (CDM-570 ONLY) ....................................................................... 5–51 

CHAPTER 6.  ETHERNET MANAGEMENT .......................................................................... 6–1 

6.1  Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 6–1 

6.2  Ethernet Management Interface Protocols ............................................................................... 6–1 

6.3  Web Server (HTTP) Interface ................................................................................................... 6–2 

6.4  SNMP Interface ........................................................................................................................... 6–3 

6.4.1  Management Information Base (MIB) Files ......................................................................... 6–3 
6.4.2  SNMP Community Strings ................................................................................................... 6–4 
6.4.3  SNMP Traps.......................................................................................................................... 6–4 
6.4.4  MIB-II ................................................................................................................................... 6–5 
6.4.5  Private MIB ........................................................................................................................... 6–6 

6.5  Telnet Interface ........................................................................................................................... 6–6

vii
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

CHAPTER 7.  BASE MODEM WEB SERVER INTERFACE ............................................. 7–1 

7.1  Web Server (HTTP) Interface ................................................................................................... 7–1 

7.1.1  Web Server Page Introduction .............................................................................................. 7–1 
7.1.2  Web Server Page Access....................................................................................................... 7–2 
7.1.2.1  CDM-570 Base Modem Web Server Interface “Splash” Page .................................................... 7–3 
7.1.2.2  CDM-570L Base Modem Web Server Interface “Splash” Page .................................................. 7–4 

7.2  Web Server Page Descriptions ................................................................................................... 7–5 

7.2.1  Home Pages .......................................................................................................................... 7–5 
7.2.1.1  Home | Home .................................................................................................................................... 7–5 
7.2.1.2  Home | Contact ................................................................................................................................. 7–6 
7.2.1.3  Home | Support ................................................................................................................................. 7–7 
7.2.2  Admin Pages ......................................................................................................................... 7–8 
7.2.2.1  Admin | Access ................................................................................................................................. 7–8 
7.2.2.2  Admin | Remote.............................................................................................................................. 7–10 
7.2.3  Config Mdm (Configure Modem) Pages ............................................................................ 7–11 
7.2.3.1  Config Mdm | Modem ................................................................................................................... 7–11 
7.2.3.2  Config Mdm | Modem Utilities ..................................................................................................... 7–12 
7.2.3.3  Config Mdm | AUPC ..................................................................................................................... 7–14 
7.2.3.4  Config Mdm | Timeslot Selection ................................................................................................. 7–15 
7.2.4  Stats Pages .......................................................................................................................... 7–16 
7.2.4.1  Stats | Modem Status ...................................................................................................................... 7–16 
7.2.4.2  Stats | Modem Logs ........................................................................................................................ 7–17 
7.2.4.3  Stats | Graphs (Minute Hour Day)................................................................................................. 7–18 
7.2.5  ODU (Outdoor Unit) Pages................................................................................................. 7–20 
7.2.6  Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info Page ................................................................................ 7–20 

CHAPTER 8.  FORWARD ERROR CORRECTION OPTIONS ............................................. 8–1 

8.1  Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 8–1 

8.2  Viterbi .......................................................................................................................................... 8–1 

8.3  Reed-Solomon Outer Codec (Hardware Option) ..................................................................... 8–2 

8.4  Trellis Coding (requires 8-PSK/8-QAM FAST Option) .......................................................... 8–4 

8.5  Turbo Product Codec (Hardware Option) ............................................................................... 8–5 

8.5.1  Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 8–5 
8.5.2  TPC modes available in the CDM-570/570L........................................................................ 8–5 
8.5.3  8-QAM Modulation .............................................................................................................. 8–6 
8.5.4  End-to-End Processing Delay ............................................................................................... 8–6 
8.5.5  Comparison of all TPC Modes.............................................................................................. 8–7 

8.6  Uncoded Operation (No FEC) ................................................................................................... 8–8 

8.7  Rates above 2.5 Msymbols/sec ................................................................................................... 8–9 

viii
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

CHAPTER 9.  AUTOMATIC UPLINK POWER CONTROL (AUPC) ..................................... 9–1 

9.1  Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 9–1 

9.2  Setting AUPC Parameters .......................................................................................................... 9–2 

9.2.1  Target Eb/N0 .......................................................................................................................... 9–2 
9.2.2  Max Range ............................................................................................................................ 9–2 
9.2.3  Alarm .................................................................................................................................... 9–2 
9.2.4  Demod Unlock ...................................................................................................................... 9–3 

9.3  Compensation Rate ..................................................................................................................... 9–3 

9.4  Monitoring ................................................................................................................................... 9–3 

CHAPTER 10.  CLOCKING MODES .................................................................................... 10–1 

10.1  Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 10–1 

10.2  Transmit Clocking .................................................................................................................... 10–1 

10.2.1  Internal Clock...................................................................................................................... 10–1 
10.2.2  Tx Terrestrial ...................................................................................................................... 10–2 
10.2.3  Rx Loop-Timed, Rx=Tx ..................................................................................................... 10–2 
10.2.4  Rx Loop-Timed, Rx<>Tx (Asymmetric Loop Timing) ...................................................... 10–2 

10.3  Receive Clocking ....................................................................................................................... 10–2 

10.3.1  Buffer Disabled (Rx Satellite)............................................................................................. 10–2 
10.3.2  Buffer Enabled, Tx=Rx ....................................................................................................... 10–3 
10.3.3  Buffer Enabled, Rx<>Tx .................................................................................................... 10–3 

10.4  X.21 Notes .................................................................................................................................. 10–3 

10.5  G.703 Clock Extension.............................................................................................................. 10–6 

10.5.1  Clock Extension Mode 1 ..................................................................................................... 10–6 
10.5.2  Clock Extension Mode 2 ..................................................................................................... 10–7 
10.5.3  Clock Extension Mode 3 ..................................................................................................... 10–7 

CHAPTER 11.  EDMAC CHANNEL ..................................................................................... 11–1 

11.1  Theory Of Operation ................................................................................................................ 11–1 

11.2  M&C Connection ...................................................................................................................... 11–2 

11.3  Setup Summary ......................................................................................................................... 11–3 

CHAPTER 12.  OFFSET QPSK OPERATION ..................................................................... 12–1 

CHAPTER 13.  IP MODULE ETHERNET INTERFACE ....................................................... 13–1 

13.1  Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 13–1 

ix
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.2  Major Assemblies ...................................................................................................................... 13–1 

13.3  IP Module Standard Features .................................................................................................. 13–1 

13.3.1  10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface.......................................................................................... 13–2 
13.3.2  Powerful Network Management ......................................................................................... 13–2 
13.3.3  Remote Software/Firmware Upgrade via FTP .................................................................... 13–2 
13.3.4  Configuration Backup and Restore via FTP ....................................................................... 13–2 
13.3.5  Event Logging to Capture all IP Module Activity .............................................................. 13–3 
13.3.6  Detailed Statistics of IP Traffic ........................................................................................... 13–3 
13.3.7  IGMP Support for Multicast ............................................................................................... 13–3 
13.3.8  Static IP Routing for Unicast and Multicast ....................................................................... 13–3 
13.3.9  Managed Switch Mode ....................................................................................................... 13–3 
13.3.9.1  Managed Switch Mode Operation ................................................................................................ 13–3 
13.3.10  Streamline Encapsulation (Version 1.7.x and later)........................................................ 13–5 
13.3.10.1  Combined Working Mode ............................................................................................................. 13–6 

13.4  IP Module Optional Features................................................................................................... 13–6 

13.4.1  CDM-570/570L IP Module Demo Mode ............................................................................ 13–7 
13.4.2  3xDES Encryption with Ability to Change Keys ............................................................... 13–7 
13.4.3  IP Header Compression ...................................................................................................... 13–7 
13.4.4  Payload Compression.......................................................................................................... 13–8 
13.4.4.1  ADLC vs. LZS Compression Comparison................................................................................... 13–8 
13.4.5  Quality of Service ............................................................................................................... 13–9 
13.4.5.1  Maximum Bandwidth/Priority QoS Mode ................................................................................. 13–10 
13.4.5.2  Minimum/Maximum Bandwidth QoS Mode ............................................................................ 13–12 
13.4.5.3  DiffServ QoS Mode ..................................................................................................................... 13–13 

13.5  IP Module Specifications – Supported RFCs and Protocols ............................................... 13–14 

13.6  IP Module Web Server Interface ........................................................................................... 13–14 

13.6.1  Web Server Menu Tree ..................................................................................................... 13–15 
13.6.2  User Login ........................................................................................................................ 13–16 
13.6.3  Web Server Page Descriptions .......................................................................................... 13–18 
13.6.3.1  Home Pages .................................................................................................................................. 13–18 
13.6.3.1.1  Home | Home ........................................................................................................ 13–18 
13.6.3.1.2  Home | Contact...................................................................................................... 13–19 
13.6.3.1.3  Home | Support ..................................................................................................... 13–20 
13.6.3.1.4  Home | Log Off ..................................................................................................... 13–21 
13.6.3.2  Admin Pages ................................................................................................................................. 13–22 
13.6.3.2.1  Admin | Summary ................................................................................................. 13–22 
13.6.3.2.2  Admin | Mode ....................................................................................................... 13–23 
13.6.3.2.3  Admin | Access ..................................................................................................... 13–26 
13.6.3.2.4  Admin | Features ................................................................................................... 13–27 
13.6.3.2.5  Admin | Remote .................................................................................................... 13–29 
13.6.3.2.6  Admin | Encryption ............................................................................................... 13–30 
13.6.3.3  Modem Pages ............................................................................................................................... 13–31 
13.6.3.3.1  Modem | Modem ................................................................................................... 13–31 
13.6.3.3.2  Modem | Utilities .................................................................................................. 13–32 
13.6.3.3.3  Modem | Status...................................................................................................... 13–33 
13.6.3.3.4  Modem | Logs ....................................................................................................... 13–34 

x
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4  IP Pages ......................................................................................................................................... 13–35 

13.6.3.4.1  IP | Interface .......................................................................................................... 13–35 
13.6.3.4.2  IP | Routes ............................................................................................................. 13–37 
13.6.3.4.3  IP | Multicast ......................................................................................................... 13–39 
13.6.3.4.4  IP | QoS Mode ....................................................................................................... 13–41 
13.6.3.4.5  IP | QoS (Quality of Service) Pages ...................................................................... 13–42 
13.6.3.4.5.1  IP | QoS (Maximum Bandwidth/Priority Mode) ............................................ 13–42 
13.6.3.4.5.2  IP | QoS (Minimum/Maximum Bandwidth Mode) ........................................ 13–44 
13.6.3.4.5.3  IP | QoS (DiffServ Mode) .............................................................................. 13–46 
13.6.3.4.5.4  IP | QoS (VLAN – Priority/Maximum Bandwidth Mode) ............................. 13–47 
13.6.3.4.6  IP | ARP ................................................................................................................ 13–48 
13.6.3.4.7  IP | VLAN ............................................................................................................. 13–49 
13.6.3.4.8  IP | IGMP .............................................................................................................. 13–51 
13.6.3.4.9  IP | Redundancy .................................................................................................... 13–52 
13.6.3.5  Stats (Statistics) Pages .................................................................................................................. 13–53 
13.6.3.5.1  Stats | Ethernet ...................................................................................................... 13–53 
13.6.3.5.2  Stats | Routes ......................................................................................................... 13–54 
13.6.3.5.3  Stats | QoS ............................................................................................................. 13–55 
13.6.3.5.4  Stats | WAN .......................................................................................................... 13–56 
13.6.3.5.5  Stats | Compression ............................................................................................... 13–57 
13.6.3.6  Maint (Maintenance) Pages ......................................................................................................... 13–58 
13.6.3.6.1  Maint | Unit Info.................................................................................................... 13–58 
13.6.3.6.2  Maint | Operations ................................................................................................. 13–59 
13.6.3.6.3  Maint | Save .......................................................................................................... 13–60 
13.6.3.6.4  Maint | Reboot ....................................................................................................... 13–61 

CHAPTER 14.  IP MODULE - CLI AND TELNET OPERATION .......................................... 14–1 

14.1  Overview .................................................................................................................................... 14–1 

14.1.1  Common Operational Features ........................................................................................... 14–2 

14.2  Main Menu Page ....................................................................................................................... 14–3 

14.2.1  Administration Page............................................................................................................ 14–4 
14.2.1.1  Name/Password Configuration Page ............................................................................................ 14–6 
14.2.1.2  Access Lists Page ........................................................................................................................... 14–7 
14.2.1.3  Feature Configuration Page ........................................................................................................... 14–8 
14.2.1.4  3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration Page ............................................................................ 14–11 
14.2.1.5  SMTP Configuration Page........................................................................................................... 14–13 
14.2.1.6  SNMP Configuration Page .......................................................................................................... 14–14 
14.2.1.7  Working Mode ............................................................................................................................. 14–15 
14.2.1.8  Managed Switch Multicast Option ............................................................................................. 14–16 
14.2.1.9  Header/Payload Compression Refresh Rate............................................................................... 14–16 
14.2.1.10  Payload Compression Refresh Rate ............................................................................................ 14–17 
14.2.1.11  Telnet Timeout ............................................................................................................................. 14–17 
14.2.2  Interface Configuration Page ............................................................................................ 14–17 
14.2.2.1  Ethernet Interface Page ................................................................................................................ 14–18 
14.2.2.1.1  VLAN Table ......................................................................................................... 14–19 
14.2.2.2  Satellite/HDLC Interface Page .................................................................................................... 14–20 
14.2.2.3  Receive HDLC Channel Addresses Page................................................................................... 14–21 

xi
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.3  QoS (Quality of Service) Configuration Page .................................................................. 14–22 

14.2.3.1  QoS Rules Configuration Page – Max/Priority Mode ............................................................... 14–23 
14.2.3.2  QoS Rules Configuration Page – Min/Max Mode .................................................................... 14–25 
14.2.3.3  DiffServ Rules Configuration Page ............................................................................................ 14–26 
14.2.4  Route Table Configuration Page ....................................................................................... 14–27 
14.2.5  Protocol Configuration Page ............................................................................................. 14–30 
14.2.5.1  IGMP Information Page............................................................................................................... 14–31 
14.2.5.2  ARP Table Utilities Page ............................................................................................................. 14–33 
14.2.5.3  Brouter Configuration Page ......................................................................................................... 14–35 
14.2.6  Vipersat Configuration Page ............................................................................................. 14–36 
14.2.7  Satellite Modem Page ....................................................................................................... 14–37 
14.2.8  Configuration Page ........................................................................................................... 14–38 
14.2.8.1  Tx Configuration Page ................................................................................................................. 14–39 
14.2.8.2  Rx Configuration Page................................................................................................................. 14–41 
14.2.8.3  Framing Mode Configuration...................................................................................................... 14–43 
14.2.8.4  Data Interface Configuration ....................................................................................................... 14–44 
14.2.8.5  Reference Configuration Page..................................................................................................... 14–45 
14.2.8.6  Alarm Mask Configuration.......................................................................................................... 14–46 
14.2.8.7  Block Up Converter (BUC) Configuration ................................................................................ 14–47 
14.2.8.8  Low Noise Block Converter (LNB) Configuration ................................................................... 14–48 
14.2.9  1:1 Redundancy Configuration Page ................................................................................ 14–49 
14.2.10  Operations and Maintenance Page ................................................................................ 14–50 
14.2.10.1  Unit Information Page.................................................................................................................. 14–52 
14.2.10.2  Statistics Page ............................................................................................................................... 14–53 
14.2.10.2.1  IP Routing Statistics Page ................................................................................... 14–54 
14.2.10.2.1.1  Filter/Drop Statistics Page............................................................................ 14–55 
14.2.10.2.2  QoS Statistics Page ............................................................................................. 14–58 
14.2.10.2.3  Ethernet Statistics Page ....................................................................................... 14–59 
14.2.10.2.4  WAN Statistics .................................................................................................... 14–61 
14.2.10.2.5  Compression Statistics ........................................................................................ 14–63 
14.2.10.2.6  CPU Statistics ..................................................................................................... 14–64 
14.2.10.2.7  VLAN Statistics .................................................................................................. 14–64 
14.2.10.3  Event Log Page............................................................................................................................. 14–65 
14.2.10.4  Database Operations Page ........................................................................................................... 14–67 
14.2.10.5  Diagnostics Page .......................................................................................................................... 14–68 

14.3  Telnet Session – Logout Option ............................................................................................. 14–70 

CHAPTER 15.  RAN OPTIMIZATION / WAN ADAPTATION .............................................. 15–1 

15.1  Overview .................................................................................................................................... 15–1 

15.1.1  E1 RAN Optimization Components ................................................................................... 15–1 
15.1.2  Radio Access Network (RAN) ............................................................................................ 15–2 
15.1.3  RAN Inefficiency ................................................................................................................ 15–3 

15.2  E1 RAN Optimization............................................................................................................... 15–3 

15.2.1  Process Overview................................................................................................................ 15–4 
15.2.2  WAN Link Dimensioning and Pre-emptive Bandwidth Management ............................... 15–5 
15.2.3  Performance Monitoring ..................................................................................................... 15–7 

xii
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

15.2.3.1  RAN Optimization (WAN Adaptation) Savings ......................................................................... 15–7 

15.2.3.2  WAN Utilization ............................................................................................................................ 15–7 
15.2.3.3  Link Congestion/Quality................................................................................................................ 15–8 

APPENDIX A.  CABLE DRAWINGS ..................................................................................... A–1 

APPENDIX B.  EB/N0 MEASUREMENT ................................................................................ B–1 

APPENDIX C.  FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE .............................................................. C–1 

C.1  FAST System Overview ............................................................................................................. C–1 

C.2  Activation Procedure ................................................................................................................. C–2 

C.2.1  Serial Number ...................................................................................................................... C–2 
C.2.2  View currently installed features ......................................................................................... C–2 
C.2.3  Enter Access Codes.............................................................................................................. C–2 
C.2.4  Enable / Disable Demo Mode .............................................................................................. C–3 

APPENDIX D.  SERIAL REMOTE CONTROL ...................................................................... D–1 

D.1  Overview ..................................................................................................................................... D–1 

D.2  EIA-485 ....................................................................................................................................... D–1 

D.3  EIA-232 ....................................................................................................................................... D–2 

D.4  Basic Protocol ............................................................................................................................. D–2 

D.5  Packet Structure......................................................................................................................... D–3 

D.5.1  Start of Packet ...................................................................................................................... D–3 
D.5.2  Target Address ..................................................................................................................... D–3 
D.5.3  Address Delimiter ................................................................................................................ D–3 
D.5.4  Instruction Code ................................................................................................................... D–4 
D.5.5  Instruction Code Qualifier ................................................................................................... D–4 
D.5.6  Optional Message Arguments .............................................................................................. D–5 
D.5.7  End of Packet ....................................................................................................................... D–5 

D.6  Remote Commands and Queries .............................................................................................. D–6 

D.6.1  Transmit (Tx) Commands and Queries ................................................................................ D–8 
D.6.2  Receive (Rx) Commands and Queries ............................................................................... D–12 
D.6.3  Unit Commands and Queries ............................................................................................. D–15 
D.6.4  Bulk Commands and Queries ............................................................................................ D–25 
D.6.5  BUC Commands and Queries (CDM-570L ONLY) ......................................................... D–27 
D.6.6  LNB Commands and Queries (CDM-570L ONLY) .......................................................... D–29 
D.6.7  WAN Adaptation Option Commands and Queries ............................................................ D–31

xiii
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

APPENDIX E.  CDM/CDD NMCS PROTOCOL – REV 1.0 ................................................... E–1 

E.1  Revision History ......................................................................................................................... E–1 

E.2  Introduction ................................................................................................................................ E–1 

E.3  Architecture ................................................................................................................................ E–1 

E.4  Command Set Introduction....................................................................................................... E–2 

E.4.1  Telnet Interface .....................................................................................................................E–2 
E.4.2  Basic Protocol .......................................................................................................................E–2 
E.4.3  Command Structure ..............................................................................................................E–2 
E.4.3.1  Start Of Packet .................................................................................................................................. E–3 
E.4.3.2  Target Address................................................................................................................................. E–3 
E.4.3.3  Instruction Code ............................................................................................................................... E–3 
E.4.3.4  Instruction Code Qualifier ............................................................................................................... E–4 
E.4.3.5  Message Arguments ......................................................................................................................... E–5 
E.4.3.6  Table Support Qualifier ................................................................................................................... E–5 
E.4.3.6.1  Index ...........................................................................................................................E–5 
E.4.3.6.2  Argument lists.............................................................................................................E–6 
E.4.3.7  End Of Packet ................................................................................................................................... E–6 

E.5  Remote Commands and Queries .............................................................................................. E–7 

E.5.1  IP Commands and Queries ....................................................................................................E–8 
E.5.1.1  Admin Commands and Queries ...................................................................................................... E–8 
E.5.2  Interface Commands and Queries .......................................................................................E–15 
E.5.3  QoS Commands and Queries ..............................................................................................E–16 
E.5.4  Protocol Commands and Queries ........................................................................................E–19 
E.5.5  Operations and Maintenance Commands and Queries .......................................................E–21 
E.5.6  Redundancy Queries ...........................................................................................................E–23 
E.5.7  Routing Commands and Queries ........................................................................................E–24 
E.5.8  Statistics Commands and Queries .......................................................................................E–26 
E.5.8.1  WAN Stats ...................................................................................................................................... E–26 
E.5.8.2  IP Stats............................................................................................................................................. E–27 
E.5.8.3  Ethernet Stats .................................................................................................................................. E–29 
E.5.8.4  Quality of Service (QoS) Stats ...................................................................................................... E–30 

E.6  PARAM Files ............................................................................................................................ E–31 

APPENDIX F.  IP QUICK-START GUIDE .............................................................................. F–1 

F.1  Quick-Start Guide Introduction ................................................................................................F–1 

F.1.1  Equipment List ...................................................................................................................... F–1 
F.1.2  Equipment Setup ................................................................................................................... F–2 
F.1.3  Transmit and Receive IF Configuration ................................................................................ F–2 
F.1.4  Serial console port Command Line Interface (CLI) Configuration ...................................... F–2 
F.1.5  Main Menu ............................................................................................................................ F–3 
F.1.6  Restoring Factory Default Configuration.............................................................................. F–3

xiv
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

F.2  Managed Switch Point-to-Point System Configuration...........................................................F–4 

F.2.1  PC Configuration .................................................................................................................. F–4 
F.2.2  CDM-IP Configuration – Setting IP Address(es) ................................................................ F–4 

F.3  Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration ................................................................F–5 

F.3.1  PC Configuration .................................................................................................................. F–5 
F.3.2  Setting CDM-IP Modems to Router Mode Operation .......................................................... F–6 
F.3.3  Setting IP Address(es) ........................................................................................................... F–6 
F.3.4  Set Route Table entries ......................................................................................................... F–6 

F.4  Troubleshooting IP Module .......................................................................................................F–8 

F.4.1  Managed Switch Mode Troubleshooting .............................................................................. F–8 
F.4.2  Router Mode Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ F–10 

APPENDIX G.  TYPICAL IP MODULE OPERATIONAL SETUPS ....................................... G–1 

G.1  Overview ..................................................................................................................................... G–1 

G.2  Modem Compatibility ................................................................................................................ G–1 

G.3  IP Module Working Modes ....................................................................................................... G–2 

G.3.1  Working Modes (CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.6.X and earlier) .............................................. G–2 
G.3.2  Working Modes (CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.7.X and later) ................................................. G–4 
G.3.3  Managed Switch Working Mode ......................................................................................... G–5 
G.3.4  Router Working Mode – Point-to-Point............................................................................... G–6 
G.3.5  Router Working Mode – Point-to-MultiPoint ...................................................................... G–7 

APPENDIX H.  IP REDUNDANCY ........................................................................................ H–1 

H.1  Introduction ................................................................................................................................ H–1 

H.2  CRS-XXX 1:1 Redundancy Switch Functional Description .................................................. H–1 

H.2.1  CRS-180 70/140 MHz 1:1 Redundancy Switch .................................................................. H–1 
H.2.2  CRS-170A L-Band 1:1 Redundancy Switch........................................................................ H–2 

H.3  CDM-570/570L 1:1 IP Data Switching Functional Description............................................. H–3 

H.4  CDM-570/570L 1:1 IP Redundancy Configuration ................................................................ H–5 

H.5  Cabling With CDM-570 IF........................................................................................................ H–7 

H.6  Cabling With CDM-570L .......................................................................................................... H–8 

APPENDIX J.  GPS MODE ..................................................................................................... J–1 

J.1  Overview ...................................................................................................................................... J–1 

J.2  Hardware Setup .......................................................................................................................... J–1 

xv
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

J.3  Remote Commands ..................................................................................................................... J–2 

APPENDIX K.  CDM-570 ODU (CSAT-5060, KST-2000A/B) OPERATION ......................... K–1 

K.1  Introduction ................................................................................................................................ K–1 

K.2  ODU Remote Control Address Setup....................................................................................... K–1 

K.3  ODU Operations via the CDM-570 Front Panel ..................................................................... K–2 
K.3.1  SELECT: (Main) Menu ....................................................................................................... K–4 
K.3.2  (SELECT:) ODU ................................................................................................................. K–4 
K.3.2.1  (SELECT:) ODU Æ CSAT-5060 Transceiver Menu Tree ......................................................... K–5 
K.3.2.1.1  (SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable ...................................................................................... K–6 
K.3.2.1.1.1  COMMON ‘ODU SELECT’ SUBMENU ......................................................... K–8 
K.3.2.1.1.1.1  ODU SELECT: Config ............................................................................... K–8 
K.3.2.1.1.1.2  ODU SELECT: Info .................................................................................. K–12 
K.3.2.1.1.1.3  ODU SELECT: Monitor ........................................................................... K–13 
K.3.2.1.1.1.4  ODU SELECT: Alarms ............................................................................. K–14 
K.3.2.2  (SELECT:) ODU ÆKST-2000A/B Transceiver Menu Tree .................................................... K–15 
K.3.2.2.1  (SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable .................................................................................... K–16 
K.3.2.2.1.1  (SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config (Configuration) .................................. K–16 
K.3.2.2.1.2  (SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE Æ INFO (Information) .................................. K–20 
K.3.2.2.1.3  (SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE ÆSTATUS .................................................... K–22 

K.4  ODU Operations via the CDM-570 Base Modem Web Server Interface............................ K–23 
K.4.1  Web Server Interface Overview ......................................................................................... K–23 
K.4.1.1  ODU-Accessible Web Server Home Page .................................................................................. K–23 
K.4.1.2  ODU (Outdoor Unit) pages .......................................................................................................... K–24 
K.4.1.2.1  ODU | Config Page ................................................................................................. K–25 
K.4.1.2.1.1  ODU | Config Page (CSAT-5060) ................................................................... K–25 
K.4.1.2.1.2  ODU | Config Page (KST-2000A/B) ............................................................... K–27 
K.4.1.2.2  ODU | Status Page ................................................................................................... K–28 
K.4.1.2.2.1  ODU | Status Page (CSAT-5060)..................................................................... K–28 
K.4.1.2.2.2  ODU | Status Page (KST-2000A/B)................................................................. K–29 
K.4.1.2.3  ODU | Utilities Page................................................................................................ K–30 
K.4.1.2.3.1  ODU | Utilities Page (CSAT-5060).................................................................. K–30 
K.4.1.2.3.2  ODU | Utilities Page (KST-2000A/B).............................................................. K–32 

APPENDIX L.  CDM-570L ODU (BUC, LNB) OPERATION .................................................. L–1 

L.1  Introduction ................................................................................................................................ L–1 

L.2  ODU Remote Control Address Setup....................................................................................... L–1 

L.3  ODU Operations via the CDM-570L Front Panel .................................................................. L–2 
L.3.1  SELECT: (Main) Menu ........................................................................................................L–4 
L.3.2  (SELECT:) Config (Configuration) ......................................................................................L–4 
L.3.2.1  (SELECT:) CONFIG Æ Mask ....................................................................................................... L–4 
L.3.2.1.1  (SELECT:) CONFIG ÆAlarm Mask: BUC ...............................................................L–4 

xvi
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.3.2.1.2  (SELECT:) CONFIG ÆAlarm Mask: LNB ...............................................................L–4 

L.3.2.2  (SELECT:) Config ÆODU............................................................................................................. L–5 
L.3.2.2.1  (SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) ÆBUC .................................................L–5 
L.3.2.2.2  (SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ LNB ................................................L–7 
L.3.3  (SELECT:) Monitor ..............................................................................................................L–9 
L.3.3.1  MONITOR: Alarms ......................................................................................................................... L–9 
L.3.3.2  MONITOR: Parameters................................................................................................................... L–9 
L.3.3.2.1  MONITOR: Parameters Æ ODU .............................................................................L–10 

L.4  ODU Operations via the CDM-570L Base Modem Web Server Interface ......................... L–11 
L.4.1  Base Modem Web Server Interface Overview....................................................................L–11 
L.4.1.1  ODU-Accessible Base Modem Web Server Home Page ........................................................... L–11 
L.4.2  ODU (BUC, LNB) Pages ....................................................................................................L–12 
L.4.2.1  Config Mdm | BUC (Block Upconverter) .................................................................................... L–12 
L.4.2.2  Config Mdm | LNB (Low-Noise Block Downconverter) ........................................................... L–13 

L.5  ODU Operations via the CDM-570L IP Module Web Server Interface ............................. L–14 
L.5.1  IP Module Web Server Interface Overview ........................................................................L–14 
L.5.1.1  ODU-Accessible IP Module Web Server Home Page ................................................................ L–14 
L.5.2  ODU (BUC, LNB) Pages ....................................................................................................L–15 
L.5.2.1  Modem | BUC (Block Upconverter)............................................................................................. L–15 
L.5.2.2  Modem | LNB (Low-Noise Block Downconverter).................................................................... L–16 

xvii
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

Tables
Table 3-1. Rear Panel External Connections ........................................................................................... 3–2
Table 3-2. Data Interface Connector Pin Assignments ............................................................................ 3–4
Table 3-3. Balanced G.703 Interface Connector Pin Assignments .......................................................... 3–5
Table 3-4. Typical Ethernet Interface Connector Pin Assignments ......................................................... 3–7
Table 3-5. Remote Control Interface Connector Pin Assignments .......................................................... 3–8
Table 3-6. Alarm Interface Connector Pin Assignments ......................................................................... 3–9
Table 3-7. 1:1 Control Interface Connector Pin Assignments ................................................................. 3–9
Table 3-8. ASYNC-Serial Console Connector Pin Assignments .......................................................... 3–10
Table 6-1. MIB-II Support ....................................................................................................................... 6–5
Table 8-1. Viterbi Decoding Summary .................................................................................................... 8–2
Table 8-2. Concatenated RS Coding Summary ....................................................................................... 8–3
Table 8-3. 8-PSK/TCM Coding Summary .............................................................................................. 8–4
Table 8-4. Available TPC Modes ............................................................................................................ 8–5
Table 8-5. Turbo Product Coding Processing Delay Comparison ........................................................... 8–6
Table 8-6. Turbo Product Coding Summary ............................................................................................ 8–8
Table 13-1. Streamlined Encapsulation .................................................................................................. 13–5

Figures
Figure 1-1. CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem (CDM-570L shown) ........................................................ 1–1
Figure 1-2. CDM-570/570L Dimensional Envelope ................................................................................ 1–4
Figure 1-3. Front Panel View (CDM-570L shown) .................................................................................. 1–5
Figure 1-4. Rear Panel View ..................................................................................................................... 1–5
Figure 2-1. Installation of Optional Rear-Mounting Support Brackets (KT/6228-2) ............................... 2–3
Figure 3-1. CDM-570/570L Rear Panel ................................................................................................... 3–1
Figure 3-2. CN-0000268 DB-15M Æ RJ-48F Adapter for E1/T1 Operation........................................... 3–6
Figure 4-1. Flash Update via Internet ....................................................................................................... 4–1
Figure 5-1. Front Panel View (CDM-570L shown) .................................................................................. 5–1
Figure 5-2. CDM-570/570L – Front Panel Keypad .................................................................................. 5–3
Figure 5-3. CDM-570/570L – Principle Menu Tree ................................................................................. 5–6
Figure 5-4. Loopback Modes .................................................................................................................. 5–40
Figure 7-1. CDM-570 “Splash” page ........................................................................................................ 7–3
Figure 7-2. CDM-570L “Splash” page ..................................................................................................... 7–4
Figure 7-3. Satellite Modem Home page (CDM-570L shown) ................................................................ 7–5
Figure 7-4. Home | Contact page .............................................................................................................. 7–6
Figure 7-5. Home | Customer Support page.............................................................................................. 7–7
Figure 7-6. Admin | Access page .............................................................................................................. 7–8
Figure 7-7. Admin | Remote page ........................................................................................................... 7–10
Figure 7-8. Config Mdm | Modem page ................................................................................................. 7–11
Figure 7-9. Config Mdm | Modem Utilities page ................................................................................... 7–12
Figure 7-10. Config Mdm | AUPC page ................................................................................................. 7–14
Figure 7-11. Config Mdm | Timeslot Selection page .............................................................................. 7–15
Figure 7-12. Stats | Modem Status page.................................................................................................. 7–16
Figure 7-13. Stats | Modem Logs page ................................................................................................... 7–17
Figure 7-14. Stats | Graphs pages (Minute page shown)......................................................................... 7–18
Figure 7-15. Maint (Maintenance) page ................................................................................................. 7–20

xviii
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure 8-1. Viterbi Decoding .................................................................................................................. 8–10

Figure 8-2. Viterbi with Concatenated RS Outer Code .......................................................................... 8–11
Figure 8-3. 8-PSK/TCM Rate 2/3 with Concatenated RS Outer Code ................................................... 8–12
Figure 8-4. Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK, 8-PSK AND 16-QAM Turbo ...................................................... 8–13
Figure 8-5. Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK, 8-PSK AND 16-QAM Turbo ...................................................... 8–14
Figure 8-6. Rate 21/44 QPSK, Rate 0.95 QPSK and Rate 0.95 8-PSK Turbo ....................................... 8–15
Figure 8-7. Rate 21/44 BPSK and Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo..................................................................... 8–16
Figure 8-8. Rate 3/4 and Rate 0.95 8-QAM Turbo ................................................................................. 8–17
Figure 8-9. Rate 7/8 8-QAM Turbo ........................................................................................................ 8–18
Figure 8-10. 16-QAM Viterbi, Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8 with 220,200 RS Outer Code ............................. 8–19
Figure 8-11. Differential Encoding – No FEC, No Scrambling ............................................................. 8–20
Figure 10-1. Tx Clock Modes ................................................................................................................ 10–4
Figure 10-2. Rx Clock Modes ................................................................................................................ 10–5
Figure 10-3. G.703 Clock Extension Mode 1 ......................................................................................... 10–8
Figure 10-4. G.703 Clock Extension Mode 2 ......................................................................................... 10–9
Figure 10-5. G.703 Clock Extension Mode 3 ....................................................................................... 10–10
Figure 13-1. Home | Home Page ........................................................................................................... 13–18
Figure 13-2. Home | Contact page ........................................................................................................ 13–19
Figure 13-3. Home | Customer Support page........................................................................................ 13–20
Figure 13-4. Info | Logoff page ............................................................................................................. 13–21
Figure 13-5. Admin |Summary page ..................................................................................................... 13–22
Figure 13-6. Admin | Mode page (Firmware Ver. 1.6.x and earlier) .................................................... 13–23
Figure 13-7. Admin | Mode page (Firmware Ver. 1.7.x and later) ....................................................... 13–24
Figure 13-8. Admin | Access page ........................................................................................................ 13–26
Figure 13-9. Admin | Features page ...................................................................................................... 13–27
Figure 13-10. Admin | Remote page ..................................................................................................... 13–29
Figure 13-11. Admin | Encryption page ................................................................................................ 13–30
Figure 13-12. Modem | Modem page.................................................................................................... 13–31
Figure 13-13. Modem | Utilities page ................................................................................................... 13–32
Figure 13-14. Modem | Status page ...................................................................................................... 13–33
Figure 13-15. Modem | Logs page ........................................................................................................ 13–34
Figure 13-16. IP | Interface page ........................................................................................................... 13–35
Figure 13-17. IP | Routes page .............................................................................................................. 13–37
Figure 13-18. IP | Multicast page .......................................................................................................... 13–39
Figure 13-19. IP | QoS Mode page ....................................................................................................... 13–41
Figure 13-20. IP | QoS page (Max/Priority Mode) ............................................................................... 13–42
Figure 13-21. IP | QoS Mode page (Min/Max Mode) .......................................................................... 13–44
Figure 13-22. IP | QoS Mode page (DiffServ Mode)............................................................................ 13–46
Figure 13-23. IP | QoS Mode page (VLAN – Priority/Max Mode) ...................................................... 13–47
Figure 13-24. IP | ARP page ................................................................................................................. 13–48
Figure 13-25. IP | VLAN page .............................................................................................................. 13–49
Figure 13-26. IP | IGMP ....................................................................................................................... 13–51
Figure 13-27. IP | Redundancy page ..................................................................................................... 13–52
Figure 13-28. Stats | Ethernet page ....................................................................................................... 13–53
Figure 13-29. Stats | Routes page.......................................................................................................... 13–54
Figure 13-30. Stats | QoS page.............................................................................................................. 13–55
Figure 13-31. Stats | WAN page ........................................................................................................... 13–56
Figure 13-32. Stats | Compression page ................................................................................................ 13–57
Figure 13-33. Maint | Unit Info page .................................................................................................... 13–58
Figure 13-34. Maint | Operations page ................................................................................................. 13–59

xix
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure 13-35. Maint | Save page ........................................................................................................... 13–60

Figure 13-36. Maint | Reboot page ....................................................................................................... 13–61
Figure 14-1. Main Menu page................................................................................................................. 14–3
Figure 14-2. Administration page ........................................................................................................... 14–4
Figure 14-3. Name/Password Configuration page .................................................................................. 14–6
Figure 14-4. Access Lists page ............................................................................................................... 14–7
Figure 14-5. Feature Configuration page ................................................................................................ 14–8
Figure 14-6. 3xDES Encrypt Configuration page ................................................................................. 14–11
Figure 14-7. SMTP Configuration page ............................................................................................... 14–13
Figure 14-8. SNMP Configuration page ............................................................................................... 14–14
Figure 14-9. Interface Configuration page ............................................................................................ 14–17
Figure 14-10. Ethernet Interface page................................................................................................... 14–18
Figure 14-11. VLAN Table................................................................................................................... 14–19
Figure 14-12. Satellite/HDLC Interface page ....................................................................................... 14–20
Figure 14-13. Receive HDLC Channel Addresses page ....................................................................... 14–21
Figure 14-14. QoS Configuration page ................................................................................................. 14–22
Figure 14-15. QoS Rules Configuration page (Max/Priority mode)..................................................... 14–23
Figure 14-16. QoS Rules Configuration page (Min/Max mode) .......................................................... 14–25
Figure 14-17. DiffServ Rules Configuration page ................................................................................ 14–26
Figure 14-18. Route Table Configuration page .................................................................................... 14–27
Figure 14-19. Protocol Configuration Page .......................................................................................... 14–30
Figure 14-20. IGMP Information page ................................................................................................. 14–31
Figure 14-21. ARP Table Utilities page................................................................................................ 14–33
Figure 14-22. Brouter Configuration page ............................................................................................ 14–35
Figure 14-23. Vipersat Configuration page .......................................................................................... 14–36
Figure 14-24. Modem Parameters Page ................................................................................................ 14–37
Figure 14-25. Modem Configuration page ........................................................................................... 14–38
Figure 14-26. Tx (Transmit Modem) Configuration Page .................................................................... 14–39
Figure 14-27. Rx (Receive Modem) Configuration Page ..................................................................... 14–41
Figure 14-28. Framing Mode Configuration Page ................................................................................ 14–43
Figure 14-29. Data Interface Configuration Page ................................................................................. 14–44
Figure 14-30. Reference Configuration Page ....................................................................................... 14–45
Figure 14-31. Alarm Mask Configuration Page.................................................................................... 14–46
Figure 14-32. Block Up Converter (BUC) Configuration Page ........................................................... 14–47
Figure 14-33. Low Noise Block Converter (LNB) Configuration Page ............................................... 14–48
Figure 14-34. 1:1 Redundancy Configuration page .............................................................................. 14–49
Figure 14-35. Operations and Maintenance page ................................................................................. 14–50
Figure 14-36. Unit Information page .................................................................................................... 14–52
Figure 14-37. Statistics Menu ............................................................................................................... 14–53
Figure 14-38. IP Statistics page ............................................................................................................ 14–54
Figure 14-39. Filter/Drop Statistics page .............................................................................................. 14–55
Figure 14-40. QoS Statistics Page......................................................................................................... 14–58
Figure 14-41. Ethernet Statistics page .................................................................................................. 14–59
Figure 14-42. WAN Statistics page ...................................................................................................... 14–61
Figure 14-43. Compression Statistics page ........................................................................................... 14–63
Figure 14-44. CPU Statistics page ........................................................................................................ 14–64
Figure 14-45. VLAN Statistics page ..................................................................................................... 14–64
Figure 14-46. Event Log page............................................................................................................... 14–65
Figure 14-47. Database Operations page .............................................................................................. 14–67
Figure 14-48. Diagnostics Page ............................................................................................................ 14–68

xx
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure 14-49. Logout via Telnet Session .............................................................................................. 14–70

Figure 15-1. 2G / 3G Radio Access Network (RAN) ............................................................................. 15–2
Figure 15-2. Typical Abis Map ............................................................................................................... 15–3
Figure 15-3. RAN Optimization (GSM Abis Interface) ......................................................................... 15–4
Figure 15-4. Optimized Abis Traffic without Pre-emptive BW Management ........................................ 15–5
Figure 15-5. Optimized Abis Traffic with Pre-emptive BW Management ............................................. 15–6
Figure A-1. CDM-570/L EIA-530 to RS-422/449 DCE Conversion Cable (CEFD Dwg. No. CA/WR12753)
......................................................................................................................................................... A–2
Figure A-2. CDM-570/L EIA-530 to V.35 DCE Conversion Cable (CEFD Dwg. No. CA/WR12685) . A–3
Figure E-1. Basic Architecture Layout ....................................................................................................E–1
Figure F-1. Main Menu ............................................................................................................................. F–3
Figure F-2. Managed Switch Point-to-Point System Configuration ........................................................ F–4
Figure F-3. Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration .............................................................. F–5
Figure G-1. Managed Switch Mode Diagram .......................................................................................... G–5
Figure G-2. Router Mode, Point-to-Point Diagram ................................................................................. G–6
Figure G-3. Router Mode, Point-to-Multipoint HDLC Diagram ............................................................. G–7
Figure G-4. Router Mode, Point-to-Multipoint Streamline Diagram ...................................................... G–8
Figure H-1. CDM-570 1:1 IP Redundancy .............................................................................................. H–3
Figure H-2. CDM-570 1:1 IP Redundancy Switchover ........................................................................... H–4
Figure H-3. CDM-570 and CRS-180 Interconnect .................................................................................. H–7
Figure H-4. CDM-570L and CRS-170A Interconnect ............................................................................. H–8
Figure K-1. CDM-570 Front Panel View ................................................................................................ K–2
Figure K-2. CDM-570 ODU Operation Principal Menu Tree ................................................................. K–3
Figure K-3. (SELECT:) ODU Æ CSAT-5060 Transceiver Menu Tree .................................................. K–5
Figure K-4. (SELECT:) ODU Æ KST-2000A/B Transceiver Menu Tree ............................................ K–15
Figure K-5. ODU | Config page (CSAT-5060) ...................................................................................... K–25
Figure K-6. ODU | Config page (KST-2000A/B) .................................................................................. K–27
Figure K-7. ODU | Status page (CSAT-5060) ....................................................................................... K–28
Figure K-8. ODU | Status page (KST-2000A/B) ................................................................................... K–29
Figure K-9. ODU | Utilities page (CSAT-5060) .................................................................................... K–30
Figure K-10. ODU | Utilities page (KST-2000A/B) .............................................................................. K–32
Figure L-1. CDM-570L Front Panel View ...............................................................................................L–2
Figure L-2. CDM-570L ODU Operation Principal Menu Tree ................................................................L–3
Figure L-3. Config Mdm | BUC page .....................................................................................................L–12
Figure L-4. Config Mdm | LNB page .....................................................................................................L–13
Figure L-5. Modem | BUC page .............................................................................................................L–15
Figure L-6. Modem | LNB page..............................................................................................................L–16

xxi
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Table of Contents MN/CDM570L.IOM

This page is intentionally blank.

xxii
 PREFACE

About this Manual

This is a technical document intended for earth station engineers, technicians, and operators
responsible for the operation and maintenance of the CDM-570/570L with optional IP Module.
This manual provides installation and operation information for the Comtech EF Data CDM-570
and CDM-570L satellite modems with optional IP Module. These two modems are essentially
identical in their operation. The CDM-570 operates in the 70/140MHz IF band and includes
support for externally connected Comtech EF Data Transceivers (CSAT-5060, KST-2000A.B),
whereas the CDM-570L operates at L-band and includes support for externally connected Block
Upconverters (BUCs) and Low-Noise Block Downcoverters (LNBs).

About the Revision Level for this Manual

The revision level of this document jumped from Revision 4 to Revision 6 due to the conversion
of document control procedures within Comtech EF Data to a product lifecycle management
(PLM) system. Accordingly, no Revision 5 exists for this document.

Reporting Comments or Suggestions Concerning this Manual

Comments and suggestions regarding the content and design of this manual will be appreciated.
To submit comments, please contact the Comtech EF Data Technical Publications Department:
TechnicalPublications@comtechefdata.com.

Conventions and References

Metric Conversion
Metric conversion information is located on the inside back cover of this manual. This information
is provided to assist the operator in cross-referencing non-metric to metric conversions.

xxiii
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Preface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Recommended Standard Designations

Recommended Standard (RS) Designations have been superseded by the new designation of the
Electronic Industries Association (EIA). References to the old designations are shown only when
depicting actual text displayed on the screen of the unit (RS-232, RS-485, etc.). All other references
in the manual will be shown with the EIA designations.

Cautions and Warnings

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury. CAUTION may also be used to indicate other unsafe practices
or risks of property damage.

IMPORTANT or NOTE Indicates information critical for proper equipment function.

Electrical Safety
The CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem has been shown to comply with safety standard EN 60950:
Safety Of Information Technology Equipment, Including Electrical Business Equipment.
The equipment is rated for operation over the range 100 - 240 volts AC. It has a maximum power
consumption of 250 Watts (when equipped with a 150W BUC power supply), and draws a
maximum of 2.5 Amps.

The user should take care to observe the following information and/or instructions.
IMPORTANT

Fuses
The AC-powered CDM-570/570L is fitted with two fuses – one each for line and neutral
connections. These are contained within the body of the IEC power inlet connector, behind a small
plastic flap.
• For 230 volt AC operation, use T2.5A, 20mm fuses.
• For 115 volt AC operation, use T5.0A fuses, slow blow, P/N 5ASB-IEC.
The DC-powered CDM-570/570L is fitted with two fuses – one each for positive and negative
connections. These are contained within the body of the power inlet, behind a small plastic flap.
• For 38 to 60 VDC operation, use T2.0A, 20mm fuses if the modem has no BUC power
supply.
• For 38 to 60 VDC operation, use T8.0A, 20 mm fuses if the modem is fitted with
internal BUC power supply.

xxiv
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Preface MN/CDM570L.IOM

FOR CONTINUED OPERATOR SAFETY, ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES WITH

THE CORRECT TYPE AND RATING.

Environmental
The CDM-570/570L must not be operated in an environment where the unit is exposed to
extremes of temperature outside the ambient range 0 to 50°C, precipitation, condensation, or
humid atmospheres above 95% RH, altitudes (non-pressurized) greater than 2000 meters,
excessive dust or vibration, flammable gases, corrosive or explosive atmospheres.
Operation in vehicles or other transportable installations that are equipped to provide a stable
environment is permitted. If such vehicles do not provide a stable environment, safety of the
equipment to EN60950 may not be guaranteed.

Installation
The installation and connection to the line supply must be made in compliance to local or national
wiring codes and regulations.
The CDM-570/570L is designed for connection to a power system that has separate ground, line
and neutral conductors. The equipment is not designed for connection to a power system that has
no direct connection to ground.
The CDM-570/570L is shipped with a line inlet cable suitable for use in the country of operation.
If it is necessary to replace this cable, ensure the replacement has an equivalent specification.
Examples of acceptable ratings for the cable include HAR, BASEC and HOXXX-X. Examples of
acceptable connector ratings include VDE, NF-USE, UL, CSA, OVE, CEBEC, NEMKO,
DEMKO, BS1636A, BSI, SETI, IMQ, KEMA-KEUR and SEV.

International Symbols
Symbol Definition Symbol Definition

~ Alternating Current Protective Earth

Fuse Chassis Ground

Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive

In accordance with the Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 91/263/EEC, this
equipment should not be directly connected to the Public Telecommunications Network.

RoHS Compliancy
This unit satisfies (with exemptions) the requirements specified in the European Union Directive on
the Restriction of Hazardous Substances, Directive 2002/95/EC, (EU RoHS).

xxv
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Preface MN/CDM570L.IOM

EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)

In accordance with European Directive 89/336/EEC, the CDM-570/570L Modem has been
shown, by independent testing, to comply with the following standards:

Emissions: EN 55022 Class B - Limits and methods of measurement of radio

interference characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.

(Also tested to FCC Part 15 Class B)

Immunity: EN 50082 Part 1 - Generic immunity standard, Part 1: Domestic,

commercial and light industrial environment.

Additionally, the CDM-570/570L has been shown to comply with the following standards:

EN 61000-3-2 Harmonic Currents Emission

EN 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker
EN 61000-4-2 ESD Immunity
EN 61000-4-4 EFT Burst Immunity
EN 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity
EN 61000-4-6 RF Conducted Immunity
EN 61000-4-8 Power frequency Magnetic Field Immunity
EN 61000-4-9 Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
EN 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips, Interruptions, and Variations Immunity
EN 61000-4-13 Immunity to Harmonics

To ensure that the Modem continues to comply with these

standards, observe the following instructions:
IMPORTANT

• Connections to the transmit and receive IF ports (‘N’ type female connectors) should be
made using a good quality coaxial cable - for example, RG213/U.
• All 'D' type connectors attached to the rear panel must have back-shells that provide
continuous metallic shielding. Cable with a continuous outer shield (either foil or braid,
or both) must be used, and the shield must be bonded to the back-shell.
• The equipment must be operated with its cover on at all times. If it becomes necessary to
remove the cover, the user should ensure that the cover is correctly re-fitted before
normal operation commences.

xxvi
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Preface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Warranty Policy
Comtech EF Data products are warranted against defects in material and workmanship
for a specific period from the date of shipment, and this period varies by product. In
most cases, the warranty period is two years. During the warranty period, Comtech EF
Data will, at its option, repair or replace products that prove to be defective. Repairs are
warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or a 90 day extended warranty,
whichever is longer. Contact Comtech EF Data for the warranty period specific to the
product purchased.
For equipment under warranty, the owner is responsible for freight to Comtech EF Data
and all related customs, taxes, tariffs, insurance, etc. Comtech EF Data is responsible
for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the factory to the owner.
Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same method (i.e., Air, Express,
Surface) as the equipment was sent to Comtech EF Data.
All equipment returned for warranty repair must have a valid RMA number issued prior
to return and be marked clearly on the return packaging. Comtech EF Data strongly
recommends all equipment be returned in its original packaging.
Comtech EF Data Corporation’s obligations under this warranty are limited to repair or
replacement of failed parts, and the return shipment to the buyer of the repaired or
replaced parts.

Limitations of Warranty
The warranty does not apply to any part of a product that has been installed, altered,
repaired, or misused in any way that, in the opinion of Comtech EF Data Corporation,
would affect the reliability or detracts from the performance of any part of the product,
or is damaged as the result of use in a way or with equipment that had not been
previously approved by Comtech EF Data Corporation.
The warranty does not apply to any product or parts thereof where the serial number or
the serial number of any of its parts has been altered, defaced, or removed.
The warranty does not cover damage or loss incurred in transportation of the product.
The warranty does not cover replacement or repair necessitated by loss or damage from
any cause beyond the control of Comtech EF Data Corporation, such as lightning or
other natural and weather related events or wartime environments.
The warranty does not cover any labor involved in the removal and or reinstallation of
warranted equipment or parts on site, or any labor required to diagnose the necessity for
repair or replacement.
The warranty excludes any responsibility by Comtech EF Data Corporation for
incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the equipment or products,
or for any inability to use them either separate from or in combination with any other
equipment or products.

xxvii
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Preface MN/CDM570L.IOM

A fixed charge established for each product will be imposed for all equipment returned
for warranty repair where Comtech EF Data Corporation cannot identify the cause of
the reported failure.

Exclusive Remedies
Comtech EF Data Corporation’s warranty, as stated is in lieu of all other warranties,
expressed, implied, or statutory, including those of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. The buyer shall pass on to any purchaser, lessee, or other user of
Comtech EF Data Corporation’s products, the aforementioned warranty, and shall
indemnify and hold harmless Comtech EF Data Corporation from any claims or
liability of such purchaser, lessee, or user based upon allegations that the buyer, its
agents, or employees have made additional warranties or representations as to product
preference or use.
The remedies provided herein are the buyer’s sole and exclusive remedies. Comtech
EF Data shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.

xxviii
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Preface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Customer Support

Refer to p. xxvii in this Preface for information regarding this product’s Warranty Policy.

Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department for:

• Product support or training
• Reporting comments or suggestions concerning manuals
• Information on upgrading or returning a product
A Customer Support representative may be reached at:
Comtech EF Data
Attention: Customer Support Department
2114 West 7th Street
Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA
480.333.2200 (Main Comtech EF Data number)
480.333.4357 (Customer Support Desk)
480.333.2161 FAX
To return a Comtech EF Data product (in-warranty and out-of-warranty) for repair or
replacement:
• Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department. Be prepared to supply the
Customer Support representative with the model number, serial number, and a description
of the problem.
• Request a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from the Comtech EF Data
Customer Support representative.
• Pack the product in its original shipping carton/packaging to ensure that the product is not
damaged during shipping.
• Ship the product back to Comtech EF Data. (Shipping charges should be prepaid.)

Online Customer Support

An RMA number request can be requested electronically by contacting the Customer Support
Department through the online support page at www.comtechefdata.com/support.asp:
• Click on “Service” for detailed instructions on our return procedures.
• Click on the “RMA Request Form” hyperlink, then fill out the form completely before
sending.
• Send e-mail to the Customer Support Department at service@comtechefdata.com.

xxix
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Preface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

xxx
 Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Overview

Figure 1-1. CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem (CDM-570L shown)

The CDM-570L Satellite Modem (Figure 1-1) is intended for closed network applications. The
CDM-570 Satellite Modem is the 70/140 MHz IF version of the same modem; apart from the IF
frequency band, the two modems are essentially identical.
The CDM-570/570L incorporates the following features:
• Variable data rates from 2.4 kbps to 9.98 Mbps, in BPSK, QPSK, Offset QPSK, 8-PSK,
8-QAM, and 16-QAM modes are offered.
• Viterbi, concatenated Reed-Solomon (RS), Trellis Coded Modulation (TCM), and Turbo
Product Coding (TPC, IESS-315 compliant) are provided as Forward Error Correction
(FEC) options.
• A full range of interface types is built in, including T1 and E1 G.703 types (note that
G.703 operation is optional after 10/2009).
• The CDM-570 IF frequency range covers 50 to 90 and 100 to 180 MHz.
• The CDM-570L IF frequency range covers 950 to 2000 MHz. and supports external
Block Up Converters (BUCs) and Low-Noise Block Down Converters (LNBs). An
optional BUC power supply, up to 150 Watts @ 50°C and 180 Watts @ 30°C, may be
installed internally. 10 MHz reference signals are available to drive both BUC and LNB.
LNB power and FSK for ‘smart’ BUCs is standard.
• The CDM-570L is compact – 1RU high and 16 inches deep – and consumes only 29
Watts (typical, not including BUC power supply or IP Module). The CDM-570 is 1 RU
high and 12 inches deep, and consumes 29 Watts (typical, not including IP Module).

1–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

• The CDM-570/570L features a front panel VFD display and keypad for local
configuration and control, although both modems can be fully remote-controlled.
• An optional integrated 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface offers a wide range of network-
based management options, such as SNMP, http (web server), and Telnet.
• An optional E1 RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation Processor Board allows provision
of GSM backhaul transport services via E1 framing over the G.703 interface.

1.2 Functional Description

The CDM-570/570L has two fundamentally different types of interface – IF and data:
• The IF interface provides a bidirectional link with the satellite via the uplink and
downlink equipment.
• The data interface is a bidirectional path, which connects with the customer’s equipment
(assumed to be the DTE) and the modem (assumed to be the DCE).
Transmit data is received by the terrestrial interface where line receivers convert the clock and
data signals to CMOS levels for further processing. A small FIFO follows the terrestrial interface
to facilitate the various clocking and framing options. If framing is enabled, the transmit clock
and data output from the FIFO pass through the framer, where the EDMAC overhead data is
added to the main data; otherwise, the clock and data are passed directly to the Forward Error
Correction encoder.
In the FEC encoder, the data is differentially encoded, scrambled, and then convolutionally
encoded. Following the encoder, the data is fed to the transmit digital filters, which perform
spectral shaping on the data signals. The resultant I and Q signals are then fed to the BPSK,
QPSK/OQPSK, 8-PSK, or 16-QAM modulator. The carrier is generated by a frequency
synthesizer, and the I and Q signals directly modulate this carrier to produce an IF output signal.
In the CDM-570L, the Rx IF signal in the range 950 to 2000 MHz is translated to an
intermediate frequency at around 465 MHz, and from there further translated to baseband using
the carrier recovery VCO.
In the CDM-570, the conversion of signals in the range 50 to 180 MHz is directly to baseband.
This is a complex mix, resulting in the signal once more being split into an in-phase (I) and a
quadrature (Q) component. An AGC circuit maintains the desired signal level constant over a
broad range. Following this, the I and Q signals are sampled by high-speed (flash) A/D
converters. All processing beyond this conversion is purely digital, performing the functions of
Nyquist filtering, carrier recovery, and symbol timing recovery. The resultant demodulated signal
is fed, in soft decision form, to the selected FEC decoder (which can be Viterbi, TCM, Reed-
Solomon, or Turbo if installed).
After decoding, the recovered clock and data pass to the de-framer (if EDMAC framing is
enabled) where the overhead information is removed. Following this, the data passes to the
Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer, which has a programmable size, or may be bypassed. From here,
the receive clock and data signals are routed to the terrestrial interface, and are passed to the
externally connected DTE equipment.
The CDM-570/570L signal processing functions are performed in a single, large
Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), which permits rapid implementation of changes,
additions and enhancements in the field. These signal processing functions are controlled and

1–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

monitored by a 32-bit RISC microprocessor, which also controls all front panel, serial and
Ethernet interfaces.
Physically, the CDM-570/570L modem is comprised of a single printed circuit board assembly,
with two expansion slots for FEC codecs and other option cards.

1.3 Features

1.3.1 Physical Description

The CDM-570/570L is constructed as a 1RU-high rack-mounting chassis, which can be free-standing
if desired. Rack handles at the front facilitate removal from and placement into a rack.

1.3.2 Compatibility
The CDM-570/570L is fully backwards-compatible with the Comtech EF Data CDM-500,
CDM-550, and CDM-550T modems, in addition to the CDM-600, CDM-600L, SDM-300 and
SDM-300L in selected modes.
Note: For CDM-570/570L with IP Module Ethernet Interface Option – The CDM-570/570L
is fully backward-compatible with the Comtech EF Data CDM-IP 550 and CDM-IP 300L in
selected modes.

1.3.3 Major Assemblies

Assembly Description
AS/10901 Modem Card - CDM-570
AS/9979 Modem Card - CDM-570L
AS/10554 Turbo Codec
AS/10551 Reed-Solomon Codec
PL/10047-1 Chassis
PL/10235 IP Module 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Interface (optional)
PL-0000599 E1 RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation Processing Board (optional, used in place of
AS/10551 R-S Codec)

1–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

1.3.4 Dimensional Envelope

Figure 1-2. CDM-570/570L Dimensional Envelope

1–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

1.3.5 Physical Features

1.3.5.1 Front Panel

USB LED Vacuum Fluorescent
Port Indicators Keypad Display (VFD)

Figure 1-3. Front Panel View (CDM-570L shown)

Figure 1-3 shows the front panel of the modem. The front panel features (from left): a Type B
USB connector, used with a PC for reflashing the modem firmware; eight Light-Emitting-Diode
(LED) indicators; a keypad; and a Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD).

The VFD is an active display showing two lines of 24 characters each. It produces a blue light
with adjustable brightness. Compared to a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), the VFD has greatly
superior viewing characteristics and does not suffer problems of viewing angle or contrast.

The keypad comprises six individual keyswitches, mounted directly behind a fully sealed
membrane overlay. They have a positive ‘click’ action, which provides tactile feedback. The user
enters data via the keypad, and messages are displayed on the VFD. The LEDs indicate, in a
summary fashion, the status of the unit.

The function and behavior of the LED indicators, VFD, and keypad is described in detail in
Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION.

1.3.5.2 Rear Panel

Figure 1-4. Rear Panel View

(CDM-570L shown with optional IP Module Ethernet Interface installed)
Figure 1-4 shows the rear panel of the CDM-570/570L. External cables are attached to connectors
on the rear panel of the modem.

1–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

Each connector is described in detail in Chapter 3. REAR PANEL CONNECTOR PINOUTS.

They comprise:
Connector
Group
Name Connector Type Function
(Chapter 3
Sect. Ref.)
IF CDM-570L: Type ’N’
(Sect. 3.2) female (L-Band)
Rx IF Input
CDM-570: BNC female
(70/140MHz band)
CDM-570L: Type ’N’
female (L-Band)
Tx IF Output
CDM-570: BNC female
(70/140MHz band)
Terrestrial Data Data Interface 25-pin Type ‘D’ female Serial synchronous data Input/Output
(Sect. 3.3)
G.703
Balanced 15-pin Type ‘D’ female
T1 (1544 kbps) / E1 (2048 kbps)
G.703
Unbalanced
Data BNC 75Ω female Receive G.703 E1 (2048 kbps)
Out
Unbalanced In BNC 75Ω female Transmit G.703 E1 (2048 kbps)
10/100 Ethernet M&C RJ-45 female 10/100 BaseT management and data
10/100 Ethernet Traffic RJ-45 female (w/optional IP Module) Ethernet Traffic
Utility Remote Control 9-pin Type ‘D’ male Serial Remote Interface (EIA-232/-485)
(Sect. 3.4)
Alarms 15-pin Type ‘D’ male Form C Alarms (relay closures)
1:1 Control 9-pin Type ‘D’ female Connection to External 1:1 Controller
External Reference BNC female Input/Output
(w/optional IP Module) EIA-232 Serial
Serial Console RJ-11 female Console for CDM-570L/IP Module
management
Power/Ground AC See Sect. 3.5.1
(Sect 3.5) Chassis power
DC See Sect. 3.5.2
Ground #10-32 stud Common Chassis Ground

Note: The European EMC Directive (EN55022, EN50082-1) requires using properly shielded
cables for DATA I/O. These cables must be double-shielded from end-to-end, ensuring a
continuous ground shield.
In addition to the connectors listed above, there are eight LEDs on the rear panel:
• Six of the LEDs, all orange, indicate the interface type currently selected: V.35, RS232,
RS422/EIA530, T1, E1-U, or E1-B.
• For systems in a redundant configuration, a green LED labeled “Online” indicates the
Online/Offline status of the unit.
• When the unit is connected to a 1:N switch, a red LED labeled “1:N CAUTION!”
indicates that caution is required, as there may be DC voltages and other control signals
present on certain pins on the 25-pin Data Interface connector.
Also associated with redundancy mode on the rear panel is a slide switch that selects the 1:N mode.

1–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

1.3.6 Hardware Options

There are four hardware options available: Reed-Solomon Codec, Turbo Product Codec, the IP
Module Ethernet Interface, and the E1 RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation Processor Board.
Three of these cards fit into expansion slots on the main circuit board; when the E1 RAN
Optimization / WAN Adaptation Processor Board is used, it takes the place of the Reed-Solomon
Codec.

1.3.7 Data Interfaces

The CDM-570/570L includes, as standard, a universal data interface that eliminates the need to
exchange interface cards for different applications. The interfaces offered include:
• EIA-422 (EIA530) DCE (at rates up to 9.98 Mbps);
• X.21 DTE and DCE (at rates up to 9.98 Mbps);
• V.35 DCE (at rates up to 9.98 Mbps);
• Synchronous EIA-232 DCE (at rates up to 300 kbps);
• G.703 E1 (2048 kbps), balanced and unbalanced (optional for units after 10/2009);
• G.703 T1 (1544 kbps), balanced;
• Optional – integrated 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Interface.

1.3.8 Verification
The unit includes many test modes and loopbacks for rapid verification of the correct function of
the unit. In particular, the IF loopback permits the user to perform a quick diagnostic test without
disturbing external cabling. During the loopback, all the receive configuration parameters are
temporarily changed to match the transmit side, and an internal RF switch connects the modulator
output to the demodulator input. When normal operation is again selected, all of the previous
values are restored.

1.3.9 AUPC
An important feature in the CDM-570/570L is the addition of Automatic Uplink Power Control
(AUPC). This feature enables the modem to automatically adjust its output power to maintain the
Eb/No of the remote end of the satellite link constant. This provides protection against rain
fading, a particularly severe problem with Ku-band links.
To accomplish this, the framed EDMAC mode of operation must be used, and the distant end
modem constantly sends back information about the demodulator Eb/No using reserved bytes in
the overhead structure. Using the Eb/No, the local modem adjusts its output power, and a closed-
loop feedback system is created over the satellite link.
A benefit of this feature is that whenever EDMAC/AUPC operation is selected, the remote
demodulator’s Eb/No can be viewed from the front panel display of the local modem. Note that
both EDMAC and AUPC can be used simultaneously.
See Chapter 7. Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) for further information.

1–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

1.3.10 EDMAC
To facilitate network management for small networks, the CDM-570/570L incorporates
Embedded Distant-end Monitor And Control (EDMAC). In this mode, an additional 5%
overhead is combined with the traffic data, (1.6% in Turbo BPSK modes, Turbo Rate 21/44
QPSK/OQPSK, and all data rates greater than 2 Mbps). M&C information is added (transparent
to the user), allowing access to the distant-end modem.
In addition, EDMAC-2 uses 1.6% overhead in all modes for those applications where the 5%
overhead is excessive. The EDMAC and EDMAC-2 modes do not require any additional cabling
at either the local or distant-end Modems. Access to EDMAC is via the standard M&C control
port. Full monitor and control is possible, and the on/off status at the distant-end carrier can be
controlled.
See Chapter 9. EDMAC CHANNEL for further information.

1.3.11 Flash Upgrading Modem Firmware

The internal software is both powerful and flexible, permitting storage and retrieval of up to 10
different modem configurations. The modem uses ‘flash memory’ technology internally, and new
firmware can be uploaded to the unit from an external PC. This simplifies software upgrading,
and updates can be sent via the Internet (from Comtech EF Data’s Web server), e-mail, or on CD.
The upgrade can be performed without opening the unit, by simply connecting the modem to a
10/100BaseT Ethernet port, or the USB port of a PC.
See Chapter 4. FLASH UPGRADING for further information.

USB reflash is not available in this firmware release – please consult Comtech
EF Data Customer Support for release schedule.
IMPORTANT

1.3.12 Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST)

The CDM-570/570L is extremely flexible and powerful, and incorporates a large number of
optional features. In order to permit a lower initial cost, the modem may be purchased with only the
desired features enabled.
If, at a later date, a user wishes to upgrade the functionality of a modem, Comtech EF Data provides
Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST), which permits the purchase and installation of options
through special authorization codes loaded into the unit either via the front panel keypad or entered
remotely via the Console (CLI) port located on the IP Module rear panel.
These unique access codes may be purchased during normal business hours from Comtech EF Data.

FAST System Theory

FAST facilitates on-location upgrade of the operating feature set without removing a modem
from the setup.
With FAST technology, operators have maximum flexibility for enabling functions as they are
required. FAST allows an operator to order a modem precisely tailored for the initial application.
When service requirements change, the operator can upgrade the topology of the modem to meet
those requirements within minutes. This accelerated upgrade can be accomplished because of FAST’s
extensive use of the programmable logic devices incorporated into Comtech EF Data products.

1–8
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

FAST Implementation
Comtech EF Data’s FAST system is factory-implemented in the modem. All FAST options are
available through the basic platform unit at the time of order – FAST allows immediate activation of
available options, after confirmation by Comtech EF Data, through the front panel keypad or via the
remote control interface.
See Appendix C. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE for further information.

FAST Accessible Options

Hardware options for basic modems can be ordered and installed either at the factory or in the
field. The operator can select options that can be activated easily in the field, depending on the
current hardware configuration of the modem. A unique access code enables configuration of the
available hardware.
The base CDM-570/570L unit is configured with a Viterbi codec. It offers BPSK, QPSK, and
OQPSK modulation types, and data rates up to 512 kbps, with all interface types except G.703.
EDMAC and AUPC operation are included.
The following tables show the available FAST and FAST-accessible hardware options:
Option
Option Description and Comments Installation
Method
Low Rate Variable Data rate 2.4 kbps to 512 kbps BASE UNIT
Mid-Rate Variable Data rate 2.4 kbps to 2.048 Mbps FAST
Full Rate Variable Data rate 2.4 kbps to 5.0 Mbps FAST
Extended Rate Variable Data rate 2.4 kbps to 9.98 Mbps FAST
8-PSK/8-QAM Modulation Type FAST
16-QAM Modulation Type FAST
RS Codec Closed-network Reed-Solomon Codec Hardware
TPC Codec 5 Mbps Turbo Product Codec (IESS-315 compliant) Hardware
RAN Optimization E1 RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation Processor Card Hardware
100W BPSU (CDM-570L only) 100 Watt@30°C, 90 Watt@50°C, Internal 24V BUC PSU Hardware
150W BPSU (CDM-570L only) 150 Watt@50°C, 180 Watt@30°C, Internal 48V BUC PSU Hardware

IP Module Ethernet Interface and IP Options

Option
Option Description and Comments Installation
Method
IP Module Ethernet Interface 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface Hardware
Uses NIST certified 3x core
3xDES Data Encryption FAST
Software Version 1.4.0 and later
IP Header Compression Software Version 1.4.0 and later FAST
Payload Compression Software Version 1.4.0 and later FAST
Quality of Service (QoS) Software Version 1.4.0 and later FAST

1–9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

1.3.13 Supporting Hardware and Software

CDM-570L Redundancy: For 1:1 applications the modem is supported by the low-cost external
CRS-170A L-Band 1:1 Redundancy Switch.
For Hub applications, the CDM-570L is supported by the low-cost external CRS-300 1:N
Redundancy Switch coupled with the CRS-280L Redundancy Switch.
CDM-570 Redundancy: For 1:1 applications the modem is supported by the low-cost external
CRS-180 70/140MHz 1:1 Redundancy Switch.
For Hub applications, the CDM-570 is supported by the low-cost external CRS-300 1:N
Redundancy Switch coupled with the CRS-280 IF (70/140 MHz) Switch.
Support Software: The CDM-570/570L is supported by Comtech EF Data’s SatMac (Satellite
system Monitor and Control) Version 4.7 software, a WindowsTM-based application that provides
a ‘point and click’ interface for the complete system of Comtech EF Data equipment (comprising
Modems, Transceivers, and Redundancy Switches).
For more information or to order a free demo disk, please contact Comtech EF Data Customer
Support. SatMac is also available for download from the M&C Utilities link on Comtech EF
Data’s Web site (http://www.comtechefdata.com/pcutils.asp).

1–10
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

1.4 Summary of Specifications

1.4.1 Modulator
Modulation BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK, 8-QAM and 16-QAM
Symbol Rate Range 4.8 ksps to 3.0 Msps
Data Rate Range See Section 1.7.5
Operating Modes Transparent, Closed Network, IESS-315 (VSAT Turbo)
Proprietary EDMAC framed mode:
• 5% overhead – EDMAC
(All modes except BPSK Turbo, Rate 21/44 OQPSK Turbo, and data rates < 2.048 Mbps)
• 1.6% overhead - EDMAC-2
(Rate 21/44, 5/16 Turbo, Rate 21/44 OQPSK Turbo, and all other rates >2.048 Mbps)
Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) mode
R-S Outer Codec (optional)
• 220,200 outer code (transparent mode)
• 200,180 outer code (EDMAC modes)
Turbo Product Codec (optional):
• Rate 21/44 BPSK
• Rate 5/16 BPSK
• Rate 21/44 QPSK/OQPSK
• Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/8-QAM/16-QAM
• Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/8-QAM/16-QAM
• Rate 0.95 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/8-QAM (exact Code Rate is actually 0.944)
Transmit Filtering Per INTELSAT IESS-308 (FIR digital filter implementation)
Scrambling Transparent Closed Network mode, no R-S or Turbo coding - per ITU V.35 (Intelsat variant)
EDMAC mode, no R-S coding - externally frame synchronized - proprietary
Turbo Product Code mode - externally frame synchronized - proprietary
All R-S modes - externally frame synchronized per IESS-308/309/310
FEC None: Uncoded BPSK/QPSK/OQPSK
Viterbi: k=7, per IESS-308/309
BPSK: Rate 1/2
QPSK/OQPSK: Rate 1/2, Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8
16-QAM: Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8 (requires Reed-Solomon)
Reed-Solomon (Closed Network):
220,200 outer code (transparent mode)
200,180 outer code (EDMAC modes)
Interleaver depth = 4
8-PSK/TCM Rate 2/3 (Trellis) with concatenated Reed-Solomon
CLOSED NETWORK - NOT IESS-310 COMPATIBLE
Turbo Product Codec (optional plug-in card):
Rate 5/16 BPSK - 2 dimensional
Rate 21/44 BPSK - 3 dimensional
Rate 21/44 QPSK/OQPSK - 3 dimensional
Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/8-QAM/16-QAM - 2 dimensional
Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/8-QAM/16-QAM - 2 dimensional
Rate 0.95 QPSK/OQPSK/8-QAM/8-PSK - 2 dimensional eTPC
(exact Code Rate is actually 17/18, or 0.944)

1–11
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

Output Frequency CDM-570L: 950 - 2000 MHz, 100 Hz resolution

-8
Stability ±0.06 ppm (±6 x 10 ) 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F), when using internal reference
CDM-570: 50 - 90 MHz, and 100 – 180 MHz, 100 Hz resolution
Stability ±1.0 ppm (±1 x 10-6) 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F), when using internal reference
Harmonics
Better than -55 dBC/4 kHz (typically <-60 dBC/4 kHz) – measured from 25 MHz to 2 GHz
and Spurious
Transmit On/Off
55 dB minimum
Ratio
Output Phase <0.75° RMS double-sided, 100 Hz to 1 MHz for CDM-570 and CDM-570 IP
Noise
<1.2° RMS double-sided, 100 Hz to 1 MHz for CDM-570L and CDM-570L IP
Output Power CDM-570L: 0 to -40 dBm, 0.1 dB steps - manual mode. See Automatic Uplink Power Control
section
CDM-570: 0 to -25 dBm, 0.1 dB steps - manual mode. See Automatic Uplink Power Control
section also.
Power Accuracy CDM-570L: ±1.0 dB over frequency, data rate, modulation type and temperature
CDM-570: ±0.5 dB over frequency, data rate, modulation type and temperature
Output Impedance CDM-570L: 50Ω, 19 dB minimum return loss
CDM-570: Compatible with 50Ω or 75Ω,17 dB minimum return loss
Output Connector CDM-570L: Type N female
CDM-570: BNC female
Clocking Options CDM-570L: Internal, ±0.06 ppm (SCT)
CDM-570: Internal, ±1.0 ppm (SCT)
External, locking over a ±100 ppm range (TT)
Loop timing (Rx satellite clock) - supports asymmetric operation - Rx and Tx data rates do not
need to be identical
External TX By TTL 'low' signal or external contact closure - hardware function automatically over-rides
Carrier Off processor, or by RTS signal on main data interface
BUC Reference On center conductor of L-Band output connector; 10.0 MHz ± 0.06 ppm* (Optional 1 ppm)
(10 MHz) -1.0 dBm, ± 4 dBm; programmable ON/OFF

*Source: Selected as Internal

Phase Noise dB/Hz Frequency Offset
-110 10 Hz
-135 100 Hz
-140 1 kHz

1–12
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50

0 Symbol Rate, Rs

-5

Comtech EF Data
-10 CDM-570L Transmit
Power Spectral Density,
-15 referred to symbol rate

-20

-25

-30

-35 Intelsat
IESS 308/309
limit
-40

CDM-570L Modulator
-45 typically < -50 dB, and
guaranteed to be
Intelsat < -45 dB at offsets
Spectral IESS 308/309 > 0.75 Rs
-50
density, limit
dB

-55

1.4.2 Demodulator
Note: Data Rate Range, Operating modes, Descrambling, Input Impedance/Return Loss etc., as specified in
Sect. 1.4.1 Modulator.
Input Power Range CDM-570 Desired Carrier: -30 to -60 dBm.
+35 dBc maximum composite, up to -5 dBm, absolute max.
CDM-570L Desired Carrier: -130 + 10 log (Symbol Rate) to -90 + 10 log (Symbol Rate).
+40 dBc maximum composite, up to –10 dBm, absolute max.
FEC Viterbi: 3 bit soft decision
Trellis: Pragmatic TCM/8-PSK with closed network concatenated Reed-Solomon
Reed-Solomon (Closed Network): Proprietary
Turbo Product Codec: 4 bit soft decision, proprietary
Acquisition Range ±1 to ±32 kHz, programmable in 1 kHz increments, for symbol rates below 625 ksymbols/sec
±1 to ±200 kHz, 1 kHz increments, for symbol rates above 625 ksymbols/sec, CDM-570L only
Acquisition Time Highly dependent on data rate, FEC rate, and demodulator acquisition range.
Examples: 120 ms average at 64 kbps, R1/2 QPSK, ±10 kHz acquisition sweep range, 6dB
Eb/No
3.5 s average at 9.6 kbps, R1/2 QPSK, ±10 kHz, 6dB Eb/No
Note: Reed-Solomon and TPC increases acquisition time, due to the additional time taken
for the RS/TPC decoder to declare synchronization.
Clock Tracking Range ± 100 ppm min

1–13
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

IMPORTANT NOTE: Starting with Release 1.4.1 of the CDM-570/570L firmware, the maximum symbol rate has
been increased from 2.5 to 3.0 Msymbols/sec. This has been done without modification to the hardware, and
as a consequence, there may be a small degradation in BER versus Eb/No performance for rates above 2.5
Msymbols/sec. The degradation is as follows:
Rates from 2.5 to 2.65 Msps: degradation < 0.1 dB
Rates from 2.65 to 2.80 Msps: degradation < 0.2 dB
Rates from 2.80 to 3.00 Msps: degradation < 0.3 dB
VITERBI Rate 1/2 (B, Q, OQ) Rate 3/4 (Q, OQ) Rate 7/8 (Q, OQ)
BER performance Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No:
(met in the presence of (typical value in (typical value in (typical value in
two adjacent carriers, parentheses) parentheses) parentheses)
each 7 dB higher than For:
the desired carrier) BER=10-5 5.4 dB (4.9 dB) 6.8 dB (6.3 dB) 7.7 dB (7.2 dB)
-6
BER=10 6.0 dB (5.5 dB) 7.4 dB (6.9 dB) 8.4 dB (7.9 dB)
BER=10-7 6.7 dB (6.2 dB) 8.2 dB (7.7 dB) 9.0 dB (8.6 dB)
VITERBI and RS Rate 1/2 (B, Q, OQ) Rate 3/4 (Q, OQ) Rate 7/8 (Q, OQ)
220,200 or 200,180 Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No:
Outer Code BER (typical value in (typical value in (typical value in
(with two adjacent parentheses) parentheses) parentheses)
carriers, each 7 dB For:
higher than the desired BER=10-5 4.3 dB (4.0 dB) 5.6 dB (4.7 dB) 6.5 dB (6.0 dB)
carrier) BER=10-6 4.4 dB (4.1 dB) 5.8 dB (4.8 dB) 6.7 dB (6.2 dB)
-7
BER=10 4.5 dB (4.2 dB) 6.0 dB (5.2 dB) 6.9 dB (6.5 dB)
8-PSK/TCM/RS R 2/3 8-PSK/TCM/RS
CODEC Guaranteed Eb/No:
BER (typical value in
(With two adjacent For: parentheses)
carriers, each 7 dB
-5
higher than the BER=10 6.3 dB (5.4 dB)
desired carrier) -7
BER=10 6.7 dB (5.8 dB)
BER=10-8 6.9 dB (6.0 dB)
TURBO PRODUCT Rate 21/44 (Q, OQ) Rate 21/44 (B) Rate 5/16 (B)
CODEC Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No:
Rate 21/44 QPSK (typical value in (typical value in (typical value in
Rate 21/44 BPSK For: parentheses) parentheses) parentheses)
Rate 5/16 BPSK
-6
BER BER=10 2.9 dB (2.6 dB) 2.8 dB (2.5dB) 2.4 dB (2.1dB)
(With two adjacent BER=10-7 3.1 dB (2.7 dB) 3.1 dB (2.8 dB) 2.6 dB (2.3dB)
carriers, each 7 dB -8
higher than the desired BER=10 3.3 dB (2.8 dB) 3.3 dB (2.90dB) 2.7 dB (2.4dB)
carrier)
TURBO PRODUCT Rate 3/4 (Q, OQ) Rate 3/4 (8-PSK) Rate 3/4 (16-QAM)
CODEC Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No:
Rate 3/4 QPSK (typical value in (typical value in (typical value in
Rate 3/4 8-PSK For: parentheses) parentheses) parentheses)
Rate 3/4 16-QAM
-6
BER BER=10 3.8dB (3.4dB) 6.2 dB (5.8 dB) 7.4dB (7.0 dB)
(With two adjacent BER=10
-7
4.1dB (3.7dB) 6.4 dB (6.0 dB) 7.8 dB (7.3 dB)
carriers, each 7 dB
higher than the desired BER=10-8 4.4dB (4.0dB) 6.8 dB (6.3 dB) 8.2 dB (7.7 dB)
carrier)

1–14
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

TURBO PRODUCT Rate 7/8 (Q, OQ) Rate 7/8 (8-PSK) Rate 7/8 (16-QAM)
CODEC Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No:
Rate 7/8 QPSK (typical value in (typical value in (typical value in
Rate 7/8 8-PSK For: parentheses) parentheses) parentheses)
Rate 7/8 16-QAM
-6
BER BER=10 4.3 dB (4.0 dB) 7.0 dB (6.6 dB) 8.1 dB (7.7 dB)
(With two adjacent BER=10
-7
4.4 dB (4.1 dB) 7.1 dB (6.7 dB) 8.2 dB (7.8 dB)
carriers, each 7 dB -8
higher than the desired BER=10 4.5 dB (4.2 dB) 7.2 dB (6.8 dB) 8.3 dB (7.9 dB)
carrier)
TURBO PRODUCT Rate 0.95 (Q, OQ) Rate 0.95 (8-PSK)
CODEC Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No:
Rate 0.95 QPSK (typical value in (typical value in
Rate 0.95 8-PSK For: parentheses) parentheses)
BER
-6
(With two adjacent BER=10 6.4 dB (6.0 dB) 9.3 dB (8.9 dB)
carriers, each 7 dB BER=10
-7
6.7 dB (6.3 dB) 9.8 dB (9.4 dB)
higher than the desired
carrier) BER=10-8 6.9 dB (6.5 dB) 10.3 dB (9.9 dB)
TURBO PRODUCT Rate 3/4 (8-QAM) Rate 7/8 (8-QAM) Rate 0.95 (8-QAM)
CODEC Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No:
Rate 3/4 8-QAM (typical value in (typical value in (typical value in
Rate 7/8 8-QAM For: parentheses) parentheses) parentheses)
Rate 0.95 8-QAM
-6
BER BER=10 6.5 dB (6.1 dB) 6.6 dB (6.2 dB) 9.6 dB (9.2 dB)
(With two adjacent BER=10
-7
6.8 dB (6.4 dB) 6.7 dB (6.3 dB) 10.1 dB (9.7 dB)
carriers, each 7 dB
higher than the desired BER=10-8 7.2 dB (6.8 dB) 6.8 dB (6.4 dB) 10.6 dB (10.2 dB)
carrier)
16-QAM VITERBI/RS 16-QAM Rate 3/4 16-QAM Rate 7/8
(With two adjacent Viterbi/RS Viterbi/RS
carriers, each 7 dB Guaranteed Eb/No: Guaranteed Eb/No:
higher than the desired (typical value in (typical value in
carrier) For: parentheses) parentheses)
-6
BER=10 8.1 dB (7.5 dB) 9.5 dB (9.0 dB)
BER=10-8 8.6 dB (8.0 dB) 10.1 dB (9.5 dB)
Plesiochronous/ Selectable size of ± 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384 and 32768 bits
Doppler Buffer Size selection is displayed in bits and milliseconds. Supports asymmetric operation - when
buffer is clocked from Tx clock, Rx and Tx rates do not need to be identical.
Monitor Functions Eb/No estimate, 2 to 16 dB (± 0.25 dB accuracy)
Corrected Bit Error Rate, 1E-3 to 1E-9
Frequency offset, ± 200 kHz range, 100 Hz resolution
Buffer fill state, in percent
Receive signal level monitor accuracy: ± 5 dB for CDM-570L, ± 3 dB for CDM–570 over
specified min to max signal range

1.4.3 Automatic Uplink Power Control

Operating Mode Requires Closed Network Framed mode for transport of Eb/No information from remote
modem (EDMAC can be enabled or disabled)
Target Eb/No Range 0 to 9.9 dB at remote demod (default is 4.0 dB)
Max AUPC Range 0 to 9 dB (default is 3 dB)
Monitor Functions Remote demod Eb/No and Tx power level increase (front panel or via remote control interface)

1–15
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

1.4.4 Data and Miscellaneous Interfaces

Primary Data RS-422/EIA-530 DCE (Rates up to 10 Mbps)
25-pin D-sub (female)
(3 selectable modes) (also supports X.21 DCE & DTE)
V.35 DCE (Rates up to 10 Mbps)
Synchronous EIA-232 (Rates up to 300 kbps)
G.703 (Optional for 1.544 Mbps T1 (Balanced 100Ω) 15-pin D-sub (female)
units as of 10/2009) 2.048 Mbps E1 (unbalanced 75Ω or balanced 120Ω) or BNC (female)
1, 2, 5, 10 or 20 MHz, -6dBm to +10dBm BNC (female)
External Reference In
(The Ext. ref. locks Tx and Rx synthesizers, and all baseband clock generation)
Modem Alarms Relay outputs (Tx, Rx & unit faults)
Demodulator I & Q test outputs (constellation)
15-pin D-sub (male)
Demodulator Rx Signal Level output (0 to 10 volts)
External carrier off input
1:1 Control Async serials link to other modem, and switching signals in 1:1 pair, via CRS-170A 9-pin D-sub (female)
Alarm Relay Type: Form C Contacts. Rating: 125V AC/30V DC, 0.3A AC/1A DC 15-pin D-sub (male)
Remote Control EIA-232 or EIA-485 modem control and monitoring 9-pin D-sub (male)
Ethernet 10/100 Base Tx for http, SNMP and Telnet interfaces RJ-45

1.4.5 Data Rate Ranges

FEC Type Modulation Code Rate Data Rate Range EDMAC limited?
BPSK Uncoded 4.8 kbps to 3.000 Mbps
None
QPSK/OQPSK Uncoded 9.6 kbps to 5.000 Mbps
BPSK Rate 1/2 2.4 kbps to 1.500 Mbps
Rate 1/2 4.8 kbps to 3.000 Mbps
Viterbi
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 3/4 7.2 kbps to 4.500 Mbps
Rate 7/8 8.4 kbps to 5.250 Mbps
BPSK Rate 1/2 2.4 kbps to 1.363 Mbps
Rate 1/2 4.3 kbps to 2.727 Mbps
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 3/4 6.5 kbps to 4.091 Mbps
Viterbi + RS
Rate 7/8 7.5 kbps to 4.666 Mbps Yes – see note below
Rate 3/4 13.0 kbps to 4.000 Mbps
16-QAM
Rate 7/8 16.8 kbps to 4.666 Mbps
TCM + RS 8-PSK Rate 2/3 8.7 kbps to 4.400 Mbps
Rate 5/16 2.4 kbps to 0.937 Mbps
BPSK
Rate 21/44 2.4 kbps to 1.430 Mbps
Rate 21/4 4.8 kbps to 2.860 Mbp
Rate 3/4 7.2 kbps to 4.500 Mbps
QPSK/OQPSK
Rate 7/8 8.4 kbps to 5.250 Mbps
Turbo Rate 0.95 9.1 kbps to 5.666 Mbps
Rate 3/4 10.8 kbps to 6.750 Mbps
8-PSK/8-QAM Rate 7/8 13.6 kbps to 7.875 Mbps
Rate 0.95 15.3 kbps to 8.500 Mbps No
Rate 3/4 14.4 kbps to 9.000 Mbps
16-QAM
Rate 7/8 16.8 kbps to 9.980 Mbps

Important Note: Where noted in the table above, if EDMAC framing is employed, the upper data rate will be reduced
by 5% for data rates up to 2.048 Mbps, and by 1.6% for data rates above 2.048 Mbps, where EDMAC2 framing is
used, or for Rate 21/44 BPSK/QPSK Turbo, or Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo.

1–16
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

1.4.6 Miscellaneous
Front Panel Tactile keypad, 6 keys (Up/Down, Left/Right, Enter/Clear)
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (blue) - 2 lines of 24 characters
Loopbacks Internal IF loopback, RF loopback, digital loopback, and inward/outward loopback
Fault Relays Hardware fault, Rx and Tx Traffic Alarms
M&C Interface EIA-232 and EIA-485 (addressable multidrop, 2-wire or 4-wire)
Ethernet 10/100 Base Tx for http:, SNMP and Telnet interfaces
M&C Software SatMac Ver. 4.7
Dimensions CDM-570L: 1U high, 16 inches (406 mm) deep
CDM-570: 1U high, 12 inches (304.8 mm) deep
Weight CDM-570L: 7 lbs (3.2 kgs) max (not including BUC Power Supply)
CDM-570: 5 lbs (2.3 kgs) max
AC Consumption CDM-570L (without BUC Power Supply, or IP Module):
29 Watts (typical) 32 Watts (maximum)
CDM-570L When fitted with 150 Watt@50°C, 180 Watt@30°C BUC power supply:
250 Watts (maximum)
CDM-570: (without IP Module):
29 Watts (typical) 32 Watts (maximum)
Typical measured VA, Power Factor and Power data:
CDM-570L - no IP Module installed:
240V 50 Hz: Power Factor = 0.44, 65VA, 29 Watts
110V 60 Hz Power Factor = 0.55, 50VA, 28 Watts
CDM-570L - with IP Module installed:
240V 50 Hz Power Factor = 0.46, 80VA, 37 Watts
110V 60 Hz Power Factor = 0.56, 63VA, 35 Watts
CDM-570 - no IP Module installed:
240V 50 Hz Power Factor = 0.33, 87VA, 29 Watts
110V 60 Hz Power Factor = 0.53, 51VA, 28 Watts
CDM-570 - with IP Module installed:
240V 50 Hz Power Factor = 0.36, 99VA, 37 Watts
110V 60 Hz Power Factor = 0.54, 64VA, 35 Watts
Operating Voltage 100 - 240 volts AC, +6%/-10% - autosensing
(total absolute max. range is 90 - 254 volts AC)
Optional - 48 volt DC supply available
o o
Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F)

1.4.7 Approvals

“CE” as follows: EN 55022 Class B (Emissions) EN 61000-3-2 EN 61000-4-6

EN 61000-3-3 EN 61000-4-8
EN 50082-1 (Immunity)
EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-9
EN 60950 (Safety) EN 61000-4-11
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-13

FCC FCC Part 15 Class B

1–17
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Introduction MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

1–18
 Chapter 2. INSTALLATION

2.1 Unpacking
The CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem and its Installation and Operation Manual are packaged and
shipped in a pre-formed, reusable cardboard carton containing foam spacing for maximum shipping
protection.

Do not use any cutting tool that extends more than 1” into the container and
CAUTION
cause damage to the unit.

Be sure to keep all shipping materials for the carrier's inspection.

IMPORTANT

Unpack and inspect the CDM-570/570L as follows:

Step Instructions

Inspect shipping containers for damage. If shipping containers are damaged,

1 keep them until the contents of the shipment have been carefully inspected and
checked for normal operation.
2 Remove the packing list from the outside of the shipping carton.
Open the carton by cutting the tape at the top of the carton (indicated by OPEN
3
THIS END).

Remove the cardboard/foam space covering the modem. Remove the modem,
4
manual and power cord from the carton.
Check the contents against the packing list to verify completeness of the
5
shipment.
Inspect the equipment for any possible damage incurred during shipment. If
6 damage is evident, contact the carrier and Comtech EF Data immediately and
submit a damage report.

Refer to the sections that follow in this chapter for further installation,
7
configuration and startup instructions.

2–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Installation MN/CDM570L.IOM

2.2 Mounting
If the CDM-570/570L is to be mounted in a rack, ensure that there is adequate clearance for
ventilation, particularly at the sides. In rack systems where there is high heat dissipation, forced
air cooling must be provided by top or bottom mounted fans or blowers. Under no circumstance
should the highest internal rack temperature be allowed to exceed 50°C (122°F).

The CDM-570/570L CANNOT have rack slides mounted to the side of the chassis.
Two cooling fans are installed in the right-hand side of the unit. Comtech EF Data
therefore recommends that an alternate method of support, such as rack shelves, is
IMPORTANT employed within the rack. If there is any doubt, please consult the Comtech EF Data
Customer Support department.

2.2.1 Optional Rear-Mounting Support Brackets

Install optional rear-mounting support brackets using Comtech EF Data kit (P/N KT/6228-2):

Quantity Part Number Description

2 HW/10-32SHLDR Screw, #10 Shoulder
4 HW/10-32FLT Washer, #10 Flat
2 HW/10-32SPLIT Washer, #10 Split
2 HW/10-32HEXNUT Nut, #10 Hex
2 FP/6138-1 Bracket, Rear Support
4 HW/10-32x1/2RK Bolt, #10 Rack Bracket

The tools required for this installation are a medium Phillips™ screwdriver and a 5/32-inch
SAE Allen™ Wrench. The kit is installed as illustrated in Figure 2-1 via the following
procedure:

Step Instructions

Secure the #10 shoulder screws to the unit chassis through the rear right and left
1 side mounting slots, using the #10 flat washers, #10 split washers, and #10 hex
nuts as shown.

Install the rear support brackets onto the equipment rack threaded rear mounting
2
rails, using the #10 rack bracket bolts.

Mount the unit into the equipment rack, ensuring that the shoulders of the #10
3
shoulder screws properly engage into the rear support bracket slots.

2–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Installation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure 2-1. Installation of Optional Rear-Mounting Support Brackets (KT/6228-2)

2–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Installation MN/CDM570L.IOM

2.3 Configuration
The unit ships with a default 64 kbps, QPSK, Rate 1/2 configuration. There are no internal
jumpers to configure, no interface cards to install, and no other options to install: all
configurations are carried out entirely via software.
The unit should first be configured locally, using the front panel keypad and display. Refer to
Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for details on how to fully configure the unit for the
desired operating parameters.
Note: The auto-sensing AC power supply does not require any adjustments. Simply plug in the
supplied line cord, and turn on the switch on the rear panel.

2.4 Select Internal IF Loop

Correct operation of the unit may be verified rapidly, without the need for externally connected
equipment. Referring to Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION – using the keypad, from
the SELECT: (top level) menu, select TEST, then IF> (IF Loopback), then press ENTER. The
demod should synchronize and the Rx TRAFFIC LED on the front panel should illuminate
green. If the unit does not pass this test, call Comtech EF Data Customer Support for assistance.

2.5 Connect External Cables

Having verified correct operation in IF loop, enter the desired configuration, and proceed to
connect all external cables to the connectors outlined in the next chapter (Chapter 3. REAR
PANEL CONNECTOR PINOUTS). Should difficulties occur, call Comtech EF Data Customer
Support for assistance.

2–4
 Chapter 3. REAR PANEL
CONNECTORS

3.1 Connector Overview

The CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem rear panel connectors, shown here in Figure 3-1, provide
0

all necessary external connections between the modem and other equipment. On the next page,
Table 3-1 summarizes the connectors provided on the rear panel interface, grouped according
1

to service function.

Figure 3-1. CDM-570/570L Rear Panel

(CDM-570L shown with optional IP Module Ethernet Interface installed)

3–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

Table 3-1. Rear Panel External Connections

Connector
Group Name Connector Type Function
(Sect. Ref.)
IF CDM-570L: Type ’N’
(Sect. 3.2) female (L-Band)
Rx IF Input
CDM-570: BNC female
(70/140MHz band)
CDM-570L: Type ’N’
female (L-Band)
Tx IF Output
CDM-570: BNC female
(70/140MHz band)
Terrestrial Data Data Interface 25-pin Type ‘D’ female Serial synchronous data Input/Output
(Sect. 3.3)
G.703
Balanced 15-pin Type ‘D’ female
T1 (1544 kbps) / E1 (2048 kbps)
G.703
Unbalanced
Data BNC 75Ω female Receive G.703 E1 (2048 kbps)
Out
Unbalanced In BNC 75Ω female Transmit G.703 E1 (2048 kbps)
10/100 Ethernet M&C RJ-45 female 10/100 BaseT management and data
10/100 Ethernet Traffic RJ-45 female (w/optional IP Module) Ethernet Traffic
Utility Remote Control 9-pin Type ‘D’ male Serial Remote Interface (EIA-232/-485)
(Sect. 3.4)
Alarms 15-pin Type ‘D’ male Form C Alarms (relay closures)
1:1 Control 9-pin Type ‘D’ female Connection to External 1:1 Controller
External Reference BNC female Input/Output
(w/optional IP Module) EIA-232 Serial
Serial Console RJ-11 female Console for CDM-570L/IP Module
management
Power/Ground AC See Sect. 3.5.1
(Sect 3.5) Chassis power
DC (Optional) See Sect. 3.5.2
Ground #10-32 stud Common Chassis Ground

Note: The European EMC Directive (EN55022, EN50082-1) requires using properly shielded cables for
DATA I/O. These cables must be double-shielded from end-to-end, ensuring a continuous ground shield.

3–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

3.2 IF Connections

 
There may be DC voltages present on the Type ‘N’ Rx and Tx IF connectors, up
CA UTIO N to a maximum of 48 volts.

CDM-570L: The IF port connectors are both 50Ω ‘N’ female types. The return loss on these
ports is greater than 19 dB (typically better than 21 dB), and if the user wishes to connect to a
75Ω system, an inexpensive ‘N’ to ‘F’ type adapter can be used. While there will be a reduction
in return loss when doing this, the effect in most systems will be imperceptible.

CDM-570: The IF port connectors are both BNC female types. The return loss on these ports is
greater than 17 dB (typically better than 19 dB) in BOTH 50Ω and 75Ω systems.

3.2.1 Rx IF Connectors
Connector Type Description Direction
CDM-570L: Type ‘N’
Rx IF signal, L- band
(Shown at left)
In
CDM-570: BNC
Rx IF signal, 70/140 MHz band
(Shown at right)

3.2.2 Tx IF Connectors
Connector Type Description Direction
CDM-570L: Type ‘N’
Tx IF signal, L- band
(Shown at left)
Out
CDM-570: BNC
Tx IF signal, 70/140 MHz band
(Shown at right)

3–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

3.3 Terrestrial Data Connections

3.3.1 Data Interface Connector, DB-25F

The 25-pin ‘D’ type female (DB-25F) Data Interface connector
conducts data input and output breakout panel, or protection switch.
This connector conforms to the EIA-530 pinout, which allows for
connection of different electrical standards, including EIA-422, V.35,
and EIA-232. A shielded DB-25F connector provides a very solid solution to EMC problems,
unlike the sometimes-used V.35 Winchester connector.

THE MODEM IS ALWAYS ASSUMED TO BE DCE

IMPORTANT IMPORTANT

Refer to Table 3-2 for pin assignments.

2

Table 3-2. Data Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Generic Signal EIA-422
Pin # Direction V.35 EIA-232 Circuit #
Description EIA-530
2 Transmit Data A DTE to Modem SD A SD A BA 103
14 Transmit Data B DTE to Modem SD B SD B - 103
24 Transmit Clock A DTE to Modem TT A SCTE A DA 113
11 Transmit Clock B DTE to Modem TT B SCTE B - 113
15 Internal Tx Clock A Modem to DTE ST A SCT A DB 114
12 Internal Tx Clock B Modem to DTE ST B SCT B - 114
3 Receive Data A Modem to DTE RD A RD A BB 104
16 Receive Data B Modem to DTE RD B RD B - 104
17 Receive Clock A Modem to DTE RT A SCR A DD 115
9 Receive Clock B Modem to DTE RT B SCR B - 115
8 Receiver Ready A Modem to DTE RR A RLSD CF 109
10 Receiver Ready B Modem to DTE RR B - - 109
5 Clear to Send A * Modem to DTE CS A CTS CB 106
13 Clear to Send B * Modem to DTE CS B - - 106
4 Request to Send A * DTE to Modem RS A RTS CA 105
19 Request to Send B * DTE to Modem RS B - - 105
6 Data Set Ready A * Modem to DTE DM A DSR CC 107
22 Data Set Ready B * Modem to DTE DM B - - 107
7 Signal Ground - SG SG AB 102
1 Shield - Shield FG AN 101
Notes:
• When the rear-panel switch marked “1:N Switch” is in the OFF position, all of the signals shown above are available
and functional. In addition, pins not shown are not connected, and therefore no damage will occur if other signals are
connected to the additional pins.
• When the rear-panel switch marked “1:N Switch” is in the ON position, the highlighted signals, plus pins 18, 20, 21,
22, 23 and 25 are reserved for use by the 1:N system. DO NOT connect signals to any of these pins in this mode.
Certain pins have DC voltages present that may damage equipment other than a Comtech EF Data redundancy
switch.
• For X.21 operation, use the EIA-422 pins, but ignore Receive Clock if the Modem is DTE, and ignore Transmit Clocks
if the Modem is DCE.

3–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

3.3.2 G.703 Connectors

3.3.2.1 Balanced E1/T1 G.703 Interface Connector, DB-15F

The Balanced E1/T1 G.703 connection is a 15-pin ‘D’ type female (DB-15F)
connector used for balanced operation at the G.703 data rates of E1 (2.048
Mbps) or T1 (1.544 Mbps).

Refer to Table 3-3 for the connector pinouts.

3

Table 3-3. Balanced G.703 Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Pin # Signal Function Name Direction

1 Tx G.703 - Tx G.703 In In
9 Tx G.703 + Tx G.703 In In
2 Ground GND
3 Rx G.703 - Rx G.703 Out Out
11 Rx G.703 + Rx G.703 Out Out
4 Ground GND

Note: Pins 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14 and 15 are not used.

3–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

3.3.2.1.1 E1/T1 RJ-48 Connection via Balanced G.703 Interface Connector

For E1/T1 operation via an RJ-48 user interface, the optional CN-0000268 Adapter, shown in
Figure 3-2, may be purchased from Comtech EF Data to adapt the Balanced E1/T1 G.703
4

DB-15F connector to an RJ-48 female connection.

User Interface Side (RJ-48 F) Modem Interface Side (DB-15M)

CN-0000268 Adapter Pin Assignments

Pin #
Signal Name
RJ-48 (User Side) DB-15M (Modem Side)
1 9 Tx+
2 1 Tx-
3 2 GND
4 11 Rx+
5 3 Rx-
6 4 GND
Note: Pins 7 and 8 on the RJ-48 side, and pins 5-8, 10, and 12-15 on
the DB-15 side, are not used.
Figure 3-2. CN-0000268 DB-15M Æ RJ-48F Adapter for E1/T1 Operation

3–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

3.3.2.2 Unbalanced G.703 Interface Connectors (Tx/Rx), 75Ω BNC

Two female BNC 75Ω connectors are provided for unbalanced operation at the
G.703 data rates of E1 (2.048 Mbps):

BNC
Description Direction
Connector
Unbal E1 Out Rx G.703 (Unbalanced E1) Out
Unbal E1 In Tx G.703 (Unbalanced E1) In

3.3.3 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Management Port Connector (M&C), RJ-45

The 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector is a standard 8-pin RJ-45 modular jack
used for connecting a UTP cable to an Ethernet hub, router, switch, PC, etc.,
and for upgrading CDM-570L base modem firmware. This connector is present
on the base modem assembly and is used for M&C purposes.
Refer to Table 3-4 for the typical connector pinouts.
5

3.3.4 10/100BaseT Ethernet Traffic Port Connector (with Optional IP Module only)
This second connector, a standard 8-pin RJ-45 modular jack, is present if the
optional IP module is installed and is used for connecting a UTP cable to an
Ethernet hub, router, switch, PC, etc. It is used for Ethernet traffic,
management of CDM-570L and IP Module functions via Telnet/HTTP/ SNMP,
and upgrading of CDM-570L IP Module software.
Refer to Table 3-4 for the typical connector pinouts.
6

Table 3-4. Typical Ethernet Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Pin # Function
1 Tx+
2 Tx-
3 Rx+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 Rx-
7 N/C
8 N/C

3–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

3.4 Utility Connections

3.4.1 Remote Control Interface Connector, DB-9M

The remote control interface connection is a 9-pin type ‘D’ male (DB-9M) connector.
This port is intended for connection to an M&C computer, or terminal device. This
interface is user selectable for either EIA-232 or EIA-485.

Refer to Table 3-5 for the connector pinouts.

7

Table 3-5. Remote Control Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Pin # Description Direction
1 Ground
2 EIA-232 Transmit Data Out
3 EIA-232 Receive Data In
4 Reserved - do not connect to this pin
5 Ground
6 EIA-485 Receive Data B * In
7 EIA-485 Receive Data A * In
8 EIA-485 Transmit Data B Out
9 EIA-485 Transmit Data A Out
* Use for 2-wire EIA-485 operation

3.4.2 Form-C Traffic Alarms Connector, DB-15M

The Alarms connector is a 15-pin type 'D' male (DB-15M) connector. Unit
alarms are provided on this connector, affording the user access to the
Form-C relay contacts which indicate the fault status of the unit. These
contacts are typically connected to an external fault monitoring system often
found in satellite earth stations. Additionally, the receive I and Q demodulator samples are
provided on this connector. Connecting these signals to an oscilloscope in X,Y mode will provide
the receive signal constellation diagram, which is a useful diagnostic aid. A pin is also provided
which can mute the transmit carrier; this requires that the pin be shorted to ground or a TTL
‘low’, or that an EIA-232 ‘high’ signal be applied.

As an aid to antenna pointing or for driving step-track equipment, an analog AGC signal is
provided on Pin 2 of this connector.

Refer to Table 3-6 for the connector pinouts.

8

3–8
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

Table 3-6. Alarm Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Pin # Signal Function Name

8 Rx Traffic (De-energized, Faulted) RX-NC
15 Rx Traffic (Energized, No Fault) RX-NO
7 Rx Traffic RX-COM
14 Tx Traffic (De-energized, Faulted) TX-NC
6 Tx Traffic (Energized, No Fault) TX-NO
13 Tx Traffic TX-COM
5 Unit Fault (De-energized, Faulted) UNIT-NC
12 Unit Fault (Energized, No Fault) UNIT-NO
4 Unit Fault UNIT-COM
11 Rx I Channel (Constellation monitor) RX-I
3 Rx Q Channel (Constellation monitor) RX-Q
10 No Connection N/C
2 AGC Voltage (Rx signal level, 0 to 10 volts) AGC
9 EXT Carrier OFF EXT-OFF
1 Ground GND

3.4.3 1:1 Control Interface Connector, DB-9F

The 1:1 Control connection is a 9-pin type ‘D’ female connector (DB-9F). This
connector is used to connect the modem only to a CRS-170 switch in 1:1
redundancy configurations.

Refer to Table 3-7 for the connector pinouts.

9

Table 3-7. 1:1 Control Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Pin # Description Direction
1 Ground
2 Receive Serial Data – auxiliary channel In
3 Redundancy In 1 In
4 Redundancy In 2 In
5 Ground
6 Transmit Serial Data – auxiliary channel Out
7 Redundancy Out 1 Out
8 Redundancy Out 2 Out
9 Fused +12 volt Out

3–9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

3.4.4 Ext Ref Connector, BNC

The Ext Ref connectors is a BNC female connector. The signal supplied here by the
user is used for phase-locking the internal 10MHz reference oscillator, and can be 1,
2, 5, 10 or 20 MHz. The impedance is matched for 50/75Ω, and requires a level in the
range –6 to +10 dBm.

Connector Type Description Direction

BNC External Reference In/Out

3.4.5 Async-Serial Console (with Optional IP Module only), RJ-11

The Serial Console Connector is a standard 6-pin RJ-11 modular jack. The Async-
Serial Console interfaces the IP Module Command Line Interface (CLI) and is used for
management of CDM-570L and IP Module functions using a terminal emulator
connected (with the supplied adapter cable) to the Console port. This is a EIA-232
DCE interface.

Refer to Table 3-8 for the connector pinouts.

1

Table 3-8. ASYNC-Serial Console Connector Pin Assignments

Pin # Function
1 Ground
2 Rx
3 Tx
4 Ground
5 Not used
6 Not used

3–10
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

3.5 Power / Ground Connections

3.5.1 Alternating Current (AC) Power Connector (Standard)

A standard, detachable, non-locking, 3-prong power cord (IEC plug)
supplies the Alternating Current (AC) power to the modem. Note the
following:

AC Power Specifications
Input Power 40W maximum, 20W typical
Input Voltage 100 - 240 volts AC, +6%/-10% - autosensing
(total absolute max. range is 90 - 254 volts AC)
Connector Type IEC
Fuse Protection 5.0A Slow-blow (115 volt AC operation)
2.5A Slow-blow (230 volt AC operation)
Line and neutral fusing
20 mm type fuses

3.5.2 Direct Current (DC) Power Connector (Optional)

This optional connector supplies the Direct Current (DC) power to
the modem. Note the following:

DC Power Specifications
Input Power 48 watts (typical)
55 watts (maximum)
Input Voltage 48 volts DC, nominal
(36 volts to 60 volts)
Connector Type Corcom PS series
Mating Connector Corcom GA210 or Molex 03-12-1026
Fuse Protection 8A Slow-blow
Line and neutral fusing
20 mm type fuses (quantity 2)

3.5.3 Ground Connector

A #10-32 stud on the rear panel of the modem is used for connecting a common
chassis ground among equipment.

Note: The AC power connector provides the safety ground.

3–11
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Rear Panel Connectors

Notes:

3–12
 Chapter 4. FLASH UPGRADING

4.1 Flash Updating via Internet

The CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem eliminates the need for updating firmware by physically
replacing EPROMs. Instead, the CDM-570/570L uses ‘Flash memory’ technology internally. This
makes software upgrading very simple, and updates can now be sent via the Internet (Figure 4-1),
via E-mail, or on CD.

This chapter outlines the complete upgrading process as follows:

• New firmware can be downloaded via the Internet to an external PC.
• The upgrade can be performed without opening the CDM-570/570L by simply connecting
the unit to the serial or Ethernet port of a computer.
• The firmware update is transferred, via File Transfer Protocol (FTP), to the CDM-570/570L.

Figure 4-1. Flash Update via Internet

4–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Flash Upgrading MN/CDM570L.IOM

4.2 Base Modem Ethernet FTP Upload Procedure

Step Procedure
1 Identify the reflashable product, firmware number, and version for download.
The current modem M&C version can be viewed at the top-level menu of the front panel display
(press the [CLEAR] key several times to view). The firmware information can also be found within
the SELECT: UTIL Æ Firmware Æ Info Æ Image#1 or Image#2 menu trees.
Using serial remote control, the firmware revision levels can be queried as follows:
Abbreviated: <0/SWR? or: Detailed: <0/FRW?
Alternately, when using the Base Modem Web Server Interface, the Bootrom, Bulk1 and
Bulk2 firmware loads may be viewed after selecting the Unit Info hyperlink (available
under the Maint [Maintenance] page tab). For more information, refer to Chapter 7.
BASE MODEM WEB SERVER INTERFACE.
2 Create a temporary directory (folder) on the PC:
Windows: Select File Æ New Æ Folder and rename the “New Folder” to "temp" or another unused
name. A "c:\temp" folder should now exist.
Note: The c: is the drive letter used in this example. Any valid, writable drive letter can be used.
CMD prompt: At the command prompt (c:\>) type "MD temp" or “mkdir temp” without quotes
(MD and mkdir stand for make directory). A "c:\temp" subdirectory should now exist, where c: is
the drive letter used in the example.
3 Download the correct firmware file to this temporary folder. As shown in Figure 4-1:
a) Go online to: www.comtechefdata.com;
b) Click on: Support tab;
c) Click on: Software Downloads drop-down or hyperlink from Support page;
d) Click on: Download Flash and Software Update Files icon;
e) Click on: Flash and Software Update Files Select a Product Line: Satellite Modems
hyperlink;
f) Select the CDM-570 and CDM-570L product hyperlink;
g) Select the appropriate firmware hyperlink.
About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and Formats:
The flashable files on the download server are organized
by product prefix; firmware number (verify that the correct
firmware number is known – see Step 1); revision letter, if
applicable; and release version. The CDM-570/570L base
modem bulk firmware number is FW10805*_### (where
the asterisk is the revision letter, and ### represents the firmware version).
The current version firmware release is provided. If applicable, one version prior to the current
release is also available. Be sure to identify and download the desired version.
The downloadable files are stored in two formats: *.exe (self-extracting) and *.zip (compressed).
Some firewalls will not allow the downloading of *.exe files. In this case, download the *.zip file
instead.
For additional help with "zipped" file types, refer to PKZIP for Windows, WinZip, or ZipCentral
help files. PKZIP for DOS is not supported due to file naming conventions.

4–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Flash Upgrading MN/CDM570L.IOM

4 Extract the files to the temporary folder on the PC.

A minimum of three files should be extracted:
1. FW10805x.bin, where "x" is the version of the bulk image file.
2. CDM570_570L Release Notes.pdf (or a variation of this filename).
3. Readme_vx.txt, where "x" is the version (installation notes).
5 Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC. In DOS, use
“cd c:\temp” to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2, then use the “dir” command to
list the files extracted from the downloaded archive file.
6 Connect the external PC to the CDM-570/570L modem 10/100 Ethernet M&C port via a
hub or a switch, or directly to a PC with a crossover cable.
BASE MODEM firmware can be loaded via the Ethernet M&C port; when
the optional IP Module is installed, via the Ethernet Traffic port; or over
the satellite link when the modem data interface is set to IP.
IMPORTANT
Note that the command used to load the BASE MODEM firmware is as
follows:
• Via Ethernet Port: Type "put FW10805*.bin bulk:"
• Via Traffic Port or over satellite using IP Module: Type "put
FW10805*.bin
7 Send a “ping” command to the modem to verify the connection and communication.
First, determine the IP address of the modem remotely or by using the SLM-5650A Front Panel:
• Remotely – use the <0/IPA? query.
• Via Front Panel – use the SELECT: CONFIG Æ Remote Æ Remote Æ Ethernet
menu.
Then, use DOS to “ping” the modem:
From Windows, click “Start” on the Windows toolbar, then select the “Run...” option (as an
alternative, use the “DOS Prompt” or “Command Prompt” icons in the Start Menu):
• Using Win95 or Win98 – Type “command”.
• Using WinNT, Win2K or WinXP – Type “cmd”.
At the DOS prompt, type “ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the modem IP
address). The results should confirm whether or not the modem is connected and communicating.
8 Initiate an FTP session with the modem (this example uses a DOS window):
a) From the PC, type "ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of the
CDM-570/570L.
b) Enter the Admin User Name and Password to complete login.
c) Verify the FTP transfer is binary by typing "bin".
d) Type "prompt", then type "hash" to facilitate the file transfers.
9 Transfer the files from the temporary folder on the PC:
• Upgrade via Ethernet M&C port: Type "put FW10805*.bin bulk:" to begin the
file transfers. The destination “bulk:” must be all lower case. It will take
approximately one minute to transfer the file.
• Upgrade via Traffic Ethernet port or over satellite using IP module: Type "put
FW10805*.bin" to begin the file transfers. It will take approximately one minute to
transfer the file when done locally and several minutes when done over the satellite.

4–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Flash Upgrading MN/CDM570L.IOM

10 Verify the file transfer:

a) The PC should report that the file transfer has occurred, and the display on the
modem will report:

Programming flash sector #xx

Please wait…
b) The process sequences through several blocks – this will take several minutes.
When it has finished, the modem front panel will display:

Bulk FTP done. Press CLEAR.

c) Terminate the FTP session by typing "bye" and close the DOS window.
d) Confirm that the new file was loaded by using the procedure in Step 1.
11 Change the desired image to boot from the modem front panel menu: SELECT: UTIL Æ
Firmware Æ Select (use ◄ ► arrows to change to the other image), then cycle power to reboot
the modem.
12 Verify the new firmware versions are booting by observing the following messages on the modem
front panel display:
Comtech CDM-570/570L Modem
Ver 1.x.x
Note: To load the second image, repeat Steps 8 through 11.

4–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Flash Upgrading MN/CDM570L.IOM

4.3 Ethernet IP Module FTP Upload Procedure

Step Procedure
1 Identify the reflashable product, firmware number, and version for download.
The current modem M&C version can be viewed at the top-level menu of the front panel display
(press the [CLEAR] key several times to view). The firmware information can also be found within
the SELECT: UTIL Æ Firmware Æ Info Æ MP550 menu trees.
• From the Serial Console port, view the IP Module information by selecting
Operations and Maintenance Æ Unit Information.
• From Telnet via the 10/100 Ethernet Traffic port, view the IP Module
information by selecting Operations and Maintenance Æ Unit Information.
• From HTTP via the 10/100 Ethernet Traffic port, view the IP Module
information by selecting Operations and Maintenance Æ Unit Information.
2 Create a temporary directory (folder) on the PC:
Windows: Select File Æ New Æ Folder and rename the “New Folder” to "temp" or another unused
name. A "c:\temp" folder should now exist.
Note: The c: is the drive letter used in this example. Any valid, writable drive letter can be used.
CMD prompt: At the command prompt (c:\>) type "MD temp" or “mkdir temp” without quotes
(MD and mkdir stand for make directory). A "c:\temp" subdirectory should now exist, where c: is
the drive letter used in the example.
3 Download the correct firmware file to this temporary folder. As shown in Figure 4-1:
a) Go online to: www.comtechefdata.com;
b) Click on: Support tab;
c) Click on: Software Downloads drop-down or hyperlink from Support page;
d) Click on: Download Flash and Software Update Files icon;
e) Click on: Flash and Software Update Files Select a Product Line: Satellite Modems
hyperlink;
f) Select the CDM-570-IP and CDM-570L-IP product hyperlink;
g) Select the appropriate firmware hyperlink.

About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and

Formats: The flashable files on the download
server are organized by product prefix; firmware
number (verify that the correct firmware number is
known – see Step 1); revision letter, if applicable;
version; and release date. The firmware number for
the CDM-570/570L with IP Module and 3xDES is FW10875*_*_*; the firmware number
for the CDM-570/570L with IP Module but without 3xDES is F0000120*_*_* (where the
asterisks in both filenames signify revision, version and release date).
Only the firmware for the IP Module without 3xDES is available for
download from the CEFD Web site. Please contact Network Product
Customer Support for details on how to obtain the firmware for the IP
IMPORTANT
Module with the 3xDES option:
Comtech EF Data Network Product Customer Support 480.333.2433
cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com

4–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Flash Upgrading MN/CDM570L.IOM

3 (cont) The current version firmware release is provided. If applicable, one version prior to the current
release is also available. Be sure to identify and download the desired version.
The downloadable files are stored in two formats: *.exe (self-extracting) and *.zip (compressed).
Some firewalls will not allow the downloading of *.exe files. In this case, download the *.zip file
instead.
For additional help with "zipped" file types, refer to PKZIP for Windows, WinZip, or ZipCentral
help files. PKZIP for DOS is not supported due to file naming conventions.
4 Extract the files to the temporary folder on the PC.
A minimum of three files should be extracted:
1. F0000120x.bin (without 3xDES) or FW10875x.bin (with 3xDES), where "x" is
the version of the bulk image file.
2. CDM570_570L Release Notes.pdf (or a variation of this filename).
3. Readme_vx.txt, where "x" is the version (installation notes).
5 Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC. In DOS, use
“cd c:\temp” to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2, then use the “dir” command to
list the files extracted from the downloaded archive file.
6 Connect the external PC to the CDM-570/570L modem 10/100 Ethernet M&C port via a
hub or a switch, or directly to a PC with a crossover cable.
IP MODULE firmware can only be loaded via the EthernetTraffic port;
do not use the Ethernet M&C port. Also, IP MODULE firmware can be
IMPORTANT loaded to a remote modem over the satellite link when the modem data
interface is set to IP.
• For upgrades to a local CDM-570 IP Module: It is recommended that
this upgrade be performed with a PC that is locally attached to the CDM-
570 IP Module CLI via the RS-232 Serial Console Port to monitor the
progress of the upgrade.
• For upgrades to a remote CDM-570 IP Module over a satellite link: It
is recommended that this upgrade be performed with a PC that has a
Telnet session connection (in addition to the FTP session) to the CDM-
570 IP Module via satellite to monitor the progress of the upgrade.
7 Send a “ping” command to the modem to verify the connection and communication.
First, determine the IP address of the modem remotely or by using the SLM-5650A Front Panel:
• Remotely – use the <0/IPA? query.
• Via Front Panel – use the SELECT: CONFIG Æ Remote Æ Remote Æ Ethernet
menu.
Then, use DOS to “ping” the modem:
From Windows, click “Start” on the Windows toolbar, then select the “Run...” option (as an
alternative, use the “DOS Prompt” or “Command Prompt” icons in the Start Menu):
• Using Win95 or Win98 – Type “command”.
• Using WinNT, Win2K or WinXP – Type “cmd”.
At the DOS prompt, type “ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the modem IP address).
The results should confirm whether or not the modem is connected and communicating.

4–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Flash Upgrading MN/CDM570L.IOM

8 Initiate an FTP session with the modem (this example uses a DOS window):
a) From the PC, type "ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of the
CDM-570/570L.
b) Enter the Admin User Name and Password to complete login.
c) Verify the FTP transfer is binary by typing "bin".
d) Type "prompt", then type "hash" to facilitate the file transfers.
9 Transfer the files from the temporary folder on the PC:
Type “put F0000120*.bin” (without 3xDES) or "put FW10875*.bin" (with 3xDES) to
begin the file transfers. It will take several minutes to transfer and write the files to flash
memory.
10 Verify the file transfer:
a) The PC should report that the file transfer has occurred, and the display on the
modem will report:

Programming flash sector #xx

Please wait…
b) Terminate the FTP session by typing "bye" and close the DOS window.
c) Confirm that the new file was loaded by using the procedure in Step 1.

If the file transfer is not successful for any reason, do not reset or
power down the CDM-570/L. Restart the FTP session and repeat steps
7-9. If the file transfer is still not successful, contact Comtech EF Data
IMPORTANT
Network Product Support:
Telephone: 480.333.2433
Email: cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com

4.4 USB Procedure

USB reflash is not available in this firmware release – please consult Comtech
EF Data Customer Support for release schedule.
IMPORTANT

4–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Flash Upgrading MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

4–8
 Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION

5.1 Introduction

LED Vacuum Fluorescent

Indicators Keypad Display (VFD)

Figure 5-1. Front Panel View (CDM-570L shown)

The user can fully control and monitor the operation of the CDM-570/570L from the front panel
using the keypad and display. Nested menus are used, which display all available options, and
prompt the user to carry out a required action.

Figure 5-1 identifies the key features of the front panel, which are explained in greater detail in
0

this section.

5–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.1.1 LED Indicators

In general, the Alarm relay state will reflect the state

of the Front Panel LEDs. For instance, if the Unit
Status LED is red, the Unit Alarm relay will be active,
etc. The one exception is the Transmit Traffic relay.
IMPORTANT This will only be activated if a Transmit Traffic Fault
exists – it does not reflect the state of the TX carrier.

The behavior of the eight front panel LED indicators is as follows:

LED Color Condition

Red A Unit Fault exists (Example: PSU fault)
No Unit Faults, but a Traffic Fault, or ODU (BUC or LNB)
UNIT STATUS Orange
fault exists
Green No Unit Faults, or Traffic Faults
Green No Tx Traffic Faults
Tx TRAFFIC
Off A Tx Traffic fault exists OR the Tx Carrier is in OFF state
No Rx Traffic Faults (demod and Viterbi decoder are locked,
Green
everything is OK)
Rx TRAFFIC
An Rx Traffic fault exists (the demod may still be OK –
Off
check the fault status of the unit from the Monitor menu).
Green The Unit is On Line, and carrying traffic
ONLINE The Unit is Off Line (standby) - forced by externally
Off
connected 1:1 or 1:N redundancy system
There is a Stored Event in the log, which can be viewed
Orange from the front panel, or retrieved via the remote control
STORED EVENT interface
Off There are no Stored Events
The Unit is in Remote Mode - local monitoring is possible,
Orange
but no local control
The Unit is in Local Mode - remote monitoring is possible,
REMOTE Off
but no remote control
ODU FSK control has been enabled, and there is a
Flashing
communications fault
Framing on, EDMAC on, and unit defined as Slave - local
Orange
monitoring is possible, but no local control
EDMAC MODE Either the unit is in Transparent mode (no framing), or the
Off framing has been selected, but in AUPC-only mode, or
EDMAC Master configuration
Orange A Test Mode is selected (Example: IF Loopback)
TEST MODE
Off There is no Test Mode currently selected

5–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.1.2 Keypad
As the manufacturing process of CDM-570/570L has evolved, there have been three different
keypad layouts, as shown in Figure 5-2:
1

(a) Flat Membrane Layout

(Units manufactured prior to June 2005)

(b) Protruding Black Button Layout I (c) Protruding Black Button Layout II
(Units manufactured between June and (Units manufactured from October 2005
October 2005) Onwards)

Figure 5-2. CDM-570/570L – Front Panel Keypad

The function of the keypad is as follows:

This key is used to select a displayed function or to execute a modem

ENTER
configuration change. From the opening screen, pressing ENTER once takes
(ENT)
the user to the SELECT: (Main) menu.
This key is used to back out of a selection or to cancel a configuration change
which has not been executed using ENTER. Pressing CLEAR generally returns
CLEAR
the display to the previous selection or, if pressed repeatedly, to the opening
(CLR)
screen. From the opening screen, pressing CLEAR once takes the user to the
SELECT: (Main) menu.
These keys are used primarily to move to the next menu screen section. At
◄ ►
times, they may also be used to move the cursor position (e.g., when editing a
(Left, Right)
parameter value or label character).

These keys are used primarily used to move from one menu screen parameter
▲ ▼
selection to another. At times, they may also be used to edit configuration value
(Up, Down)
digits (numbers) or label characters (e.g., letters).

The keypad has an auto-repeat feature. If a key is held down for more than 1
second, the key action will repeat, automatically, at the rate of 15 keystrokes
per second. This is particularly useful when editing numeric fields, with many
IMPORTANT digits, such as frequency or data rate.

5–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.1.3 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)

The CDM-570/570L features a Vacuum Fluorescent
Display (VFD). The VFD is an active display
showing two lines of 24 characters each. It produces
a blue light, the brightness of which can be
controlled by the user. Compared to a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), it has greatly superior
viewing characteristics and does not suffer problems of viewing angle or contrast.
On most menu screens, the user will observe a flashing solid block cursor, which blinks at a once-
per-second rate. This indicates the currently selected item, digit, or field. Where this solid block
cursor would obscure the item being edited (e.g., a numeric field) the cursor will automatically
change to an underline cursor.
If the user were to display the same screen for weeks at a time, the display could become ‘burnt’
with this image. To prevent this, the unit has a ‘screen saver’ feature, which will activate after 1
hour. The top line of the display will show the Circuit ID (which can be entered by the user) and
the bottom line will show the circuit Eb/No value (if the demod is locked) followed by ‘Press
any key...’. The message moves from right to left across the screen, then wraps around.
Pressing any key will restore the previous screen.

5.2 Opening Screen

The opening screen displays whenever power is first applied to the unit; from any other nested
menu, it is accessible by pressing CLEAR repeatedly.
If the Internal Reference warm-up delay feature has been disabled (refer to SELECT:UTILÆ
REFERENCEÆ Warm-up Delay later in this chapter) one of the following screens is displayed
(depending on modem type):
Comtech CDM-570L Modem Comtech CDM-570 Modem
Firmware Version:1.x.x Firmware Version:1.x.x
If, however, the Internal Reference warm-up delay feature has been enabled, one of the following
screens is displayed:
Comtech CDM-570L Modem Comtech CDM-570 Modem
Ref Warming-up: 045 Ref Warming-up: 045
The bottom right of the display counts down, in seconds, until the warm-up period is complete.
During this period, the Tx Carrier is deliberately muted. At the end of the warm-up period, the
bottom line will revert to the ‘normal’ display of Firmware version, and the unit will enter its
normal operational state. At this stage, pressing any key will take the user to the top level
selection screen.

The user may override the warm-up period (i.e., bypass this feature) at any
time by pressing the CLEAR key.
IMPORTANT

5–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3 SELECT: (Main) Menu

CDM-570L: CDM-570:
SELECT: Config Monitor SELECT: Config Monitor
Test Info Save/Ld Util Test Info Save/Load Util

The SELECT: menu screen is immediately accessible from the opening screen by pressing
ENTER or CLEAR or, from any other nested menu, by repeatedly pressing CLEAR as needed
until it reappears.
On the next page, Figure 5-3 illustrates the hierarchal structure of the front panel principle menu
tree from the SELECT: menu on down.
The table that follows identifies the menu branches available from the SELECT: menu and their
related content sections in this chapter (the detailed information for the sub branches that are
available for selection under each menu branch is, in turn, provided within the pertinent chapter
sections):

Menu Branch Sect Description

Config 5.3.1 Used to fully configure the modem.

Used to monitor the alarm status of the unit, to view the log of stored
Monitor 5.3.2
events, and to display the Receive Parameters screen.
Test 5.3.3 Used to invoke one of several test modes (loopbacks, for example).
(Information) Used to view information on the unit, without having to
Info 5.3.4
go into configuration screens.
(Save/Load) Used to save and to retrieve up to 10 different modem
Save/Ld 5.3.5
configurations.
(Utility) Used to perform miscellaneous functions, such as setting the
Util 5.3.6
Real-time clock, adjusting the display brightness, etc.
(Outdoor Unit) On the CDM-570 only: Used to monitor and control a
ODU Comtech EF Data RF Transceiver (CSAT-5060 or KST-2000A/B), if
5.3.7
(summary only) connected. See Appendix K. CDM570 ODU (CSAT-5060,
KST-2000A/B) OPERATION for full details.

The actual choices displayed in the submenus may vary according to which
FAST options have been enabled. Where a FAST option affects a menu, this
IMPORTANT
is identified in the descriptive text.

Select from the choices shown for either the CDM-570L or CDM-570 using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then press ENTER.

5–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure 5-3. CDM-570/570L – Principle Menu Tree

5–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1 (SELECT:) Config (Configuration) Menus

CONFIG: Rem All Tx Rx CEx
Frame Intfc Ref Mask ODU
Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to select from the submenu choices shown, then press ENTER. The
following table identifies each submenu available from the Configuration menu branch, its content
section in this chapter, and each submenu’s functional description:

Submenu Sect Functional Description

(Remote Control) Used to define whether the unit is being
Rem 5.3.1.1
controlled locally, or remotely.

Used to completely configure the unit, being prompted, step by

step, to make choices, or edit data. This is highly recommended for
All 5.3.1.2
new users, as it will clearly lead the user through all the
configuration parameters.

(Transmit) Used to define, on a parameter-by-parameter basis, the

transmit configuration of the unit. These menu sub-branches would
Tx 5.3.1.3
be used if the user wished to change, for example, just the Transmit
frequency.

(Receive) Used to define, on a parameter-by-parameter basis, the

receive configuration of the unit. These menu sub-branches would
Rx 5.3.1.4
be used if the user wished to change, for example, just the receive
data rate.

(Clock Extension) Used to define the G.703 Clock Extension

CEx 5.3.1.5
interface.
Used to define operation in a transparent mode (no framing) or in a
framed mode. In the framed mode, an overhead of 5% or 1.6% is
Frame 5.3.1.6
added to the rate transmitted over the satellite so that M&C and
AUPC information may be passed to the distant end.
(Interface) Used to define which electrical interface type is active at
Intfc 5.3.1.7
the data connectors (either the EIA-530 port, or the G.703 ports).
(Reference) Used to define whether the unit should use its own
Ref 5.3.1.8 internal 10MHz reference, or phase lock to an externally applied
reference, and if so, at what frequency.
Used to mask certain traffic alarms, which may cause problems to the
user. As an example, certain multiplexers use ‘all ones’ as an idle
Mask 5.3.1.9 pattern. However, by convention, the ‘all ones’ condition is taken to
be the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). If desired, this alarm may be
masked.
On the CDM-570L only: Used to configure a BUC (Block Up
ODU Converter) or LNB (Low-Noise Block Down Converter), if connected.
5.3.1.10
(Summary only) See Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU (BUC,LNB) OPERATION for full
details.

5–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.1 CONFIG: Rem (Remote Control)

Remote Control: Local
Serial Ethernet(◄ ►,ENT)
Select Local, Serial, or Ethernet using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If Local is selected, then remote control will be disabled. Remote monitoring is still possible.

5.3.1.1.1 CONFIG: Remote Æ Serial

NOTE: In Remote Æ Serial mode, in addition to Serial M&C being enabled, Telnet connection
is also allowed, which enables Telnet M&C for modems configured for redundant operation.
If Serial is selected from the Remote Control submenu and the unit has not been defined as an
EDMAC SLAVE, then the following menu is displayed:
Serial Config: Interface
Baudrate (◄ ►,ENTER)

CONFIG: Remote Æ Serial Æ Interface

M&C Bus Interface: RS232
RS485-2W RS485-4W (◄ ►)
Select RS232, RS485-2W (2-wire), or RS485-4W (4-wire) by using the ◄ ► arrow keys,
then press ENTER. At this point the user is further prompted to enter the bus address.

CONFIG: Remote Æ Serial Æ Interface Æ RS232

If RS232 is selected, the following menu is displayed:
In RS232 Mode the Bus
Address is fixed at 0000

CONFIG: Remote Æ Serial Æ Interface Æ RS485 (-2W or -4W)

If either RS485 mode is selected, the user is further prompted:
RS485 Bus Address: 0245
(◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENTER)
Edit the RS485 bus address of this unit. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to select the character to
edit, then the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the value of the digit. Press ENTER when done.
The valid range of addresses is from 1 to 9999.

CONFIG: Remote Æ Serial Æ Baudrate

Local M&C Bus Baud Rate:
19200 Baud (▲ ▼,ENTER)
Edit the baud rate of the remote control bus, connected locally to the M&C computer. The
value is changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when done. Values of 2400,
4800, 9600,19200, 38400 and 57600 baud are available. Note: The asynchronous character
format is FIXED at 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity (8-N-1).

5–8
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.1.2 CONFIG: Remote Æ Ethernet

NOTE: In Remote Æ Ethernet mode, Serial monitoring is allowed; however, Serial control is
not allowed except for use of the LRS (Local/Remote Status) and FPL (Front Panel Lockout)
commands/queries.
Ethernet Config: Gateway
Address MAC SNMP (◄ ►)
Select the parameter to configure – Gateway, Address, MAC, or SNMP – using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ Gateway

Ethernet IP Gateway:
192.168.001.002 (◄ ►,▲ ▼)
Edit the IP Gateway Address for the Ethernet M&C port for this unit. Use the ◄ ► arrow
keys to select the character to edit, then the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the value of the digit.
Press ENTER when done.

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ Address

Ether IP Address/Range:
192.168.001.002/24(◄ ►,▲ ▼)
Edit the IP Address and Range for the Ethernet M&C port for this unit. Use the ◄ ► arrow
keys to select the character to edit, then the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the value of the digit.
Press ENTER when done.

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ MAC

M&C Port MAC Address:
00-06-B0-00-01-06 (ENTER)
This read-only menu shows the unit MAC address. Once the MAC address has been noted,
exit this menu by pressing ENTER or CLEAR.

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ SNMP

SNMP: Communities Traps
(◄ ►, ENT)
Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to select the parameter to configure: Communities or Traps.

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ SNMP Æ Communities

SNMP Communities:
Read Write (◄ ►, ENT)
Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to select the community to edit: Read or Write.

5–9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ SNMP Æ Communities Æ Read

Read Community: (◄ ►,▲ ▼)
public

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ SNMP Æ Communities Æ Write

Write Community: (◄ ►,▲ ▼)
private
These preceding menus are used to edit the SNMP Read or Write Community strings.
Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to select the character to edit, then use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys
to edit that character. Note that only the first 20 characters on the bottom line are
available. All printable ASCII characters are available with the exception of the
backslash (ASCII code 92) and ~ (ASCII code 126). When the user has composed the
string, press ENTER – all trailing spaces are removed from the Community string
upon entry.

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ SNMP Æ Traps

Traps: Community Version
IP Addr#1 IP Addr#2 (◄ ►)
Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to select Community, Version, IP Addr#1, or IP Addr#2,
then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ SNMP Æ Traps Æ Community

Trap Community: (◄ ►,▲ ▼)
comtech
Use this menu to edit the SNMP Traps Community string. Only the first 20
characters on the bottom line are available. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to select the
character to edit, then use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the value of the character. All
printable ASCII characters are available with the exception of the backslash (ASCII
code 92) and ~ (ASCII code 126). When the user has composed the string, press
ENTER. All trailing spaces are removed from the Community string upon entering.

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ SNMP Æ Traps Æ Version

Trap Version:
SNMPv1 SNMPv2 (◄ ►,ENT)
Select the version (SNMPv1 or SNMPv2) using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press
ENTER.

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ SNMP Æ Traps Æ IP Addr#1

CONFIG: Remote ÆEthernet Æ SNMP Æ Traps Æ IP Addr#2
Trap IP #X: (◄ ►,▲ ▼)
000.000.000.000
Where ‘X’ indicates Trap IP #1 or Trap IP #2: These submenus are used to edit the
Trap Destination’s IP Addresses. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to select the character to

5–10
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

edit, then use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the value of the character. If both Trap IP
Addresses are 000.000.000.000, this designates the Traps as disabled.

5.3.1.2 CONFIG: All

All = Stop
(Stop, Start) (◄ ►,▲ ▼)
Use this menu to configure the unit, in a step-by-step process, by viewing each menu in succession.
Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to select and ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the various parameters. Press
ENTER to continue through all the configuration. Press CLEAR to discontinue.
The user is presented, in a sequential fashion, with every configuration option that is part of the
individual configuration menus.

5.3.1.3 CONFIG: Tx (Transmit)

Tx:FEC Mod Code Data Frq
On/Off Pwr Scram Clk Inv
Select FEC, Mod, Code, Data, Frq, On/Off, Pwr, Scram, Clk, or Inv using the ◄ ► arrow keys,
then press ENTER. The following table identifies each selection and its functional description;
detailed information on each selection’s nested menus are provided in the sections that follow.
(Forward Error Correction) Used to select the method of FEC used for transmission
FEC
(Viterbi, TPC, etc). FEC type takes the highest configuration priority.
(Modulation) Used to select the modulation type used for transmission (BPSK, QPSK, 8-
Mod
PSK, etc.). The choice of modulation will depend on the FEC type chosen.
(FEC Code Rate) Used to select the FEC Code Rate used for transmission (Rate 1/2,
Code Rate 3/4, etc.). The choice of Code Rate will depend on both the FEC type and Modulation
selected.
(Data Rate) Used to select the transmit data rate, in steps of 1 bps. The choice of data
Data rate will depend on the FEC type, Modulation, and Code Rate selected.

(Frequency) Used to select the transmit frequency, in steps of 100Hz.

Frq CDM-570L range: 950 MHz to 2000 MHz
CDM-570 range: 50 to 90 MHz and 100 to 180 MHz
On/Off Used to control the output state of the transmit carrier.
(Output Power level) Used to control the output level of transmit carrier, either manually,
Pwr
or using the AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) feature.
Scram (Scrambler) Used to select whether or not data scrambling is used.

(Clock Source) Used to select the clock source for transmission. This can be from the
Clk CDM-570L’s high stability internal source, from an external source, or from the distant-end
of the satellite link (loop timed).
(Inversion) Used to invert the sense of the transmitted spectrum, or to invert the sense of
Inv
the transmitted baseband data.

5–11
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

VERY IMPORTANT NOTE: The FEC type takes the highest configuration
priority, and the selection here depends on what, if any, optional plug-in
IMPORTANT codecs are installed. The choice of FEC type then determines what modulation
types, code rates, and data rates are available. The order of hierarchy is
therefore:
FEC type ► Modulation type ► Code Rate ► Data Rate
(Highest) (Lowest)
If the user changes a parameter within this hierarchy, the other parameters may
become invalid. In this case, the software will change those other parameters, in
order that the configuration remains valid at all times.
Example: Suppose the user has selected Viterbi + Reed-Solomon, QPSK, Rate
1/2. Now, the user changes the modulation type from QPSK to 16-QAM. In this
case, Rate 1/2 is no longer a valid code rate, and so it will be automatically
changed to the nearest valid code rate (Rate 3/4).

5.3.1.3.1 CONFIG: Tx Æ FEC (FEC Type)

Tx FEC: Viterbi Vit+RS
TCM+RS TPC Uncoded
IMPORTANT NOTE: All available choices are presented at all times. If an
option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow keys
IMPORTANT will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.

CASE RULES COMMENT

Viterbi ALWAYS VALID
Vit+RS
If the RS codec is installed
(Viterbi +Concatenated Reed-Solomon)
TCM+RS If the RS codec is installed
(Trellis Coded Modulation + AND 8-PSK FAST is Fixed at 8-PSK and Rate 2/3
Concatenated Reed-Solomon) enabled
TPC If the TPC codec is
(Turbo Product Codec) installed
Always valid - BPSK, Forces Code Rate to 1:1
Uncoded
QPSK and OQPSK only. (uncoded)

5–12
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.3.2 CONFIG: Tx Æ Mod (Modulation)

Modulation: BPSK QPSK
OQPSK 8-PSK 16-QAM 8-QAM
IMPORTANT NOTE: All available choices are presented at all times. If an
option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow keys
IMPORTANT will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.

CASE RULES
BPSK Valid for all FEC types except TCM+RS
QPSK Valid for all FEC types except TCM+RS
OQPSK Valid for all FEC types except TCM+RS
8-PSK Requires TCM+RS OR Turbo codec AND requires 8-PSK/ 8-QAM FAST option
8-QAM Requires Turbo codec AND requires 8-PSK/8-QAM FAST option
16-QAM Requires Viterbi+RS OR Turbo codec AND requires 16-QAM FAST option

5.3.1.3.3 CONFIG: Tx Æ Code (Code Rate)

Tx Code Rate: 5/16 21/44
1/2 2/3 3/4 7/8 0.95 Unc

IMPORTANT NOTE: All available choices are presented at all times. If an

option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow keys
IMPORTANT will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.

CASE RULES
5/16 Requires BPSK AND Turbo
21/44 Requires BPSK or QPSK/OQPSK AND Turbo
1/2 Valid for BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK
2/3 Requires TCM AND 8-PSK AND RS codec installed
3/4 Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK, 8-QAM and 16-QAM
7/8 Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK, 8-QAM and 16-QAM
0.95 Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK and 8-QAM
Unc (uncoded) Valid only for ‘Uncoded’ in FEC choice

5–13
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.3.4 CONFIG: Tx Æ Data (Data Rate)

Tx Dat Rate: 5000.000kbps
3000.000ksym (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)

The overall range of data rates is from 2.4 to 9980 kbps. The overall range of
symbol rates is from 4.8 to 3000 ksymbols/second. The minimum and
maximum data rates are dependent on modulation type and FEC encoder
IMPORTANT
rate. If user changes the modulation or FEC, and the currently selected data
rate can no longer be supported, then the data rate will be adjusted
automatically, up or down, keeping the symbol rate constant. The
bottom line of the display shows the symbol rate, based on FEC type,
modulation, FEC Code Rate, and Data Rate. The valid ranges of data rate
are shown in the table below.

If the current interface type is selected to be G.703, the data rate will be automatically set
to either 1544 kbps (T1) or 2048 kbps (E1).

FEC Type Modulation Code Rate Data Rate Range EDMAC limited?
BPSK Uncoded 4.8 kbps to 3.000 Mbps
None
QPSK/OQPSK Uncoded 9.6 kbps to 5.000 Mbps
BPSK Rate 1/2 2.4 kbps to 1.500 Mbps
Viterbi Rate 1/2 4.8 kbps to 3.000 Mbps
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 3/4 7.2 kbps to 4.500 Mbps
Rate 7/8 8.4 kbps to 5.250 Mbps
BPSK Rate 1/2 2.4 kbps to 1.363 Mbps
Rate 1/2 4.3 kbps to 2.727 Mbps
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 3/4 6.5 kbps to 4.091 Mbps
Viterbi + RS
Rate 7/8 7.5 kbps to 4.666 Mbps Yes – see note below
Rate 3/4 13.0 kbps to 4.000 Mbps
16-QAM
Rate 7/8 16.8 kbps to 4.666 Mbps
TCM + RS 8-PSK Rate 2/3 8.7 kbps to 4.400 Mbps
Rate 5/16 2.4 kbps to 0.937 Mbps
BPSK
Rate 21/44 2.4 kbps to 1.430 Mbps
Rate 21/44 4.8 kbps to 2.860 Mbps
Rate 3/4 7.2 kbps to 4.500 Mbps
QPSK/OQPSK
Rate 7/8 8.4 kbps to 5.250 Mbps
Turbo Rate 0.95 9.1 kbps to 5.666 Mbps
Rate 3/4 10.8 kbps to 6.750 Mbps
8-PSK/8-QAM Rate 7/8 13.6 kbps to 7.875 Mbps
Rate 0.95 15.3 kbps to 8.500 Mbps No
Rate 3/4 14.4 kbps to 9.000 Mbps
16-QAM
Rate 7/8 16.8 kbps to 9.980 Mbps

Important Note: Where noted in the table above, if EDMAC framing is employed, the upper data rate will
be reduced by 5% for data rates up to 2.048 Mbps, and by 1.6% for data rates above 2.048 Mbps, where
EDMAC2 framing is used, or for Rate 21/44 BPSK/QPSK Turbo, or Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo.

5–14
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

CONFIG: Tx Æ Data Rate (with WAN Adaptation)

If the interface has been selected as WAN Adaptation, the menu appears as follows:
TxDataRate: 1024.000kbps
1096.000ksym AR=1.000
The initial (default) data displayed in this menu will be the uncompressed data rate, as
displayed in the WAN Adaptation. AR is the Adaptation Ratio, and will initially show
1.00. Subsequent editing of the data rate downwards from the default value will result in
AR being modified (for example, to 0.865).
Note: Editing of the number of WAN Adaptation Tx channels will reset the Tx Data Rate
to the uncompressed value.

5.3.1.3.5 CONFIG: Tx Æ Frq (Frequency)

Tx IF Freq:1156.3456 MHz
(◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the Transmit IF Frequency. Select each digit of the frequency to be edited using the ◄ ►
arrow keys, then edit the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when done.
For the CDM-570L, the range of frequencies is from 950 to 2000 MHz, with a resolution of 100
Hz. Furthermore, if using the CONFIG: ODUÆBUC menus and the user has selected a BUC
LO frequency other than zero and defined whether the mix is high-side or low-side, the display
changes, as shown in the following example, to include the calculated Transmit RF frequency of
the modem/ BUC combination:
Tx IF Freq:1156.3456 MHz
RF=14156.3456(◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
As the Tx IF frequency is edited, the RF frequency will automatically be updated. However, for
the CDM-570, the range of frequencies permitted is from 50 to 90 MHz, and from 100 to
180MHz, with a resolution of 100 Hz, as per the following example:
Tx IF Freq:0085.1234 MHz
(◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Note the leading zeros, which are included to maintain compatibility with the CDM-570L software.

5.3.1.3.6 CONFIG: Tx Æ On/Off

Tx Output State: Off On
Rx-Tx Inhibit(◄ ►,ENTER)
Select On, Off, or Rx-Tx Inhibit by using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
When Rx-Tx Inhibit is selected, it will prevent the TX carrier from being transmitted, until the
demodulator is locked.
To avoid the Tx Carrier from being turned off when the demodulator loses lock for a very short
period of time, the demodulator must be unlocked continuously for a period of 10 seconds before
the transmit carrier is inhibited. This time interval is fixed and the user cannot change it.

5–15
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

IMPORTANT NOTE: Having this feature enabled does not affect the
internal IF loopback feature. However, be aware that if an external IF
loopback is attempted (connecting an external cable from the Tx IF output to
the Rx IF input), then this will not work! (The Tx carrier cannot turn on until
the demod is locked, and the demod cannot lock, because the TX output is
IMPORTANT off. The net result is that the demod will not lock, and the Tx carrier will not
turn on.)
USE THE RTI FEATURE WITH EXTREME CARE!

5.3.1.3.7 CONFIG: Tx Æ Pwr (Power)

Output Power Level Mode:
Manual AUPC (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select the output power level mode – either Manual or AUPC – then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Tx Æ Power Æ Manual

Tx Output Power Level:
-03.9 dBm (◄ ►,▲ ▼ ENT)
Edit the output power level using the ◄ ► and ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER.
For the CDM-570L, the range of output power is from 0 dBm to –40 dBm.
For the CDM-570, the range of output power is from 0 dBm to –25 dBm.

CONFIG: Tx Æ Power Æ AUPC

If selecting AUPC and ‘Framed’ mode is not selected, the menu displays as follows:
Warning! AUPC needs
Framed Mode (ENT or CLR)
Pressing either ENTER or CLEAR returns the user to the previous menu, with Manual
selected.
Otherwise, if selecting AUPC and ‘Framed’ mode is selected, the menu displays as follows:
Target-Eb/No Max-Range
Alarm DemodUnlock (◄ ►)
Select Target EbNo, Max-Range, Alarm or Demod-Unlock using the ◄ ► arrow keys,
then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Tx Æ Power Æ AUPC Æ Target-Eb/No

Remote Demod - Target
Min Eb/No:14.9dB (◄ ►,▲ ▼)
Edit the target Eb/No of the remote demod by using the ◄ ► and ▲ ▼ arrow keys,
then press ENTER. Default value is 3.0 dB, and upper limit is 14.9 dB.

5–16
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

CONFIG: Tx Æ Power Æ AUPC Æ Max-Range

Maximum-permitted Power
increase: 1dB (▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the maximum permitted increase in power level (when in AUPC mode) using the
▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER. Default value is 1dB, and upper limit is 9 dB.

CONFIG: Tx Æ Power Æ AUPC Æ Alarm

Action when max Tx Power
reached: None TxAlarm ◄ ►
Select the action that will occur if the AUPC causes the maximum output power level to
be reached – either None or TxAlarm – then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Tx Æ Power Æ AUPC Æ DemodUnlock

Action when Remote Demod
unlocks: Nom-Pwr Max-Pwr
Select the action that occurs if the remote demod is unlocked, then press ENTER. The
choices are: Nom-Pwr (Nominal Power), where the output level reverts to the nominal
power level set under Manual; or Max-Pwr (Maximum Power), where the output level
changes to the maximum permitted.

5.3.1.3.8 CONFIG: Tx Æ Scram (Scrambling)

Tx Scrambling:Default-On
IESS-315-On Off (◄ ►,ENT)
The options are:
• Default-On: The appropriate scrambler type is automatically selected
• IESS-315-On: This only applies when Turbo is installed and has been selected as the
FEC type
• Off: No scrambling
As before, the options are displayed all of the time, but the ◄ ► arrow keys will force the cursor
to skip past an unavailable choice.

The default scrambler types are:

Uncoded ITU V.35 (Intelsat variant)
IMPORTANT Viterbi, no framing: ITU V.35 (Intelsat variant)
Viterbi, EDMAC frame: Comtech proprietary, frame synchronized
Viterbi + RS or TCM/RS: Per IESS-308, frame synchronized
TPC: Comtech proprietary, frame synchronized
8-QAM TPC: ITU V.35 (Intelsat variant)

5–17
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.3.9 CONFIG: Tx Æ Clk (Clock Source)

Tx Clocking Mode: Int
Ext Loop-Timed (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Int, Ext, or Loop-Timed using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(Internal) Indicates that the CDM-570/570L will supply a clock to the DTE, which is
Int derived from its internal frequency reference. If the IP Module is installed and the
selected Data Interface is IP, then Internal is the only valid selection.
(External) Indicates that the CDM-570/570L expects to receive a clock from the
Ext DTE, to which the unit can phase-lock its internal circuits. (If G.703 is selected as
the Interface type, the software will force the clock mode to External.)
Indicates that the transmit timing source should be the receive clock, from the
direction of the satellite. This is a useful mode, in that no external connection needs
Loop-Timed to be made in this mode. If the demodulator loses lock, or if there is no receive
signal present, the internal clock is substituted. Note also that this mode will work
even with asymmetric Rx and Tx data rates.

5.3.1.3.10 CONFIG: Tx Æ Inv (Inversion Functions)

Tx Inversion functions:
Spectrum Data (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Spectrum or Data by using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Tx Æ Inv Æ Spectrum

Tx Spectrum: Normal
Inverted (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select Normal or Inverted by using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Tx Æ Inv Æ Data

Tx Data Sense: Normal
Inverted (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select Normal or Inverted by using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5–18
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.4 CONFIG: Rx (Receive)

Rx:FEC Dem Code Data Frq
Acq Descram Buf Inv EbNo
Select FEC, Dem, Code, Data, Frq, Acq, Descram, Buf, Inv, or EbNo using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then press ENTER. The following table identifies each selection and its functional description;
detailed information on each selection’s nested menus are provided in the sections that follow.

(Forward Error Correction) Used to select the method of FEC used for reception
FEC
(Viterbi, TPC, etc.). FEC type takes the highest configuration priority.

(Demodulation) Used to select the modulation type used for reception (BPSK,
Dem QPSK, 8-PSK, etc.). The choice of demodulation will depend on the FEC type
chosen.
(FEC Code Rate) Used to select the FEC Code Rate used for reception (Rate 1/2,
Code Rate 3/4, etc.). The choice of Code Rate will depend on both the FEC type and
Demodulation selected.
(Data Rate) Used to select the receive data rate, in steps of 1 bps. The choice of
Data
data rate will depend on the FEC type, Demodulation, and Code Rate selected.
(Frequency) Used to select the transmit frequency, in steps of 100Hz.
Frq CDM-570L range: 950 MHz to 2000 MHz
CDM-570 range: 50 to 90 MHz and 100 to 180 MHz
(Acquisition) Used to determine the amount of frequency uncertainty the
Acq
demodulator will search over in order to find and lock to an incoming carrier.

Descram (Descrambler) Used to select whether or not data descrambling is used.

(Buffer) Used to select whether or not the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is used,

Buf
and if so, the size of that buffer.
(Inversion) Used to invert the sense of the received spectrum, or to invert the
Inv
sense of the received baseband data.

EbNo (Eb/No Alarm threshold) Used to determine the Eb/No alarm threshold.

VERY IMPORTANT NOTE: The FEC type takes the highest configuration
priority, and the selection here depends on what, if any, optional plug-in
codecs are installed. The choice of FEC type then determines what
IMPORTANT
demodulation types, code rates, and data rates are available.
The order of hierarchy is therefore:
FEC type ► Demodulation type ► Code Rate ► Data Rate
(Highest) (Lowest)
If the user changes a parameter within this hierarchy, the other parameters may
become invalid. In this case, the software will change those other parameters, in
order that the configuration remains valid at all times.
Example: Suppose the user has selected Viterbi + Reed-Solomon, QPSK, Rate 1/2.
Now, the user changes the demodulation type from QPSK to 16-QAM. In this case,
Rate 1/2 is no longer a valid code rate, and so it will be automatically changed to the
nearest valid code rate (Rate 3/4).

5–19
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.4.1 CONFIG: Rx Æ FEC (FEC Type)

Rx FEC: Viterbi Vit+RS
TCM+RS TPC Uncoded

IMPORTANT NOTE: All available choices are presented at all times. If an

option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow keys
IMPORTANT will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.

CASE RULES COMMENT

Viterbi Always valid
Vit+RS
(Viterbi +Concatenated Reed- If the RS codec is installed
Solomon)
TCM+RS
If the RS codec is installed Fixed at 8-PSK and Rate
(Trellis Coded Modulation +
AND 8-PSK FAST is enabled 2/3
Concatenated Reed-Solomon)
TPC
If the TPC codec is installed
(Turbo Product Codec)
Always valid - BPSK, QPSK Forces Code Rate to 1:1
Uncoded
and OQPSK only. (uncoded)

5.3.1.4.2 CONFIG: Rx Æ Dem (Demodulation)

Demodulation: BPSK QPSK
OQPSK 8-PSK 8-QAM 16-QAM
IMPORTANT NOTE: All available choices are presented at all times. If an
option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow keys
IMPORTANT will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.

CASE RULES
BPSK Valid for all FEC types except TCM+RS
QPSK Valid for all FEC types except TCM+RS
OQPSK Valid for all FEC types except TCM+RS
8-PSK Requires TCM+RS OR Turbo codec AND requires 8-PSK/8-QAM FAST option
8-QAM Requires Turbo codec AND requires 8-PSK/8-QAM FAST option

16-QAM Requires Viterbi+RS OR Turbo codec AND requires 16-QAM FAST option

5–20
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.4.3 CONFIG: Rx Æ Code (Code Rate)

Rx Code Rate: 5/16 21/44
1/2 2/3 3/4 7/8 0.95 Unc

IMPORTANT NOTE: All available choices are presented at all times.

If an option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow
IMPORTANT keys will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.

CASE RULES
5/16 Requires BPSK AND Turbo
21/44 Requires BPSK or QPSK/OQPSK AND Turbo
1/2 Valid for BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK
2/3 Requires TCM AND 8-PSK AND RS codec installed
3/4 Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK, 8-QAM and 16-QAM
7/8 Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK, 8-QAM and 16-QAM
0.95 Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK and 8-QAM
Unc (uncoded) Valid only for ‘Uncoded’ in FEC choice

5–21
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.4.4 CONFIG: Rx Æ Data (Data Rate)

Rx Dat Rate:5000.000kbps
2500.000ksym (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)

Overall range of data rates is from 2.4 to 9980 kbps. Overall range of symbol
rates is 4.8 to 2500 ksymbols/second. Minimum and maximum data rates are
dependent on modulation type and FEC encoder rate. If the user changes
IMPORTANT
modulation or FEC, and the currently selected data rate can no longer be
supported, then the data rate will be adjusted automatically, up or down,
keeping the symbol rate constant. The bottom line of the display shows
symbol rate, based on FEC type, modulation, FEC Code Rate, and Data Rate.
If the current interface type is selected to be G.703, the data rate will be set to either 1544
(T1) or 2048 kbps (E1). This is as follows:
FEC Type Modulation Code Rate Data Rate Range EDMAC limited?
BPSK Uncoded 4.8 kbps to 3.000 Mbps
None
QPSK/OQPSK Uncoded 9.6 kbps to 5.000 Mbps
BPSK Rate 1/2 2.4 kbps to 1.500 Mbps
Rate 1/2 4.8 kbps to 3.000 Mbps
Viterbi
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 3/4 7.2 kbps to 4.500 Mbps
Rate 7/8 8.4 kbps to 5.250 Mbps
BPSK Rate 1/2 2.4 kbps to 1.363 Mbps
Rate 1/2 4.3 kbps to 2.727 Mbps
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 3/4 6.5 kbps to 4.091 Mbps
Viterbi + RS Yes – see Note 1
Rate 7/8 7.5 kbps to 4.666 Mbps
(below)
Rate 3/4 13.0 kbps to 4.000 Mbps
16-QAM
Rate 7/8 16.8 kbps to 4.666 Mbps
TCM + RS 8-PSK Rate 2/3 8.7 kbps to 4.400 Mbps
Rate 5/16 2.4 kbps to 0.937 Mbps
BPSK
Rate 21/44 2.4 kbps to 1.430 Mbps
Rate 21/44 4.8 kbps to 2.860 Mbps
Rate 3/4 7.2 kbps to 4.500 Mbps
QPSK/OQPSK
Rate 7/8 8.4 kbps to 5.250 Mbps
Turbo Rate 0.95 9.1 kbps to 5.666 Mbps
Rate 3/4 10.8 kbps to 6.750 Mbps
8-PSK/8-QAM Rate 7/8 13.6 kbps to 7.875 Mbps
Rate 0.95 15.3 kbps to 8.500 Mbps No
Rate 3/4 14.4 kbps to 9.000 Mbps
16-QAM
Rate 7/8 16.8 kbps to 9.980 Mbps
IMPORTANT NOTES:
1. Where noted in the table above, if EDMAC framing is employed, the
IMPORTANT
upper data rate will be reduced by 5% for data rates up to 2.048 Mbps,
and by 1.6% for data rates above 2.048 Mbps, where EDMAC2 framing is
used, or for Rate 21/44 BPSK/QPSK Turbo, or Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo.
2. When configured for WAN Adaptation, the Rx Data Rate should match
the distant-end data rate.

5–22
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.4.5 CONFIG: Rx Æ Frq (Frequency)

Rx IF Freq:1156.3456 MHz
(◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the Receive IF Frequency. Select each digit of the frequency to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow
keys. Edit the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER when done.
For the CDM-570L, the range of frequencies is from 950 to 2000 MHz, with a resolution of 100
Hz. Furthermore, if using the CONFIG: ODUÆLNB menus and the user has selected an LNB
frequency other than zero and defined whether the mix is high-side or low-side, the display
changes, as shown in the following example, to include the calculated Transmit RF frequency of
the modem/ LNB combination:
Rx IF Freq:1156.3456 MHz
RF=14156.3456(◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
As the Rx IF frequency is edited, the RF frequency will automatically be updated. However, for
the CDM-570, the range of frequencies permitted is from 50 to 90 MHz, and from 100 to
180MHz, with a resolution of 100 Hz, as follows:
Rx IF Freq:0075.9876 MHz
(◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Note the leading zeros, which are included to maintain compatibility with the CDM-570L software.

5.3.1.4.6 CONFIG: Rx Æ Acq (Acquisition Range)

Demod Acquisition Range:
+/- 010 kHz (▲ ▼,ENTER)
Edit the acquisition search range of the demodulator (the value entered here determines the
amount of frequency uncertainty the demodulator will search over in order to find and lock to an
incoming carrier). Edit the value by selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow keys,
then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Then press ENTER.
The value entered here determines the amount of frequency uncertainty the demodulator will
search over in order to find and lock to an incoming carrier.
In the CDM-570L, the range varies according to symbol rate:
• ±1 kHz to ±32 kHz for rates less than or equal to 625 ksymbols/sec
• ±1 kHz to ±200 kHz for rates greater than 625 ksymbols/sec
In the CDM-570, the range is ±1 kHz to ±32 kHz.

CAUTION MUST BE EXCERCISED at low data rates where the acquisition

range is greater than the symbol rate of the desired carrier. In this circumstance
IMPORTANT it may be possible to acquire lock on an adjacent (and hence undesired) carrier,
if that carrier has identical characteristics (modulation, FEC, code rate, data rate,
etc.) to the carrier of interest.

5–23
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.4.7 CONFIG: Rx Æ Descram (Descrambling)

Descrambling: Default-On
IESS-315-On Off (◄ ►,ENT)
The options are:
• Default-On: The appropriate descrambler type is automatically selected
• IESS-315-On: This only applies when Turbo is installed and has been selected as the
FEC type
• Off: No descrambling
As before, the options are displayed all of the time, but the ◄ ► arrow keys will force the cursor
to skip past an unavailable choice.
The default descrambler types are:
Uncoded: ITU V.35 (Intelsat variant)
IMPORTANT Viterbi, no framing: ITU V.35 (Intelsat variant)
Viterbi, EDMAC frame: Comtech proprietary, frame synchronized
Viterbi + RS or TCM/RS: Per IESS-308, frame synchronized
TPC: Comtech proprietary, frame synchronized

5.3.1.4.8 CONFIG: Rx Æ Buf (Buffer)

Edit the size, in bits, of the Plesiochronous/Doppler Buffer. The value is changed using the ▲ ▼
arrow keys. Press ENTER when done. Values of Disabled, +/- 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096,
8192, 16384 and 32768 bits are available.
When Disabled is selected, the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is disabled. The receive clock will
then be derived from the satellite signal, and will therefore be subject to clock offsets relative to the
local transmit clock. This is due in part to the originating clock being slightly different from the
local clock (a so-called plesiochronous offset), and to the motion of the satellite (a Doppler offset).
This menu choice is as follows:
Rx Buffer: Disabled (Loop
Timing Mode)(▲ ▼, ENTER)
If the IP Module is installed and the selected Data Interface is IP, the buffer is Disabled by default
and this is the only valid selection.
When a value other than ‘Disabled’ is selected, the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is enabled,
and set to the selected size as follows:
Rx Buffer: +/-32768 Bits
(13.1ms) (▲ ▼, ENTER)
The input to the buffer will be the signal from the satellite, with any clock offsets and jitter. The
output from the buffer will be derived from the local TRANSMIT clock. In this way, the receive
data will be perfectly synchronous with this local clock. The CDM-570/570L can be operated
with independent receive and transmit data rates. Even in this configuration, where Rx data rate < >
Tx data rate, the output clock for the buffer will be phase locked to the transmit clock.
While it is only possible to select the size in bits, the corresponding total buffer size is displayed
in ms (which will vary in inverse proportion to the data rate).

5–24
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

CONFIG: Rx Æ Buf (Buffer) (with WAN Adaptation)

If the interface has been selected as WAN Adaptation, the menu appears as follows:
Rx Buffer: 00064 Bytes
(0.25ms) (▲ ▼, ENTER)
On the top line, edit the number of Bytes using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, which will then also be
displayed in milliseconds on the second line.

5.3.1.4.9 CONFIG: Rx Æ Inv (Inversion Functions)

Rx Inversion functions:
Spectrum Data (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Spectrum or Data using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Rx Æ Inv Æ Spectrum

Rx Spectrum: Normal
Inverted (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select Normal or Inverted by using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Rx Æ Inv Æ Data

Rx Data Sense: Normal
Inverted (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select Normal or Inverted by using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5.3.1.4.10 CONFIG: Rx Æ Eb/No

Eb/No Alarm Point:
02.0 dB (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENTER)
Edit the Eb/No alarm point by selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then
changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when done.
The range of values is from 0.1 to 16.0 dB. The user may select a value here, and if the Eb/No
falls below this value, a receive traffic fault will be generated.

5.3.1.5 CONFIG: CEx (G.703 Clock Extension)

G703 Clock Extend: None
TxLock RxEnable (◄ ►,ENT)
Selecting TxLock or RxEnable displays the following submenu:
Clk Extend Interface: T1
E1Bal E1Unbal (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select the appropriate G.703 Clock Extension interface – T1, E1Bal, or E1Unbal – then press
ENTER.

5–25
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.6 CONFIG: Frame (Framing Mode)

Framing Mode: Unframed
EDMAC EDMAC-2 (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Unframed, EDMAC, or EDMAC-2 using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5.3.1.6.1 CONFIG: Frame Æ Unframed

No framing is selected. No overhead is added, and the unit will be compatible with other
manufacturer’s equipment, when operating in a ‘standard’ configuration.

5.3.1.6.2 CONFIG: Frame Æ EDMAC or EDMAC-2

Comtech EF Data’s proprietary framing is added. The framing permits the bi-directional passing
of M&C and AUPC data between local and distant-end units.
EDMAC is backwards compatible with the CDM-500, CDM-550, CDM-550T, CDM-600 and
CDM-600L. EDMAC-2 is a reduced overhead version of EDMAC, and is not completely
backwards compatible with the modems listed above, but is in some modes (for example, in
Turbo BPSK modes and at rates above 2.048 Mbps).
Selecting either mode displays the following submenu:
Framing mix: AUPC-Only
AUPC+EDMAC (◄ ►,ENTER)
Note: When framing is enabled (either EDMAC or EDMAC-2), AUPC is automatically enabled
but the specific EDMAC feature (passing M&C data from a local to a distant-end unit) needs to
enabled here.
Select either AUPC-Only (default) or AUPC+EDMAC using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER.
When AUPC-Only is selected, none of the EDMAC features are available, even though framing
is still enabled.
When AUPC+EDMAC is selected, the user is further prompted to select whether the unit is an
EDMAC master, or an EDMAC slave:

CONFIG: Frame Æ EDMAC or EDMAC-2 Æ AUPC+EDMAC

EDMAC Mode:
Master Slave (◄ ►,ENTER)
An EDMAC Master is a unit which is local to the M&C computer, and which passes
messages, via the overhead, to a distant-end modem.
An EDMAC Slave is a unit that is not local to the M&C computer, which is at the distant-
end of a satellite link.
Select either Master or Slave using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5–26
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

If Master is selected, the following submenu is displayed:

Distant-end Base Address
0240 (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENTER)
Edit the address of the distant-end modem to which this unit will pass messages by
selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then changing the value of the
digit by using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Then press ENTER.
There is a restriction on values which can be entered here; they may only be entered in
increments of 10. This is automatically taken care of; the user may not edit the last digit
of the address. This has been implemented so that a single Master may pass messages for
up to 10 devices at the distant end. The valid range of addresses is from 10 to 9990.
If Slave is selected, then the following submenu is displayed:
Address of this Slave
Unit: 0241 (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the address of this Slave unit by selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ►
arrow keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Then press
ENTER.
The valid range of addresses is from 1 to 9999, although ‘base 10' values will be
automatically skipped. The Slave EDMAC address will always end in ‘1’.
Remember that this is a unit which is intended to be located at the distant-end of a link,
and will therefore be under the control of a Master at the other end. This is the equivalent
of putting the unit into Remote Control mode; no local control is possible.

5.3.1.7 CONFIG: Intfc (Interface)

Interface: RS422 IP V.35
RS232 G.703 WAd (◄ ► ENT)
Select RS422 (EIA-530), IP, V.35, RS232, G.703 , or Wad using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then
press ENTER.
Note: The WAd (E1 RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation) option will be available only if the
E1 RAN / WAN Adaptation (WAd) Processor Board is installed.

5–27
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.7.1 CONFIG: Intfc Æ RS422 or V.35 or RS232

RTS/CTS Operation: (▲ ▼)
Loop,RTS Controls Tx Out
If RS422, V.35, or RS232 are selected, the preceding submenu is displayed. Change the option
using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER. The following options are available:
RTS and CTS are looped, so that CTS echoes the state of RTS,
RTS/CTS Loop, No Action
but RTS does not control the ON/OFF state of the carrier.
RTS and CTS are looped, so that CTS echoes the state of RTS,
and RTS controls the ON/OFF state of the carrier (in other
Loop, RTS Controls Tx Out
words, the modem will not bring up its TX carrier until RTS is
asserted).

Ignore RTS, Assert CTS RTS is ignored, and CTS is asserted unconditionally.

If the 1:N switch on the rear panel is active, then RTS/CTS are
N/A - 1:N system in use
not supported; the pins are assigned to redundancy functions.

5.3.1.7.2 CONFIG: Intfc Æ IP

If the optional IP module is installed, and IP is selected by pressing ENTER, all of the rear panel
electrical interfaces are disabled, and all data for Tx and Rx is routed to and from the modem
board to the IP module. The user is returned to the previous menu level.

5.3.1.7.3 CONFIG: Intfc Æ G.703

G.703 Type: T1
E1-Bal E1-Unbal(◄ ►,ENT)
Select T1, E1-Bal, or E1-Unbal using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Intfc Æ G.703 Æ T1

T1 Configuration: Length
Line-Code (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select Length or Line Code using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Intfc Æ G.703 Æ T1 Æ Length

T1 Line Length:
000-133 feet (▲ ▼,ENTER)
Edit the line length using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER. Values will toggle
between the following values: 0-133, 133-266, 266-399, 399-533 and 533-655 feet.

CONFIG: Intfc Æ G.703 Æ T1 Æ Line-Code

T1 Line Code (B8ZS):
On Off(AMI) (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5–28
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

CONFIG: Intfc Æ G.703 Æ T1 Æ E1-Bal or E1-Unbal

E1 Line Code (HDB3):
On Off (◄ ►,ENTER)
Selecting either E1-Bal or E1-Unbal displays the preceding submenu. Select On or
Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5.3.1.7.4 CONFIG: Intfc Æ WAd (E1 RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation)

WanAdaptation: TS-Config
Bal/Unb LineCode (◄ ►)
Select TS-Config, Bal/Unb, or LineCode using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Intfc Æ WAd Æ TS-Config

WanAdaptation TS-Config:
TxTS RxTS Loop (◄ ►)
Select TxTS, RxTS, or Loop using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Intfc Æ WAd Æ TS-Config Æ TxTS or RxTS

Tx: Number Of Channels
Channel/TS-Assign (◄ ►)
Rx: Number Of Channels
Channel/TS-Assign (◄ ►)
For either, select NumberOfChannels or Channel/TS-Assign using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Intfc Æ WAd Æ TS-Config Æ TxTS or RxTS Æ

NumberOfChannels
Tx Channels: 05 (▲ ▼)
Nominal D.R.=0320.0 kbps

Rx Channels: 05 (▲ ▼)
Nominal D.R.=0320.0 kbps
For either, on the top line, edit the number of channels – which dictate the data rate –
using the ▲▼arrow keys, then press ENTER.
The permitted number of channels is 1–16, corresponding to data rates of xx–1024
kbps.
The nominal data rate is shown on the lower line for informational purposes only.

5–29
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

CONFIG: Intfc Æ WAd Æ TS-Config Æ TxTS or RxTS Æ

Channel/TS-Assign
Ch/TS: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16(◄ ►)
For either, select the Channel for assigning a timeslot using the ◄ ► arrow keys –
the cursor may only be positioned on valid channel numbers – then press ENTER.
One a valid channel is selected, the display changes to allow the user to edit the
timeslot:
Select Timeslot for
Channel 02 TS=00(▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the timeslot using the ▲▼arrow keys, then press ENTER. The permitted
timeslot settings are 0–31.

CONFIG: Intfc Æ WAd Æ TS-Config Æ Loop

WAd E1 Loop:
No-Loop Insert-Loop (◄ ►)
Select No-Loop or Insert-Loop using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
When Insert-loop is selected, the Insert de-multiplexer uses Tx Terrestrial data/clock
(E1) as the source for inserts. Received satellite data is inserted into the Tx Terrestrial
data stream, which is then output to the Rx Terrestrial data interface. Also, Tx Terrestrial
clock is used as the buffer reference source.

CONFIG: Intfc Æ WAd Æ Bal/Unb (Balanced/Unbalanced)

WAd E1 Bal/Unbal:
Balanced Unbalanced (◄ ►)
Select Balanced or Unbalanced using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

CONFIG: Intfc Æ WAd Æ LineCode

WAd E1 Line Code:
On (HDB3) Off (AMI) (◄ ►)
Select On (HDB3) or Off (AMI) using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5–30
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.8 CONFIG: Ref (Reference)

IMPORTANT NOTE: The CDM-570/570L can accept an externally supplied

frequency reference, using the BNC connector on the rear panel. However, rather
IMPORTANT than bypassing the internal reference, and substituting the external signal, the
internal reference is used in a low-bandwidth (~ 2Hz) phase-locked loop (PLL), so
the CDM-570/570L actually phase locks to the reference external signal. There are
two distinct advantages to this scheme:
1. It permits hitless switching between the operation of internal and external
reference. There are no sudden discontinuities of frequency and phase in the
transmitted carrier.
2. Due to the very low bandwidth of the PLL, it permits the external reference to
have an inferior phase noise characteristic than the internal reference of the
CDM-570/570L. The narrow loop essentially ‘cleans up’ the external signal. This
is particularly important if the CDM-570L is being used to supply a 10MHz
reference to a BUC or LNB.
Edit the configuration and value of the frequency reference by changing the value using the ▲ ▼
arrow keys. Press ENTER when done. Values of Internal 10 MHz, External 01 MHz, External
02 MHz, External 05 MHz, External 10 MHz, and External 20 MHz, are available.
Two examples are as follows:
Frequency Reference:
Internal 10 MHz(▲ ▼,ENT)
Frequency Reference:
Internal 05 MHz(▲ ▼,ENT)

5.3.1.9 CONFIG: Mask

Alarm Mask: Transmit
Receive Ref BUC LNB (◄ ►)
Select Transmit, Receive, Reference, BUC (CDM-570L only), or LNB (CDM-570L only) using
the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5.3.1.9.1 CONFIG: Mask Æ Transmit

Tx Alarm Mask: Tx-FIFO
G703BPV TxAIS G703LOS ◄ ►
Select Tx-FIFO, G703BPV, Tx-AIS, or G703LOS using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER.
For each of these choices, a submenu similar to the following is displayed:
Tx-FIFO Alarm:
Active Masked (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Active or Masked by using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5–31
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

If the user selects Active, then a Transmit Traffic fault will be generated whenever the
transmitter sees that the transmit FIFO has slipped.
Similarly, the user can mask a G.703 BPV or TxAIS alarm.
If the user selects Masked, no alarm will be generated.

5.3.1.9.2 CONFIG: Mask Æ Receive

Rx Alarm Mask: AGC Eb/No
Rx-AIS Buf WAd (◄ ►,ENT)
Select AGC, Eb/No, Rx-AIS, Buf (Buffer), or WAd by using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER.
For each of these choices, a submenu similar to the following is displayed:
AGC Alarm:
Active Masked (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Active or Masked by using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If the user selects Active, then a Receive Traffic fault will be generated whenever the
demodulator sees that the composite input level being applied will cause compression in the IF
stages, and hence degrade the performance of the demodulator.
Similarly, the user can mask an Eb/No, Rx-AIS, Buf (Buffer), or WAd alarm.
If the user selects Masked, no alarm will be generated.

5.3.1.9.3 CONFIG: Mask Æ Ref

Reference Alarm:
Active Masked (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Active or Masked using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If the user selects Active, then a Transmit Traffic fault is generated whenever the unit sees that:
a) External Reference is selected, and
b) there is no signal activity at the External Reference port.
If the user selects Masked, no alarm will be generated.

5.3.1.9.4 CONFIG: Mask Æ BUC (CDM-570L ONLY)

BUC Alarm:
Active Masked (◄ ►,ENT)
On the CDM-570L only, this submenu is used to set the alarm for the BUC (Block Up
Converter), if connected, as Active or Masked.
Refer to Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU (BUC, LNB) OPERATION for complete details about
this modem-specific menu branch.

5–32
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.1.9.5 CONFIG: Mask Æ LNB (CDM-570L ONLY)

LNB Alarm:
Active Masked (◄ ►,ENT)
On the CDM-570L only, this submenu is used to set the alarm for the LNB (Low-Noise Block
Down Converter), if connected, as Active or Masked.
Refer to Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU (BUC, LNB) OPERATION for complete details
about this modem-specific menu branch.

5.3.1.9.6 CONFIG: ODU (CDM-570L ONLY)

ODU (Outdoor Unit):
BUC LNB (◄ ►,ENTER)
On the CDM-570L only, this menu branch is used to configure a BUC (Block Up Converter) or
LNB (Low-Noise Block Down Converter), if connected.
Refer to Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU (BUC, LNB) OPERATION for complete details about
this modem-specific menu branch.

5.3.2 SELECT: Monitor Menus

MONITOR:Alarms Stats
Event-Log Parameters
Select Alarms, Stats, Event-Log, or Parameters using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER.

5.3.2.1 MONITOR: Alarms

Live Alarms:Unit Receive
Transmit ODU (◄ ►,ENTER)

IMPORTANT NOTE: The CDM-570L uses a system of Fault Prioritization. In

each category of fault, only the highest priority fault is displayed. For instance,
if the demodulator is unlocked, it is irrelevant if there are other receive faults
IMPORTANT
present. If the demodulator then locks, but there is a fault of a lower priority
present, this will then be displayed. This also holds true for the faults reported
via the remote control. This system cuts down significantly on unwanted and
irrelevant fault reporting.
For CDM-570 modems, or CDM-570L modems without ODUs, select Unit, Receive, Transmit
using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
For CDM-570L modems with ODUs, refer to Appendix L: CDM-570L ODU (BUC, LNB)
OPERATION for details on selecting this submenu.

5–33
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

The comprehensive list of prioritized faults for Unit, Receive, and Transmit is as follows (refer to
Appendix L for the listing of prioritized ODU faults):
LISTING OF PRIORITIZED FAULTS
Unit Faults Rx Traffic Status Tx Traffic Status
1) Power supply fault, +5 volts 1) Demodulator unlocked 1) No clock from terrestrial interface
2) Power supply fault, +12 volts 2) AGC Alarm - signal out of range 2) Tx FIFO slip
3) Power supply fault, –5 volts 3) RS Frame sync alarm 3) Loss of External Reference
4) Power supply fault, +23 volts 4) EDMAC Frame sync alarm 4) AUPC upper limit reached
5) Power supply fault, –12 volts 5) Buffer Underflow 5) AIS detected on incoming data
6) Tx synthesizer lock 6) Buffer Overflow (from terrestrial direction)
7) Rx 1st LO synthesizer lock 7) Eb/No alarm 6) WAd E1 Sync loss
8) Rx 2nd LO synthesizer lock 8) WAd Idle Detected 7) Bipolar violation on G.703 interface
9) Reference PLL lock 9) WAd DFFL Overflow
10) WAd HW fault 10) WAd Rx Sync Loss
11) IP Module fault 11) WAd Buffer Syn Error
12) EEPROM checksum error 12) AIS detected on incoming data
(from satellite direction)

5.3.2.1.1 MONITOR: Alarms Æ Unit

Unit Fault: -12 Volt PSU
is Under-Voltage (ENT)
This screen indicates if there are any Unit Faults. If not, it displays ‘None’. Press ENTER to
return to the previous menu.

5.3.2.1.2 MONITOR: Alarms Æ Receive (Receive Traffic Status)

Rx Traffic: AGC Alarm -
Reduce Input level (ENT)
This screen indicates if there are any Receive Traffic Faults. If not, it displays ‘None’. Press
ENTER to return to the previous menu.

5.3.2.1.3 MONITOR: Alarms Æ Transmit (Transmit Traffic Status)

Tx Traffic: No Tx Clock
from Terrestrial (ENT)
This screen indicates if there are any Transmit Traffic Faults. If not, it displays ‘None’. Press
ENTER to return to the previous menu.

5.3.2.2 MONITOR: Stats (Link Statistics)

Link Statistics: View
Clear-All Config(◄ ►,ENT)
Select View, Clear-All, or Config using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5–34
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.2.2.1 MONITOR: Stats Æ View

Sta198:02/11/02 10:37:32
16.0, 16.0, 9.0, 9.0(▲ ▼)
The user may scroll backwards or forwards through the entries in the statistics log by using the ▲
▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu. The statistics log can
store up to 255 events.
The top line of the display indicates the log entry number, and the time and date of the entry.

Note that in accordance with international convention, the date is shown in

DAY-MONTH-YEAR format.
IMPORTANT

The bottom line of the display shows the statistics data which has been measured and recorded.
The meaning and format of the numbers is as follows:
Minimum Eb/No, Average Eb/No, Maximum TPLI, Average TPLI (where TPLI means Transmit
Power Level Increase, if AUPC is enabled).
The user defines a measurement interval (see MONITOR: Stats Æ Config) and during this
interval, Eb/No and TPLI are observed, at a one second rate. At the end of this period, the average
Eb/No is calculated and recorded, and the minimum value seen in the interval. Similarly, the
average TPLI is calculated, along with the highest value seen in the interval.
Note: If the demod has lost lock during the measurement interval, the minimum Eb/No will show
‘Loss’ rather than indicate a value. However, the average value (while the demod was locked) will
still be calculated and shown. If, on the other hand, the demodulator has been unlocked for the
entire measurement interval, the average Eb/No will also show ‘Loss’. (The display will show
‘Loss, Loss’.)
If the measured values are greater than, or equal to 16.0 dB, the display will show 16.0 dB.
If AUPC is not enabled, the values of maximum and average TPLI will both show ‘Off'.
Examples: 08.0, 13.5, 2.5, 1.8 means:
Minimum Eb/No observed in the measurement interval = 8.0 dB
Average Eb/No observed in the measurement interval = 13.5 dB
Maximum TPLI observed in the measurement interval = 2.5 dB
Average TPLI observed in the measurement interval = 1.8 dB
Loss, 04.5, Off, Off means:
There was a loss of demod lock during the measurement interval
Average Eb/No observed in the measurement interval = 4.5 dB
Maximum TPLI observed in the measurement interval = AUPC disabled
Average TPLI observed in the measurement interval = AUPC disabled

5.3.2.2.2 MONITOR: Stats Æ Clear-All

Clear all Stored Stats?
No Yes (▲ ▼, ENTER)
Choose No or Yes using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER. If Yes is selected, the Link
Statistics log is cleared, and the user is taken directly back to the previous menu.

5–35
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.2.2.3 MONITOR: Stats Æ Config (Configure)

Stats Logging Interval:
Disabled (▲ ▼,ENTER)
The user is prompted to enter the logging interval (the period of time over which the statistics is
measured) by using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when done.
The user can choose Disabled, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90 minutes. Once set, the display
reflects the chosen logging interval:
Stats Logging Interval:
30 minutes (▲ ▼,ENTER)

5.3.2.3 MONITOR: Event-Log (Stored Events)

Stored Events: View
Clear-All (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select View or Clear-All using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5.3.2.3.1 MONITOR: Event-LogÆ View

Log23: 30/11/02 10:37:32
Fault - Demod Lock (▲ ▼)
The user may scroll backwards or forwards through the entries in the event log by using the ▲ ▼
arrow keys. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.
The event log can store up to 255 events. When a fault condition occurs, it is time-stamped and
put into the log.
Similarly, when the fault condition clears, this is also recorded, as shown per the following
example:
Log240:30/11/97 10:37:35
Clear - Demod Lock (▲ ▼)

5.3.2.4 MONITOR: Event-Log Æ Clear-All

Clear all Stored Events?
No Yes (▲ ▼, ENTER)
Choose No or Yes using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER. If Yes is selected, the event log
is cleared, and the user is taken directly back to the previous menu. However, if there are faults
present on the unit at this time, they will be re-time-stamped, and new log entries will be generated.

Note that in accordance with international convention, the date is shown in

DAY-MONTH-YEAR format.
IMPORTANT

5–36
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.2.5 MONITOR: Parameters

PARAMETERS: Rx-Params
WAd-Params AUPC ODU
For CDM-570 modems or CDM-570L modems without ODUs, select Rx-Params,
WAd-Params, or AUPC using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
For CDM-570L modems with ODUs, refer to Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU (BUC, LNB)
OPERATION for complete details on selecting the ODU submenu.

5.3.2.5.1 MONITOR: Parameters Æ Rx-Params (Receive Parameters)

EbNo=05.7dB BER=3.4E-9
∆F=+11.7k Buf=50 RSL=-64
If the demodulator is locked, the following information is displayed:

This shows the value of Eb/No calculated by the demodulator. The value referred to here
Eb/N0
is the energy per information bit (Ebi), divided by the noise spectral density (No).

BER This is an estimate of the corrected BER.

∆F The frequency offset of the received carrier, in kHz, with a displayed resolution of 100 Hz.

(Buffer fill state) This shows the fill state (in percent), of the receive Buffer. After a reset, it
Buf will read 50. A value <50 indicates that the buffer is emptying, and >50 indicates that it is
filling.

(Receive Signal Level) A value in dBm, indicating the input power of the desired carrier,
RSL as seen by the demodulator. If the signal level is below the AGC range of the demod, this
will display RSL <-99.

Otherwise, if the demodulator is not locked, the message ‘Demod: Not Locked’ appears but the
screen continues to display the receive signal level, as shown in the following example:
Demod: Not Locked
RSL=-64
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

5.3.2.5.2 MONITOR: Parameters Æ WAd-Params (WAN Adapation Parameters)

WAd: AdaptRate=X.XXX

This screen displays the transmit channel adaptation ratio (where X.XXX = data out / data in).
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

5–37
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.2.6 MONITOR: Parameters Æ AUPC

If selecting AUPC, and the modem is not in ‘Framed’ mode, the menu displays as follows:
Framing is required for
AUPC Monitor (ENT or CLR)
Otherwise, if the user selects AUPC and the modem is in Framed mode, the menu displays as
follows:
AUPC:Remote EbNo =14.0dB
TX Power Increase =2.2dB
The top line displays the value of Eb/No of the demodulator at the distant end of the satellite link.
The Eb/No will display Unlock if the remote demod is unlocked.
The bottom line shows how much the AUPC system has increased the output power. If AUPC is
not enabled, the value of Tx Power Increase will show as 0.0 dB.
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

5.3.2.7 MONITOR: Parameters Æ ODU (CDM-570L ONLY)

Outdoor Unit Monitor:
BUC LNB (▲ ▼,ENTER)
On the CDM-570L only, this menu branch is used to monitor a BUC (Block Up Converter) or
LNB (Low-Noise Block Down Converter), if connected.
Refer to Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU (BUC, LNB) OPERATION for complete details about
this modem-specific menu branch.
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

5–38
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.3 SELECT: TEST Menus

TEST: Norm IF> Dig> I/O>
RF> Tx-CW Tx-1,0(◄ ►,ENT)
Select Norm, IF Loop, Dig Loop, I/O Loop, RF Loop, Tx-CW, or Tx-1,0 using the ◄ ►
arrow keys, then press ENTER.
This menu branch is used to select the following test modes:
(Normal) This clears any test modes or loopbacks, and places the unit back into an
Norm
operational state.
(IF Loopback) This test mode invokes an internal IF loop. This is a particularly useful
feature, as it is used to perform a quick diagnostic test without having to disturb
external cabling. Furthermore, all of the receive configuration parameters are
IF Loop
temporarily changed to match those of the transmit side. When Norm is again
selected, all of the previous values are restored. During an IF Loop, the Tx carrier
continues to be transmitted. See Figure 5-4.
3

(Digital Loopback) This test mode invokes a digital loopback, which loops data at the
output of the framer/scrambler on the transmit side, back into the
Dig Loop
deframer/descrambler on the receive side. If concatenated Reed-Solomon FEC is
being used, this is also included in the digital loop. See Figure 5-4.
4

(Inward/Outward loopback) This test mode invokes two distinct loopbacks. The first
of these is the Inward Loop, which takes data being received from the satellite
I/O Loop direction, and passes it directly to the modulator. Simultaneously, the Outward Loop is
invoked, whereby data being fed to the transmit data interface is routed directly back
out of the receive data interface. See Figure 5-4.
5

(RF Loopback) This test mode is almost identical to the IF loop mode. All of the
receive configuration parameters are temporarily changed to match those of the
RF Loop transmit side, however, no internal connection is made. This is useful for performing a
satellite loopback. When Norm is again selected, all of the previous values are
restored.
(Transmit CW) This is a test mode which forces the modulator to transmit a pure
TX-CW
carrier (unmodulated). Used for measuring phase noise.
(Transmit an alternating 1,0,1,0 pattern) This is a test mode which forces the
modulator to transmit a carrier modulated with an alternating 1,0,1,0 pattern, at the
currently selected symbol rate. This causes two discrete spectral lines to appear,
spaced at +/- half the symbol rate, about the carrier frequency. This mode is used to
TX-1,0
check the carrier suppression of the Modulator. If OQPSK is selected as the
modulation type, the test will produce a spectral pattern suitable for the measurement
of SSB rejection – useful in determining the phase and amplitude accuracy of the
modulator.

5–39
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure 5-4. Loopback Modes

5–40
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.4 SELECT: Info Menus

INFO:All Tx Rx Buf Frame
Intfc Rem Msk Ref ID 1:1
The Info menu branch displays information on the current configuration of the unit. Select All,
Tx, Rx, Buf, Frame, Intfc, Rem, Mask, Red, ID, or 1:1 by using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then
press ENTER.

5.3.4.1 INFO: All

All = Start
(Stop, Start) (▲ ▼,ENTER)
Note: This display is read-only. The user may only view the configurations - no editing is
possible.
Use this menu to view the configuration of the unit, in a step-by-step process, by scrolling
through each menu in succession. Use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to select between Stop and Start.
Press ENTER to continue through all the configurations.
To discontinue: Press CLEAR, use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to select Stop, then press ENTER.

5.3.4.2 INFO: Tx (Transmit)

Tx:1140.000 5000.000 TUR
8P 0.95 S EXT -20.0 ON I
The Transmit information provided here is displayed as follows:
Top line:
o Transmit Frequency and Data Rate (NOTE: Due to space limitations, the
resolution of displayed frequency is limited to 1 kHz, and data rate to 10 bps)
o FEC Encoder type (VIT = Viterbi, VRS=Viterbi + Reed-Solomon, TCM = Trellis
Coded + Reed-Solomon, TUR = Turbo, UNC = uncoded)

Bottom line:
o Modulation type (Q = QPSK, OQ= OQPSK, B = BPSK, 8P = 8-PSK, 8Q = 8QAM,
16=16-QAM)
o Code Rate (Unc = Uncoded, 2144 = 21/44, then 5/16, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 7/8, 0.95)
o Scrambler state (S = Scrambler on, N = Scrambler off, I = IESS-315 On)
o Clocking Mode (INT = internal, EXT = external, LOP = loop, CXE = internal &
Clock Extend TxLock E1 mode, CXT = internal & Clock Extend TxLock T1 mode)
o Output power level
o Transmit output state (ON = on, OF = off, EO= external off, RT= Rx-Tx Inhibit)
o TSI state (I = Transmit Spectral Inversion on, N = off)

5–41
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.4.3 INFO: Rx (Receive)

Rx:1140.000 5000.000 TUR
8P 0.95 D BUF +/-32k I
The Receive information provided here is displayed as follows:
Top line:
o Receive Frequency and Data Rate (NOTE: Due to space limitations, the resolution
of displayed frequency is limited to 1 kHz, and data rate to 10Hz,)
o FEC Decoder type (VIT = Viterbi, VRS=Viterbi + Reed-Solomon, TCM = Trellis
Coded + Reed-Solomon, TUR = Turbo, UNC = uncoded)
Bottom line:
o Demodulation type (Q = QPSK, OQ= OQPSK, B = BPSK, 8P = 8-PSK, 8Q =
8QAM, 16=16-QAM).
o Code Rate (Unc = Uncoded, 2144 = 21/44, then 5/16, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 7/8, 0.95)
o Descrambler state (D = Descrambler on, N = Descrambler off, I = IESS-315 On)
o Clocking Mode (SAT = buffer disabled, BUF = buffer enabled, CXE = internal &
Clock Extend RxEnable E1 mode, CXT = internal & Clock Extend RxEnable T1
mode)
o Demod Sweep Acquisition range
o RSI state (I = Receive Spectral Inversion on, N = off)

5.3.4.4 INFO: Buf (Buffer)

Buffer: Enabled (Tx=Rx)
Size:+/-04096 bits (ENT)
This displays if the buffer is enabled or disabled, shows the exact clocking mode (Tx=Rx, or Tx< >
Rx), and the buffer size. Press ENTER to return to the previous menu.

5.3.4.5 INFO: Frame (Framing and EDMAC)

This screen displays EDMAC mode and if the unit is EDMAC Master or Slave, with the
appropriate address. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu. Examples are as
follows:
Framing: Disabled
(ENTER or CLEAR)
Framing:AUPC-Only,EDMAC2
(ENTER or CLEAR)
Framing: AUPC+EDMAC2
Master,0240 (ENT or CLR)
Framing: AUPC+EDMAC
Slave, 0241 (ENT or CLR)

5–42
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.4.6 INFO: Intfc (Interface)

This screen displays details of the electrical interface type of the main data port. If RS422, V.35
or RS232 is selected, the menu will also indicate the operation of RTS/CTS. Press ENTER or
CLEAR to return to the previous menu. Examples are as follows:
Interface: RS422 (ENT)
RTS/CTS Loop, No Action
Interface:G.703 E1-Unbal
HDB3 (ENTER or CLEAR)
Interface: G.703 T1 B8ZS
533-655 feet(ENT or CLR)
Interface: IP (ENT)
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet

5.3.4.7 INFO: Rem (Remote Control)

This screen displays if the unit is in Local or Remote mode; gives details of the electrical
interface type selected; the unit’s address; and the baud rate selected, etc. Examples are as
follows:
Remote M&C: Monitor Only
(Local Control only)
Remote M&C: RS485-4Wire
Address: 0001 19200 Baud
Remote M&C: 100BaseTx
IP Addr: 255.255.255.255
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

5.3.4.8 INFO: Msk (Alarm Mask)

Mask: FIFO BPV TAIS RAIS
AGC EbNo BUF Ref BUC LNB
This screen displays, in the same format as the CONFIG:Mask submeny, which alarms are currently
masked. If an alarm is not masked, the relevant screen position is replaced with a blank space.
Note: When in G.703 Clock Extend Mode, BPV is replaced with LOS to indicate the alarm mask of
G703 Loss of Signal.

5.3.4.9 INFO: Ref (Frequency Reference)

Frequency Reference:
Internal 10 MHz (ENTER)
This screen displays the source of the frequency reference for the CDM-570/570L.

5–43
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.4.10 INFO: ID (Circuit ID)

Circuit ID: (ENTER)
24 CHARACTER TST MESSAGE
This screen displays the user-defined Circuit ID string, which is entered via the UTIL: ID
submenu. Press ENTER to return to the previous menu.

5.3.4.11 INFO: 1:1 (1:1 Redundancy)

Redundancy State:Standby
Serial 1:1 Link: Active
This screen displays:
• Redundancy status – Either Online or Standby (1:1 or 1:N)
• 1:1 link status – The status of the serial link between the two units, either Active or Idle,
is indicated.
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

5.3.5 SELECT: Save/Load Menus

Save/Load Configuration:
Save Load (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select Save or Load using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. The submenus that follow
are used to store or load up to 10 different modem configurations (0 through 9) in the non-
volatile memory of the modem.

5.3.5.1 Save/Load: Save

Using Location 9 for this example: Selecting Save displays the following screen, if the selected
location is empty:
Save Config to Loc: 9
Empty (▲ ▼)
However, if the location already contains data, the display appears as follows:
Save Config to Loc: 9
11:10:29 23/12/03 (▲ ▼)
The user is shown the time and date stamp of the previously stored configuration, for identification
purposes. Select the location where the current configuration will be stored by using the ▲ ▼
arrow keys, then press ENTER. Locations 0 through 9 are available.
If the selected location does not contain a previously stored configuration, the display appears as
follows:
Your Configuration has
been Saved to Loc 9 (ENT)

5–44
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

If, however, the selected location contains a previously stored configuration, the display appears
as follows:
Loc 9 Contains Data!
Overwrite? NO YES (◄ ►)
Select No or Yes using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. Selecting Yes will overwrite the
existing configuration at the selected location.

5.3.5.2 Save/Load: Load

Having selected Load, if there is a configuration stored at the selected location the display appears
as follows:
Load Config from Loc: 9
11:10:29 23/12/03 (▲ ▼)
Note the data and time stamp identifying the stored configuration.
If the selected location contains no data, the display appears as follows:
Load Config from Loc 9
Empty (▲ ▼)
Select the location from where to load a configuration by using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press
ENTER. Locations 0 through 9 are available.
If the selected location contains valid data, the display appears as follows:
New Config has been
Loaded from Loc 9 (ENT)
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

5.3.6 SELECT: Utility Menus

UTIL: Buffer Clock Ref
ID 1:1 VFD Firmware FAST
Select Buffer, Clock, Ref, ID, 1:1, VFD, Firmware, or FAST using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then
press ENTER.

5.3.6.1 UTIL: Buffer (Buffer Re-center)

Press ENTER to Re-Center
the Receive Buffer
Press ENTER to cause a forced re-centering of the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer.

5–45
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.6.2 UTIL: Clock (Set Real-time Clock)

Edit Real-Time Clock:
12:00:00 24/04/03(◄ ►,▲ ▼)
Edit the time and date settings of the real-time clock by selecting the digit to be edited using the
◄ ► arrow keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER
when done.

Note that in accordance with international convention, the date is shown in

DAY-MONTH-YEAR format.
IMPORTANT

5.3.6.3 UTIL: Ref (Reference)

Internal Freq Ref:Adjust
Warm-up delay (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select Adjust or Warm-up delay using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5.3.6.4 UTIL: Ref Æ Adjust

Internal 10 MHz Freq Ref
Fine Adjust:+017(◄ ►,▲ ▼)
Fine adjustment of the Internal 10 MHz reference oscillator is possible through this menu. Use
the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the value. Note: In order to facilitate adjustment, the value is updated
as the digits are incremented – the user does not need to press the ENTER key. The range of
values is from –999 to +999.
Note: The numbers displayed here do not correspond to an exact frequency increment. A user
should perform this fine adjustment while using an external frequency counter, connected to
either:
a) the internal 10 MHz reference, if the user has internal access to the equipment,
or
b) the Tx Output, set for CW, 0 dBm output level, and an exact center frequency (1000
MHz, for example).

5.3.6.5 UTIL: Ref Æ Warm-up Delay

Warm-up delay: Disable
Enable (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select Disable or Enable using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If the user selects Disable, the CDM-570/570L will power-up and go into normal operational
service without any delay. Because the CDM-570L uses a high-stability oven-controlled 10 MHz
reference oscillator (OCXO) there is a finite time required for the oven to reach operating
temperature. Consequently, there will be a frequency error (as great as 2 x 10-6) when the modem
first powers up, and it may take up to 2 minutes before the frequency has settled to its correct value.
This will affect the Tx synthesizer (and hence the Tx output frequency), the Rx synthesizers, and

5–46
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

the generation of the Internal Tx baseband clock. For a CDM-570L operating on its own, this may
not be a problem, but if the 10 MHz reference signal is being used to drive an externally-connected
BUC, the frequency error at the RF output may be large, particularly at Ku or Ka-band.
In order to avoid this problem, the user may choose to enable a warm-up delay, which will suspend
normal operation of the unit until the operating temperature of the OCXO has stabilized. This is
accomplished by selecting Enable, then pressing ENTER.
Warm-up delay is not fixed. Instead, CDM-570L uses an intelligent algorithm to minimize this
delay, under all circumstances. CDM-570L uses its internal temperature sensor, and a knowledge of
how long the unit has been powered down, to determine how long the warm-up delay should be.
For example: The worst case occurs when the unit has been powered down sufficiently long that
the unit has reached thermal equilibrium with its surroundings, and the external temperature is at the
lowest value possible. In this circumstance the CDM-570L will take 2 minutes to warm-up.
If the external temperature is hot, and the unit was powered down, then a short time later, powered
up again, the warm-up period will be very short, perhaps only several seconds.
In order to alert the user, when the warm-up delay has been enabled, the opening screen will display
the following:
Comtech CDM-570L Modem
Ref Warming-up: 045 secs
The bottom right of the display counts down, in seconds, until the warm-up period is complete.
During this period, the Tx Carrier is deliberately muted. At the end of the warm-up period, the
bottom line will revert to the ‘normal’ display of Firmware version, and the unit will enter its
normal operational state.

IMPORTANT NOTE: If the user wishes to bypass this feature, the warm-up
period may be over-ridden at any time by pressing the CLEAR key.
IMPORTANT

5.3.6.6 UTIL: ID (Circuit ID)

Edit Circuit ID:(◄ ►,▲ ▼)
24 CHARACTER TST MESSAGE
Edit the Circuit ID string by using the ◄ ► and ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Only the bottom line is
available (24 characters). The cursor selects the position on the bottom line using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then the character is edited using the ▲ ▼ keys. The following characters are available:
[Space] ( ) * + -, . / 0-9 and A-Z.
Once the ID string is composed, press ENTER.

5.3.6.7 UTIL: 1:1 (Manual 1:1 Switchover)

Press ENT to force modem
to Standby (1:1 ONLY)
If the unit is part of a 1:1 redundant pair of modems, and this unit is currently on-line, press
ENTER to cause the unit to switch to standby. Press CLEAR to exit this screen and return to the
previous menu without causing the switchover.

5–47
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.6.8 UTIL: VFD (Video Fluorescent Display Brightness)

Edit Display Brightness:
100% (▲ ▼,ENTER)
To edit the display brightness, use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The values of brightness that can be
selected are 25%, 50%, 75%, or 100%. Press ENTER when the brightness is suitable.

5.3.6.9 UTIL: Firmware

Firmware Image:
Info Select (◄ ►,ENTER)
This series of submenus are used to view information about the CDM-570/570L internal
firmware. The modem can store two complete firmware images, and the user can select which
image will be loaded the next time the unit re-boots.

THESE MENUS ARE FOR DIAGNOSTIC PURPOSES. ONLY CHANGE AN IMAGE

IF INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY COMTECH EF DATA CUSTOMER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT TECHNICIANS.

Select either Info or Select using the ◄ ► arrow keys. Press ENTER.

5.3.6.9.1 UTIL: Firmware Æ Info

Firmware Info: Bootrom
Image#1 Image #2 MPP50
Use the ◄ ► arrow keys and ENTER key to select and view information about the Bootrom, the
two images, or the IP module (if installed).
Each image is further broken down to display component-level firmware information; the
display’s appearance changes depending on whether or not the E1 RAN Optimization / WAN
Adaptation (WAd) Processor Board is installed, as follows ((where Image#x denotes Image#1 or
Image#2):
No RAN board present:
Image#x: Bulk Main-FPGA
App Turbo-FPGA RS-FPGA
RAN board present:
Image#x: Bulk Main-FPGA
App Turbo-FPGA WAd-FPGA
Use the ◄ ► arrow keys and ENTER key to select which element is then displayed. If, for example,
Bulk is selected, a screen similar to the following example displays:
Bulk#x: 08/14/09
FW/10805AH 1.7.0

5–48
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.6.9.2 UTIL: Firmware Æ Select

Current Active Image: #1
Next Reboot Image: #1 #2
The top line shows the current active image. On the bottom line the user may select, by using the
◄ ► arrow and ENTER keys, the image that will be active the next time the unit is re-booted.

5.3.6.10 UTIL: FAST (FAST Code Options)

FAST:Cnfg View (H/W 0.03)
MainBoard S/N: 123456789
FAST (Fully Accessible System Topology) is the way to enable new options in the modem.
Obtain the FAST code for the new option from Comtech EF Data.
The FAST menu allows the user to either configure (enter) a new FAST code into the unit or
enable Demo Mode, or to view which options are currently installed.
Additionally, the user is also presented with the Hardware Revision Number, and the Main Board
Serial Number. This Serial Number is a unique identifier for the FAST upgrade process (and is
different from the Chassis Serial Number) and is required to obtain a new FAST code from the
factory.
Select Cnfg or View using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

5.3.6.10.1 UTIL: FAST Æ Cnfg (FAST Configuration)

FAST Configuration:
Edit Code Demo Mode
Select Edit Code or Demo Mode using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

UTIL: FAST Æ Cnfg Æ Edit Code

Edit 20 digit FAST Code:
00000000000000000000 ENT
Enter the code carefully. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to each character. Use the
▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the character, then press ENTER. The modem will respond with
“Configured Successfully” if the new FAST option has been accepted as follows:
Configured Successfully
(ENTER or CLEAR)
If, on the other hand, the FAST code is rejected, the following message displays:
FAST Code Rejected!
(ENTER or CLEAR)

5–49
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

UTIL: FAST Æ Cnfg Æ Demo Mode

FAST Demo Mode: Off On
604800 seconds remain
Select Off or On by using the ◄ ► arrow keys. When On, the second line will display the
number of seconds remaining available for the free Demo Mode.
When enabled, Demo Mode allows access to ALL CDM-570/570L FAST options for 604800
seconds (7 full days). Demo Mode may be turned on and off an unlimited number of time until
the 604800 seconds have expired. The seconds count only decrements when the mode is On.
When the Demo period expires the following menu is displayed:
FAST Demo Mode: Off On
Demo Period Expired

IF THE DEMO MODE STATE (OFF/ON) IS CHANGED, OR IF DEMO MODE

IS ENABLED AND THE TIMER EXPIRES, THE MODEM FIRMWARE WILL
IMPORTANT AUTO-REBOOT AFTER 5 SECONDS.
NOTE THAT VALIDATION OF AUTHORIZED FAST OPTIONS OCCURS ON
AUTO-REBOOT; IF AN INVALID CONFIGURATION IS FOUND, THE MODEM
CONFIGURATION WILL RESET TO DEFAULT VALUES.

5–50
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

5.3.6.10.2 UTIL: FAST Æ View

View Options: 03 (▲ ▼)
150W BPSU Not Installed
Use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to scroll through each Option Number in turn. As the cursor highlights
each option, the description of the option is displayed on the bottom line, along with the information
“Installed” or “ Not Installed”. The options are shown in the following table:
Option Option
Displayed Code Description
Number Type
01 150WBPSU 150 Watt, 48 volt BUC PSU
02 100W BPSU 100 Watt, 24 volt BUC PSU
03 RS Codec Reed-Solomon Codec
04 TPC Codec Turbo Product Codec
05 Hardware Reserved Reserved
06 IP Module IP Traffic Module
E1 RAN Optimization / WAN
07 WAd Card
Adaptation Processor Board
08 H/W Exp-2 Future Hardware Expansion 2
09 2048 kbps 2048 kbps max data rate
10 5000 kbps 5000 kbps max data rate
11 8PSK/8QAM 8-PSK and 8-QAM modulation
12 16-QAM 16-QAM modulation
13 9980 kbps 9980 kbps max data rate
14 Hdr Comp IP Header Compression
FAST
15 Data Comp IP Datagram Compression
16 IP QoS IP Quality of Service
17 3xDES IP 3xDES Encryption
18 Vipersat Management by VMS
19 VFS Vipersat File Streamer
20 G703 CEx Clock Extension

5.3.7 SELECT: ODU Menus (CDM-570 ONLY)

Transceiver Control:
Disable Enable(◄ ►,ENTER)
On the CDM-570 only, this menu branch is used to monitor and control a Comtech EF Data RF
Transceiver (CSAT-5060 or KST-2000A/B), if connected.
Refer to Appendix K. CDM-570 ODU (CSAT-5060, KST-2000A/B) OPERATION for
complete details about this modem-specific menu branch.

5–51
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Front Panel Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

5–52
 Chapter 6. ETHERNET
MANAGEMENT

6.1 Introduction
The CDM-570/570L base modem is equipped with an RJ-45 10/100 Base-T Ethernet management
interface, used for monitor and control purposes. This section provides a high-level overview of the
functionality provided by this interface and references other chapters for further details.

6.2 Ethernet Management Interface Protocols

The modem 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Management Interface supports three (3) different
management protocols:
• Web Server (HTTP) interface for complete product management;
• SNMP with public and private MIB;
• Telnet interface for remote product M&C.
In general, the operation of each of these interfaces is essentially identical to the management
interfaces that are available when the optional IP Module is installed.
NOTE: In Remote Æ Ethernet mode, Serial monitoring is allowed; however, Serial control is
not allowed except for use of the LRS (Local/Remote Status) and FPL (Front Panel Lockout)
commands/queries.

The Ethernet M&C port is designed to be used on a CDM-570/570L modem

that does NOT have the optional IP Module installed. With the IP Module
IMPORTANT installed, the IP Module Traffic port and base modem M&C port will share the
same IP address and can cause an IP conflict on the local network if both
ports are used. Therefore, when the IP Module is installed, only the IP Module
Traffic port should be used for IP traffic, base modem and IP Module FW
upgrades, and Ethernet Management.
The Traffic port supports Ethernet Management of all IP Module functions as
well as all base modem functions via Web, Telnet and SNMP.

6–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Ethernet Management MN/CDM570L.IOM

6.3 Web Server (HTTP) Interface

The embedded Web Server application provides the user with an easy to use interface to
configure and monitor all aspects of the Base Modem. These web pages have been designed for
optimal performance when using Microsoft’s Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.
Currently, Comtech EF Data offers two independent Web Server Interfaces with the
CDM-570/570L modem:
• Base modem Web Server (HTTP) Interface – For details, see Chapter 7. BASE
MODEM WEB SERVER PAGES.
• IP Module Web Server (HTTP) Interface – Available when the optional IP Module
Interface is installed. For details on this optional feature, see Chapter 13. IP MODULE
WEB SERVER PAGES.
Note: The optional IP Module does NOT need to be installed for base modem operations.
All Web Server Interfaces are accessible using a Web browser by typing (depending on the
interface) “http://www.xxx.yyy.zzz” or “https://www.xxx.yyy.zzz” in the browser’s Address box,
where “www.xxx.yyy.zzz” is the IP address of the modem (as configured from the CDM-570/570L
front panel menu: SELECT: CONFIG Æ REM Æ ETHERNET Æ ADDRESS. Refer to Chapter 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION for further details).
To access the Web Server via the Ethernet M&C port, the CDM-570/570L must
be configured via SELECT: CONFIG Æ REM Æ ETHERNET. If modem Remote is
IMPORTANT
set to LOCAL or SERIAL, the Web Server will display “Modem Remote Control
is not in Ethernet mode”.

For base modems as well as modems equipped with the optional IP

Module, the user is prompted to type in a valid User Name and
Password, similar to the dialogue box shown to the right (the site IP
address shown in this example is for display purposes only. Contact
your network administrator to determine the appropriate IP address
assignment for your modem):

Typical HTTP Login Access Levels, User Names, and Passwords are defined as follows:
User Login Access Level
User Interface
Admin User Read/Write User Read Only User
No Access to Admin pages No Access to Admin pages
Full Access to all
Web Full Access for all other View Only Access for all other
Web Pages
Web Pages Web Pages

CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem Web Server Default Name/Passwords

Admin User Read/Write User Read Only User

comtech/comtech opcenter/1234 monitor/1234

Type the appropriate User Name and Password, then click OK. For detailed information on
navigating the specific CDM-570/570L Web Server Interface, refer to the pertinent chapter or
section in this manual, as previously listed.

6–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Ethernet Management MN/CDM570L.IOM

6.4 SNMP Interface

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application-layer protocol designed to
facilitate the exchange of management information between network devices. The CDM-570/570L
SNMP agent supports both SNMPv1 and v2c.
1. For proper SNMP operation, the CDM-570/570L MIB files must be used with
the associated version of the CDM-570/570L modem M&C and the IP Module
IMPORTANT
SW. Please refer to the CDM-570/570L FW Release Notes for information on
the required FW/SW compatibility.
2. For SNMP access via the Ethernet M&C port, the CDM-570/570L must be
configured via SELECT: CONFIG Æ REM Æ ETHERNET.

6.4.1 Management Information Base (MIB) Files

MIB files are used for SNMP remote management and consist of Object Identifiers (OIDs). Each
OID is a node that provides remote management of a particular function. An MIB file is a tree of
nodes that is unique to a particular device.
The following MIB files are associated with the CDM-570/570L:
MIB File/Name Description
FW10874-2-.mib ComtechEFData MIB file gives the root tree for ALL Comtech EF Data
ComtechEFData MIB file products and consists of only the following OID:
Name: comtechEFData
Type: MODULE-IDENTITY
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247
Full path:
iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).comtechEFData(6247)
Module: ComtechEFData
FW10874-3b.mib MIB file for the optional IP Module consists of all of the OIDs for
IP Module MIB file management of the IP functions
FW10874-4G.mib MIB file consists of all of the OIDs for management of the CDM-570/570L
CDM-570/570L MIB file modem functions
FW10874-5A.mib Trap MIB file is provided for SNMPv1 traps common for base modems.
CDM-570/570L Traps MIB file
FW10874-6B.mib CDM-570L MIB file consists of all of the OIDs for management of the BUC
CDM-570L BUC/LNB MIB file and LNB.
FW10874-7-.mib CDM-570L Trap MIB file is provided for BUC and LNB SNMPv1 traps
CDM-570L L-Band BUC/LNB
Traps MIB file
FW10874-8-.mib MIB file consists of all the OIDs for management of the CSAT-5060
CSAT-5060 MIB file Transceiver connected to the CDM-570 modem through FSK.
FW10874-9-.mib MIB file consists of all the OIDs for management of the KST-2000A/B
KST-2000A/B MIB file Transceiver connected to the CDM-570 modem through FSK.

These MIB files should be compiled in a MIB Browser or SNMP Network Monitoring System server.
Note: The SNMP agent supports both “SNMPv1” and “v2c”. The “Traps” file only needs to be
compiled if “SNMPv1” traps are to be used.

6–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Ethernet Management MN/CDM570L.IOM

6.4.2 SNMP Community Strings

The modem uses community strings as a password scheme that provides authentication before
gaining access to the modem agent’s MIBs.
In “SNMP v1/v2c”, the community string is sent unencrypted in the SNMP packets. Caution
must be taken by the network administrator to ensure that SNMP packets travel only over a
secure and private network if security is a concern. A packet sniffer can easily obtain the
community string by viewing the SNMP traffic on the network.
The community string is entered into the MIB Browser or Network Node Management software
and is used to authenticate users and determine access privileges to the SNMP agent.
The user defines three Community Strings for SNMP access:
• Read Community default = public
• Write Community default = private
• Trap Community default = comtech
Note: Maximum number of characters for community strings shall not exceed 20. All printable
ASCII characters, except ’\’ and ‘~’ are allowed. No trailing spaces are permitted for community
strings.

6.4.3 SNMP Traps

The CDM-570/570L has the ability to send out SNMP traps when certain events occur in the
modem. For example, when the CDM-570/570L boots it sends out a coldstart trap and three
linkup traps, one for each interface that is brought up. The CDM-570/570L also sends out traps
when an alarm or a fault occurs in the modem. These include unit faults, TX faults, and RX
faults. A trap is sent both when a fault occurs and is cleared.
The CDM-570/570L supports both SNMPv1 traps and SNMPv2 notifications. Which style of traps
the CDM-570/570L sends can be configured by the user using the cdmipSnmpTrapVersion OID.
The following are the MIB-II v1traps/v2 notifications that the modem supports:

CDM-570/570L MIB-II SNMPv1 traps:

Cold Start 1
Link Up 4
Authentication Failure 5

CDM-570/570L MIB-II SNMPv2 notifications:

Cold Start 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1
Link Up 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4
Authentication Failure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5

6–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Ethernet Management MN/CDM570L.IOM

The following tables are the Alarms and Faults v1 traps / v2 notifications that the modem supports.
CDM-570/570L Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 traps:
cdm570LUnitAlarm 6247241
cdm570LTxTrafficAlarm 6247242
cdm570LRxTrafficAlarm 6247243
cdm570LODUAlarm 6247244
CDM-570/570L Alarms and Faults SNMPv2 notifications:

cdm570LUnitAlarm 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.24.2.0.1

cdm570LTxTrafficAlarm 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.24.2.0.2

cdm570LRxTrafficAlarm 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.24.2.0.3

cdm570LODUAlarm 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.24.2.0.4

6.4.4 MIB-II
The CDM-570/570L agent implements RFC 1213, Management Information Base for Network
Management of TCP/IP-based Internets. This is known as “MIB-II” or “Public MIB support.”
For detailed OID information please refer to the actual MIB file. The agent implements the
following groups:
Table 6-1. MIB-II Support
Group Comments
System Group Mandatory for RFC1213
Interface Mandatory for RFC1213
IP Mandatory for RFC1213
ICMP Mandatory for RFC1213
TCP Mandatory for RFC1213
UDP Mandatory for RFC1213
SNMP Mandatory for RFC1213
Address Translation Group Implemented but depreciated in MIB-II
EGP Not applicable

6–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Ethernet Management MN/CDM570L.IOM

6.4.5 Private MIB

The CDM-570/570L SNMP implements common modem MIBs that contain all the modem specific
parameters common to the CDM-570/570L. In addition, the CDM-570L SNMP also implements a
BUC and LNB MIB for RF parameters.

Whenever modifying the Modulator or Demodulator parameters by SNMP, the

user must be aware that the following variables must be executed in this
IMPORTANT order:
1. FEC (Forward Error Correction)
2. Modulation or Demodulation
3. Code Rate
4. Data Rate

For detailed OID information please refer to the actual MIB file.

6.5 Telnet Interface

The modem provides a Telnet interface for two primary functions:
• Equipment M&C via the standard equipment Remote Control protocol.
• Equipment M&C via Comtech Monitor and Control System (CMCS) application.
Telnet connection is allowed in both Serial remote mode and Ethernet remote mode.
The Telnet interface requires user login at the Administrator level and Read/Write level.

The login process appears

as follows:

Once logged into the

Telnet interface as the
Administrator, the user can
access the standard remote
control interface defined in
Appendix D. REMOTE
CONTROL as shown in
this example:

6–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Ethernet Management MN/CDM570L.IOM

There is a disadvantage when using Windows DOS as Telnet Client. Since Windows DOS cannot
translate a ‘\r’ to a ‘\r\n’ for the messages coming from Telnet Server, the multi-line command
response (for example, FRW? response) will be displayed as one line, with the latter lines
overwriting the previous lines.
In order to view the full response messages, CEFD recommends using HyperTerminal configured
as Telnet Client. To do so, configure the HyperTerminal as follows:
1. Under the HyperTerminal
Properties tab: Connect using
TCP/IP instead of COM1 or
COM2.
2. Under the Settings tab, ASCII
setup (far right): For ASCII
Sending, check "Send line
ends with line feeds".
For ASCII Receiving, check
"Append line feeds to in-
coming line ends".

Examples of HyperTerminal configured as Telnet Client are as follows:

6–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Ethernet Management MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

6–8
 Chapter 7. BASE MODEM WEB
SERVER INTERFACE

7.1 Web Server (HTTP) Interface

The sections that follow describe the functionality of the CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem Web
Server (HTTP) Interface for use with the Base Modem as well as the optional IP Module. Please
refer to Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION, and the Remote Commands Specifications
tables found in Appendix D. REMOTE CONTROL for detailed descriptions of the configuration
parameters featured on the individual Web pages depicted in this section.
Information about the functionality of the CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem Web Server Interface
for use with the optional IP Module is provided in Chapter 13. IP MODULE WEB SERVER
INTERFACE.
The Ethernet M&C port is designed to be used on a CDM-570/570L modem
that does NOT have the optional IP Module installed. With the IP Module
installed, the IP Module Traffic port and base modem M&C port will share the
IMPORTANT
same IP address and can cause an IP conflict on the local network if both
ports are used. Therefore, when the IP Module is installed, only the IP Module
Traffic port should be used for IP traffic, base modem and IP Module FW
upgrades, and Ethernet Management.
The Traffic port supports Ethernet Management of all IP Module functions as
well as all base modem functions via Web, Telnet and SNMP.

7.1.1 Web Server Page Introduction

The embedded Web Server application provides the user with an easy to use interface to
configure and monitor all aspects of the CDM-570/570L. These Web pages have been designed
for optimal performance when using Microsoft’s Internet Explorer Version 5.5 or higher (the
examples shown use Internet Explorer Version 6.0).

The user can fully control and monitor base operations of

the CDM-570/570L from the Web Server Interface. By
rolling the cursor over the navigation tabs located at the top
of each page (right), the user can select from the available
nested hyperlinks.

7–1
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.1.2 Web Server Page Access

To initiate a Web session with the CDM-570/570L Modem, from the PC type
http:/www.xxx.yyy.zzzz (where “www.xxx.yyy.zzz” represents the IP address of the CDM-570/570L
Advanced Satellite Modem) into the Address area of the Web browser:

If the user attempts to

access the Base Modem
Web Server Interface and
the modem Remote
Control is set to Local or
Serial mode, the following
message will appear:

The user will need to set the CDM-570/570L to Ethernet mode. From the CDM-570/570L front
panel main menu: Using the arrow keys, from the main (SELECT) menu, SELECT: CONFIG Æ
Rem Æ Ethernet, then press [ENTER]. Type in the modem’s IP address in the browser window
once more.
With a properly configured modem, the Login window will appear,
and the user is prompted to type a User Name and Password:
Base Modem default Admin User Name – comtech
Base Modem default Admin Password – comtech
Type the User Name and Password, then click [OK].

HTTP Login Access Levels, User Names, and Passwords are defined as follows:
User Login Access Level
User Interface
Admin User Read/Write User Read Only User
No Access to Admin pages No Access to Admin pages
Full Access to all
Web Full Access for all other View Only Access for all other
Web Pages
Web Pages Web Pages

CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem Web Server Default Name/Passwords

Admin User Read/Write User Read Only User

comtech/comtech opcenter/1234 monitor/1234

Once the valid IP address has been entered, the CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem Web Server
Interface “splash” page is displayed. As shown in Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2, depending on the
unit in use and the equipment configured for use with that unit, from this top level menu the user
has access to five or six navigation tabs.

7–2
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.1.2.1 CDM-570 Base Modem Web Server Interface “Splash” Page

Figure 7-1. CDM-570 “Splash” page

The options available through the CDM-570 Base Modem Web Server Interface are illustrated via
the following menu tree:

Home Admin Config Mdm Stats ODU Maint

Unit
Home Access Modem Modem Status Config
Info

Contact Remote Modem Utilities Modem Logs Status

Graphs
Support AUPC Utilities
(Minute Hour Day)

Timeslot Selection

Note that the ‘ODU’ tab and its associated hyperlinks are accessible to the user only when a
CSAT-5060 or KST-2000A/B Outdoor Unit is connected via FSK to the CDM-570. These pages
are fully defined in Appendix K. CDM-570 ODU (CSAT-5060, KST-2000A/B) OPERATION.

7–3
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.1.2.2 CDM-570L Base Modem Web Server Interface “Splash” Page

Figure 7-2. CDM-570L “Splash” page

The options available through the CDM-570L Base Modem Web Server Interface are illustrated via
the following menu tree:

Home Admin Config Mdm Stats Maint

Unit
Home Access Modem Modem Status
Info

Contact Remote Modem Utilities Modem Logs

Graphs
Support AUPC
(Minute Hour Day)

Timeslot Selection

BUC

LNB

Note that the ‘BUC’ and ‘LNB’ hyperlinks found under the ‘Config Mdm’ tab are accessible
only when a BUC (Block Upconverter) or LNB (Low-Noise Block Downconverter) is connected
to the CDM-570L. These pages are fully defined in Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU (BUC,
LNB) OPERATION.
For either modem interface, click any tab to continue.

7–4
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2 Web Server Page Descriptions

The sections that follow detail the Web pages accessible via hyperlink from the navigation tabs
illustrated by the splash pages shown in Sect. 7.1.2.
Each section subsequently defines features common to either the CDM-570 or the CDM-570L
Base Modem Web Server Interfaces (content unique to either the CDM-570 or CDM-570L
interface is noted accordingly):
For: Refer to:
Home Pages Sect. 7.2.1
Admin (Administration) Pages Sect. 7.2.2
Config Mdm (Configure Modem) Pages Sect. 7.2.3
Stats Pages Sect. 7.2.4
ODU (Outdoor Unit) Page Sect. 7.2.5 (CDM-570 only) – summary only
Maint (Maintenance) Page Sect. 7.2.6

7.2.1 Home Pages

7.2.1.1 Home | Home

Figure 7-3. Satellite Modem Home page (CDM-570L shown)

From any location within the Base Modem Web Server Interface, the user can select the Home
tab and/or hyperlink to return back to this top-level page.

7–5
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.1.2 Home | Contact

Figure 7-4. Home | Contact page

The ‘Home | Contact’ page (Figure 7-4) provides basic contact information to reach Comtech
EF Data Sales and Customer Support via phone or automated e-mail links.

7–6
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.1.3 Home | Support

Figure 7-5. Home | Customer Support page

Use the ‘Home | Support’ page (Figure 7-5) to compose an e-mail message for questions or
problems with the CDM-570/570L modem.

The Problem Report area of the display allows up to 256 characters maximum.

The CDM-570/570L Support Web Page uses SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) to send
e-mail to Comtech EF Data Modem Support (cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com).

For this page to operate correctly, the modem’s administrator is required to

specify the SMTP server, domain name, and destination on the Admin | Access
IMPORTANT
page (see Sect. 7.2.2.1).

Once the Contact Information is entered and a message composed in the Problem Report text
window, click [Submit E-mail] to send the message.

7–7
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.2 Admin Pages

The hyperlinks available under the ‘Admin’ tab provide the means to set up access parameters
required to facilitate communication with the CDM-570/570L Web Server.

The Admin pages are available only to users who have logged in using the
Administrator Name and Password.
IMPORTANT

7.2.2.1 Admin | Access

Figure 7-6. Admin | Access page

Use the ‘Admin | Access’ page (Figure 7-6) to set up and maintain the user names, passwords,
e-mail server, and the host IP addresses as needed to facilitate communication with the
CDM-570/570L Web Server.

Network Maintenance
• Ping reply: Use the dropdown to set this as Enabled or Disables.
• MAC address: This is read-only and cannot be edited.
• IP Gateway / IP Address: Specify an IP address and a subnet mask for the modem in
use here.

System Account Access Information

• Admin, Read/Write, and Read Only Names and Passwords:
The factory defaults for these names/passwords are:
o Admin comtech/comtech

7–8
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

o Read/Write opcenter/1234
o Read Only monitor/1234
Note that the Name and Password fields can each accept any alphanumeric combination
with a maximum length of 10 characters.
• SMTP Server: Specify the mail server IP address from where you want to send the e-mail.
• SMTP Domain Name / Destination: The Administrator can assign the SMTP Domain
Name and Destination. This is required if the e-mail feature of the Support Page (Sect.
6.5.4.1.3 in this chapter) is to be used.
o For SMTP Domain Name, specify the domain of the e-mail server (usually
found to the right of the @ symbol in an e-mail address).
o For SMTP Domain Destination, specify the e-mail recipient name (usually
found to the left of the @ symbol in an e-mail address).

Host Access List

• IP (#) / Mask: The Host Access List is used to define which remote clients can connect
when the Access List is Enabled. Each entry allows a user to specify an IP address and a
subnet mask to define a unique class of machines that are allowed access.
For example, if a user wanted to grant access to a PC with an IP Address of 10.10.10.1
and any PC on a subnet of 192.168.10.xxx, then the Access List would be defined as :
IP 1 / Mask: 10.10.10.1/32
IP 2 / Mask: 192.168.10.0/24
For IP 3 / Mask and IP 4 / Mask, make sure they are not 0.0.0.0/0. An entry with
0.0.0.0/0 simply means any machine is allowed to access.
• Access List: Use the Access List to grant access via HTTP and SNMP to a well-defined
list of client machines. From the dropdown, select Enable or Disable. If Disabled, then
any client machine will be able to connect via HTTP and SNMP.
Once the desired configuration settings have been made on this page, click [Submit Admin] to
save these changes.

7–9
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.2.2 Admin | Remote

Figure 7-7. Admin | Remote page

Use the ‘Admin | Remote’ page (Figure 7-7) to set and return administration information for the
CDM-570/570L Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) feature.
For details pertaining to the configuration parameters available on this page, refer to Chapter 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION and Sect. 6.3 SNMP INTERFACE.
Use of this page is restricted to users with Administrator login privileges.
The Administrator may:
• Use the associated dropdowns to set Simple Network Management and Enable
Authentication Trap as Enabled or Disabled.
• Assign up to two SNMP Trap IP addresses (Trap IP 1 and Trap IP 2).
• Set the Trap Version, using the associated dropdown, as SNMPv1 or SNMPv2.
• Assign SNMP Read, Write, and Trap Community Strings. The factory defaults for
these parameters are as follows:
o Read Community String public
o Write Community String private
o Trap Community String comtech
Each Community String field can be any combination of characters and a length of 0 - 20
characters.
• Assign an SNMP Contact, SNMP Name, and SNMP Location.
Once the desired configuration settings have been made on this page, click [Submit Admin] to
save these changes.

7–10
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.3 Config Mdm (Configure Modem) Pages

The hyperlinks available under the ‘Config Mdm’ tab provide the user with the means to configure all
modem parameters.

Note: The ‘BUC’ and ‘LNB’ hyperlinks shown in Figure 7-8 are available only on the CDM-570L
Base Modem Web Server Interface. They provide the user with the means to control and monitor a
Block Upconverter or Low-Noise Block Down Converter connected to the CDM-570L. Refer to
Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU (BUC, LNB) OPERATION for complete details on ODU
operations via the CDM-570L Base Modem Web Server Interface.

7.2.3.1 Config Mdm | Modem

Figure 7-8. Config Mdm | Modem page

Use the ‘Config Mdm | Modem’ page (Figure 7-8) to configure modem operating (Tx / Rx)
parameters, including the Tx / Rx Interfaces and Framing.

The Tx / Rx Interface Types and Framing Modes have higher priority than other
parameters, and should be configured before setting other parameters.
IMPORTANT

For details pertaining to the configuration parameters available on this page, refer to Chapter 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION.
Once the desired configuration settings have been made in each section, click [Submit] as needed
in that section to save those changes.

7–11
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.3.2 Config Mdm | Modem Utilities

Figure 7-9. Config Mdm | Modem Utilities page

Use the ‘Config Mdm | Modem Utilities’ page (Figure 7-9) to configure the following
CDM-570/570L utility functions:

Date and Time

• Enter a date using international format in the form DD/MM/YY (where DD = day [01 to
31], MM = month [01 to 12], and YY = year [00 to 99]).
• Enter a time using HH:MM:SS format (where HH = hour [00 to 23], MM = minutes [00
to 59], and SS = seconds [00 to 59]).
Once the desired date and time have been entered in this section, click [Enter Date/Time] as
needed to save these changes.

Circuit ID
• Enter a Circuit ID string of up to 24 characters. Once the desired string had been entered
in this section, click [Enter Circuit ID] as needed to save this change.

Unit
• Configure Test Mode, EDMAC Framing Mode, EDMAC Slave Address, and Stats
Sample Interval.
Once the desired configuration settings have been made in this section, click [Submit Unit
Utilities] as needed to save those changes.

7–12
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Clocks
• Configure Tx Clock Sources, Rx Buffer Size, Modem Frequency Reference, G.703 Clock
Extended Mode / Interface.
Once the desired configuration settings have been made in this section, click [Submit Clocks] as
needed to save those changes.
Additional utility functions provided on this page include:

Re-Center Buffer
• Click [Re-Center Buffer] to force re-centering of the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer.

Force 1:1 Switch

• Click [Force 1:1 Switch] to toggle the Unit Fail relay to the “fail” state for approx
500ms. If the unit is one in a 1:1 pair and it is currently the ‘On-Line’ unit, this will force
a switchover so the unit will then be in ‘Standby’ mode. The command is always
executed by the unit, regardless of whether it is stand-alone, in a 1:1 pair, or part of a 1:N
system.

Submit Save and Load

• Click [Submit Save and Load] to save, then load (recall) up to 10 configuration sets
numbered 0 through 9.
To save a configuration set: After all utilities parameters have been adjusted to suit, use
the Save Location dropdown to select 0 through 9, then click [Submit Save and Load] as
needed in to store the configuration settings. The chosen setting is then bookmarked with a
time and date stamp.
The default Save Location setting is Don’t Save.
To load (recall) a configuration set: Use the Load Location dropdown to select 0
through 9, then click [Submit Save and Load] as needed to load those configuration
settings.
The default Load Location setting is Don’t Load.

7–13
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.3.3 Config Mdm | AUPC

Figure 7-10. Config Mdm | AUPC page

Use the ‘Config Mdm | AUPC’ page (Figure 7-10) to configure Automatic Uplink Power Control
(AUPC), whereby a local modem is permitted to adjust its own output power level in order to attempt
to maintain the Eb/N0 at the remote modem.
For details pertaining to AUPC configuration and operation, refer to Chapter 9. AUTOMATIC
UPLINK POWER CONTROL (AUPC).
Observe the following:
• AUPC Enable: Use the dropdown to select AUPC operation as either Enabled or Disabled.
• Rem Demod Target Eb/No: Type in a value, in dB, from 0.0 to 14.9.
• Tx Power Max Increase: Use the dropdown to select a value, in dB, from 0 to 9.
• Max Pwr Reached Action: Use the dropdown to set the action as No Action or Generate
Tx Alarm.
• Rem Demod Unlock Action: Use the dropdown to set the action as Go to Nominal Power
or Go to Maximum Power.
Once the desired configuration settings have been made in each section, click [Submit] as needed
in that section to save those changes.

7–14
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.3.4 Config Mdm | Timeslot Selection

Figure 7-11. Config Mdm | Timeslot Selection page

The ‘Config Mdm | Timeslot Selection’ page (Figure 7-11) operations are available from the
CDM-570/570L Base Modem Web Server Interface only when the presence of the optional E1
RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation Processor Board is detected. Use this page to configure
the timeslots, channels, and D&I loop functionality associated with RAN Optimization / WAN
Adaptation (RAN / WAd).
Note: If the user attempts to access this page when there is no E1 RAN Optimization / WAN
Adaptation Processor Board is installed, the following message appears:

For details pertaining to RAN / WAd functionality, refer to Chapter 15. RAN OPTIMIZATION /
WAN ADAPTATION.
For details on the monitoring parameters available on these pages, refer to Chapter 5. FRONT
PANEL OPERATION.

7–15
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.4 Stats Pages

The hyperlinks available under the ‘Stats’ tab provide the user access to status, operational
statistics, and event logging windows.

7.2.4.1 Stats | Modem Status

Figure 7-12. Stats | Modem Status page

Use the ‘Stats | Modem Status’ page (Figure 7-12) to review read-only status information
pertaining to:
• General modem operating and configuration information
• Installed options
• Alarms
• Rx Parameters
• AUPC
• Ethernet
• RAN / WAd

7–16
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.4.2 Stats | Modem Logs

Figure 7-13. Stats | Modem Logs page

Use the ‘Stats | Modem Logs’ page (Figure 7-13) to control how the following parameters are
processed by the unit:
• Events
• Stored Statistics
• Alarm Masks
Once the desired settings have been selected in either the Events Log or Statistics Log sections,
click [Submit] as needed to save those changes.
Note: The Unread Events and Unread Statistics windows provide read-only counters of
available unread information as tallied since the last time the associated log file was cleared.
Each available Alarm Mask may be selected as Masked or Active. Once the desired Alarm Mask
settings have been selected, click [Submit Alarm Mask] as needed to save those changes.
For details on the configuration parameters available for this page, refer to Chapter 5. FRONT
PANEL OPERATION.

7–17
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.4.3 Stats | Graphs (Minute Hour Day)

Figure 7-14. Stats | Graphs pages (Minute page shown)

When the presence of the optional E1 RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation Processor Board is
detected, the ‘Stats | Graphs’ pages (Figure 7-14) provide a live graphical representation of the
trending characteristics provided while using this feature.
After clicking the Stats tab, the user can then select performance graph sets by the Minute, by
the Hour, or by the Day.
Note: Once selected, allow some time for the performance statistics to be compiled, then
graphed. If the browser window is resized, allow approximately 5 to 10 seconds for the graph set
to regenerate, then re-center in the browser window.
Each page provides three trending graphs – Wan Adaptation Settings, WAN Utilization, and
Link Congestion.

7–18
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Aside from the self-explanatory time duration afforded each page, the information presented
throughout is identical and is explained thusly:
• WAN Adaptation Settings: This graph is a simple representation of the percentage of
bandwidth saved by using the RAN / WAd feature.
• WAN Utilization: This graph allows the user to fine-tune the amount of satellite
bandwidth allocated for the link. Figure 7-14 depicts an example where the user has
allocated too little bandwidth to the link at first, then has changed the bandwidth to 900
kbps, which is too much.
• Link Congestion: This graph displays the link quality metric, which is a qualitative
measure of the quality of the voice calls as measured by the amount of adaptation
required to fit the user data into the available satellite bandwidth. A dip indicates link
quality degradation.
The following table defines the Link Quality Metric, as it is graphed in relation to its
Level of Quality:
Link Quality
Link Quality
Metric
8 Excellent
7 Very Good
6 Good
5 Fair
4 Average
3 Poor
2
Very Poor
1

Note: If the user attempts to access any of the three Graphs page hyperlinks when there is no E1
RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation Processor Board is installed, the following message
appears:

For details pertaining to RAN / WAd functionality, refer to Chapter 15. RAN OPTIMIZATION
/ WAN ADAPATION.
For details on the monitoring parameters available on these pages, refer to Chapter 5. FRONT
PANEL OPERATION.

7–19
CDM-570 Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Base Modem Web Server Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

7.2.5 ODU (Outdoor Unit) Pages

The ‘ODU’ (Outdoor Unit) tab and its associated hyperlinks are available only on the CDM-570
Base Modem Web Server Interface. They are accessible only when a CSAT-5060 or
KST-2000A/B ODU is configured for operation via FSK for the CDM-570.
Refer to Appendix K. CDM-570 ODU (CSAT-5060, KST-2000A/B) OPERATION for
complete details on ODU operations via this interface.

7.2.6 Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info Page

Figure 7-15. Maint (Maintenance) page

Use the ‘Maint | Unit Info’ page (Figure 7-15) to review a scrollable, read-only status window
that provides information about the currently loaded Bootrom. For Bulk1 and Bulk2, the user is
provided with information about all the constituent firmware blocks that make up the bulk.

7–20
 Chapter 8. FORWARD ERROR
CORRECTION OPTIONS

8.1 Introduction
As standard, the CDM-570/570L Modem is equipped with an industry-standard Viterbi Forward
Error Correction (FEC) encoder/decoder. The constraint lengths and encoding polynomials are
compatible with the vast majority of existing modems from other manufacturers. Comtech EF Data
has performed compatibility testing to ensure interoperability. In addition, there are two plug-in
daughter cards (SIMM modules), both field upgradeable, for adding other FEC functionality.
The first of these is a Concatenated Reed-Solomon Codec, which is combined with Viterbi
coding, to significantly improve BER versus Eb/No performance. It is required for running 8-
PSK/TCM, and for the 16-QAM Viterbi modes.
The second optional plug-in card is the Turbo Product Codec. Turbo Coding represents a very
significant development in the area of FEC, and Comtech EF Data’s Turbo Product Codec offers
Rate 5/16 and Rate 21/44 for BPSK, Rate 21/44 QPSK, Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8 for QPSK,
OQPSK, 8-QAM, 8-PSK and 16-QAM, and Rate 0.95 for QPSK, 8-QAM and 8-PSK. Turbo
Product Coding provides the best Forward Error Correction technology currently available, and is
now offered with a sufficiently broad range of code rates and modulation types that link
performance can be optimized under any conditions.

8.2 Viterbi
The combination of convolutional coding and Viterbi decoding has become an almost universal
standard for satellite communications. The CDM-570/570L complies with the Intelsat IESS
308/309 standards for Viterbi decoding with a constraint length of seven. This is a de facto
standard, even in a closed network environment, which means almost guaranteed inter-operability
with other manufacturer’s equipment. It provides very useful levels of coding gain, and its short
decoding delay and error-burst characteristics make it particularly suitable for low data rate coded
voice applications. It has a short constraint length, fixed at 7, for all code rates. (The constraint
length is defined as the number of output symbols from the encoder that are affected by a single
input bit.)
By choosing various coding rates (Rate 1/2, 3/4 or 7/8) the user can trade off coding gain for
bandwidth expansion. Rate 1/2 coding gives the best improvement in error rate, but doubles the
transmitted data rate, and doubles the occupied bandwidth of the signal. Rate 7/8 coding, at the

8–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

other extreme, provides the most modest improvement in performance, but only expands the
transmitted bandwidth by 14%. A major advantage of the Viterbi decoding method is that the
performance is independent of data rate, and does not display a pronounced threshold effect (i.e.,
does not fail rapidly below a certain value of Eb/No). Note that in BPSK mode, the CDM-570/570L
only permits a coding rate of 1/2. Because the method of convolutional coding used with Viterbi,
the encoder does not preserve the original data intact, and is called non-systematic.

Table 8-1. Viterbi Decoding Summary

FOR AGAINST
• Good BER performance - very useful Higher coding gain possible with other
coding gain. methods
• Almost universally used, with de
facto standards for constraint length
and coding polynomials.
• Shortest decoding delay (~100 bits)
of any FEC scheme - good for coded
voice, VOIP, etc.
• Short constraint length produces
small error bursts - good for coded
voice.
• No pronounced threshold effect -
fails gracefully.
• Coding gain independent of data
rate.

8.3 Reed-Solomon Outer Codec (Hardware Option)

It cannot be emphasized strongly enough that the purpose of the

concatenated Reed-Solomon is to dramatically improve the BER
performance of a link under given noise conditions. It should NOT be
IMPORTANT considered as a method to reduce the link EIRP to the point where
rain-fade margin, particularly at Ku-band, is no longer required.
The concatenation of an outer Reed-Solomon Codec with Viterbi decoder first became popular
when Intelsat introduced it in the early 1990s. It permits significant improvements in error
performance without significant bandwidth expansion. The coding overhead added by the RS outer
Codec is typically around 10%, which translates to a 0.4 dB power penalty for a given link. Reed-
Solomon codes are block codes (as opposed to Viterbi which is convolutional), and in order to be
processed correctly the data must be framed and de-framed.
Additionally, Reed-Solomon codes are limited in how well they can correct errors that occur in
bursts. This, unfortunately, is the nature of the uncorrected errors from a Viterbi decoder, which
produce clusters of errors that are multiples of half the constraint length. For this reason, the data
must be interleaved following RS encoding, and is then de-interleaved prior to decoding. This
ensures that a single burst of errors leaving the Viterbi decoder is spread out over a number of
interleaving frames, so errors entering the RS decoder do not exceed its capacity to correct those
errors. In the case of the CDM-570/570L, two different RS code rates are used, according to the
mode of operation.

8–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

A 220,200 code is used in transparent closed network modes, and a 200,180 code is used in
framed (EDMAC) modes. (220,200 means that data is put into blocks of 220 bytes, of which 200
bytes are data, and 20 bytes are FEC overhead.) These two codes were chosen because they fit
well into Comtech EF Data’s clock generation scheme, and they have almost identical coding
gain. When Viterbi decoding is used as the primary FEC, an interleaver depth of four is used. The
increase in coding gain is at the expense of delay. The interleaving/de-interleaving delay and the
delay through the decoder itself can be as high as 25 kbits. At very low data rates, this equates to
several seconds, making it highly unsuitable for voice applications. Additionally, the de-
interleaver frame synchronization method can add significantly to the time taken for the
demodulator to declare acquisition.
A characteristic of concatenated RS coding is the very pronounced threshold effect. For any
given modem design, there will be a threshold value of Eb/No below which the demodulator
cannot stay synchronized. This may be due to the carrier-recovery circuits, or the
synchronization threshold of the primary FEC device, or both. In the
CDM-570/570L, and Rate 1/2 operation, this threshold is around 4 dB Eb/No. Below this value,
operation is not possible, but above this value, the error performance of the concatenated RS
system produces exceptionally low error rates for a very small increase in Eb/No.

Care should be taken not to operate the demodulator near its sync
threshold. Small fluctuations in Eb/No may cause total loss of the link,
CAUTION with the subsequent need for the demodulator to re-acquire the signal.

Table 8-2. Concatenated RS Coding Summary

FOR AGAINST
• Exceptionally good BER • Very pronounced threshold effect -
performance - several orders of does not fail gracefully in poor Eb/No
magnitude improvement in link conditions. Additional coding overhead
BER under given link conditions. actually degrades sync threshold, and
reduces link fade margin.
• Very small additional bandwidth • Significant processing delay (~25
expansion. kbits) - not good for voice, or IP
applications.
• Adds to demod acquisition time.

8–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

8.4 Trellis Coding (requires 8-PSK/8-QAM FAST Option)

In the other FEC methods described here, the processes of coding and modulation are
independent. The FEC codec has no knowledge of, or interaction with, the modulator. However,
there are schemes in which the coding and modulation are combined together, where the encoder
places FEC symbols in a precise manner into the signal constellation. This can yield an overall
improvement in performance, and is used in higher-order modulation schemes, such as 8-PSK,
16-PSK, 16-QAM, etc. When convolution coding is used, the overall coded modulation approach
is referred to as Trellis Coded Modulation (TCM). Ungerboeck was an early pioneer, and
developed optimum mapping and decoding schemes. However, the decoding scheme was seen as
complex, and expensive, and Qualcomm Inc. developed a variation on the theme, which uses a
Viterbi decoder at the core, surrounded by adjunct processing. The scheme is able to achieve
performance very close to the optimum Ungerboeck method, but with far less complexity, and is
called pragmatic Trellis Coded Modulation.
Now, Intelsat recognized that, as more and more high power transponders are put into service, the
transponders are no longer power limited, but bandwidth limited. In order to maximize
transponder capacity, they looked at 8-PSK as a method of reducing the occupied bandwidth of a
carrier, and adopted Qualcomm’s pragmatic TCM, at Rate 2/3.
A Rate 2/3 8-PSK/TCM carrier occupies only 50% of the bandwidth of a Rate 1/2 QPSK carrier.
However, the overall coding gain of the scheme is not adequate by itself, and so it is required that
the scheme be concatenated with an outer RS codec. When combined, there is a threshold value
of Eb/No of around 6 dB, and above approximately 7 dB, the bit error rate is better than 1 x 10-8.
The detractions of the concatenated RS approach apply here also, along with more stringent
requirements for phase noise and group delay distortion – the natural consequences of the higher-
order modulation.
The CDM-570/570L implements a Closed Network version of Rate 2/3 8-PSK/TCM/RS, using
either the 220, 200 or 200,180 Reed-Solomon outer codes. Although not compatible, it provides
identical performance to the Open Network IESS-310 standard.

Table 8-3. 8-PSK/TCM Coding Summary

FOR AGAINST
Exceptionally bandwidth efficient • Needs concatenated RS outer codec
compared to QPSK. to give acceptable coding gain
performance.
• Demod acquisition threshold much
higher than for QPSK.
• 8-PSK is more sensitive to phase
noise and group delay distortion than
QPSK.

8–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

8.5 Turbo Product Codec (Hardware Option)

8.5.1 Introduction
Turbo coding is an FEC technique developed within the last few years, which delivers significant
performance improvements compared to more traditional techniques. Two general classes of
Turbo Codes have been developed: Turbo Convolutional Codes (TCC), and Turbo Product
Codes (TPC), a block coding technique. Comtech EF Data has chosen to implement an FEC
codec based on TPC. A Turbo Product Code is a 2- or 3-dimensional array of block codes.
Encoding is relatively straightforward, but decoding is a very complex process requiring multiple
iterations of processing for maximum performance to be achieved.
Unlike the popular method of concatenating a Reed-Solomon codec with a primary FEC codec,
Turbo Product Coding is an entirely stand-alone method. It does not require the complex
interleaving/de-interleaving of the RS approach, and consequently, decoding delays are
significantly reduced. Furthermore, the traditional concatenated RS schemes exhibit a very
pronounced threshold effect. A small reduction in Eb/No can result in total loss of demod and
decoder synchronization. TPC does not suffer from this problem. The demod and decoder remain
synchronized down to the point where output error rate becomes unusable. This is considered to
be an advantageous characteristic in fading environment. Typically, in QPSK, 8-PSK and 16-
QAM TPC modes the demod and decoder can remain synchronized 2 – 3 dB below the
Viterbi/R-S or TCM cases.
With this release of the CDM-570/570L, Comtech EF Data now provides the best Forward Error
Correction technology currently available, offering a very broad range of TPC code rates,
combined with the entire range of modulation types, from BPSK to 16-QAM.

8.5.2 TPC modes available in the CDM-570/570L

Table 8-4. Available TPC Modes

Code Rate/Modulation Data Rate Range
Rate 5/16 BPSK 2.4 kbps to 0.937 Mbps
Rate 21/44 BPSK 2.4 kbps to 1.430 Mbps
Rate 21/44 QPSK, OQPSK 4.8 kbps to 2.860 Mbps
Rate 3/4 QPSK, OQPSK 7.2 kbps to 4.500 Mbps
Rate 3/4 8-PSK, 8-QAM 10.8 kbps to 6.750 Mbps
Rate 3/4 16-QAM 14.4 kbps to 9.000 Mbps
Rate 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK 8.4 kbps to 5.250 Mbps
Rate 7/8 8-PSK, 8-QAM 13.6 kbps to 7.875 Mbps
Rate 7/8 16-QAM 16.8 kbps to 9.980 Mbps
Rate 0.95 QPSK, OQPSK 9.1 kbps to 5.666 Mbps
Rate 0.95 8-PSK, 8-QAM 15.3 kbps to 8.500 Mbps
Maximum rates are subject to the appropriate FAST codes being installed

8–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

8.5.3 8-QAM Modulation

What is 8-QAM, and why is it important? Unlike 8-PSK, which comprises 8 equally spaced
constellation points around a unit-circle, 8-QAM is comprised of exactly half of a 16-QAM
signal. Fortuitously, the 8-QAM constellation possesses some unique properties that can be
exploited to permit acquisition and tracking of signals at noise levels 2 - 3 dB worse than is
possible with 8-PSK. This is, then, a perfect match for the expected Eb/No values that TPC
demands. Naturally, it has exactly the same spectral efficiency as 8-PSK.
While the 8-QAM constellation itself is not new, Comtech has performed much original work
related to the choice of optimum mapping and soft decision decoding, and, of course, on the
techniques for acquiring and tracking 8-QAM signals. This work is the subject of a pending
patent application filed by Comtech EF Data.
The basic performance of uncoded 8-QAM is broadly similar to uncoded 8-PSK, but has a
slightly higher peak-to-average power ratio than 8-PSK (about 0.8 dB). In most linear
transponders, this should not be considered a problem.
A major benefit of Comtech’s implementation of 8-QAM is that it is inherently more immune to
the effects of phase noise than 8-PSK. In L-band applications that use low-cost BUCs and LNBs
this is considered particularly advantageous for lower bit rates, where phase noise can be very
problematic.

8.5.4 End-to-End Processing Delay

In many cases, FEC methods that provide increased coding gain do so at the expense of increased
processing delay. However, with TPC, this increase in delay is very modest. The table below
shows, for the CDM-570/570L, the processing delays for the major FEC types, including the
three TPC modes:

Table 8-5. Turbo Product Coding Processing Delay Comparison

FEC Mode (64 kbps data rate) End-to-end delay, ms
Viterbi, Rate 1/2 12
Viterbi Rate 1/2 + Reed Solomon 266
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 3/4 47
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 21/44, BPSK 64
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 5/16, BPSK 48
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 7/8 245 *
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 0.95 69
* A larger block is used for the Rate 7/8 code, which increases decoding delay.

Note that in all cases, the delay is inversely proportional to data rate, so for 128 kbps the delay values
would be half of those shown above. It can be seen that the concatenated Reed-Solomon cases
increase the delay significantly, due mainly to interleaving/de-interleaving.

8–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

8.5.5 Comparison of all TPC Modes

Eb/No at Eb/No at
Occupied *
BER = 10-6 BER = 10-8
Spectral Bandwidth
Mode Guaranteed Guaranteed Symbol Rate
Efficiency for 1 Mbps
(Typical in (Typical in
Carrier
parentheses) parentheses)
6.0 dB 7.3 dB
QPSK Rate 1/2 Viterbi * 1.00 bits/Hz 1.0 x bit rate 1190 kHz
(5.5 dB) (6.8 dB)
2.9 dB 3.3 dB
BPSK Rate 21/44 Turbo 0.48 bits/Hz 2.1 x bit rate 2493 kHz
(2.6 dB) (3.0 dB)
2.4 dB 2.8 dB
BPSK Rate 5/16 Turbo 0.31 bits/Hz 3.2 x bit rate 3808 kHz
(2.1 dB) (2.5 dB)
QPSK/ OQPSK 2.9 dB 3.2 dB
0.96 bits/Hz 1.05 x bit rate 1246 kHz
Rate 21/44 Turbo (2.6 dB) (2.8 dB)
QPSK/ OQPSK 3.8 dB 4.4 dB
1.50 bits/Hz 0.67 x bit rate 793 kHz
Rate 3/4 Turbo (3.3 dB) (4.0 dB)
QPSK/ OQPSK 4.3 dB 4.5 dB
1.75 bits/Hz 0.57 x bit rate 678 kHz
Rate 7/8 Turbo (4.0 dB) (4.2 dB)
QPSK/ OQPSK 6.4 dB 6.9 dB
1.90 bits/Hz 0.53 x bit rate 626 kHz
Rate 0.95 Turbo (6.0 dB) (6.5 dB)
8-PSK Rate 2/3 TCM ** 6.5 dB 6.9 dB
1.82 bits/Hz 0.56 x bit rate 666 kHz
and RS (IESS-310) (5.6 dB) (6.0 dB)
6.2 dB 6.8 dB
8-PSK Rate 3/4 Turbo 2.25 bits/Hz 0.44 x bit rate 529 kHz
(5.7 dB) (6.3 dB)
7.0 dB 7.2 dB
8-PSK Rate 7/8 Turbo 2.62 bits/Hz 0.38 x bit rate 453 kHz
(6.6 dB) (6.8 dB)
9.3 dB 10.3dB
8-PSK Rate 0.95 Turbo 2.85 bits/Hz 0.35 x bit rate 377 kHz
(8.9 dB) (9.9 dB)
6.5 dB 7.2 dB
8-QAM Rate 3/4 Turbo 2.25 bits/Hz 0.44 x bit rate 529 kHz
(6.1 dB) (6.8 dB)
6.6 dB 6.8 dB
8-QAM Rate 7/8 Turbo 2.62 bits/Hz 0.38 x bit rate 453 kHz
(6.2 dB) (6.4 dB)
9.6 dB 10.6 dB
8-QAM Rate 0.95 Turbo 2.85 bits/Hz 0.35 x bit rate 377 kHz
(9.2 dB) (10.2 dB)
7.4 dB 8.2 dB
16-QAM Rate 3/4 Turbo 3.00 bits/Hz 0.33 x bit rate 396 kHz
(7.0 dB) (7.7 dB)
8.1 dB 8.3 dB
16-QAM Rate 7/8 Turbo 3.50 bits/Hz 0.28 x bit rate 340 kHz
(7.7 dB) (7.9 dB)
16-QAM Rate 3/4 ** 8.1 dB 8.6 dB
2.73 bits/Hz 0.37 x bit rate 435 kHz
Viterbi/Reed-Solomon (7.5 dB) (8.0 dB)
16-QAM Rate 7/8 ** 9.5 dB 10.1 dB
3.18 bits/Hz 0.31 x bit rate 374 kHz
Viterbi/Reed-Solomon (9.0 dB) (9.5 dB)
* The occupied bandwidth is defined at the width of the transmitted spectrum taken at the –10 dB
points on the plot of power spectral density. This equates to 1.19 x symbol rate for the
CDM-570/570L transmit filtering.
** Included for comparative purposes

8–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

It can be seen that the 8-PSK Rate 3/4 Turbo performance closely approaches that of the Rate 2/3
TCM/Reed-Solomon case – the BER performance is within approximately 0.4 dB. However, it
should be noted that the Rate 3/4 Turbo mode is 20% more bandwidth efficient than the TCM
case. The additional advantages of Turbo (lower delay, performance during fades, etc.) should
also be considered.

Table 8-6. Turbo Product Coding Summary

FOR AGAINST
• Exceptionally good BER performance -
significant improvement compared with
every other FEC method in use today.
• No pronounced threshold effect - fails
gracefully.
• Exceptional bandwidth efficiency. Nothing!
• Coding gain independent of data rate
(in this implementation).
• Low decoding delay.
• Easy field upgrade in CDM-570/570L.

8.6 Uncoded Operation (No FEC)

There are occasions when a user may wish to operate a satellite link with no forward error
correction of any kind. For this reason, the CDM-570/570L offers this uncoded mode for three
modulation types - BPSK, QPSK, and OQPSK. However, the user should be aware of some of
the implications of using this approach.
PSK demodulators have two inherent undesirable features. The first of these is known as ‘phase
ambiguity’, and is due to the fact the demodulator does not have any absolute phase reference,
and in the process of carrier recovery, the demodulator can lock up in any of K phase states,
where K = 2 for BPSK, K = 4 for QPSK. Without the ability to resolve these ambiguous states
there would be a 1-in-2 chance that the data at the output of the demodulator would be wrong, in
the case of BPSK. For QPSK, the probability would be 3 in 4.
The problem is solved in the case of BPSK by differentially encoding the data prior to
transmission, and then performing the inverse decoding process. This is a very simple process,
but has the disadvantage that it doubles the receive BER. For every bit error the demodulator
produces, the differential decoder produces two.
The problem for QPSK is more complex, as there are 4 possible lock states, leading to 4
ambiguities. When FEC is employed, the lock state of the FEC decoder can be used to resolve
two of the four ambiguities, and the remaining two can be resolved using serial differential
encoding/decoding. However, when no FEC is being used, an entirely different scheme must be
used. Therefore, in QPSK, a parallel differential encoding/decoding technique is used, but has the
disadvantage that it again doubles the receive BER.
OQPSK is a different situation again, where the ambiguities result not only from not having an
absolute phase reference, but also not knowing which of the two parallel paths in the demod, I or Q,
contains the half-symbol delay. Another type of differential encoding is used, but yet again the error
rate is doubled, compared to ideal.

8–8
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

The second problem inherent in PSK demodulators is that of ‘data false locking’. In order to
accomplish the task of carrier recovery, the demodulator must use a non-linear process. A second-
order non-linearity is used for BPSK, and a fourth-order non-linearity is used for QPSK. When
data at a certain symbol rate is used to modulate the carrier, the demodulator can lock at incorrect
frequencies, spaced at intervals of one-quarter of the symbol rate away from the carrier.
Fortunately, when FEC decoding is used, the decoder synchronization state can be used to verify
the correct lock point has been achieved, and to reject the false locks.
However, if uncoded operation is used, there is no way to recognize a data false lock. The
demodulator will indicate that it is correctly locked, but the data out will not be correct.
This problem has been almost entirely eliminated in the CDM-570/570L with the fast acquisition
algorithm which includes Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) techniques. However, there is a very
small probability that a data false lock could still occur in uncoded mode, and in this
circumstance Comtech EF Data cannot be held responsible for incorrect operation.

8.7 Rates above 2.5 Msymbols/sec

Starting with Release 1.4.1 of the CDM-570/570L firmware, the maximum

symbol rate has been increased from 2.5 to 3.0 Msymbols/sec. This has
IMPORTANT been done without modification to the hardware, and as a consequence,
there may be a small degradation in BER versus Eb/No performance for rates
above 2.5 Msymbols/sec. The degradation is as follows:
Rates from 2.5 to 2.65 Msps: degradation < 0.1 dB
Rates from 2.65 to 2.80 Msps: degradation < 0.2 dB
Rates from 2.80 to 3.00 Msps: degradation < 0.3 dB
Users should take this into account when considering the BER versus Eb/No
graphs that follow.

8–9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
Viterbi
1E-2
Decoding

Typical
Performance

1E-3

1E-4

1E-5

1E-6

Specification
1E-7 limit, Rate 7/8
Coding

1E-8

Specification Specification
limit Rate 1/2 limit, Rate 3/4
Coding Coding
1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER

Figure 8-1. Viterbi Decoding

8–10
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

Uncoded BPSK/QPSK Viterbi with

concatenated
1E-2 RS 220,200
Sync Outer Code
threshold,
Rate 3/4

1E-3

Sync
threshold,
Rate 7/8
1E-4

Combined sync
1E-5 threshold, demod
and Viterbi
Decoder, Rate 1/2

1E-6 Specification
Limit Rate 1/2
and 220,200
Outer Code

1E-7
Specification
Limit Rate 3/4
and 220,200
Typical performance
Outer Code

1E-8
Specification
Limit Rate 7/8
and 220,200
Outer Code
1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER
Figure 8-2. Viterbi with Concatenated RS Outer Code

8–11
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
8-PSK/TCM Rate 2/3
1E-2 Decoding, with 220,
200 RS Outer Code

1E-3

1E-4 Typical
Performance

1E-5

1E-6

1E-7

1E-8

Specification limit
Rate 2/3 Coding and Specification
220,200 RS Outer Code limit, Rate 2/3
Coding
1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER

Figure 8-3. 8-PSK/TCM Rate 2/3 with Concatenated RS Outer Code

8–12
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

Comtech Turbo Product Codec

Uncoded Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK,
BPSK/QPSK 8-PSK and 16-QAM
1E-2

Uncoded
16-QAM
1E-3

Spec limit
Rate 3/4 Uncoded
8-PSK 8-PSK
1E-4

Spec limit
Rate 3/4
QPSK/OQPSK
1E-5

1E-6

1E-7

Spec limit
Rate 3/4
16-QAM
1E-8

Typical performance

1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER

Figure 8-4. Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK, 8-PSK AND 16-QAM Turbo

8–13
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

Comtech Turbo Product Codec

Uncoded
Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK,
BPSK/QPSK 8-PSK and 16-QAM
1E-2

Uncoded
16-QAM
1E-3
Spec limit
Rate 7/8
Spec limit 8-PSK
Rate 7/8 Uncoded
QPSK/OQPSK 8-PSK
1E-4

1E-5

1E-6

1E-7

Spec limit
Rate 7/8
16-QAM
1E-8

Typical performance

1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER

Figure 8-5. Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK, 8-PSK AND 16-QAM Turbo

8–14
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

Comtech Turbo Product Codec

Uncoded Rate 21/44 QPSK/OQPSK
BPSK/QPSK Rate 0.95 QPSK/OQPSK
1E-2
and 8-PSK

Uncoded
8-PSK
1E-3

1E-4

Spec limit
Spec limit
Rate 0.95
Rate 1/2
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
1E-5

1E-6

1E-7

Spec limit
Rate 0.95
8-PSK
1E-8

Typical
performance
1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER

Figure 8-6. Rate 21/44 QPSK, Rate 0.95 QPSK and Rate 0.95 8-PSK Turbo

8–15
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

Comtech Turbo Product Codec

Rate 21/44 BPSK
Rate 5/16 BPSK
1E-2

Spec limit
Rate 5/16
1E-3 BPSK

Spec limit
Rate 21/44
BPSK

1E-4

Uncoded
BPSK/QPSK
1E-5

1E-6

1E-7

1E-8

Typical
performance

1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER

Figure 8-7. Rate 21/44 BPSK and Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo

8–16
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

Uncoded
Comtech Turbo Product Codec
BPSK/QPSK Rate 3/4 8-QAM
1E-2
Rate 0.95 8-QAM

Uncoded
8-PSK
1E-3
Spec limit
Rate 3/4
8-QAM

1E-4

1E-5

1E-6

1E-7

Spec limit
Rate 0.95
8-QAM
1E-8

Typical
performance

1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER

Figure 8-8. Rate 3/4 and Rate 0.95 8-QAM Turbo

8–17
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

Comtech Turbo Product Codec

Uncoded
BPSK/QPSK
Rate 7/8 8-QAM
1E-2

Uncoded
8-PSK
1E-3

Spec limit
1E-4
Rate 7/8
8-QAM

1E-5

1E-6

1E-7

1E-8

Typical
performance
1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER
Figure 8-9. Rate 7/8 8-QAM Turbo

8–18
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

16-QAM Viterbi, Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8

with 220,200 RS Outer Code
Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
1E-2

Uncoded 16-QAM

1E-3

1E-4
Specification
limit Rate 7/8
Viterbi and
220,200 RS
Outer Code
1E-5

Typical
Performance

1E-6

1E-7

1E-8

Specification limit Rate

3/4 Viterbi and 220,200
RS Outer Code
1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER

Figure 8-10. 16-QAM Viterbi, Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8 with 220,200 RS Outer Code

8–19
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Forward Error Correction Options MN/CDM570L.IOM

Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1

Differential
Encoding -
No FEC, no
1E-2 Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
scrambling

1E-3

1E-4

1E-5

1E-6

1E-7

1E-8

1E-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BER

Figure 8-11. Differential Encoding – No FEC, No Scrambling

8–20
 Chapter 9. AUTOMATIC UPLINK
POWER CONTROL (AUPC)

9.1 Introduction
The user MUST obtain permission from the Satellite Operator to use this feature.
Improper use of this feature could result in a transmitting terminal seriously
WARNING exceeding its allocated flux density on the Operator’s satellite. This could
produce interference to other carriers, and could cause transponder saturation
problems.
Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) is a feature whereby a local modem is permitted to adjust
its own output power level as a means to maintain the Eb/N0 at the remote modem.
To accomplish this, the framed mode of operation (EDMAC, or EDMAC-2) must be used. The
remote modem constantly sends back information about the demodulator Eb/N0 using reserved
bytes in the overhead structure. The local modem then compares this value of Eb/N0 with a pre-
defined target value. If the Remote Eb/N0 is below the target, the local modem will increase its
output power, and hence, a closed-loop feedback system is created over the satellite link. A
particularly attractive benefit of this feature is that whenever framed operation is selected, the
remote demodulator’s Eb/N0 can be viewed from the front panel display of the local modem. Note
also that AUPC can be used simultaneously with EDMAC.
There are several important parameters associated with this mode of operation, and the user needs
to understand how the AUPC feature works, and the implications of setting these parameters.

9–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Automatic Uplink Power Control MN/CDM570L.IOM

9.2 Setting AUPC Parameters

Step Instructions
Under the menu (CONFIGÆFrame), first ensure that Framing is selected. EDMAC or
1 EDMAC-2 may be selected, then the Framing mix – either AUPC-Only or AUPC
+EDMAC. The important consideration is that EDMAC framing should be enabled.
2 Verify that the remote modem also has EDMAC framing enabled.
Under the menu (CONFIGÆTxÆPower), set the nominal output power of the modem
3
by selecting the Manual mode, then editing the Tx output power level displayed.
4 Select AUPC as the operating mode.

At this point, the user will be prompted to define four key parameters: Target Eb/N0, Max Range,
Alarm, and Demod Unlock.

9.2.1 Target Eb/N0

Target Eb/N0 is value of Eb/N0 that the user desires to keep constant at the remote modem.
If the Eb/N0 exceeds this value, the AUPC control will reduce the Tx output power, but will never
drop below the nominal value set.
If the Eb/N0 falls below this value, the AUPC control will increase the Tx output power, but will
never exceed the value determined by the parameter Max-Range.
• The minimum value the user can enter is 0.0 dB
• The maximum value the user can enter is 9.9 dB
• The default value is 3.0 dB
• The resolution is 0.1 dB

9.2.2 Max Range

Max-Range defines how much the modem is permitted to increase the output level, under AUPC
control.
• The minimum value the user can enter is 0 dB
• The maximum value the user can enter is 9 dB
• The default value is 1 dB
• The resolution is 1 dB

9.2.3 Alarm
The Alarm parameter defines how the user wants the modem to act if, under AUPC control, the
maximum power limit is reached.
The two choices are:
• None (no action)
• Tx-Alarm (generate a TX alarm)
The default setting is None.

9–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Automatic Uplink Power Control MN/CDM570L.IOM

9.2.4 Demod Unlock

This defines the action the modem will take if the remote demodulator loses lock.
The two choices are:
• Nom-Pwr (reduce the Tx Output Power to the nominal value)
• Max-Pwr (increase the Tx Output Power to the maximum value permitted by the
parameter Max-Range)
The default setting is Nom-Pwr.
(Note: If the local demod loses lock, the modem will automatically move its output power to the
nominal value.)

9.3 Compensation Rate

As with any closed-loop control system, the loop parameters must be chosen to ensure stability at
all times. Several features have been incorporated to ensure that the AUPC system does
overshoot, or oscillate.
• First, the rate at which corrections to the output power can be made is fixed at once every
4 seconds. This takes into account the round trip delay over the satellite link, the time
taken for a power change to be reflected in the remote demodulator’s value of Eb/N0, and
other processing delays in the modems.
• Second, if the comparison of actual and target Eb/N0 yields a result that requires a change
in output power, the first correction made will be 80% of the calculated step. This avoids
the possibility of overshoot. Subsequent corrections are made until the difference is less
than 0.5 dB. At this point, the output power is only changed in increments of 0.1 dB, to
avoid ‘hunting’ around the correct set point.

9.4 Monitoring
The remote demodulator’s value of Eb/N0 can be monitored at all times, either from the front panel
(Monitor Æ AUPC) or via the remote control interface. The resolution of the reading is 0.2 dB.
For all values greater than or equal to 16 dB, the value 16.0 dB will be displayed. As long as
framing is enabled, the value will still be available, regardless of the AUPC mode, or framing mix.
Also displayed is the current value of Tx power increase. If EDMAC framing is enabled, but
AUPC is disabled, this will indicate 0.0 dB. This value is also available via the remote control
interface.
Comtech EF Data strongly cautions against the use of large values of
permitted power level increase under AUPC control. Users should
consider using the absolute minimum range necessary to improve rain-
CAUTION
fade margin.

9–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Automatic Uplink Power Control MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

9–4
 Chapter 10. CLOCKING MODES

10.1 Introduction
When dealing with satellite modems, the subject of clocking can be a complex issue. This chapter
describes the various clocking options that are available with the CDM-570/570L. There are two
fundamentally different interfaces provided by the modem, plus the optional IP Module Ethernet
Interface:
• Synchronous clock and data interfaces (EIA-422, V.35, etc.) that permit great flexibility
concerning the source and direction of clocks. These are complex.
• G.703 interfaces combine clock and data into a single signal (and are referred to as self-
clocking). In their basic form these are less flexible and easier to understand.
Additionally, a G.703 Clock extension mode is available in order to provide the transport
of a high–stability G.703 (T1 or E1) timing reference to the distant end of a satellite link,
regardless of the actual data rate of that link. See Section 10.5 for detailed information.
• For the optional IP Module Ethernet interface, clocking is internally controlled and clock
selection is not available. The G.703 Clock extension mode is also available when using
the IP interface.

10.2 Transmit Clocking

There are four transmit clocking modes in the CDM-570/570L. EIA-422/449 signal mnemonics
will be used for illustration, but the description applies equally to V.35 and synchronous EIA-232.

10.2.1 Internal Clock

In this mode the modem, assumed always to be the DCE, supplies the clock to the DTE. (The
EIA-422/449 name for this signal is Send Timing, or ST.) The DTE then clocks from this source
and gives the modem transmit data (Send Data, or SD), synchronous with this clock. It is optional
whether the DTE also returns the clock (Terminal Timing, or TT). The modem can accept it if it
is present, but uses ST if it is not. At rates above 2 Mbps, Comtech EF Data highly recommends
that the user return TT to ensure the correct clock/data relationship.
G.703: The internal clock mode does not apply; the clock is always recovered from the incoming
signal, and the modem locks its modulator clocks to this.

10–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Clocking Modes MN/CDM570L.IOM

G.703 Clock extension: This is a special case of Internal Tx Clock, where the internal clock
generator is perfectly locked to an externally applied G.703 (T1 or E1) signal. See Section 10.5
for detailed information.

10.2.2 Tx Terrestrial
In this mode, the modem expects to see the DTE provide the clock, so that it can phase-lock its
internal circuits. In this case, the modem does not provide any signal on ST, but instead requires a
clock signal on TT, synchronous with the data. If no clock is present, an alarm will be generated
and the modem will substitute its internal clock.
G.703: This is the ‘natural’ clock mode.

10.2.3 Rx Loop-Timed, Rx=Tx

In certain circumstances, a terminal at the distant-end of a satellite link may be required to
provide a clock to the DTE equipment which is locked to the receive satellite signal. This is
similar to Internal Clock mode, in that the modem will source ST to the DTE, but now the timing
is derived from the demodulator. The DTE then clocks from this source, and gives the modem
transmit data (SD), synchronous with this clock. It is optional whether the DTE also returns the
clock (TT); the modem can accept it, if it is present, but uses ST if it is not. If the demodulator
loses lock, the modem’s internal clock will be substituted, so an accurate and stable clock is
present on ST, rather than a clock that may jitter and wander in a random fashion.
G.703: Does not apply.

10.2.4 Rx Loop-Timed, Rx<>Tx (Asymmetric Loop Timing)

The CDM-570/570L incorporates circuitry which permits loop timing when the Tx and Rx data
rates are not the same. In this case the clock frequency appearing at ST will be whatever the TX
data rate is programmed to, but phase-locked to the demodulator’s receive symbol clock. In all
other respects the operation is the same as for ‘standard’ loop timing.
G.703: Does not apply.

10.3 Receive Clocking

There are three receive clocking modes in the CDM-570/570L, plus an additional setting used for
Drop and Insert only – refer to Figure 10-1 for details.

10.3.1 Buffer Disabled (Rx Satellite)

When the buffer is disabled, the receive clock (RT) is derived directly from the demodulator, and
hence will be subject to plesiochronous and Doppler offsets. In certain instances, this may be
acceptable. There is still a minimum buffer in use to de-jitter the effects of removing overhead
framing.
G.703: Applicable.

10–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Clocking Modes MN/CDM570L.IOM

10.3.2 Buffer Enabled, Tx=Rx

In this instance, it is required that the buffer be enabled, so that the clock and data appearing on
RT and RD are synchronous with the transmit clock. This is a relatively simple case, as the output
clock for the buffer is derived directly from either ST, TT or the external source.
G.703: Applicable.

10.3.3 Buffer Enabled, Rx<>Tx

This is an uncommon case, where the receive data rate does not equal the transmit clock. The
modem will generate a phase-locked buffer output clock which uses the selected reference,
regardless of its frequency in relation to the receive data rate.
G.703: Applicable.

10.4 X.21 Notes

For X.21 operation, use the RS-422 pins, but ignore Receive Clock if the Modem is DTE, and
ignore Transmit clocks if the Modem is DCE.

10–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Clocking Modes MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure 10-1. Tx Clock Modes

10–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Clocking Modes MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure 10-2. Rx Clock Modes

10–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Clocking Modes MN/CDM570L.IOM

10.5 G.703 Clock Extension

There are some applications where it becomes necessary, at the distant end of a satellite link, to
provide a high-stability G.703 timing reference for timing equipment connected to the modem.
For instance, in cellular backhaul applications the BTS equipment may require such a reference,
even though the satellite link itself may be operating at a data rate other than 1.544 Mbps or
2.048 Mbps. Sometimes this is accomplished by adding a specialized GPS receiver at the distant
end, which then provides the G.703 synchronizing signal; however, with the G.703 clock
extension mode, this may become unnecessary, as the CDM-570/570L – operating at either end
of the link, where the local modem has access to a high-stability G.703 signal – can provide an
almost perfect copy of this signal at the distant end. The presence of Doppler shift on the link is
the only factor affecting the overall accuracy. If Doppler shift were not present, the copy of the
clock would be perfect.
This feature of the CDM570/570L is accomplished by the use of a novel frequency synthesis and
phase locking scheme. This permits the distant end to generate a G.703 synchronizing signal that,
depending on a sufficiently accurate local reference, has short term accuracy to within parts in 10-8,
and is solely dependent on link Doppler shift.
The subsections and figures that follow illustrate three possible G.703 clock extension modes.
Details of how to set up the modems for these various operating modes are given in Chapter 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION.

10.5.1 Clock Extension Mode 1

Figure 10-3 shows Clock Extension Mode 1. The local modem is assumed to be operating on
INTERNAL clock. A T1 or E1 G.703 signal is applied to the rear panel connector of the modem,
where the clock is recovered.
(Note: the G.703 signal is not intended to convey data – its function is only to provide a
synchronizing clock. The data is transferred using the EIA-530/V.35 serial interface.)
The internal clock reference generator locks, in both frequency and phase to this recovered clock,
and a special synthesizer generates an ST clock of ANY ARBITRARY FREQUENCY, over the
range 2.4 kHz to 9.98 MHz, with a resolution of 1 Hz. The synthesis is exact – there is no
approximation or residual error. For example, if the user selects 168.231 kbps as the transmit data
rate, and an E1 reference, there will be exactly 168,231 clock cycles generated for every
2,048,000 cycles of the E1 reference.
The internal ST clock is now used, as in the standard Internal Clock mode, to provide the timing
reference for the externally-connected equipment. The data is then transmitted, at the desired data
rate, to the distant end (or distant ends – this works for broadcast applications as well).
Now, at the distant end modem (timing mode: Rx Satellite), the Rx signal is received,
demodulated, and the clock is recovered. A second synthesizer, very similar to the one used at the
local modem, is now used to generate an E1 or T1 timing signal. Again, it should be emphasized
that the synthesis is exact.
The net result is that the E1 or T1 timing signal used at the local end is reproduced at the distant
end, regardless of the link data rate.
The only thing that affects the overall accuracy and stability of the copy of the clock is the
Doppler shift of the link itself. This will be very dependent on the particular satellite used, and the
accuracy of the orbital station keeping (often referred to as orbital inclination). Typically the

10–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Clocking Modes MN/CDM570L.IOM

Doppler variations are in the order of parts in 10-8 , but more importantly it should be recognized
that over a 24 hour period the net error will be zero, due to a fundamental characteristics of
geostationary orbits.
The T1 or E1 signal, available on the rear panel of the modem on the G.703 connectors, is now
used to provide a synchronizing source for equipment connected to the modem. The form of this
is an ‘all ones’ signal, which provides the maximum transition density in the AMI signal.
Note: This scheme is sufficiently flexible to permit an E1 signal to be used at the local end, and a
T1 signal to be reproduced at the distant end, or vice versa.

10.5.2 Clock Extension Mode 2

Figure 10-4 shows Clock Extension Mode 2. This is for situations where clock extension needs
to be performed, but there is no local G.703 reference. In this case the local modem now operates
in an EXTERNAL clock mode, and the accuracy of the Tx Clock is determined solely by the
accuracy of the equipment connected to the modem.
At the distant end, an E1 or T1 synchronizing signal is generated regardless of the link data rate,
as in Mode 1.

10.5.3 Clock Extension Mode 3

Figure 10-5 shows Clock Extension Mode 3. This is very similar to Mode 1, but now, instead of
the EIA-530/V.35 serial interface being used, the modems are equipped with the optional IP
module, and for the user, everything is based around the 10/100 Base T Ethernet interface.
At the distant end, an E1 or T1 synchronizing signal is generated regardless of the link data rate,
as in Mode 1.

10–7
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Clocking Modes MN/CDM570L.IOM

LOCAL END DISTANT END

USER
USER
EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT
SD SD RD
Mod
EIA-530 / v.35
TT TT

EIA-530 / v.35
Interface Demod RT

Interface
RD ST
Rx Demod
RT Buffer TT

SD
ST Notes:
Clock
Synth
Core
1) The EIA-530 / v.35 interface can
operate at any data rate, with

G.703 Port
G.703 Port

B
1 bps resolution
A
Any desired 2048 or
bit rate 1544 KHz
Clock 2) Tx and Rx bit rates can be O
O Synth
2048 or Core asymmetrical
1544 KHz

3) Works with multiple distant end G.703 output (T1/E1)

G.703 input (T1/E1)
CDM-570/570L CDM-570/570L (all ones pattern)
from high stability modems (STAR networks)
network source
Tx timing mode: Timing mode:
Internal clock locked to G.703 Usually loop timing (or Rx-Sat)
Rx buffer disabled
Rx:
Buffer enabled, clocked from ST
END RESULT:
The G.703 signal at A is perfectly reproduced
at B , regardless of the link data rate

Figure 10-3. G.703 Clock Extension Mode 1

10–8
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Clocking Modes MN/CDM570L.IOM

LOCAL END DISTANT END

USER
USER
EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT
SD
EIA-530 / v.35 SD
TT*

EIA-530 / v.35
TT
Interface

Interface
RT
ST*
RD RD
Demod RT RT

* TT assumed to be
derived from a high Notes: *ST optional
stability source
1) The modems can be set to any
A

G.703 Port
desired data rate, with 1 bps
Clock
resolution Synth O
Core
2048 or
2) Asymmetrical loop timing 1544 KHz G.703 output (T1/E1)
supported at distant end
(all ones pattern)
CDM-570/570L CDM-570/570L

Tx timing mode: Timing mode:

External clock Usually loop timing (or Rx-Sat)

Rx timing:
Not important END RESULT:
The G.703 signal at A is generated with
the same accuracy as TT at the local end

Figure 10-4. G.703 Clock Extension Mode 2

10–9
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Clocking Modes MN/CDM570L.IOM

LOCAL END DISTANT END

Rx clock at desired link data rate
CLK
Mod
DATA Demod
IP Interface

IP Interface
ETHERNET (HDLC) (HDLC) ETHERNET
DATA
RD
CLK Mod
Demod RT

Notes:
Any desired
1) The IP interface can be set to
B
data rate

G.703 Port
A
G.703 Port

any desired data rate, with 1 bps

resolution Clock
Clock O
Synth
O Synth
Core 2048 or
2048 or Core
1544 KHz
2) Tx and Rx rates can be 1544 KHz
asymmetrical G.703 output (T1/E1)
G.703 input (T1/E1)
CDM-570/570L CDM-570/570L (all ones pattern)
from high stability
network source
Tx timing mode: Timing mode:
Internal clock, locked to Rx buffer disabled
external G.703

Rx: END RESULT:

Buffer disabled The G.703 signal at A is perfectly reproduced
at B , regardless of the exact link data rate

Figure 10-5. G.703 Clock Extension Mode 3

10–10
 Chapter 11. EDMAC CHANNEL

11.1 Theory Of Operation

Embedded Distant-end Monitor And Control (EDMAC) is a feature that permits the user to
access the M&C features of modems that are at the distant-end of a satellite link. This is
accomplished by adding extra information to the user’s data in a manner that is completely
transparent to the user.
On the transmit side: The data is split into frames – each frame containing 1008 bits (except
Rate 21/44 BPSK Turbo or when the data rates exceed 2048 kbps – where the frame length is
2928 bits; and Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo – where the frame length is 3072 bits). 48 bits in each
frame are overhead, and the rest of these bits are the user’s data. This increases the rate of
transmission by 5% (approximately 1.6% for the Turbo BPSK cases, and for all data rates greater
than 2.048 Mbps). For example, if the user’s data rate is 64 kbps, the actual transmission rate will
now be at 67.2 kbps. Note that the user may also select EDMAC-2 framing, which uses a 2928 bit
frame, and yields a 1.6% overhead for all modulation types and data rates.
At the start of each frame, a 12-bit synchronization word is added. This allows the demodulator to
find and lock to the start of frame. At regular intervals throughout the frame, additional data bytes
and flag bits are added (a further 36 bits in total). It is these additional bytes which convey the
M&C data.
When framing is used, the normal V.35 scrambler is no longer used. This V.35 approach is called
‘self synchronizing’ because, in the receiver, no external information is required in order for the
descrambling process to recover the original data. The disadvantage of this method is that it
multiplies errors.
On average, if one bit error is present at the input of the descrambler, three output errors are
generated. However, there is an alternative when the data is in a framed format; in this case, a
different class of scrambler may be used – one which uses the start of frame information to start
the scrambling process at an exact known state. In the receiver, having synchronized to the frame,
the descrambler can begin its processing at exactly the right time. This method does not multiply
errors, and therefore has a clear advantage over V.35 scrambling.
This is fortunate, as there is a penalty to be paid for adding the framing. By adding the extra 5%
to the transmitted data rate, the effective Eb/No seen by the user will degrade by a factor of
10log(1.05), or 0.21 dB (0.07 dB in the case of the two BPSK Turbo rates). The use of an
externally synchronized scrambler and descrambler almost exactly compensates for this
degradation. The net effect is that the user will see effectively identical BER performance
whether framing is used or not.

11–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
EDMAC Channel MN/CDM570L.IOM

On the receive side: When the demodulator locks to the incoming carrier, it must go through the
additional step of searching for, and locking to, the synchronization word. This uniquely
identifies the start of frame, and permits the extraction of the overhead bytes and flag bits at the
correct position within the frame. In addition, the start of frame permits the descrambler to
correctly recover the data. The user’s data is extracted, and sent through additional processing, in
the normal manner. The extracted overhead bytes are examined to determine if they contain valid
M&C bytes.

11.2 M&C Connection

Data to be transmitted to the distant-end is sent to a local unit via the remote control port. A
message for the distant-end is indistinguishable from a ‘local’ message – it has the same structure
and content, only the address will identify it as being for a distant-end unit.
Before the M&C data can be successfully transmitted and received, pairs of units must be split
into EDMAC Masters and EDMAC Slaves. Masters are local to the M&C Computer, and Slaves
are distant-end.
Now, a unit which has been designated an EDMAC master not only responds to its own unique
bus address, but it will also be configured to listen for the address which corresponds to its
EDMAC Slave. When a complete message packet has been received by the EDMAC Master, it
will begin to transmit this packet over the satellite channel, using the overhead bytes which
become available.
Note: The ‘normal’ protocol for the message packet is not used over the satellite path, as it is
subject to errors. For this reason, a much more robust protocol is used which incorporates
extensive error checking.
At the distant-end, the EDMAC slave, configured for the correct address, receives these bytes,
and when a complete packet has been received, it will take the action requested, and then send the
appropriate response to the EDMAC Master, using the return overhead path on the satellite link.
The EDMAC Master assembles the complete packet, and transmits the response back to the
M&C Computer.
Apart from the round-trip satellite delay, the M&C Computer does not see any difference
between local and distant-end units – it sends out a packet, addressed to a particular unit, and gets
back a response. It can be seen that the EDMAC Master simply acts as forwarding service, in a
manner which is completely transparent.
This approach does not require any additional cabling – connection is made using the normal
M&C remote port. Furthermore, the user does not have to worry about configuring the baud rate
of the M&C connection to match the lowest data rate modem in the system. The M&C system
can have mixed data-rate modems, from 2.4 kbps to 2048 kbps, and still run at speeds in excess
of 19,200 baud. It should be pointed out that at 2.4 kbps, the effective throughput of the overhead
channel is only 11 async characters/second. For a message of 24 bytes, the time between sending
a poll request and receiving a response will be around 5 seconds. (Note that when either of the
BPSK Turbo rates are in use, the overhead rate is reduced by a factor of three, and therefore the
response time will be around 15 seconds.)

11–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
EDMAC Channel MN/CDM570L.IOM

11.3 Setup Summary

To access a distant-end unit:

Step Instructions

1 Designate a Master/Slave pair: Master at the local-end, Slave at the distant-end.

On the local-end unit, enable framing, and EDMAC, define the unit as MASTER, then
2 enter the bus address. This is constrained to be ‘base 10' meaning that only
addresses such as 10, 20, 30, 40, etc, are allowed.

Choose a unique bus address for the distant-end. This should normally be set to the
3 ‘base 10' address + 1. For example, if the MASTER unit is set to 30, choose 31 for
the distant-end unit.

On the distant-end unit, enable framing, and EDMAC, define the unit as SLAVE, then
4
enter the bus address. The orange EDMAC Mode LED should be illuminated.

Set the local-end unit to RS485 remote control, and set the bus address of this local
5
unit. The orange Remote Mode LED should be illuminated.

Once the satellite link has been established, connect the M&C Computer, and begin
6
communications, with both the local and distant end units.

Note: EDMAC modes are fully compatible with AUPC modes.

11–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
EDMAC Channel MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

11–4
 Chapter 12. OFFSET QPSK
OPERATION
Offset QPSK modulation is a variation of normal QPSK, which is offered in the
CDM-570/570L. Normal, bandlimited QPSK produces an RF signal envelope that necessarily
goes through a point of zero amplitude when the modulator transitions through non-adjacent
phase states. This is not considered to be a problem in most communication systems, as long
as the entire signal processing chain is linear.
However, when bandlimited QPSK is passed through a non-linearity (for instance, a saturated
power amplifier), there is a tendency for the carefully-filtered spectrum to degrade. This
phenomenon is termed ‘spectral re-growth’, and at the extreme (hard limiting) the original,
unfiltered sin(x)/x spectrum would result. In most systems, this would cause an unacceptable
level of interference to adjacent carriers, and would cause degradation of the BER
performance of the corresponding demodulator.
To overcome the problem of the envelope collapsing to a point of zero amplitude, Offset
QPSK places a delay between I and Q channels of exactly 1/2 symbol. Now the modulator
cannot transition through zero when faced with non-adjacent phase states. The result is that
there is far less variation in the envelope of the signal, and non-linearities do not cause the
same level of degradation.
The demodulator must re-align the I and Q symbol streams before the process of carrier
recovery can take place. For various reasons this makes the process of acquisition more
difficult, and acquisition times may be longer, especially at low data rates.

12–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Offset QPSK Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

12–2
 Chapter 13. IP MODULE
ETHERNET INTERFACE

13.1 Introduction
The CDM-570/570L’s optional IP Module Ethernet Interface makes the CDM-570/570L a
high-performance, low-cost, IP-centric satellite modem that is well-suited for closed network
Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC) links. It is also ideal for many VSAT applications.
The CDM-570/570L, when equipped with the optional IP Module, can also be utilized in a
ViperSat satellite bandwidth management system. For specific information on the
CDM-570/570L IP Module operation when deployed in a ViperSat system, refer to adjunct
Comtech EF Data publication MN/22125 – Vipersat CDM-570/570L Satellite Network Modem
Router User Guide.

13.2 Major Assemblies

Assembly Description
PL/10235-1 IP Ethernet Module MPP-50

13.3 IP Module Standard Features

• 10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface;
• Powerful Network Management:
o Front Panel operation for complete product management;
o Web Server interface for complete product management;
o SNMP with public and private MIB;
o Console Port interface for local network management;
o Telnet interface for remote product M&C;
o Remote software/firmware upgrade via FTP.
• Configuration Backup and Restore via FTP;
• Event Logging to Capture all IP Module Activity;
• Detailed Statistics of IP traffic;

13–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

• IGMP Support for Multicast;

• Static IP Routing for Unicast and Multicast;
• Managed Switch Mode with VLAN Support (added in Firmware Ver. 1.5.4);
• Streamline Encapsulation (added in Firmware Ver. 1.7.0).

13.3.1 10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface

In Router Mode operation, the 10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface is used for routing IP traffic to be
transmitted over the satellite or routed to another device on the local LAN. In Managed Switch
Mode, the Ethernet Interface is used to forward IP and non-IP traffic over the satellite. Local or
remote management of all CDM-570/570L and IP Module functions is also available via Telnet,
HTTP, or SNMP.

13.3.2 Powerful Network Management

The CDM-570/570L IP-Centric Modem may be configured, operated and monitored using any of
the following methods:

Modem IP Module
User Interface Connection Reference
Functions Functions
IP Address/Subnet
Front Panel Local - Keypad ALL Chapter 5
Mask only
Local or remote - Ethernet via
SNMP ALL ALL Chapter 6.4
10/100 BaseT Traffic interface
Local or remote - Ethernet via
Web Server ALL ALL Chapter 13.6
10/100 BaseT Traffic interface
Serial Command Local - Serial RS-232 via
ALL ALL Chapter 14
Line Interface (CLI) Console Port
Local or remote - Ethernet via
Telnet ALL ALL Chapter 14
10/100 BaseT Traffic interface
Serial Remote Local - Serial RS-232/RS-485 IP Address/Subnet
ALL Appendix D
Control via Remote Control Port Mask only

13.3.3 Remote Software/Firmware Upgrade via FTP

The IP Module uses ‘flash memory’ technology internally, and new firmware can be uploaded to
or from an external PC by FTP. This makes software upgrading very simple, and updates can now
be sent via the Internet, E-mail, or on disk. The upgrade can be performed without opening the
unit or having to be in the same physical location.

13.3.4 Configuration Backup and Restore via FTP

All Base Modem and IP Module configuration parameters are stored in a simple text file. The
parameter file can easily be retrieved locally or remotely by FTP. The file can then be used to
quickly configure a replacement modem if needed.

13–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.3.5 Event Logging to Capture all IP Module Activity

All IP Module activity can be stored into an easy-to-read Event Log. This file can also be retrieved
locally or remotely by FTP.

13.3.6 Detailed Statistics of IP Traffic

IP traffic statistics are continuously updated and allow detailed performance analysis or can be
used to identify traffic problems. The statistics are available through the Serial Console locally, or
can be gathered remotely by Telnet, HTTP, or SNMP.

13.3.7 IGMP Support for Multicast

IGMP is a standard feature in the IP Module. If enabled, it responds to IGMP queries for the
configured multicast routes on the transmit side and generates IGMP queries on the receive side.
If there are no active IGMP receivers on the LAN, it will stop forwarding the multicast traffic
(received from the satellite) to the LAN.

13.3.8 Static IP Routing for Unicast and Multicast

Up to 256 static routes can be entered into the IP Module to direct IP traffic over the satellite or to
another device on the local LAN. These 256 routes could be in any combination of unicast and
multicast.

13.3.9 Managed Switch Mode

Managed Switch Mode is the Comtech EF Data IP modem intelligent networking solution that
allows a link to be setup with minimal configuration (no specific routes need to be configured).
The IP Module also supports non-IP traffic with Managed Switch Mode. All IP traffic will be
subject to user configured QoS restrictions.

13.3.9.1 Managed Switch Mode Operation

1. Managed Switch Mode will automatically use Header Compression for

compressing Layer 2 (even if Header Compression option has not been
IMPORTANT purchased). Because of this, some of the initial traffic sent between two
devices will not be received over the satellite until a full Header is
transmitted. For example, the default Header Compression Refresh Rate is
50 packets. If a ping is sent over the satellite, then it will time out until the
full Header packet is sent. The Header Compression Refresh Rate on the
Administration Menu can be reduced to minimize the amount of traffic lost
when traffic is first sent between two devices. Once communication
between two devices has been established, both IP modems will be able
to receive all traffic, unless one IP modem is power cycled or reset.
Header Compression feature should be enabled for compressing Layer 3,
Layer 4 and Layer 5.
2. Do not enable IF Loopback (or link the TX to RX by a BNC cable or
satellite) on a IP modem operating in Managed Switch Mode when

13–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

connected to a LAN. In this configuration, Managed Switch Mode will

resend all Layer 2 broadcast packets and cause a “broadcast storm” on
the LAN. To perform a loop test to verify the modem or satellite link, do
one of the following:
a) Reconfigure the CDM-570/570L interface selection: From the front
panel, select ConfigÆ Intfc, then select RS422, V.35, or RS232.
- OR -
b) Set the IP Module to Router Mode.

Information about how Managed Switch Mode functions, as well as a detailed description for
how a Managed Switch Mode pair should be set up and configured, is as follows:
• Because Managed Switch Mode is a “smart wire,” the devices attached to it on either side
of the satellite should be on the same subnet and should not configure a next hop address
to be the CDM-570/570L IP address (as should be done with router mode). For purposes
of configuration, Managed Switch Mode should be viewed to function in much the same
way as a bridge (however, without spanning tree protocol).
• All of the features that groom and optimize the satellite link in router mode are also
available in Managed Switch Mode.
• Managed Switch Mode Multicast Option – Multicast packets in Managed Switch Mode
are identified using multicast MAC address. These identified multicast packets are either
routed or dropped based on the Managed Switch Mode multicast option.
• Managed Switch Mode uses Layer 2 (MAC) addresses to learn where to send packets. In
comparison, router mode uses the destination IP address in the packet in conjunction with
the route table to determine where to forward the packets.
• The IP Module Ethernet Interface in Managed Switch Mode is configured to be in
promiscuous mode with a data rate of 10/100BaseT Half Duplex/Full Duplex. The
IP Module needs to be in promiscuous mode in order to learn the attached networking
devices.
• Since Managed Switch Mode does not use a routing table, the determination of where to
send a packet is made by a learning process. When the system is powered-up, all packets
from each subnet (local and remote) will be sent over the satellite interface. However, as
each IP Module learns which devices are attached to their local Ethernet interfaces, the IP
Module begins to filter packets which it has learned are locally attached to its Ethernet
interface.
• The Managed Switch Mode learning/forwarding algorithm is as follows:
o If the packet is destined for the IP Module, then process it locally.
o If the packet is from the Ethernet interface, then send it to the Satellite interface; OR
if the destination Layer 2 (MAC) address of the packets matches the source Layer 2
address for a packet we have already seen, then the destination MAC address of this
packet is on our local subnet; so why send it over the satellite interface. In this case,
the IP Module will drop the packet.
o If the packet is from the satellite interface, then send it out the Ethernet interface.

13–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

• Managed Switch Mode also supports VLAN’s and when VLAN Mode is enabled, will
forward traffic as follows:
o If an untagged packet arrives at the IP Module, it will egress as a tagged packet with
the defined Native VLAN ID.
o VLAN entries can be added into the VLAN Table and to forward VLAN's over the
satellite. A VLAN entry is also needed on the receiving CDM-570 to receive the
VLAN traffic and they will egress as tagged VLAN's.
o If a tagged packet arrives at the Ethernet port, it will only be forwarded if there is a
matching VLAN entry in the VLAN Table and it will egress as tagged. If there is no
matching VLAN in the VLAN Table, the tagged packet will be dropped.
• VLAN operation in the CDM-570 also includes full 802.1Q VLAN QoS support. With
the QoS Option enabled, the IP Module will read the 802.1Q VLAN Priority (7 through
0) that is in the VLAN Header in each VLAN frame received and will prioritize traffic
accordingly.

13.3.10 Streamline Encapsulation (Version 1.7.x and later)

Numerous encapsulation techniques exist for transporting packetized data including HDLC and
GSM. Many of them perform well on large packet sizes, but produce excessive overhead on
smaller packet sizes such as those found in VoIP or when Header and / or Payload compression
techniques are utilized. Some, such as HDLC, are data dependent making it impossible to specify
the amount of user bandwidth available and giving a lower bound of 3% in purely random data
regardless of how large the packets are.
The Comtech Streamline Encapsulation method was developed to provide a low overhead method
of transporting any size packetized data. It provides superior performance on small packets and
performs well on large packets, with overhead performance approaching 1%.
As shown in Table 13-1, the three basic encapsulation methodologies are compared and, as this
table illustrates, the large performance gain of over GSM and HDLC encapsulation on smaller
packets far outweighs the 1% disadvantage on large packets. With respect to HDLC, Comtech
Streamline Encapsulation outperforms the longtime industry standard on all packet sizes.

Table 13-1. Streamlined Encapsulation

Packet Size GSM (%) HDLC (%) Comtech Streamline (%)
32 15.6 18.8 7.4
64 7.8 10.9 4.3
128 3.9 7.0 2.7
256 2.0 5.1 2.0
512 1.0 4.1 1.6
1024 0.5 3.6 1.4
2048 0.2 3.4 1.3

Additional advantages of Streamline Encapsulation include:

• HDLC addresses are removed to reduce overhead and deployment configuration
complexity;
• HDLC addressing modes have been removed;

13–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

• Receive Header Compression is now automatically determine from the Streamline

encapsulation information. This removes the need to configure the Rx Header
Decompression feature (these options have been removed);
• The Vipersat STDMA ACK packet (one per burst) is much smaller (42 to 14 bytes).

13.3.10.1 Combined Working Mode

In order greatly simply the configuration complexity, the working modes operation of modem
have been centralized in the single Working Mode configuration parameter, which in turn offer
the following functional parameters:
Mode Selection Function
Managed switch with support for VLAN as well as advanced
features such as QoS, Header Compression and Payload
Managed Switch
Compression. Primarily intended for operation in a point-to-point
topology.
Hub side router in a Point-to-Multipoint network.
Router-Hub
Allows Sat-to-sat
Remote Router in a Point-to-Multipoint network. Packets from
Router-Remote the WAN are not allowed to be sent to the WAN. No longer
requires HDLC receive addresses to be configured.
Router-Point to Point Point-to-Point router in Point-to-Point configurations.
Vipersat Router-Hub Hub router in a Vipersat Network
Vipersat Router-Hub Expansion Hub Expansion router in a Vipersat Network
Vipersat Router-Remote Remote router in a Vipersat Network
Vipersat Router-Remote Expansion Remote Expansion Router in a Vipersat Network.

Note: The Vipersat “Unit Role” and “Expansion Role” parameters are not read-only.

13.4 IP Module Optional Features

Enhancing the IP Module performance is easy. Additional features can be added quickly on site,
using the FAST access code purchased from Comtech EF Data. To enable these features, simply
enter the applicable FAST code via the CDM-570/570L front panel. See Appendix C. FAST
ACTIVATION PROCEDURE for more information.
• 3xDES Data Encryption;
• IP Header Compression;
• Payload Compression;
• Quality of Service (QoS) – supports three different modes of QoS:
o Minimum/Maximum Bandwidth;
o Maximum Bandwidth/Priority;
o DiffServ.
• Vipersat (Management by VMS);
• VFS (Vipersat File Streaming).

13–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.4.1 CDM-570/570L IP Module Demo Mode

Demo Mode temporarily enables the following IP optional features:
• IP Header Compression;
• Payload Compression;
• Quality of Service (QoS);
• Vipersat;
• VFS.
The Demo Mode is a cumulative counter that can be stopped and started at any time, for a total
time duration of up to seven (7) days, or 168 hours.
To enable Demo Mode: From the CDM-570/570L front panel, select UTIL: DEMO Æ ON.
The seven day Demo Mode Timer will start but can be stopped at any time by setting Demo
Mode to OFF.

All IP FAST Options except 3xDES Encryption may be temporarily enabled

using the 7-day Demo Mode.
IMPORTANT

13.4.2 3xDES Encryption with Ability to Change Keys

The IP Module optionally supports 3xDES-128 (using NIST certified 3x core) encryption and
decryption, for the highest level security for link encryption. Each unit supports eight encryption
keys and eight decryption keys. The keys are user configurable. Each route can be assigned to be
encrypted by any of the eight available keys, random key method, or transmitted in clear.

13.4.3 IP Header Compression

Header Compression is an optional feature of the IP Module. The IP Module supports Header
Compression for the following Ethernet and Layer 3, 4 & 5 Headers:
Supported Ethernet Headers Supported Layer 3 & 4 Headers
Ethernet 2.0 IP
Ethernet 2.0 + VLAN-tag TCP
Ethernet 2.0 + MPLS UDP
802.3-raw RTP (Codec Independent)
802.3-raw + VLAN-tag
802.3 + 802.2
802.3 + 802.2 + VLAN-tag
802.3 + 802.2 + SNAP
802.3 + 802.2 + SNAP + VLAN-tag
802.3 + 802.2 + SNAP + MPLS

Header Compression reduces the required VoIP bandwidth by 60 percent. Example: A G.729a
voice codec, operating at 8 kbps, will occupy 32 kbps once encapsulated into IP framing on a

13–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

LAN. Using IP/UDP/RTP Header Compression, the same traffic only needs 10.8 kbps total WAN
satellite bandwidth to cross the link. A total maximum of 64 simultaneous VoIP calls can be
compressed. Normal Web/HTTP traffic can be reduced an additional 10% via IP/TCP header
compression. Note the following:
• Header Compression Configuration is completely independent from QoS, and there is
no configuration required except enabling the Header Compression feature on both the
sending and receiving Comtech EF Data IP modem. Packets with a Header Compression
supported header will automatically be identified for compression. The only
configuration consideration is the Header Compression Refresh Rate. This is how many
compressed header packets will be sent before a single full header packet is sent. Some
compressed header traffic could be lost during deteriorated satellite link conditions.
Sending a full header packet will allow the return of the traffic stream. The Refresh Rate
can be increased for poor satellite link conditions or decreased to further reduce
overhead.
• Header Compression Statistics will display the total bytes of the pre-compressed and
post-compressed traffic and effective compression ratio.

13.4.4 Payload Compression

Traffic optimization through Payload Compression is an optional feature of the IP Module. Note the
following::
• FAST feature to upgrade;
• Uses AHA chip;
• Compression algorithm applied to all data (HDLC header excluded);
• Compression statistics are fed back to QoS in order to maximize WAN utilization while
maintaining priority, jitter and latency;
• 1024 simultaneous compression sessions to maximize compression across multiple
distinct traffic flows;
• Compression algorithm not applied to RTP streams because this traffic is already
compressed and would only INCREASE the sat bandwidth if compressed again;
• Additional statistics have been added to the compression statistics menu in order to
provide feedback on the compression efficiency that has been achieved;
• Payload Compression is selectable on a per route basis.

13.4.4.1 ADLC vs. LZS Compression Comparison

These numbers have been generated by using an internally created test program. This program
takes the target benchmark files and splits the files into payload size chunks and compresses each
chunk in a separate invocation of the compression algorithm. This is important to note because
most compression algorithms are applied to the entire file data set as a single invocation of the
compression algorithm which is easier for other types of compression algorithms (LZS, GZIP in
specific). This, of course, does not apply to streamed packet data across an IP network (FTP
transfer, for example).

13–8
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Algorithm Payload size File Set Ratio

1472 1.76
1000 1.76
Calgary
500 1.77
100 2.09
ADLC
1472 1.71
1000 1.72
Canterbury
500 1.74
100 2.04
1472 1.66
1000 1.66
Calgary
500 1.68
100 1.97
LZS
1472 1.61
1000 1.62
Canterbury
500 1.63
100 1.91

13.4.5 Quality of Service

Quality of Service (QoS) is an optional feature of the IP Module. The user may select one of three
modes of QoS operation:
• Mode 1 – QoS Rules based on Maximum Bandwidth and Priority;
• Mode 2 – QoS Rules based on Minimum and Maximum Bandwidth;
• Mode 3 – DiffServ.
QoS Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR): Packet Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) is
enabled automatically while QoS is enabled. However, SAR is an adaptive process; it will trigger
only if the packet latency exceeds the threshold value (default to 20 msec). Latency value is
calculated based on the satellite transmission bandwidth. There is no minimum segment size.
However if the last segment is less than 16 bytes, then it will be appended to the previous
segment excluding satellite HDLC header in order to avoid satellite overhead and consumption of
CPU cycles.
Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED): The MIN-MAX and MAX-Priority QoS modes
allow the user to enable or disable the WRED option. In Diffserv mode, WRED is applicable to
Asure forwarding only; however, the user can change the WRED option. WRED allows for more
graceful dropping of packets as QoS queues get full. Typically, without WRED, packets are
dropped based upon a simple tail drop algorithm that is applied to packets as they are being added
to the QoS queues. This can result in large numbers of contiguous packets being dropped, which
causes many protocols such as RTP and TCP to ungracefully degrade performance in an over-
consumed or bursty scenario. WRED applies a randomization, which means that the percentage
change to drop packets increases as the queue becomes full, and minimizes the chances of global
synchronization. Thus, WRED allows the transmission line to be used fully at all times.
System Latency: System latency is used to define the maximum duration that a packet will stay
in a QoS queue. Rather than waste satellite bandwidth on invalid packets, this mechanism serves
to ensure that old packets are “aged” out of the system.

13–9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.4.5.1 Maximum Bandwidth/Priority QoS Mode

QoS Rules can be assigned to up to 32 different types of flows to be defined by the user. Flows
can be defined by any combination of Protocol (FTP, UDP, RTP, etc.), Source/Destination IP
(specific or range), and/or Layer 3 Source/Destination Port.
Priority – A Priority level from 1 to 8 is assigned for each flow:
• The IP Module classifies each packet that is to be forwarded over the satellite; the packet
then has a Priority assigned according to the defined QoS Rules;
• Any latency critical traffic such as VoIP/RTP should always be assigned Priority 1.;
• Priority 1 packets are forwarded immediately; Priority 2 packets are forwarded as soon as
there are no Priority 1 packets in the Queue; and so on;
• Any packet that does not meet a QoS Rule is assigned to the Default Rule and is assigned
a Priority of 9.
Maximum Bandwidth – This can also be assigned to a flow to restrict the Maximum Bandwidth that
any particular flow will utilize; otherwise, the default of no bandwidth restriction can be selected.
Filtering – QoS also allows specific flows to be designated as “filtered,” so the IP Module will
discard traffic that the user does not want to forward over a satellite link.
QoS Rule Hierarchy – It is quite possible to have traffic that meets the definitions of several
QoS Rules. All traffic will be classified into the first QoS Rule that is a match, or fall into the
Default Rule. The most specific QoS Rule will always be first. For example, a QoS Rule that
identified a Source and Destination IP Address would be assigned ahead of a rule that just defined
RTP protocol. QoS Rules that have the same amount of variables defined are sorted as follows:
1. Having a Protocol defined:
Protocol Priority
CTRX CITRIX Protocol
FTP File Transfer Protocol
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
IP All Internet Protocol
N-IP All Non-Internet Protocol
ORCL ORACLE Protocol
RTP All Real Time Protocol
RTPS Real Time Protocol Signaling
SAP Service Announcement Protocol
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SQL Structured Query Language Protocol
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TELN Telnet Protocol
UDP User Datagram Protocol
VDEO Video Real Time Protocol
+ Voice Real Time Protocol

13–10
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

2. Source IP Address or subnet defined.

3. Destination IP Address or subnet defined.
4. Source Port defined (lowest Port number first).
5. Destination Port defined (lowest Port number first).
The IP Module will sort each QoS rule as they are added and the QoS Configuration display will
be updated to reflect the order with which rules are matched.
QoS Statistics – Every QoS Rule defined can be monitored to see the traffic flow for each
Queue. These statistics will display the traffic sent in each Queue, the amount of dropped traffic,
and the number of Active Flows.
Protocol and Port Number Considerations – When defining QoS Rules, it is important to be
aware of specifics of the traffic for which the rule is intended. When selecting a protocol for a
QoS Rule, be aware that the IP Module allows for a very broad selection (such as IP) or a very
specific protocol. For example, RTP traffic can consist of UDP portion (for voice or video) and a
TCP portion (for RTP signaling). These could have separate QoS Rules created or all be included
in a single Rule by selecting RTP as the protocol.
The following diagram illustrates where each protocol selection resides:

VOCE SNMP
UDP

VDEO
IP RTP
RTPS FTP HTTP

TCP
TELN SMTP SAP

ORCL CTRX SQL

Non IP

Selection of Source/Destination Ports should only be done if the user is aware of the port usage of
the desired protocol or application. There are well known ports for various protocols, but often
only the ‘command’ messaging is transacted on these ports and the ‘data’ is transferred through a
negotiated port.

13–11
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

The following table can be used as a reference for some well known Port numbers:
Port Description Port Description
1 TCP Port Service Multiplexer (TCPMUX) 118 SQL Services
7 ECHO 119 Newsgroup (NNTP)
20 FTP - Data 137 NetBIOS Name Service
21 FTP - Control 139 NetBIOS Datagram Service
22 SSH Remote Login Protocol 150 NetBIOS Session Service
23 Telnet 156 SQL Server
25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) 161 SNMP
42 Host Name Server (Nameserv) 179 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
53 Domain Name System (DNS) 190 Gateway Access Control Protocol (GACP)
69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) 197 Directory Location Service (DLS)
70 Gopher Services 396 Novell Netware over IP
80 HTTP 443 HTTPS
108 SNA Gateway Access Server 444 Simple Network Paging Protocol (SNPP)
109 POP2 546 DHCP Client
110 POP3 547 DHCP Server
115 Simple File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) 1080 Socks

Once the QoS Rules are defined, each type of traffic flow should be
IMPORTANT
isolated and sent to verify that it is being sent in the intended QoS Rule.

13.4.5.2 Minimum/Maximum Bandwidth QoS Mode

QoS Rules can be assigned to up to 32 different types of flows to be defined by the user. Flows
can be defined by any combination of Protocol (FTP, UDP, RTP, etc.), Source/Destination IP
(specific or range), and/or Layer 3 Source/Destination Port.
Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) – The Min/Max BW QoS mode allows the user to
select Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED).
WRED allows for more graceful dropping of packets as QoS queues get full. Typically, without
WRED, packets are dropped based upon a simple tail drop algorithm that is applied to packets as
they are being added to the QoS queues. This can result in large numbers of contiguous packets
being dropped, which causes many protocols such as RTP and TCP to ungracefully degrade
performance in a over-consumed or bursty scenario. WRED applies a randomization, which
means that the percentage change to drop packets increases as the queue becomes full, and
minimizes the chances of global synchronization. Thus, WRED allows the transmission line to be
used fully at all times.
Maximum Bandwidth – This can be assigned to a flow to restrict the Maximum Bandwidth that
any particular flow will utilize; otherwise, the default of no bandwidth restriction can be selected.
Minimum Bandwidth – Minimum specification that allows a committed information rate (CIR)
to be applied to user defined classes of traffic; otherwise, the default of no minimum bandwidth
can be selected.
Filtering – Any specific flow can be designated as filtered (see Maximum Bandwidth/Priority QoS).

13–12
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

QoS Rule Hierarchy – The QoS Rule Hierarchy is the same as Maximum Bandwidth/Priority QoS.
QoS Statistics – QoS Statistics are displayed as Maximum Bandwidth/Priority QoS.

13.4.5.3 DiffServ QoS Mode

The IP Module QoS can also be set to DiffServ Mode to make it fully compliant to the
Differential Services QoS RFC standards.
Class Selector DiffServ Code Points (DSCP) – Some implementations of DiffServ will
prioritize traffic by Class Selector assignment. This is defined in the DiffServ Code Points
(DSCP) within the IP header. The first three bits of the DSCP define the Class Selector
Precedence (or Priority):

Class Selector DSCP IP Module Priority

Precedence 1 001 000 7
Precedence 2 010 000 6
Precedence 3 011 000 5
Precedence 4 100 000 4
Precedence 5 101 000 3
Precedence 6 110 000 2
Precedence 7 111 000 1
Default 000 000 9

The IP Module will prioritize the traffic based upon the DSCP Class Selector Precedence.
Note: All traffic that does not have the DSCP Class Selector Precedence defined (000 000) will
be placed in the Default Queue and have a Precedence of 9.
Expedited Forwarding and Assured Forwarding DSCP – Another implementation of DiffServ
uses all six bits of the DSCP to define Expedited and Assured Forwarding:
DiffServ Type Class Selector DSCP IP Module Priority
Expedited Forwarding Precedence 1 101 110 3
Assured Forwarding – Class 1 Precedence 8 001 xx0 7
Assured Forwarding – Class 2 Precedence 8 010 xx0 7
Assured Forwarding – Class 3 Precedence 8 011 xx0 7
Assured Forwarding – Class 4 Precedence 8 100 xx0 7

Expedited Forwarding (EF) DSCP – This defines premium service and is recommended for
real time traffic applications such as VoIP and video conferencing.
Assured Forwarding (AF) DSCP – This defines four service levels and also uses the last three
bits of the DSCP to define the Drop Precedence (Low, Medium, or High). The Drop Precedence
determines which packets will most likely be dropped during periods of over congestion, similar
to Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED). As a result, each of the four AF service levels
also have three Drop Precedence levels for which the IP Module provides 12 separate queues.
Minimum Bandwidth (AF only) – Minimum specification that allows a committed information
rate (CIR) to be applied to user defined classes of traffic, or the default of no minimum bandwidth
can be selected.

13–13
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Maximum Bandwidth (AF only) – This can be assigned to a flow to restrict the maximum
bandwidth that any particular flow will utilize, or the default of no bandwidth restriction can be
selected.
Notes:
1. Minimum and maximum bandwidth is only configurable for each of the four Assured
Forwarding classes.
2. Typically, DiffServ is implemented using exclusively Class Selector DSCP or exclusively
Expedited and Assured Forwarding DSCP. The IP Module is fully DiffServ compliant and
will work with either DiffServ implementation, or with a combination of both.

13.5 IP Module Specifications – Supported RFCs and Protocols

Supported RFC Protocol
RFC 768 User Datagram Protocol RFC 791 Internet Protocol
RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol RFC 793 Transmission Control Protocol
RFC 826 An Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol RFC 856 Telnet Binary Transmission
RFC 894 A Standard for the Transmission of IP Datagrams
RFC 862 Echo Protocol
over Ethernet Networks
RFC 959 File Transfer Protocol RFC 1112 Host Extensions for IP Multicasting
RFC 1213 Management Information Base for Network
RFC 1812 Requirements for IP Version 4 Routers
Management of TCP/IP-based internet: MIB-II
RFC 2045 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2
RFC 2474 Definition of the Differentiated Services Field
RFC 2475 An Architecture for Differentiated Services
(DS Field) in the Ipv4 and Ipv6 Headers
RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2
RFC 2597 Assured Forwarding PHB Group
(SMIv2)
RFC 2598 An Expedited Forwarding PHB RFC 2616 Hypertext Transfer Protocol – HTTP/1.1
RFC 3412 Message Processing and Dispatching for the
RFC 2821 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the RFC 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

13.6 IP Module Web Server Interface

The embedded IP Module Web Server Interface integrates a good portion of the CDM-570/570L
Base Modem Web Server Interface functionality (outlined in detail in the previous Chapter 7. Base
Modem Web Server Interface) with the configuration and monitoring features unique to the IP
Module Interface. Accordingly, the IP Module Web Server provides an easy-to-use interface for
configuring and monitoring most aspects of the CDM-570/570L modem and all IP Module
parameters.

The user can fully control and monitor operation of the IP

Module from the IP Module Web Server Interface. By
rolling the cursor over the tabs located at the top of each
page, the user can select from the available nested
hyperlinks (as shown to the right).

13–14
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

The pages in the IP Module Web Server Interface have been designed to work using either
Microsoft’s Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or higher, or Mozilla Firefox Version 2.0 or higher (the
examples shown use Internet Explorer Version 6.0).
1. The Ethernet M&C port is designed to be used on a CDM-570/570L modem
that does NOT have the optional IP Module installed. With the IP Module
IMPORTANT installed, the IP Module Traffic port and base modem M&C port will share
the same IP address and can cause an IP conflict on the local network if
both ports are used. Therefore, when the IP Module is installed, only the IP
Module Traffic port should be used for IP traffic, base modem and IP
Module FW upgrades, and Ethernet Management. The Traffic port supports
Ethernet Management of all IP Module functions as well as all base modem
functions via Web, Telnet and SNMP.
2. In order to make any IP Module modifications permanent, the unit
configuration must be saved before rebooting the unit (select Maint/Save).

13.6.1 Web Server Menu Tree

The following menu tree illustrates the options available through this interface:

Home Admin Modem IP Stats Maint

Home Summary Modem Interface Ethernet Unit Info

Contact Mode Utilities Routes Routes Operations

Support Access Status Multicast QoS*1 Save

Logoff Features Logs QoS Mode*1 WAN Reboot

Remote BUC2 QoS*1 Compression*1

Encryption*1 LNB2 ARP

VLAN

IGMP

Redundancy

Notes:
1. * indicates a FAST Feature that is accessible from the interface only after that option has
been purchased and activated via the CDM-570/570L front panel. See Appendix C. FAST
ACTIVATION PROCEDURE for more information.
2. The ‘BUC’ and ‘LNB’ hyperlinks are available only on the CDM-570L Base Modem and IP
Module Web Server Interfaces. They provide the user with the means to control and monitor a

13–15
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Block Upconverter or Low-Noise Block Down Converter connected to the CDM-570L. Refer to
Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU (BUC, LNB) OPERATION for complete details on ODU
operations via the CDM-570L Base Modem and IP Module Web Server Interfaces.

13.6.2 User Login

To initiate a Web session with the CDM-570/570L IP Module, from a Web browser type
http://www.xxx.yyy.zzzz (where “www.xxx.yyy.zzz” represents the IP address of the IP Module)
into the browser’s Address area:

The Login window will appear, and the user is prompted to type a User Name and Password:

Network Processor default Admin User Name – comtech

Network Processor default Admin Password – comtech

Type the User Name and Password, then click [OK].

HTTP Login Access Levels, User Names, and Passwords are defined as follows:
User User Login Access Level
Interface Admin User Read/Write User Read Only User
No Access to Admin – Access,
No Access to Admin – Access, Features, Remote, or Encryption
Features, Remote, or Encryption Pages
Full Access to all Pages No Access to Maint – Operation
Web
Web Pages Page
Full Access for all other Web View Only Access for all other Web
Pages Pages

CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem Web Server Default Name/Passwords

Admin User Read/Write User Read Only User

comtech/comtech opcenter/1234 monitor/1234

13–16
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Once the valid User Name and Password is accepted, the user will see the CDM-570/570L IP
Module Web Server Interface “splash” page:

From this top level page the user has access to six navigation tabs – Home, Admin (Administration),
Modem, IP, Stats (Statistics), and Maint (Maintenance). As previously noted in Sect. 13.6.1,
depending on the unit configuration and FAST Features purchased, access to the nested
hyperlinks is dependent on the configuration of standard and optional features.
Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.

13–17
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3 Web Server Page Descriptions

13.6.3.1 Home Pages

13.6.3.1.1 Home | Home

Figure 13-1. Home | Home Page

13–18
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.1.2 Home | Contact

Figure 13-2. Home | Contact page

The ‘Home | Contact’ page (Figure 13-2) provides the basic contact information for Comtech
EF Data Sales and Service via e-mail links, phone, or fax.

13–19
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.1.3 Home | Support

Figure 13-3. Home | Customer Support page

The ‘Home | Support’ page (Figure 13-3) allows the user to compose an e-mail message for
questions or problems with the CDM-570/570L modem.

The Problem Report area of the display allows up to 256 characters maximum.

The CDM-570/570L Support Web Page uses SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) to send
e-mail to Comtech EF Data Modem Support (cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com).

For this page to operate correctly, the modem’s administrator is required to

specify the SMTP server, domain name, and destination on the Admin | Access
IMPORTANT
page (see Sect. 13.6.3.2.3).

Once the Contact Information is entered and a message composed in the Problem Report text
window, click [Submit E-mail] to send the message.

13–20
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.1.4 Home | Log Off

Figure 13-4. Info | Logoff page

The IP Module currently allows only one connection to the IP Module Web Server Interface. Use
the ‘Home | Logoff’ page (Figure 13-4) to formally disconnect from the interface. At the prompt,
click [Yes, Disconnect] to complete the logoff process.

Upon disconnection, you will be required to close the Web browser so as to

delete the IP Module’s security cookie.
IMPORTANT

13–21
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.2 Admin Pages

13.6.3.2.1 Admin | Summary

Figure 13-5. Admin |Summary page

The ‘Admin | Summary’ page (Figure 13-5) provides read-only information for the assigned
MAC and IP Addresses and the operational features (standard or optional) currently available.

13–22
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.2.2 Admin | Mode

The ‘Admin | Mode’ page allows the user to specify how the modem/IP Module is to behave in
Vipersat or non-Vipersat working modes. Once the role of a particular modem in the network is
determined, this single point of configuration is intended to simplify deployment.
Note that the appearance of and selections available on this page depend on the currently active
firmware version. Figure 13-6 illustrates the page as it appears under Firmware Ver. 1.6.x and
earlier.

Figure 13-6. Admin | Mode page (Firmware Ver. 1.6.x and earlier)

Router – Small Network Mode

The Small Network Mode supports up to 255 remotes, as allowed using HDLC addressing. Select
this mode to set the modem to be on independent IP subnets; this mode requires adding static
routes to pass traffic between them.

Router – Large Network Mode

This mode is similar to Small Network Mode, the exception being that a maximum of 32,766
remotes are allowed on a single shared satellite outbound carrier.

Router – Point-to-Point Mode

Select for use in a Point-to-Point SCPC link where there are different IP subnets on either side of
the link.

Router – Vipersat Mode

Please consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN/22125 – Vipersat CDM-570/570L
Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for details on use of the Router – Vipersat Mode
selection provided on this page.

Managed Switch
Managed Switch mode functions as a learning bridge with VLAN support. Supports optional
features: QoS, Header Comp, Payload Comp, and 3xDES. No routes are required in this mode.

13–23
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure 13-7 illustrates the page as it appears under Firmware Ver. 1.7.x and later.

Figure 13-7. Admin | Mode page (Firmware Ver. 1.7.x and later)

Managed Switch
Managed Switch mode functions as a managed switch with support for VLAN as well as advanced
features such as QoS, Header Compression and Payload Compression. Primarily intended for
operation in a point-to-point topology.

Router – Hub
Router-Hub mode functions as the Hub side router in a Point-to-Multipoint network. Allows Sat-
to-sat packets to pass. No longer requires per-route HDLC addresses to be configured.

Router – Remote
Router-Remote mode functions as a Remote Router in a Point-to-Multipoint network. Packets
from the WAN are not allowed to be sent to the WAN. No longer requires HDLC receive
addresses to be configured.

Router – Point-to-Point Mode

Select for use in a Point-to-Point SCPC link where there are different IP subnets on either side of
the link.

Vipersate Router Mode selections

Please consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN/22125 – Vipersat CDM-570/570L
Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for details on configuration and use of the Vipersat
Router Mode selections provided on this page:
• Vipersat Router – Hub
• Vipersat Router – Hub Expansion
• Vipersat Router – Remote
• Vipersat Router – Remote Expansion

13–24
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

For either Admin | Mode page version, once the appropriate selection is made, click [Submit].
If a working mode different from the currently active mode is selected, the user is prompted to
reboot the modem:

Click [OK] to reboot the modem, or [Cancel] to return to the Admin | Mode page.

13–25
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.2.3 Admin | Access

Figure 13-8. Admin | Access page

The ‘Admin | Access’ page (Figure 13-8) provides the means to set up User names, passwords,
the e-mail server, and the host IP addresses to facilitate communication with the CDM-570/570L
IP Module Web Server.

For details pertaining to the configuration parameters available on this page, refer to Chapter 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION.

Once the desired configuration settings have been configured, click [Submit] to save those
changes.

13.6.3.2.4

13–26
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Admin | Features

Figure 13-9. Admin | Features page

The ‘Admin | Features’ page (Figure 13-9) provides a read-only status summary of operational
features.

Features – Standard
Permits the user to set as Enabled or Disabled (via option button or drop-down menu) the
following standard features:
• Telnet;
• Ping Reply;
• Managed Switch Multicast Option;
• Downlink Route All Available Multicast;
• L2 Tx Header Compression;
• L2 Rx Header Compression.

Header Compression – Refresh Rates

In association with enabled L2 Header Compression, this section permits the user to enter, via
number of packets, the refresh rates for UPD/RTP1, UDP, Payload, and All Others.

Note: L2 Header Compression applies only when in Managed Switch Mode.

13–27
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Features – Optional
Permits the user to set, via drop-down menu, the following optional features (as available) as
Enabled or Disabled:
• QoS (Quality of Service);
• STDMA;
• IGMP;
• L3/L4/L5 Rx Header Compression;
• ViperSat.
The following optional features have the additional capability to be assigned, from its respective
drop-down menu, on a Per Route basis:
• Tx Payload Compression;
• L3/L4/l5 Tx Header Compression;
• 3xDES.
Once the desired configuration settings have been configured from any of the above sections,
click [Submit] to save those changes.

Feature Availability
As per the ‘Admin | Summary’ page, this section provides read-only information for the
operational features (standard or optional) currently available.

13–28
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.2.5 Admin | Remote

Figure 13-10. Admin | Remote page

The ‘Admin | Remote’ page (Figure 13-10) sets and returns administration information for:
• The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) feature;
• The Feature and Unlock codes for ViperSat Management;
• The IP address of the DHCP Server.
For details pertaining to the configuration parameters available on this page, refer to Chapter 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION and Sect. 6.4 SNMP INTERFACE.
Once the desired configuration settings have been configured, click [Submit] to save those
changes.

13–29
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.2.6 Admin | Encryption

The CDM-570/570L IP Module optionally supports 3xDES-128 (using NIST certified 3x core)
encryption and decryption, for the highest level security for link encryption.

Figure 13-11. Admin | Encryption page

The ‘Admin | Encryption’ page (Figure 13-11) is accessible only when the optional 3xDES
Encryption FAST feature has been purchased from Comtech EF Data and activated via the front
panel. Otherwise, when the Encryption hyperlink is selected, the following page is displayed:

Refer to Sect. 13.4.1 3xDES Encryption with Ability to Change Keys or Chapter 14. IP
MODULE - CLI AND TELNET OPERATION for further information.

13–30
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.3 Modem Pages

Note: The ‘BUC’ and ‘LNB’ hyperlinks shown in Figure 13-12 are available only on the
CDM-570L Base Modem and IP Module Web Server Interfaces. They provide the user with the
means to control and monitor a Block Upconverter or Low-Noise Block Down Converter connected
to the CDM-570L. Refer to Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU (BUC, LNB) OPERATION for
complete details on ODU operations via these Web Server Interfaces.

13.6.3.3.1 Modem | Modem

Figure 13-12. Modem | Modem page

The ‘Modem | Modem’ (Configuration) page (Figure 13-12) provides the means to configure
the modem operating parameters. The user may enter a preferred value into a text box, select a
predefined parameter from a drop-down menu, or, for the Alarm Mask section, use the option
button provided to define a designated alarm as Masked or Active.
For details pertaining to the configuration parameters available on this page, refer to Chapter 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION.
Once the desired configuration settings have been configured, click [Submit] to save those
changes.

13–31
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.3.2 Modem | Utilities

Figure 13-13. Modem | Utilities page

The ‘Modem | Utilities’ page (Figure 13-13) is used to set utilities such as Date and Time;
Circuit ID; and Load and Store Configurations.
Click [Re-Center Buffer] to force the re-centering of the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer.
For details pertaining to the configuration parameters available on this page, refer to Chapter 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION.

13–32
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.3.3 Modem | Status

Figure 13-14. Modem | Status page

The ‘Modem | Status’ page (Figure 13-14) provides the user with a read-only status window for
the modem’s general operating status and configuration parameters.

13–33
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.3.4 Modem | Logs

Figure 13-15. Modem | Logs page

The ‘Modem | Logs’ page (Figure 13-14) provides read-only windows that display any Faults
and Alarms (Events) as logged by the unit, and modem operating statistics.
Click [Clear Events] to delete all existing log entries from the Modem Events Log. The log is
then reset to one (1) entry: “Info: Log Cleared”.
Click [Clear Statistics] to delete all existing entries from the Modem Statistics Log.
For details pertaining to the information provided on this page, refer to Chapter 5. FRONT
PANEL OPERATION.

13–34
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4 IP Pages

13.6.3.4.1 IP | Interface

Figure 13-16. IP | Interface page

The ‘IP | Interface’ page (Figure 13-16) allows the user to view the MAC address and set the IP
address and mask of the IP Module:

Ethernet (LAN)
• MAC Address (read-only) – This is set at the factory to a guaranteed unique address that
cannot be modified by the user.
• Mode & Speed – Use the drop-down menu to select Auto, 10 Mbps Half Duplex, 100
Mbps Half Duplex, 10 Mbps Full Duplex, or 100 Mbps Full Duplex.
• IP Address/Mask – The user may enter the IP Address/Mask for the IP Module Ethernet
Interface.
• Link Status (read-only) – The is the actual negotiated Link Status of the Ethernet Port; this
includes whether the link is UP or DOWN.

Managed Switch Mode

When Managed Switch Mode is active, the user may enter the Gateway IP Address.

13–35
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Terrestrial Interface
The user may select the operating terrestrial interface from the available
drop-down menu (shown at right):

Satellite (WAN)

HDLC addressing only applies with IP Firmware Versions 1.6.x and earlier.
Firmware Version 1.7.x and later uses Streamline Encapsulation; HDLC
IMPORTANT addresses are not used.

• HDLC Address Mode – Select Small Network Mode, Large Network Mode, or Point-
to-Point Mode.
• Receive HDLC Addresses (Hex) (read-only) – Indicates the HDLC Address that the
WAN Interface will listen to (i.e., pass traffic). This should match the HDLC Address
specified for traffic to pass from the sending modem.
• Network Mode Address Ranges (read-only) – The Hex address ranges for Large and
Small Network Modes are provided here for reference purposes.

VLAN Brouter
• VLAN Brouter Mode – Use the drop-down menu to Enable or Disable this mode. If
enabled, any packet arriving at the Ethernet interface with a VLAN header will be
automatically forwarded to the WAN interface. In this mode, ALL VLAN packets are
sent; there is no filtering of any kind.
• VLAN Brouter Tx Payload Compression – Use the drop-down menu to Enable or
Disable payload compression for all "Brouted" packets. Because the modem is really in
router mode, all non-VLAN traffic would check the associated router to turn on/off
payload compression.
• VLAN Brouter Next Hop MAC Address – On the downlink side, this attribute allows
the operator to define the next hop router to which all of the Brouted packets must be
sent. This allows the Brouter feature to bypass the need to send an ARP packet for
packets that could potentially have the same IP address.
Once the desired configuration settings have been configured, click [Submit] to save those
changes.

13–36
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4.2 IP | Routes

Figure 13-17. IP | Routes page

Using the ‘IP | Routes’ page (Figure 13-17), static routes can be entered into the IP Module to
route IP traffic over the satellite or to another device on the local LAN.

Route Table Entry

• Name – String label provided to help users maintain their network. The assigned name
cannot contain any whitespace and must be unique.
• IP Address/Mask – Parameters used to define the route to the destination network.
• Next Hop Address – When the route is of type ToEth, the Next Hop Address is used to
define the locally attached router’s IP address. which can be used to route to the
destination network. This is the case when there is another subnet addressed to the
modem on the LAN side.
• Interface – There are two valid values for routing to a destination network: ToSat and
ToEth:
o ToSat should be selected when the route to the destination network is over the
satellite link. The ToSat routes do not need a Next Hop IP address.
o ToEth should be used when the route to the destination network is attached to
the Ethernet interface.
• 3xDES – When this optional feature is available, the user may set encryption as Enabled
or Disabled.
• 3xDES Key – When this optional feature is available and encryption has been Enabled,
the 3xDES keys are used to encrypt traffic being sent over the Satellite Interface:

13–37
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

o Select 1 through 8 to use the key specified in the 3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt

Configuration Page to encrypt the traffic destined for the route.
o Select Clear to force the IP Module to not encrypt any traffic destined for the
route.
o Select Random to cause the IP Module to randomly use any of the eight Tx Keys
to encrypt the traffic destined for the route.
• Payload Compression – When this optional feature is available, the user may set
Payload Compression as Enabled or Disabled.
• Header Compression – When this optional feature is available, the user may set Header
Compression as Enabled or Disabled.
• Add/Change – Click to add a route entry to the route table or modify an existing route
table entry. The route entry will be added to the route table (or the existing entry
modified) for processing once the user clicks [Submit].
• Delete – Click to flag a route entry for removal from the route table. The route entry will
be deleted from the route table once the user clicks [Submit].
Once the desired configuration settings have been configured, click [Submit] to save those
changes.

Route Table
This read-only window displays the currently active Route Table Entries.

13–38
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4.3 IP | Multicast

Figure 13-18. IP | Multicast page

Using the ‘IP | Multicast’ page (Figure 13-18), multicast routes can be entered into the IP
Module to route multicast IP traffic over the satellite or to another device on the local LAN.

Multicast Route Table Entry

• Name – String label provided to help users maintain their network. The assigned name
cannot contain any whitespace and must be unique.
• Downlink Route All Available Multicast (read-only) – Displays if this feature is
Enabled or Disabled.
• Multicast IP Address – Parameters used to define the route to the destination network.
• Next Hop HDLC (Eth to Sat Only) (read-only) – Displays the desired Next Hop HDLC
IP Address for traffic to be sent over the satellite, within the following ranges:
o Point-to-Point: No HDLC address
o Small Network: 0x1 – 0xFE
o Large Network: 0x1 – 0xFFFE
• Eth to Sat / Sat to Eth – Select the valid packet handling value for routing to a
destination network, using the drop-down menu:
o Forward – When unit is running in Managed Switch Mode, multicast is only
forwarded across link if both units have this feature enabled.

13–39
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

o Filter – A multicast packet is received but there is no application associated with it.
• 3xDES – When this optional feature is available, the user may set encryption as Enabled
or Disabled.
• 3xDES Key – When this optional feature is available and encryption has been Enabled,
the 3xDES keys are used to encrypt traffic being sent over the Satellite Interface:
o Select 1 through 8 to use the key specified in the 3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt
Configuration Page to encrypt the traffic destined for the route.
o Select Clear to force the IP Module to not encrypt any traffic destined for the
route.
o Select Random to cause the IP Module to randomly use any of the eight Tx Keys
to encrypt the traffic destined for the route.
• Payload Compression – When this optional feature is available, the user may set
Payload Compression as Enabled or Disabled.
• Header Compression – When this optional feature is available, the user may set Header
Compression as Enabled or Disabled.
• Add/Change: Click to add a route entry to the route table or modify an existing multicast
route table entry. The multicast route entry will be added to the multicast route table (or
the existing entry modified) for processing once the user clicks [Submit].
• Delete: Click to flag a route entry for removal from the multicast route table. The
multicast route entry will be deleted from the multicast route table once the user clicks
[Submit].
Once the desired settings have been configured, click [Submit] to save those changes.

Multicast Route Table

This read-only window displays the currently active Multicast Route Table Entries.

13–40
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4.4 IP | QoS Mode

Note: This section depicts the CDM-570/570L IP Module Web Server Interface with Quality of
Service (QoS) installed on the CDM-570/570L. QoS is a FAST Feature option which must be
purchased from Comtech EF Data.

To access these QoS pages, this optional feature must first be installed by entering the
appropriate FAST code from the CDM-570/570L front panel; QoS functionality must then be
enabled using the ‘Admin | Features’ page.

Figure 13-19. IP | QoS Mode page

Use the ‘IP | QoS Mode’ page (Figure 13-19) to define the operational rules for the QoS
configuration. Select the option button for one of the following operational rules/modes:
• Rule – Max/Priority Mode
• Rule – Min/Max Mode
• DiffServ Mode
• VLAN – Priority/Max Mode
Once the desired settings have been configured, click [Submit] to initiate that change in
operation.
Note: For detailed QoS operational overview and rule configuration information, refer to the
following sections in this manual:
QoS Rule/Mode Overview Configuration Info
Max/Priority Mode See Sect. 13.4.5.1 See Sect. 14.2.3.1
Min/Max Mode See Sect. 13.4.5.2 See Sect. 14.2.3.2
DiffServ See Sect. 13.4.5.3 See Sect. 14.2.3.3

13–41
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4.5 IP | QoS (Quality of Service) Pages

Note: This section depicts the CDM-570/570L IP Module Web Server Interface with Quality of
Service (QoS) installed on the CDM-570/570L. QoS is a FAST Feature option which must be
purchased from Comtech EF Data.

To access these QoS pages, this optional feature must first be installed by entering the
appropriate FAST code from the CDM-570/570L front panel; QoS functionality must then be
enabled using the ‘Admin | Features’ page.

The appearance of the ‘IP | QoS’ page is driven by the QoS operating rule selected using the ‘IP |
QoS Mode’ page.

13.6.3.4.5.1 IP | QoS (Maximum Bandwidth/Priority Mode)

Figure 13-20. IP | QoS page (Max/Priority Mode)

The ‘IP | QoS’ page, as it appears when Maximum Bandwidth/Priority Mode is active (Figure
13-20), is used by the user to establish up to 32 different types of flows. Refer to Sect. 13.4.5.1 for full
information on this page’s functionality.

13–42
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

QoS Table Entry

Using the text boxes, enter the following information:
• Rule # • Source Port (range)
• Source IP / Mask • Destination Port (range)
• Destination IP / Mask • Max Bandwidth (in kbps)
Using the option buttons, select the following:
• Filter (F) – Click Yes or No to allow/disallow flow filtering.
• WRED (W) – Click Yes or No to allow/disallow Weighted Random Early Detection.
• Add/Change – Click to add a QoS flow rule or modify an existing QoS flow rule. The
entry will be added to the QoS Rules table for processing once the user clicks [Submit].
• Delete – Click to flag a flow rule for removal from the QoS Rules table. The flow rule
will be deleted from the QoS Rules table once the user clicks [Submit].
Using the drop-down menus, select the following:
• Protocol Rule – Select the desired protocol rule as per the QoS Hierarchy Rule Protocol
table featured in Sect. 13.4.5.1.
• Priority Level (P) – Select the desired packet forwarding priority – Priority 1 (Highest)
through Priority 8 (Lowest).
• Default QoS Rule Filter – Select Enable or Disable.
• Sort By – Select the QoS Rules table column by which to re-order as needed.
Once the desired flow rules settings have been configured, click [Submit] to save those changes.

QoS Rules
This read-only window displays the currently active QoS flow rules. The table sorts each QoS
rule as it has been added, and the display is updated to reflect the order with which rules are
matched; the columns for the rules are additionally sorted by the user via the Sort By drop-down
menu on this page.

13–43
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4.5.2 IP | QoS (Minimum/Maximum Bandwidth Mode)

Figure 13-21. IP | QoS Mode page (Min/Max Mode)

The ‘IP | QoS’ page, as it appears when Minimum/Maximum Bandwidth Mode is active (Figure
13-21), is used by the user to establish up to 32 different types of flows. Refer to Sect. 13.4.5.2 for
full information on this page’s functionality.

QoS Table Entry

Using the text boxes, enter the following information:
• Rule # • Destination Port (range)
• Source IP / Mask • Min Bandwidth (in kbps)
• Destination IP / Mask • Max Bandwidth (in kbps)
• Source Port (range)

Using the option buttons, select the following:

• Filter (F) – Click Yes or No to allow/disallow flow filtering.
• WRED (W) – Click Yes or No to allow/disallow Weighted Random Early Detection.
• Add/Change – Click to add a QoS flow rule or modify an existing QoS flow rule. The
entry will be added to the QoS Rules table for processing once the user clicks [Submit].

13–44
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

• Delete – Click to flag a flow rule for removal from the QoS Rules table. The flow rule
will be deleted from the QoS Rules table once the user clicks [Submit].
Using the drop-down menus, select the following:
• Protocol Rule – Select the desired protocol rule as per the QoS Hierarchy Rule Protocol
table featured in Sect. 13.4.5.1.
• Priority Level (P) – Select the desired packet forwarding priority – Priority 1 (Highest)
through Priority 8 (Lowest).
• Default QoS Rule Filter – Select Enable or Disable.
• Sort By – Select the QoS Rules table column by which to re-order as needed.
Once the desired flow rules settings have been configured, click [Submit] to save those changes.

QoS Rules
This read-only window displays the currently active QoS flow rules. The table sorts each QoS
rule as it has been added, and the display is updated to reflect the order with which rules are
matched; the columns for the rules are additionally sorted by the user via the Sort By drop-down
menu on this page.

13–45
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4.5.3 IP | QoS (DiffServ Mode)

Figure 13-22. IP | QoS Mode page (DiffServ Mode)

The ‘IP | QoS’ page, as it appears when DiffServ Mode is active (Figure 13-22), is used by the
IP Module QoS to make it fully compliant to the Differential Services QoS RFC standards. Refer
to Sect. 13.4.5.3 for full information on this page’s functionality.

DiffServ Rules Configuration

Using the text boxes, enter the following information:
• Rule #
• Min Bandwidth (kpbs)
• Max Bandwidth (kbps)
Once the desired rules values have been entered, click [Submit] to save those changes.

DiffServ Rules
This read-only window displays the currently active DiffServ Rules.

13–46
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4.5.4 IP | QoS (VLAN – Priority/Maximum Bandwidth Mode)

Figure 13-23. IP | QoS Mode page (VLAN – Priority/Max Mode)

Figure 13-23 shows the ‘IP | QoS’ page as it appears when Working Mode has been set to
Managed Switch (see ‘Admin | Mode’) and VLAN – Max/Priority Mode is active (see ‘QoS |
Modes’).

This page is used by the IP Module QoS to allow the user to specify the maximum bandwidth for
each VLAN Priority. Additionally, the user can turn on or off Weighted Random Early Detection
(WRED) on a per-queue basis.

QoS VLAN Table

The prioritized maximum bandwidth is entered, in kbps, in text box column MaxBW for VLAN
Priority Rules 0 through 7.
Using the drop-down menu, select Yes or No to allow/disallow WRED Priority Rules 0 through
7.
Once the desired rules settings have been configured, click [Submit] to save those changes.

13–47
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4.6 IP | ARP

Figure 13-24. IP | ARP page

The ‘IP | ARP’ page (Figure 13-24) displays all current ARP entries (both Static and Dynamic).
The user is able to directly edit any of the current static ARP entries.

Addresses
• IP Address – Enter the IP Address (format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX).
• MAC Address – Enter the MAC Address (format YY:YY:YY:YY:YY:YY).
• Add – Click to directly add a Static ARP entry. The entry will be added to the ARP Table
for processing once the user clicks [Submit].
• Delete – Click to flag a Static ARP entry for removal from the ARP Table. The ARP
entry will be deleted from the ARP Table once the user clicks [Submit].
Once the desired ARP values have been entered, click [Submit] to save those changes.

ARP Table
This read-only table list the ARP entries by IP address, MAC address, and entry Type (S=Static;
D=Dynamic).
Click [Refresh] to update the table (note that the index total will automatically increment to the
next available number).

13–48
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4.7 IP | VLAN

Figure 13-25. IP | VLAN page

Figure 13-25 shows the ‘IP | VLAN’ page, which is accessible when Working Mode has been
set to Managed Switch (see ‘Admin | Mode’).

VLAN Feature
Use the option buttons to Enable or Disable VLAN operation. Click [Submit] once the selection
has been made.

Native and Management Configuration

This section is used to configure the Native and Management VLAN IDs:
• The Native VLAN ID is used to tag arriving packets that have no VLAN tag. Likewise,
when packets arrive from the WAN with the same VLAN tag as the Native VLAN ID,
then the VLAN header is removed and passed to the LAN interface.

13–49
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

• The Management VLAN ID us used to specify a dedicated management VLAN used to

access and control the modems.
For either Native or Management VLAN ID configuration, enter the following information:
• VLAN ID – Specifiy a value from 1 to 4095.
• VLAN Name – Assign a string to label the VLAN ID as needed for user convenience.
• Priority – Use the drop-down menu to select prioritize rules from 0 to 7.
Once the desired information has been entered, click [Submit] to save those changes.

VLAN Table
This read-only table list the VLAN rules by ID, Name, and Tag.

VLAN Table – Add/Delete

• VLAN ID – Enter an ID for the rule. Specifiy a value from 1 to 4095.
• VLAN Name – Enter a name for the rule, using a maximum of 20 characters.
• Type – Tagged is the only rule option available at this time.
• Add – Click to add a VLAN priority rule. The entry will be added to the VLAN Table for
processing once the user clicks [Submit].
• Delete – Click to flag a VLAN priority rule for removal from the VLAN Table. The
VLAN rule will be deleted from the VLAN Table once the user clicks [Submit].
Once the desired information has been entered, click [Submit] to save those changes.

13–50
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.4.8 IP | IGMP

Figure 13-26. IP | IGMP

The ‘IP | IGMP’ page (Figure 13-26) facilitates the use of Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP) with configured multicast routes.

CDM-IP as Client
• Recognize IGMP Queries – Select Yes or No using the drop-down menu.
• IGMP Version for Unsolicited Reports – Select V1 or V2 using the drop-down menu.
• Unsolicited Report Interval – Enter an interval value from 1 to 25 seconds into the text
box.
• Force Router Alert Option Sending V1 Reports – Select Yes or No using the drop-
down menu.

CDM-IP as Server
• Enable IGMP – Select Yes or No using the drop-down menu. If enabled, the IP Module
responds to IGMP queries for the configured multicast routes on the transmit side and
generates IGMP queries on the receive side.
• IGMP Query Period – Enter a query period value from 1 to 600 seconds into the text box.
• IGMP Maximum Response Time – Enter a response time value that is less than the
IPGM Query Period minus one – from 1 to 598 seconds – into the text box.
• Missed Responses before leaving IGMP Group – Enter the number of desired missed
responses – from 1 to 30 – into the text box.

13–51
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

IGMP Table
This read-only table lists the IGMP Groups that are active on the modem. This includes the Time
to Live for the entry; the State (Idle, Active, or Closing); and the Multicast IP Address.
Once the desired settings have been configured on this page, click [Submit] to save those changes.

13.6.3.4.9 IP | Redundancy

Figure 13-27. IP | Redundancy page

The ‘IP | Redundancy’ page (Figure 13-27) provides the user with redundant configuration
control and monitoring capabilities. The CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem, when connected to a
Comtech EF Data redundancy switch, provides fully-automatic protection of IP packet traffic in
the case of equipment failure. Refer to Appendix H. IP REDUNDANCY for detailed
information on the use of the CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem in redundant operations.

With this page, the user may adjust the following redundancy operating parameters:
• 1:1 Redundancy – Select Enabled or Disabled using the drop-down menu.
• Traffic IP Address/Mask – Enter in format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx / xx
• Force Unit Offline – Select Yes or No using the drop-down menu.

Additionally, read-only information is provided on the redundant configuration as follows:

• 1:1 Redundancy State – Displays the status as Online or Offline.
• Local Unit Management IP Address/Mask
• Redundant Unit Management IP Address/Mask

Once the desired settings have been configured on this page, click [Submit] to save those changes.

13–52
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.5 Stats (Statistics) Pages

13.6.3.5.1 Stats | Ethernet

Figure 13-28. Stats | Ethernet page

The ‘Stats | Ethernet’ page (Figure 13-28) provides current operating statistics for Ethernet Tx
and Rx.
Click [Reset Stats] to refresh this read-only page, allowing the most recent statistics to display.

13–53
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.5.2 Stats | Routes

Figure 13-29. Stats | Routes page

The ‘Stats | Routes’ page (Figure 13-29) provides current operating statistics for IP packet
routing on a Sent/Received, Dropped, and Filtered basis.

Click [Reset Stats] to refresh this read-only page, allowing the most recent statistics to display.

13–54
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.5.3 Stats | QoS

Figure 13-30. Stats | QoS page

The ‘Stats | QoS’ page (Figure 13-30) provides current operating statistics for the optional QoS
feature, if installed.

Click [Reset Statistics] to refresh this read-only page, allowing the most recent statistics to
display.

13–55
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.5.4 Stats | WAN

Figure 13-31. Stats | WAN page

The ‘Stats | WAN’ page (Figure 13-31) provides current operating statistics for the WAN FPGA
Tx and Rx, as well as logged Rx Errors.

Click [Reset Statistics] to refresh this read-only page, allowing the most recent statistics to
display.

13–56
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.5.5 Stats | Compression

Figure 13-32. Stats | Compression page

The ‘Stats | Compression’ page (Figure 13-32) provides current operating statistics for the
optional Payload and Header Compression feature, if installed.

Click [Reset Statistics] to refresh this read-only page, allowing the most recent statistics to
display.

13–57
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.6 Maint (Maintenance) Pages

13.6.3.6.1 Maint | Unit Info

Figure 13-33. Maint | Unit Info page

The ‘Maint | Unit Info’ page (Figure 13-33) provides the user a scrollable, read-only status
window containing the base modem and IP Module’s firmware information for Boot, Active and
Inactive Bulks. The Unit Uptime, Modem Serial number, and IP Module Software Revision
information is also provided here.

For details about the information provided on this page, refer to Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION.

13–58
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.6.2 Maint | Operations

Figure 13-34. Maint | Operations page

The ‘Maint | Operations’ page (Figure 13-34) is used for the following operations:

Boot/Upgrade Image
By using the drop-down menus in this section, these parameters permit the user to specify how
the firmware on the IP Module and in the base modem are controlled:
• IP Module Boot From – Select Latest, Image 1, or Image 2.
• Base Modem Boot From – Select Latest, Image 1, or Image 2.
• Upgrade To – Select Oldest, Image 1, or Image 2.

Parameters Image
By using the drop-down menu, the user may control how the parameters file is managed:
• Operations – Select None, Save Parameters to Flash, Load Parameters from Flash, or
Restore Factory Defaults. Note that restoring from factory default requires reboot of the
modem.

Codecast
The Codecast feature allows multiple modems to be upgraded at the same time. The Codecast
Multicast Address is configured to match the Multicast Address in the VLOAD application.
Once the desired settings have been configured on this page, click [Submit] to save those changes.

13–59
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.6.3 Maint | Save

Figure 13-35. Maint | Save page

The ‘Maint | Save’ page (Figure 13-35) saves the current unit configurations to Flash, thereby
making all configuration changes made via IP Module Web Server Interface permanent until the
user either initiates and saves a new round of settings updates, or restores all settings to the
original factory defaults via the ‘Maint | Operations’ page.

Selecting the ‘Maint | Save’ hyperlink initiates the save process and the page appears with the
message window as shown in Figure 13-35. The user is prompted to click [Back] in the browser
window (alternately, press [Backspace] on the keyboard or select any one of the Web Server
navigation tabs + hyperlinks) to return to the previously active Web Server page or to select other
modem functions.

In order to make any IP Module modifications permanent, the unit configuration

must be saved before rebooting the unit.
IMPORTANT

13–60
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

13.6.3.6.4 Maint | Reboot

Figure 13-36. Maint | Reboot page

The ‘Maint | Reboot’ page (Figure 13-36) is used to initiate the unit reboot process. After clicking
the Reboot hyperlink, the page with the message window as shown opens.
To continue the process, click [Yes, Reboot]. The page then updates as follows:

From this point forward, while the reboot process is underway the page is no longer accessible.
Additionally, while this process ensues, the CDM-570/570L front panel displays the following
messages in succession:
IP OPTION CARD BOOTING.
...PLEASE WAIT

PROCESSOR BOOTING.
...PLEASE WAIT

The reboot process has been completed once the opening screen displays on the modem front panel:

Comtech CDM-570L Modem

Firmware Version:1.x.x

A new Web Server session may now be initiated as per the procedure outlined in Sect. 13.6.2.

13–61
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module Ethernet Interface MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

13–62
 Chapter 14. IP MODULE - CLI
AND TELNET OPERATION

14.1 Overview
This chapter defines the user menu system connected to the IP Module via a Terminal Emulator
or Telnet. In the process of configuring each parameter, an overview of the parameter and its
impact on the configuration of the IP Module is provided.
When connecting via a Terminal Emulator, the user should be physically attached to the Console
port of the IP Module. The terminal emulator should be configured to match the Console port
setting. The default Console port setting is 38,400 bps, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit and no
flow control.
When connecting via Telnet, the user must have network connectivity to the Traffic Ethernet Port
of the IP Module. This connectivity can be via a local LAN, a remote LAN, or via a satellite link
from another IP modem. The Ethernet Speed Mode is a configurable parameter of the IP Module
and thus its exact setting can vary between specific installations.

1. The IP MODULE does not allow concurrent access to the menu via
Telnet and the Console port. If a user connects via Telnet, IP MODULE
automatically disables the Console port for the duration of the Telnet
IMPORTANT session. All menu pages allow a Telnet logout to end a Telnet session.
Also, the IP MODULE will automatically end a Telnet session after a
period of inactivity (configurable from 1 to 60 minutes).
2. Any changes made to the base modem and IP Module will be lost if the
IP Module is reset or loses power unless the changes are saved to
permanent storage. This applies to all of the IP Module and base
modem parameters. The parameters can be saved by selecting “S”,
available on any CLI/Telnet Menu page.
3. As of CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.5.3, all parameters for the modem are
stored in the IP Module parameter file. This provides a single file to
store the entire contents of the modem.
4. As of CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.5.3.1, all parameter changes made for the
modem or IP settings will automatically be saved by default. This
applies to any changes made from the front panel or any other user
interface (Web/CLI/SNMP, etc.) This feature can be disabled in
Maintenance/Database Operations.

14–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

The CLI and Telnet Access Levels are defined as follows:

User Login Access Level
User Interface
Read Only
Admin User Read/Write User
User

No Access to Admin Menu

Full Access – all
Telnet No Access
Menus
Full Access all other Menus

CLI (direct to Console port) Full Access – no Login

Default Name/Passwords are:

• Admin comtech/comtech
• Read/Write opcenter/1234
• Read Only monitor/1234

14.1.1 Common Operational Features

Interface Appearance: The appearance of the HyperTerminal-based Telnet interface may vary
across individual user configurations. Therefore, a complete interface window is depicted in
Figure 14-1 only.
Common Interface Options/Fields: For the purpose of brevity, the following functions are
deemed typical for all primary and nested screens, and are documented as follows:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Allows user to save the current configuration of the NP Module
Save Parameters to Flash S to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on
each successive power cycle.
Allows user to exit the current menu and return to the parent
Exit Menu X menu. Alternately, the user may press the Esc key to perform
the same action.

Elsewhere, when the Entry column for a tabulated menu feature is designated as [RO], this
designates that pertinent menu option/field as a read-only feature.

14–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2 Main Menu Page

Menu pages are followed by a table listing the Menu Options/Fields, required Entry, and Descriptions.

Figure 14-1. Main Menu page

The Main Menu page has the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

The Administration menu provides a basic set of standard admin

Administration A functions to the IP Module. When connected via Telnet,
navigation to this menu will be restricted to the admin user.

Allows the user to configure the Ethernet and Satellite

Interface Configuration I
interfaces.

Allows the user to define QoS rules for up to 32 different types

QoS Configuration Q
of flows.

Allows the user to define how the IP Module will route packets
Route Table R
that it receives on its Ethernet and Satellite interfaces.

The Protocol Settings option allows the user to configure various

Protocol Configuration P protocols used by the IP Module. These protocols currently
include ARP and IGMP.

The Modem Parameters option displays a set of menus that

Satellite Modem
M allows the user to configure and monitor the satellite base
Configuration
modem.

The Redundancy Configuration Menu allows the user to

Redundancy Configuration E
configure 1:1 IP redundancy.

The Operations & Maintenance Menu allows the user to

Operations and configure various options used to control and maintain the
O
Maintenance system. Also has diagnostic tools for troubleshooting and
Statistics.

14–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.1 Administration Page

The Administration page is activated from the Main Menu page.

Figure 14-2. Administration page

Access to the Administration page is restricted to the Admin user when
connecting via the Telnet, or HTTP interface. The Administration page is
IMPORTANT available when connected via the Terminal Emulator (serial) connection
because there is no log in.

The Administration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Activates Name/Password Configuration page. Allows the
Name/Password Configuration P user to define the user name and passwords that are
required in order to access the management interfaces.
Activates Access Lists page. Allows the user to restrict
Access Lists A access to the management interfaces based upon the
requester’s IP address.
Feature Configuration F Activates Feature Configuration page.
The 3xDES Configuration Page allows the user to determine
if 3xDES encryption is enabled on a device and if so, the
3xDES keys that are used to decrypt traffic. The keys
3xDES Configuration D
specified for the transmit function are completely
independent for the 3xDES keys specified for the receiver
function.
The SMTP configuration page allows the user to specify
SMTP Configuration M
appropriate settings for SMTP email server.
The SNMP configuration page allows the user to specify
SNMP Configuration N
management parameters for SNMP.

14–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Working Mode W* Used to set the Working Mode.
-or- *For CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.7.Xand later:
• Managed Switch
C**
• Router – Hub
• Router – Remote
• Router – Point to Point
** For CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.6.X and earlier:
• Router – Small Network
• Router – Large Network
• Router – Point to Point
• Managed Switch
See Chapter 13 for additional information.
Managed Switch Multicast
Option
(For CDM-IP Firmware Ver. When unit is running in Managed Switch mode, Multicast is
1.5.4 and later; was E only forwarded across link if both units have this feature
“Easyconnect Multicast Option” enabled.
for CDM-IP Firmware Ver.
1.5.3.6 and earlier)
This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a
Header comp refresh rate (in
H full header of this type of traffic when Header Compression is
pkts) for UDP/RTP1
enabled.
This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a
Header comp refresh rate (in
U full header of this type of traffic when Header Compression is
pkts) for UDP
enabled.
This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a
Header comp refresh rate (in
O full header of this type of traffic when Header Compression is
pkts) for all others
enabled.
Payload comp refresh rate (in This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a
Q
pkts) full payload when Payload Compression is enabled.
The Telnet timeout determines how many minutes (1-60) of
Telnet Timeout T Telnet inactivity before the Telnet session is automatically
terminated.

14–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.1.1 Name/Password Configuration Page

The Name/Password Configuration page is activated from the Administration page. Allows user
to define the passwords required to access via HTTP, FTP, and TELNET.

Figure 14-3. Name/Password Configuration page

All Usernames and Passwords are case sensitive.
There is a minimum of 1 and maximum of 11 characters.
IMPORTANT
Any or all of the Usernames and Passwords can be removed by entering
“NONE NONE” from the CLI or Telnet.
Removing all Usernames and Passwords would only allow access to the IP
functions when connected via the Terminal Emulator (serial) connection
(because there is no log in).
FTP access is restricted to Admin Username/Password only. FTP is only used
to upgrade the IP SOFTWARE or to load or retrieve the IP Parameter or IP
Event log files.

The Name/Password Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Admin User/Password A Enter the user name and password with a space delimiter.
Example: <user> <passwd>
Enter NONE NONE to erase
Read/Write User/Password W Enter the user name and password with a space delimiter.
Example: <user> <passwd>
Enter NONE NONE to erase
Read Only User/Password R Enter the user name and password with a space delimiter.
Example: <user> <passwd>
Enter NONE NONE to erase

14–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.1.2 Access Lists Page

The Access Lists page is activated from the Administration page. This page allows the user to
limit monitor and control access to the unit from a specified list of authorized clients.

Figure 14-4. Access Lists page

If connecting to the IP modem remotely, the IP address of the machine used to

manage the IP modem should be included in the Access List.
IMPORTANT

The Access Lists page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
AccessClient1 - 4 1-4 The Access Client list allows the user to define which remote
clients can connect when the Access List Enforcement is enabled.
Each entry allows the user to specify an IP Address or a subnet
mask to define a unique class of machines that are allowed
access.
For example, if a user wanted to grant access to a PC with an IP
Address of 10.10.10.1 and any PC on a subnet of 192.168.10.xxx,
then the Access List would be defined as:
AccessClient1 …[10.10.10.1/32]
AccessClient2…. [192.168.10.0/24]

Access List Enforcement E The Access List Enforcement allows the user to grant access via
ping, Telnet, HTTP, FTP, and SNMP to a well-defined list of client
machines.
Access List Enforcement toggles between [Enabled] and
[Disabled]. If disabled, then any client machine will be able to
connect via ping, Telnet, HTTP, FTP, and SNMP.
If enabled, then only those machines specified in the Access Client List
will be allowed to connect via ping, Telnet, HTTP, and SNMP.

14–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.1.3 Feature Configuration Page

The Feature Configuration page is activated from the Administration page.

Figure 14-5. Feature Configuration page

The Feature Configuration page communicates to the user the current availability for each of the
features. If a feature is marked “Unavailable” then the feature is a FAST feature. FAST features
must be purchased from Comtech EF Data.
The Feature Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Ping Reply P Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]:
• Enabled tells the IP Module to respond to ping requests directed to
the IP Module Ethernet Interface.
• Disabled tells the IP Module not to respond to ping requests. This is
used as a security feature to prevent unauthorized parities from
determining if a device exists via the ping utility.
Telnet E Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]:
• Enabled allows access via Telnet.
• Disabled denies access via Telnet.
SNMP N Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]:
• Enabled tells the IP Module to respond to SNMP requests against
the private and public MIB.
• Disabled tells the IP Module not to respond to SNMP requests
against the private and public MIB.
IGMP I Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled].
The receive portion of an IP Module will utilize the IP Module as an
IGMP server. The transmit portion of a IP Module will utilize the IP
Module as an IGMP client.
The IGMP Information Page configures the IP Module to report an
interest to join a Multicast group on an IGMP server. The IGMP protocol
is used to regulate Multicast traffic on a LAN segment to prevent
information of no interest from consuming bandwidth on the LAN.

14–8
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Downlink Route All Available M Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]
Multicast Enabled tells the IP Module to route all Multicast packets coming from
the Satellite interface to the Ethernet LAN regardless of the Route Table
entries.
Disabled tells the IP Module not to automatically forward all Multicast
packets. This IP Module will only forward multicast traffic received from
the satellite to the Ethernet port if the multicast route exists in the Route
Table.
Quality of Service (QoS) Q This feature must be purchased.
Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled].
Enabled tells the IP Module to apply configured QoS rules on all
packets going out the Satellite Interface.
When Disabled, the IP Module does not apply QoS rules for outgoing
packets.
Transmit 3xDES Encryption T This feature must be purchased.
Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]
Enabled allows the IP Module to assign a TX key to encrypt packets
for a specific route being sent over the Satellite Interface.
When Disabled, the IP Module cannot encrypt packets being sent
over the Satellite interface.
Receive 3XDES Decryption [RO] This feature must be purchased.
Available allows the IP Module to decrypt packets being received
from the Satellite Interface.
When Unavailable the IP Module cannot decrypt packets received
from the Satellite Interface. This option is auto-sensed by a bit carried
in packet headers. This option is always available if the option is
purchased.
L3/L4/L5 Tx Header H This option will compress L3/L4/L5 headers. Headers available for
Compression compression can be referenced in the IP Header Compression section.
Note that in Managed Switch mode all L2 Ethernet Headers will be
compressed whether or not this feature is enabled. In Router mode, this
screen will show Available, and the option must be enabled per route in
Route table.
L3/L4/L5 Rx Header K This option tells the system to expect received streams to be Header
Compression compressed.
Important Note for CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.6.x and earlier: A
CDM-IP modem must receive all streams Header compressed or not
Header compressed. The modem has no way to distinguish between
compressed or not compressed. If a CDM-IP modem has TX Header
Compression enabled, the receiving CDM-IP will not be able to
receive any data unless RX Header Compression is also Enabled. For
this reason, when enabling Header Compression on a live satellite
link, the user must always first enable the option on the remote CDM-
IP modem. For example:
Step1. Enable remote CDM-IP TX Header Comp (data link will be
lost).
Step 2. Enable local CDM-IP RX Header Compression (data link will
restored).
Step 3. Enable remote CDM-IP RX Header Comp (data link will be
lost).
Step 4. Enable local CDM-IP TX Header Compression (data link will
restored).
Important Note for Streamline (Firmware Ver. 1.7.x and later): The
modem will detect if packets received were Header Compressed on a
packet by packet basis. Therefore there is no need to enable or
disable L3/L4/L5 RX Header Compression and this is a Read Only
selection as either Available or Unavailable.

14–9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

L2 Tx Header Compression L This option will compress L2 headers when set to Enabled and only
applies in Managed Switch Mode.
Note for Streamline (Firmware Ver. 1.7.x and later): This option is
only displayed when in Managed Switch Mode.
L2 Rx Header Compression J This option will decompress L2 headers when set to Enabled and only
applies in Managed Switch Mode.
Note for Streamline (Firmware Ver. 1.7.x and later): This option is
not displayed when in Managed Switch Mode. The modem will detect
if packets received were L2 Header Compressed on a packet by
packet basis.
Tx Payload Compression C This option allows a stream of traffic to be payload compressed. Payload
is considered everything inside the HDLC satellite frame. Therefore, IP
headers could be compressed as well. Note that in Managed Switch
Mode, the option is enabled/disabled for all traffic. In Router mode,
Payload compression will show Available, and one must set the option Per
Route in Routing table.
Rx Payload Compression [RO] Receive payload compression option allows a unit receiving a stream
of data that has been payload compressed to be correctly
uncompressed. This option is auto-sensed by a bit carried in packet
headers. This option is always available if the option is purchased.
FAST Feature Code Y If a FAST Feature is purchased, the FAST code is entered here to
enable that feature.
Vipersat Feature Codes Allows user to review the Vipersat features enable code that has been
provided by Comtech Vipersat for modem configured to operate under
VMS control.
Vipersat File Streamer Refer to Vipersat Manual

14–10
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.1.4 3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration Page

The 3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration page is activated from the Administration page.

Figure 14-6. 3xDES Encrypt Configuration page

The 3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

This menu will only be accessible if the 3xDES FAST feature has been purchased
and the license key has been entered through the modem front panel.
NOTE

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

3xDES Status [RO] Displays status, [Available] or [Unavailable]:
• Available is displayed when the 3xDES feature has been
installed.
• Unavailable is displayed when the 3xDES feature has not
been installed.
Transmit Encrypt Enabled [RO] Displays feature status. This field is updated via the Features
Configuration menu.
If Transmit Encrypt is disabled, then all traffic processed by the
IP Module will be transmitted in the clear regardless of the
3xDES encryption key specified in the Route table.
Receive Decrypt Enabled [RO] Displays feature status. This field updates via the Features
Configuration menu.
Transmit Key 1 - 8 1 These 3xDES keys are used to encrypt traffic being sent over
through the Satellite Interface.
8 The key is entered in HEX (48 digits max)
Receive Key 1 - 8 A These 3xDES keys are used to decrypt traffic being received
through from the Satellite Interface.
H The key is entered in HEX (48 digits max)

14–11
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

A 24 Byte [192-bit] 3xDES key is actually a combination of 3 single DES

keys of 8 Bytes [64-bits]. The CLI will display the Key with a space
IMPORTANT separating the Key into 3 sections. In the screen capture above,
Transmit Key 1 is displayed as:
2222222222222222 4444444444444444 6666666666666666
Consider the first section as Key1A, the second as Key1B, and the third as
Key1C.
Data is first encrypted with Key1A and then decrypted with Key1B and
again encrypted with Key1C. So if a user specifies all the three Keys the
same, (like 48 ‘1's OR all the characters in DES key the same) the
cumulative effect of 3xDES is just a single DES. When data is first
encrypted with Key1A and decrypted with Key1B we get back the
original data and then when encrypted with Key1C results in a total
effect of single DES key.

Because of this, the user is required to enter unique 64-bit keys.

If any 2 sections of the Key match, the IP Module will respond

Invalid Key - Please Re-enter.

Also, the Least Significant bit of each byte in a 24-byte [192-bit] 3xDES
key is reserved for the DES Algorithm for parity. Entries of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9,
B, D, or F will have all the corresponding bit positions masked. So a Key
entry of:
1111111133333333 5555555577777777 99999999BBBBBBBB
becomes
1010101032323232 5454545476767676 98989898BABABABA

14–12
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.1.5 SMTP Configuration Page

The SMTP Configuration page is activated from the Administration page.

Figure 14-7. SMTP Configuration page

The SMTP Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

SMTP Server IP Address I The mail server address from where the user will want to send
the email.

SMTP Domain D Set to the domain of the email server (usually found to the
right of the @ symbol in an email address).

SMTP Destination Name N Set the email recipient names (usually found to the left of the
@ symbol in an email address).

SMTP can be used to send an email to Comtech EF Data IP Modem Support

cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com using the Support Web Page by
NOTE
connecting to the IP Module with a Web Browser. The Support Web Page
allows the user to compose an email message for questions or problems
with the IP Module. The user can also select to automatically attach the IP
Module parameter file in order to facilitate troubleshooting or to resolve
configuration issues.

14–13
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.1.6 SNMP Configuration Page

The SNMP Configuration page is activated from the Administration page.

Figure 14-8. SNMP Configuration page

The SNMP Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

SNMP Read Community R GET community - allows GET operations to all portions of
the IP Module Controller and CDM-570/570L modem
MIBs.

SNMP Write Community W SET community string - allows SET operations to all
portions of the IP Module Controller and CDM-570/570L
modem MIBs.

SNMP Trap Community T Community String that will be set in the Community field
of all outgoing traps. This field on the trap PDU may be
checked by the network manager application to determine
if the trap came from a “trusted” agent.

SNMP Trap Destination #1 D First IP address where all traps/notifications will be sent. If
a network management application is running in the
network, it should be configured to receive traps and its IP
address should be entered here.

SNMP Trap Destination #2 2 Second IP address where all traps/notifications will be

sent. If a network management application is running in
the network, it should be configured to receive traps and
its IP address should be entered here.

SNMP Trap Version V Determines whether an SNMPv1 trap or SNMPv2

notification is sent.

SNMP Enable A Determines whether a MIB2 authentication trap will be

Authentication Trap sent when a PDU with an invalid community string is
encountered. A community string is invalid when it does
not match the Admin, the Read Write, or the Read Only
community strings.

SNMP System Contact C User defined SNMP Contact information.

14–14
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

SNMP System Name N User defined SNMP Name information.

SNMP System Location O User defined SNMP Location information.

Displays statistics concerning the operation of the SNMP

SNMP Stats P agent (number of IN SNMP packets, number of OUT
SNMP packets, number of OUT Traps, etc.)

14.2.1.7 Working Mode

The Working Mode page is activated from the Administration page.

Changing the Working Mode will require a system reboot. The user will
be prompted [Y] or [N] to continue to this section and may press [ESC]
IMPORTANT to abort this process at any time.

The Working Mode contains the following option/field:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
IP Module Working Mode C* Select the Working mode.
* For CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.6.x and earlier:
-or-
• For all Router Modes - IP packets are routed based on
W** the Route table information input by the user. Non-IP
packets are discarded. Operates at 10/100BaseT.
• Router – Small Network: Router uses 1 byte HDLC
addresses.
• Router – Large Network: Router mode using 2 byte
HDLC addresses.
• Router – Point to Point: Router mode uses 0 HDLC
addresses to save satellite bandwidth
• Router – Vipersat: Router mode when running in a
Vipersat Network.
• Managed Switch: default operating mode, and operates
at 10/100BaseT. In this mode the IP Module will forward
both IP and non-IP datagrams over satellite without any
defined routes.
**For Streamline, CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.7.x and later:
• Managed Switch
• Router – Hub
• Router – Remote
• Router – Point to Point
See Chapter 13 for additional information.

14–15
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.1.8 Managed Switch Multicast Option

The Managed Switch Multicast Option (Firmware Ver. 1.5.4 or later; this feature was titled
easyConnect Multicast Option in CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.5.3.6 or earlier) page is activated from
the Administration page. It allows multicast to be either transmitted or received through the
modem. This applies to Managed Switch Mode only. Managed Switch Mode will normally filter
multicast traffic.

If the Working Mode is Managed Switch and multicast traffic is intended to

pass across a pair of modems, this option must be enabled on both modems.
IMPORTANT

14.2.1.9 Header/Payload Compression Refresh Rate

The Header Compression Refresh Rates are configured from the Administration page.
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Header comp refresh rate H Selects how often a single, full header UDP/RTP1 packet is
(in pkts) for UDP/RTP1 transmitted with Header Compression enabled.

Header comp refresh rate U Selects how often a single, full header UDP packet is
(in pkts) for UDP transmitted with Header Compression enabled.

Header comp refresh rate O Selects how often a single, full header packet is transmitted
(in pkts) for all others with Header Compression enabled (for all other types of IP
headers).

The Header Compression Refresh Rates determines how many compressed header packets will
be sent before a single full header packet is sent. Some compressed header traffic could be lost
during deteriorated satellite link conditions. Sending a full header packet will allow the return of
the traffic stream. Refresh rates from 1 to 600 can be individually selected for UDP/RTP1, UDP
and all other IP headers. The Refresh Rate can be decreased for poor satellite link conditions or
increased to further reduce overhead. The default Refresh Rate of 50 has been found to provide
the best performance and efficiency in typical satellite link

Managed Switch Mode will automatically use L2 Header Compression

(even if Header Compression option has not been purchased). Because of
IMPORTANT this, some of the initial traffic sent between two devices will not be
received over the satellite until a full Header is transmitted. For example,
the default Header Compression Refresh Rate is 50 packets. If a ping is
sent over the satellite it will time out until the full Header packet is sent.
The Header Compression Refresh Rate on the Administration Menu can be
reduced to minimize the amount of traffic lost when traffic is first sent
between two devices. Once communication between two devices has been
established, both CDM-IP modems will be able to receive all traffic, unless
one CDM-IP is power cycled or reset.

14–16
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.1.10 Payload Compression Refresh Rate

The Payload Compression Refresh Rates determines how many compressed payload packets will
be sent before a single full payload packet is sent. Some compressed payload traffic could be lost
during deteriorated satellite link conditions. Sending a full payload packet will allow the return of
the traffic stream. Refresh rates from 1 to 600 can be individually selected. The Refresh Rate can
be decreased for poor satellite link conditions or increased to further reduce overhead.

14.2.1.11 Telnet Timeout

The Telnet timeout determines how many minutes (1-60) of Telnet inactivity before the Telnet
session is automatically terminated by the IP Module.

The IP Module does not allow concurrent access to the menu via Telnet and
the Console port. If a user connects via Telnet, IP Module automatically
IMPORTANT disables the Console port for the duration of the Telnet session. All menu
pages allow a Telnet logout to end a Telnet session. Also, the IP Module will
automatically end a Telnet session after a period of inactivity (configurable
from 1 to 60 minutes).

14.2.2 Interface Configuration Page

The Interface Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page.

Figure 14-9. Interface Configuration page

The Interface Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Ethernet Interface E Activates Ethernet Interface page.

Satellite/HDLC Interface H Activates Satellite/HDLC Interface page.

14–17
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.2.1 Ethernet Interface Page

The Ethernet Interface page is activated from the Interface Configuration page.

Figure 14-10. Ethernet Interface page

The Ethernet IP Speed/Mode must be set to match the Ethernet port settings of
the connected device port or there will be a significant performance degradation.
For example, if the connected device port is set for auto negotiate then the IP
IMPORTANT
Module must also be set to auto negotiate. It is recommended to use auto
negotiate mode unless the connected device port does not support auto
negotiate. In that case, both Ethernet ports must be set to the same Manual
settings (i.e. 100 Mbps Full Duplex).

The Ethernet Interface page contains the following options/fields

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

MAC Address Read The MAC Address defines the hardware destination MAC Address
Only that is used when an Ethernet packet is destined for the IP Module
Traffic Ethernet Interface. This address is unique and has been
assigned permanently at the factory.
Speed/Mode E The Ethernet Speed Mode is a configurable parameter and thus its
exact setting can vary between specific installations. The default
setting allows the Ethernet port to auto negotiate its link speed on
power-up. Selections are:
1 - Auto
2 - 10 MB/sec Half Duplex
3 - 100 MB/sec Half Duplex
4 - 10 MB/sec Full Duplex
5 - 100 MB/sec Full Duplex
IP Address I This is the IP Address assigned the Ethernet Traffic Interface.
Enter the IP address in aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format
Subnet Prefix Length M Specifies the Subnet Mask assigned to the Ethernet Traffic Interface.
Enter the subnet mask prefix length (8...30)
Link Status [RO] Displays current Link Status of the IP Module Traffic port

14–18
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Managed Switch MAC A (Displayed only when in Managed Switch Mode)
Learning Allows user to disable MAC Learning on packets received on the
Ethernet Interface so that all packets are sent to the satellite.
Managed Switch Gateway G (Displayed only when in Managed Switch Mode)
IP Allows user to define a Gateway so that the IP Module is accessible
from an outside network when in Managed Switch Mode
VLAN V (Displayed only when in Managed Switch Mode)
Allows user to enable VLAN support functions
VLAN Table T (Displayed only when in Managed Switch Mode)
Select VLAN Table to make VLAN Table entries

14.2.2.1.1 VLAN Table

The VLAN Table is activated from the Ethernet Interface page.

Figure 14-11. VLAN Table

In the VLAN Table, there is a Native VLAN and Management VLAN (default VLAN ID 1).
These can be changed to other VLAN ID's, but they cannot be deleted.
If an untagged packet arrives at the IP Module, it will egress as a tagged packet with the defined
Native VLAN ID.
VLAN entries can be added into the VLAN Table and to forward VLAN's over the satellite. A
VLAN entry is also needed on the receiving CDM-570 to receive the VLAN traffic and they will
egress as tagged VLAN's.
If a tagged packet arrives at the Ethernet port, it will only be forwarded if there is a matching
VLAN entry in the VLAN Table and it will egress as tagged. If there is no matching VLAN in the
VLAN Table, the tagged packet will be dropped.

14–19
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.2.2 Satellite/HDLC Interface Page

The Satellite/HDLC Interface page is activated from the Interface Configuration page.

Satellite HDLC addressing only applies to CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.6.x and
earlier.
IMPORTANT
Firmware Ver. 1.7.x and later uses Streamline, and HDLC addresses are not
used. The Satellite Interface menu is read-only and for firmware Ver. 1.7.x
there is no selection for Receive HDLC Channel Addresses.

Figure 14-12. Satellite/HDLC Interface page

The Satellite/HDLC Interface page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
HDLC Addr Mode [RO] HDLC Address Mode – This mode is configured via the Working
Mode, which is found on the Administration page.
Point-To-Point Mode – In this mode of operation, no HDLC
address is transmitted over the satellite link. The restrictions on
using this mode are that it can only be used for pure Point-to-Point
configurations.
Small Network Mode (up to 254 addresses) - In this mode of
operation a single byte HDLC address will be transmitted over the
satellite link (0x1 – 0xFE).
Large Network Mode (up to 32766 addresses) - In this mode of
operation a two byte HDLC address will be transmitted over the
satellite link (0x1 – 0xFFFE).
Receive HDLC Channel H Activates Receiver HDLC Channel Addresses page.
Addresses

14–20
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.2.3 Receive HDLC Channel Addresses Page

The Receive HDLC Channel Addresses page is activated from the Satellite/HDLC Interface page.
This page allows the user to define up to four HDLC addresses that can carry user information on
the Satellite Interface. It is displayed only when using CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.7.x or earlier.

Figure 14-13. Receive HDLC Channel Addresses page

The Receive HDLC Channel Addresses page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

HDLC Addr 1 - 4 1-4 HDLC address in hex <1 - FFFE, enter = 0001>
Note: HDLC addresses are not used in Point-To-Point Mode.
Small Network Mode (up to 254 addresses) - The user is limited
to valid addresses between the values of 0x01 and 0xFE.
Large Network Mode (up to 32766 addresses) - The user is
limited to valid addresses between the values of 0x0001 and
0x7FFF.
Delete HDLC Addr D Enter the HDLC entry to delete <1...4>

14–21
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.3 QoS (Quality of Service) Configuration Page

The QoS Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page.

Figure 14-14. QoS Configuration page

The QoS Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

QoS Mode M Select;

1 - Rule-Max/Pri Mode
2 - Rule-Min/Max Mode
3 - DiffServ Mode

QoS Rules Configuration Q Select to define QoS rules for Max/Pri Mode or Min/Max Mode

DiffServ Rules D Select to define QoS rules for DiffServ Mode

Configuration

Maximum System Latency A Defines the maximum duration that a packet will sit in a QoS
(msecs) queue before being aged out and dropped. This allows the user
to specify the overall depth of the QoS queues in milliseconds
of traffic that is destined to go over the satellite. Lower priority
packets are dropped first until there is enough room to send the
higher priority packets.
Valid range is from 200 to 5000 milliseconds.

Enable WAN Segmentation R Packet Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) is enabled

and Reassembly (SAR) automatically while QoS is enabled. However, SAR is an
adaptive process; it will trigger only if the packet latency
exceeds the threshold value (default to 20 msec).
Latency value is calculated based on the satellite
transmission bandwidth. There is no minimum segment
size. However if the last segment is less than 16 bytes,
then it will be appended to the previous segment
excluding satellite HDLC header in order to avoid
satellite overhead and consumption of CPU cycles.

14–22
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.3.1 QoS Rules Configuration Page – Max/Priority Mode

The QoS Rules Configuration page is activated from the QoS Configuration page.

Figure 14-15. QoS Rules Configuration page (Max/Priority mode)

The QoS Rules Configuration page contains the following options/fields when in Max/Pri Mode:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Rule 01 – 08 (32) 1 - 08 Max/Pri QoS can be assigned to up to 32 different types of
(The 8 currently displayed QoS flows to be defined by the user. Flows can be defined by
Rules; up to 32 can be defined). any combination of Protocol (FTP, UDP, RTP, etc.),
Source/Destination IP (specific or range), and/or Layer 3
Source/Destination Port.
By selecting a QoS Rule, the user will be asked to define the following:
Specify Protocol for the rule 1 UDP - User Datagram Protocol
2 TCP - Transmission Control Protocol
3 ICMP – Internet Control Message Protocol
4 RTP - Real Time Protocol (includes all RTP – VOCE,
VDEO, and RTPS)
5 VOCE – Voice RTP
6 VDEO - Video RTP
7 RTPS – RTP Signaling
8 FTP - File Transfer Protocol only
9 HTTP - Hypertext Transfer Protocol
10 TELN - Telnet
11 SMTP - Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
12 SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
13 SAP – Service Announcement Protocol
14 ORCL - Oracle application traffic
15 CTRX - Citrix application traffic
16 SQL – Structured Query Language
17 IP – Internet Protocol (all inclusive)
18 N-IP - Non-Internet Protocol (all inclusive)

14–23
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Specify priority for the rule 1-8 Priority 1 – Highest, Priority 8 – Lowest:
1 for QoS Priority-1
2 for QoS Priority-2
3 for QoS Priority-3
4 for QoS Priority-4
5 for QoS Priority-5
6 for QoS Priority-6
7 for QoS Priority-7
8 for QoS Priority-8
Maximum bandwidth in kbps 0- Enter desired Maximum Bandwidth in kbps.
<0 - 99999, enter = 99999>: 99999 If no Maximum is desired, select enter, Bandwidth will be
displayed as ‘99999’
Source IP address x.x.x.x Enter desired Source IP Address or subnet.
<enter = 0.0.0.0>: If no Source IP is desired, select enter, Source IP will be
displayed as ‘***’
Number of source subnet bits 0,8-32 Enter desired Source subnet bits.
<0,8-32, enter = 0>: If no Source subnet is desired, select enter, Source subnet
will be displayed as ‘/*’
Destination IP address x.x.x.x Enter desired Destination IP Address or subnet.
<enter = 0.0.0.0>: If no Destination IP is desired, select enter, Destination IP
will be displayed as ‘***’
Number of Destination subnet bits 0,8-32 Enter desired Destination subnet bits.
<0,8-32, enter = 0>: If no Destination subnet is desired, select enter, Destination
subnet will be displayed as ‘/*’
Specify TCP/UDP source port [MIN] 1- Enter desired TCP/UDP source port (or Min port of a
(1 – 65535) <Enter: ***> 65535 range).
If no TCP/UDP source port is desired, select enter, Source
port will be displayed as ‘***’
Specify TCP/UDP source port [MAX] 1- Enter desired TCP/UDP source port (or Max port of a
(1 – 65535) <Enter: ***> 65535 range).
Will not display if no MIN TCP/UDP source port was
selected.
Specify TCP/UDP destination port 1- Enter desired TCP/UDP destination port (or Min port of a
[MIN] 65535 range).
(1 – 65535) <Enter: ***> If no TCP/UDP destination port is desired, select enter,
Destination port will be displayed as ‘***’.
Specify TCP/UDP destination port 1- Enter desired TCP/UDP destination port (or Max port of a
[MAX] 65535 range).
(1 - 65535) <Enter: ***> Will not display if no MIN TCP/UDP destination port was
selected.
Set WRED Y or N Select to enable Weighted Random Early Detect.
(Weighted Random Early Discard)
<Y or N> <Enter : Y>
Specify Filtering for the rule Y or N Select to prevent traffic defined in rule to be forwarded.
<Y or N> <Enter : N> Default N = not filtered
Delete D Enter the QoS Rule to delete <1..32>
Base [1] B Select Base to view, edit, or display a different set of 8 QoS
Rules. For example, if 8 QoS Rules have been defined, add
a new rule by selecting B 9. The QoS Configuration page
will refresh and now display QoS Rules 9 – 16.
QoS [ ] [RO] Displays state of QoS option – Unavailable, Enabled
Disabled. If available, QoS is Enabled or Disabled from the
Administrator Features page.

14–24
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.3.2 QoS Rules Configuration Page – Min/Max Mode

The QoS Rules Configuration page is activated from the QoS Configuration page.

Figure 14-16. QoS Rules Configuration page (Min/Max mode)

In Minimum/Maximum Mode, the QoS Rules Configuration page contains the same options/fields
as in Max/Pri Mode with the following exceptions:
• Priority is not assigned.
• A Minimum Bandwidth can be assigned, or select enter to assign no Min Bandwidth
(displayed as ‘0’).
See section 14.2.3 Quality of Service for a more detailed description of this QoS option.

14–25
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.3.3 DiffServ Rules Configuration Page

The DiffServ Rules Configuration page is activated from the QoS Configuration page.

Figure 14-17. DiffServ Rules Configuration page

In DiffServ Mode, the IP Module will prioritize all traffic by the DSCP value contained within
the IP header of each packet. All packets that do not have a DSCP value will be placed in the
Default Queue and have a Priority of 9.
Configuration of DiffServ Rules is only allowed for Assured Forwarding Classes 1-4 (Rule 9-
12), where a Minimum and Maximum Bandwidth can be assigned.
See 14.2.3 Quality of Service section for a more detailed description of this QoS option.

14–26
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.4 Route Table Configuration Page

Satellite HDLC addressing only applies to CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.6.x and
earlier.

IMPORTANT CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.7.x and later uses Streamline, and HDLC addresses
are not used.

The Configuring the Route Table page is activated from the Main Menu page.

Figure 14-18. Route Table Configuration page

The Configuring the Route Table page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Route001-Route008 (256) 1-8 Route Table allows user to define how packets the IP Module receives
(The 8 currently displayed are routed. Defining an entry in this table is similar to using 'route add'
routes, up to 256 can be command of machines that support that command. For each route, the
defined) user must define:
1. A name assigned by the user to reference the route. The
assigned name cannot contain any whitespace and must be
unique.
2. The destination address of an IP packet of interest.
The number of network addresses that are governed by the selected
destination entry, i.e., subnet mask.
The Next Hop IP address. This is the IP where the packet will be
routed for further processing. The Next Hop IP Address for traffic to be
sent over the satellite will be the desired HDLC address (version 1.6.x
and earlier only).
Point-to-Point – no HDLC address
Small Network - 0x1 – 0xFE
Large Network – 0x1 – 0xFFFE
Also, a route can be defined to have IP Module send traffic to another
IP address on the same subnet as the Ethernet interface.

14–27
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Optionally: If the user enters a multicast address (224.0.0.0-
239.255.255.255) as the destination IP address, then the following
parameters will be requested:
Route Multicast packets from Ethernet to Satellite? [y/n]
The option allows the user to specify if multicast packets that match
the provided IP address will be routed from the Ethernet to Satellite.
“No” means that the packets will be discarded.
Route Multicast packets from Satellite to Ethernet? [y/n]
The option allows the user to specify if multicast packets that match
the provided IP address will be routed from the Satellite to Ethernet.
“No” means that the packets will be discarded.
Multicast Routes always have a subnet length of 32 and the next hop
is 0.0.0.0 because it is not applicable.
Note: The IP Module does allow the specification of one and only
one default route. Destination IP = 0.0.0.0 Subnet Length = 0.
The default route can be defined to send traffic to either the
Satellite or Ethernet interface.
This will cause all packets that do not match any other route
to be sent to the destination the user will have defined for
further processing.
Base B The Route Table menu allows the user to view up to 8 different routes
per screen. To allow editing on any of the 256 entries that can be
defined, the user can select a base address to control which 8 routes
are displayed. For example, if the user wants to edit Routes 32-40,
then a Base value of 32 should be defined.
Delete Route D Route Name to delete.
Display P Displays all of the routes that are currently defined in the system. This
will include automatically generated routes that are provided to simplify
provisioning of the system. The information displayed is: Route Name,
DestIP/SnetBits, Next Hop, HDLC, and Flags.
PerRoute E Enter to enable Header Compression, Payload Compression or
3xDES Encryption on a Per Route basis.
Downlink Mcast [RO] Read only status of Downlink Multicast (Enabled or Disabled). This
feature is enabled or disabled on the Administrator Feature page.

14–28
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Selecting Per Route will display the following menu:

Header Compression, Payload Compression or 3xDES Encryption can be configured on a per

Route basis by selecting the route number.
DES key select <Choose [1-8] for [key1-key8] 0=Clear 9=Random Enter= Clear>:
The value of 0 [CLEAR] will force the IP Module to not encrypt any traffic destined for the
route.
The value of Key[1-8] will use the key specified in the 3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration
Page to encrypt the traffic destined for the route.
The value of Random will cause the IP Module to randomly use any of the 8 TX Keys to encrypt
the traffic destined for the route.

3xDES Encryption:
Managed Switch Mode – By definition, there are no routes in Managed Switch
IMPORTANT operation, so there is no way to assign different keys to traffic. When TX
3xDES encryption is enabled in Managed Switch Mode, all traffic (IP and non-
IP) is encrypted and TX Key1 is always used.
Router Mode – Different TX keys can be assigned to different routes and some
routes can be sent unencrypted [Clear]. If Random is selected, then all TX Keys
must be configured with different keys and the receiving IP modem must have
identical corresponding RX Keys. The IP Module will randomly utilize all 8 Keys
for encryption.

14–29
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.5 Protocol Configuration Page

The Protocol Configuration Page is activated from the Main Menu page.

Figure 14-19. Protocol Configuration Page

The Protocol Configuration Page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

IGMP I Activates IGMP page.

ARP A Activates ARP Table Utilities page.

DHCP Server IP Address R Allows user to enter the IP address of a DHCP server. This
allows hosts on a remote LAN to send DHCP request
packets to the DHCP server so that the DHCP server can
dynamically assign IP addresses to remote hosts.

Brouter Mode B Activates Brouter Configuration page.

14–30
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.5.1 IGMP Information Page

The IGMP Information page is activated from the Protocol Configuration page. The IGMP
Information page allows the user to view the IGMP clients that are actively listening to content
being provided by the IP Module. It also allows the user to determine how the Ethernet Interface is
configured either to receive requests to join IGMP groups or announce groups for others to join.

Figure 14-20. IGMP Information page

The IGMP Information page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
IGMP Read Read only showing IGMP status (Enabled or Disabled).
Only
View IGMP Table V This table reports the content that clients have subscribed to the
IP Module using the IGMP protocol. This allows the user to
determine which services are being used and the minimum time
before a service will be terminated.
Modem as Server: Q The IGMP protocol requests that a server periodically publish to
IGMP query period users on the LAN the Multicast IP Addresses that it can service.
The IGMP query period defines the time interval (in seconds)
between each of these queries for membership.
Modem as Server: R The IGMP max response time defines the time interval (in
IGMP max. response time seconds) that the IP Module should wait before it assumes that
no parties are interested in the content published via an IGMP
query. This option is expressed in seconds, and the max
response time that is accepted by the IP Module is 25 seconds.
Modem as Server: M Defines the number of membership queries that go unanswered
Number of missed responses from LAN clients before the Ethernet Interface will no longer
before leaving IGMP group forward data for that IGMP group.
Consider a IP Module that has the IGMP query period set to 60
seconds and the number of missed responses set to 3. If a client
joins an IGMP group, then the service to that group will not be
discontinued until no clients respond to a query from the IP
Module for a period of 60*3 = 180 seconds.

14–31
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Modem as Client: C The Recognize IGMP Queries parameters determines if the IP
Recognized IGMP queries Module should respond to periodic queries from an IGMP server
that publishes a request to join a specified multicast group.
This parameter will assume either of the following values:
1. YES
2. NO
If set to YES, the IP Module will respond to an IGMP query by
requesting to join a Multicast Group published by the server that
is defined in the IP Module’s route table.
If set to NO, the IP Module will not respond to IGMP queries
from a server. In this type of configuration, the IP Module may
be configured to unconditionally request to join an IGMP group
at an interval specified by the “Unsolicited Report Interval” option
in the Transmitter IGMP Client Configuration Page.
Modem as Client: U This parameter defines which version of the IGMP protocol
IGMP Version used for should be followed when attempting to join a group on a
Unsolicited Reports Multicast Server via an unsolicited report. When the IP Module is
configured to Recognize IGMP Queries, the IP Module will
respond to a query in the same version that the server used to
initiate the query.
This parameter will assume either of the following values:
1. V1
2. V2
The value of V1 will configure the IP Module to use the IGMP
Version 1 protocol to join a Multicast Group available on an
IGMP Server in response to an IGMP Query.
The value of V2 will configure the IP Module to use the IGMP
Version 2 protocol to join a Multicast Group available on an
IGMP Server in response to an IGMP Query.
The user can toggle the value of the IGMP Version used for
Unsolicited Reports from ‘V1’ and ‘V2’ with each selection.
Modem as Client: A Some Cisco Routers may require the definition of a Router Alert
Force Cisco Router Alert Option to recognize a report from a Client to join a Multicast
Option sending V1 reports group. The IP Router Alert Option is defined in RFC2113 and
was introduced by Cisco. While this option is not part of the
IGMP standard, most IGMP V2 implementations contain this
option. However, most implementations of IGMP V1 do not
contain this option. This parameter is defined to prevent possible
conflicts in networks in which a Cisco Router is configured as an
IGMP V1 server.
This parameter can assume either of the following values:
1. YES
2. NO
If set to YES, the IP Module will generate IGMP reports to join
Multicast groups as specifically required by some Cisco Router
configurations.
If set to NO, the IP Module will generate IGMP reports to join
Multicast groups as defined and implemented by most IGMP
servers.

14–32
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Modem as Client: I The Unsolicited Report Interval configures the IP Module to
Unsolicited Report Interval, generate unsolicited reports to join a Multicast Group at
sec specified time intervals. Each unsolicited report to join a
Multicast group will use the version of the IGMP protocol as
specified by the IGMP Version used for Unsolicited Reports
option.
The value of the Unsolicited Report Interval specifies the
number of seconds between unsolicited reports. A value of zero
implies that no unsolicited reports to join a Multicast group
should be generated by the IP Module.

14.2.5.2 ARP Table Utilities Page

The ARP Table Utilities page is activated from the Protocol Configuration Page.

Figure 14-21. ARP Table Utilities page

The ARP Table Utilities page allows the user to view and edit the ARP table defined by the IP
Module. It allows up to 256 static IP->MAC ARP entries.

14–33
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

The ARP Table Utilities page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Entry0001 - 0008 1-8 The user can define up to 256 static ARP definitions on the IP
Module. This table allows the user to operate/view up to 8 of
these definitions. An ARP definition is defined as:
1. Unicast IP Address
This IP Address is used as a lookup into the ARP table when
the IP Module needs to resolve a MAC or HDLC Address.
Restrictions:
IP Address must be on the same subnet as the Ethernet
Interface.
IP Address must be a valid Unicast address (Not Multicast,
broadcast, etc.)
2. MAC Address
The MAC Address defines the hardware destination MAC
Address that is used when an Ethernet packet is destined for
an IP machine from the IP Module.

Add IP to MAC ARP entry M Adds an IP to MAC ARP entry.

Delete ARP Entry D Allows the user to delete a Static ARP entry. Queries the
user for the IP address of the ARP entry to delete.

Display ARP Tbl A Displays the entire IP to MAC ARP table. Includes the Static
as well as dynamic ARP entries. Displays blocks of 10 ARP
entries. Hit ‘Enter’ key to display next 10 entries or ‘Escape’
to return to ARP Table Utilities page.

Flush ARP Table F This option allows the entire ARP table to be removed. This
is equivalent to performing the standard UNIX command “arp
–d” on each address reported in an “arp –a” command. The
command only flushes the dynamic ARP entries. The static
ARP entries will not be removed.

Base B The ARP Table menu allows the user to view up to 8

different ARP definitions per screen. To allow editing on any
of the 256 entries that can be defined, the user can select a
base address to control which 8 ARP entries are displayed.
For example, if the user wants to edit static ARP Entries 32-
40, then a Base value of 32 should be defined.

14–34
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.5.3 Brouter Configuration Page

The Brouter Configuration page is activated from the Protocol Configuration Page.

Figure 14-22. Brouter Configuration page

The Brouter Configuration Page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

VLAN Brouter Mode B If enabled, any packet arriving at the Ethernet interface
with a VLAN header will be automatically forwarded to the
WAN interface. In this mode ALL VLAN packets are sent -
no filtering of any kind.
VLAN Brouter Tx Payload P Allows the user to enable/disable Payload Compression for
Compression all "Brouted" VLAN packets.

VLAN Brouter Next Hop N On the downlink side, this selection allows the operator to
Address define the MAC of the next hop router to which all of the
Brouted packets must be sent. This allows the Brouter
feature to bypass the need send an ARP packet for
packets that could potentially have the same IP address.

14–35
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.6 Vipersat Configuration Page

This page is displayed only if the optional Vipersat feature is enabled.

IMPORTANT

The Vipersat Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page.

Figure 14-23. Vipersat Configuration page

The Vipersat Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

STDMA Mode T
Automatic Switching A
Unit Role R
Expansion Unit E
Bandwidth Group ID B
Used only when CDM-570/570L is used in a
Unit Name N Vipersat system.
Multicast Management IP Address M
Refer to Vipersat Operators Manual for more
Multicast VMS Management IP
V information.
Address
Managing IP Address I
Path Loss Data Multicast (PLDM) P
Dynamic Power Control Config C
Set Home State Parameters H

14–36
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.7 Satellite Modem Page

The Satellite Modem page is activated by selecting Satellite Modem Configuration from the Main
Menu page.

Figure 14-24. Modem Parameters Page

The Satellite Modem page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Modem Type [RO] Modem type – CDM-570/570L.

Configuration C Activates Modem Configuration page.

Monitor M Activates Modem Monitor page.

Information I Activates Modem Information page.

Utilities U Activates Modem Utilities page.

14–37
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.8 Configuration Page

The Modem Configuration page is activated by selecting Configuration from the Satellite Modem
page.

Figure 14-25. Modem Configuration page

The Modem Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Modem Type [RO] Modem type – CDM-570/570L .

Tx Configuration T Activates Tx Configuration page.

Rx Configuration R Activates Rx Configuration page.

Framing Mode Configuration F Activates Framing Mode Configuration page.

Data Interface Configuration I Activates Data Interface Configuration page.

Reference Configuration E Activates Reference Configuration page.

Alarm Mask Configuration A Activates Alarm Mask Configuration page.

BUC Configuration B Activates Block Up Converter (BUC) Configuration page.

LNB Configuration N Activates Low Noise Block Converter (LNB) Configuration

page.

14–38
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.8.1 Tx Configuration Page

The Tx (Transmit Modem) Configuration page is activated from the Configuration page.

Figure 14-26. Tx (Transmit Modem) Configuration Page

The Tx (Transmit Modem) Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Turbo FEC selections are displayed only if the optional Turbo card is installed.
IMPORTANT

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Tx Frequency Q Valid ranges are from 50 to 180 MHz (IF);
950 to 1950 MHz (L-Band)
Tx Data Rate D The rate at which the Modem will send traffic over the Satellite
Interface.
Valid ranges are from 2.4 to 9980 kbps.
Up to 5000 kbps and 9980kbps are options that must be
purchased.
Tx Symbol Rate [RO] Corresponding Symbol Rate for the currently selected data rate,
encoder, rate and modulation scheme.
Tx FEC T 1 - VIT
2 - TURBO
3 - VIT+RS
4 - TCM-RS
Tx Code Rate R 1 - 5/16
2 - 21/44
3 - 1/2
4 - 2/3
5 - 3/4
6 - 7/8
7 - 0.95
9 - 1/1

14–39
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Tx Modulation M Sets transmit modulation type

1 - BPSK
2 - QPSK
3 - OQPSK
4 - 8-PSK
5 - 16-QAM
6 - 8-QAM
Tx Spectrum Inversion U 1 - Normal
2 - Inverted
Tx Data Inversion I 1 - Normal
2 - Inverted
Tx Scrambling B 1 - Off
2 - On-Default
3 - On-IESS-315
Tx Output Power P Valid ranges are from 0.0 to 40.0 dBm
(minus sign assumed)
Tx Carrier C 1 - OFF
2 - ON
3 - Rx-Tx Inhibit – Turn off the transmitter if the Rx is not
locked
NOTE: In a 1:1 Redundant system, the standby CDM-570 will
display [RO] [External Control].
Tx Clock Source [Internal]

14–40
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.8.2 Rx Configuration Page

The Rx (Receive Modem) Configuration page is activated from the Configuration page.

Figure 14-27. Rx (Receive Modem) Configuration Page

The Rx (Receive Modem) Configuration Page contains the following options/fields:

Turbo FEC selections are displayed only if the optional Turbo card is installed.
IMPORTANT

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Valid ranges are from 50 to 180 MHz (IF),
Rx Frequency Q
950 to 1950 MHz (L-Band)
Valid ranges are from 2.4 to 9980 kbps.
Rx Data Rate D Up to 5000 kbps and 9980kbps are options that must be
purchased.
Corresponding Symbol Rate for the currently selected data rate,
Rx Symbol Rate [RO]
encoder, rate and modulation scheme.
1 - VIT
2 - TURBO
Rx FEC T
3 - VIT+RS
4 - TCM-RS
1 - 5/16
2 - 21/44
3 - 1/2
4 - 2/3
Rx Code Rate R
5 - 3/4
6 - 7/8
7 - 0.95
9 - 1/1

14–41
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Rx Demodulation M Sets receive demodulation type

1 - BPSK
2 - QPSK
3 - OQPSK
4 - 8-PSK
5 - 16-QAM
6 - 8-QAM
1 - Normal
Rx Spectrum Inversion U
2 - Inverted
1 - Normal
Rx Data Inversion I
2 - Inverted
Rx Descrambling B 1 - Off
2 - On-Default
3 - On-IESS-315
Rx Acquisition Range W Valid ranges are from 0 to 200 kHz
(Sweep Width) (1 to 32HKz if symbol rate < 625Ksymbol)
Eb/No Alarm Point P Valid ranges are from 0.1 to 16.0
Rx Buffer Size F 1 - Disabled
2 - +/-_1024_bits
3 - +/-_2048_bits
4 - +/-_4096_bits
5 - +/-_8192_bits
6 - +/-_16384_bits
7 - +/-_32768_bits
Recenter Rx Buffer C

14–42
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.8.3 Framing Mode Configuration

The Framing Mode Configuration page is activated from the Configuration page.

Figure 14-28. Framing Mode Configuration Page

The Framing Mode Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Framing Mode F 1 - Unframed
2 - EDMAC Framing
3 - EDMAC-2 Framing
EDMAC Mode D 1 - Unframed
2 - EDMAC Framing
3 - EDMAC-2 Framing
EDMAC Slave Address Range V 10 to 9990 in multiple of ten.
AUPC A 1 - Enable
2 - Disable
Max Power Reached Action R 1 - No_Action
2 - Generate_TX_Alarm
Remote Demod Unlock Action U 1 - Nominal_Power
2 - Maximum_Power
Target Eb/No of Remote Demod (db) E 0.0 to 9.9
Maximum Power Limit M 0 to 9

14–43
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.8.4 Data Interface Configuration

The Data Interface Configuration page is activated from the Configuration page.

Figure 14-29. Data Interface Configuration Page

The Data Interface Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Data Interface I 1 - EAI-422/EAI-530 DCE
2 - V.35 DCE
3 - EAI-232(sync)
4 - G.703 T1 AMI
5 - G.703 T1 B8ZS
6 - G.703 E1 Unbal AMI
7 - G.703 E1 Unbal HDB3
8 - G.703 E1 Bal AMI
9 - G.703 E1 Bal HDB3
10 - IP Interface
NOTE: The data interface must be set to IP Interface for IP
traffic to pass over the satellite.

14–44
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.8.5 Reference Configuration Page

The Reference Configuration page is activated from the Configuration page.

Figure 14-30. Reference Configuration Page

The Reference Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Frequency Reference R 1 - Internal 10 MHz
2 - External 1 MHz
3 - External 2 MHz
4 - External 5 MHz
5 - External 10 MHz
6 - External 20 MHz
Test Mode T 1 - Normal
2 - IF_loopback
3 - Digital_loopback
4 - I/O_Loopback
5 - RF Loopback
6 - Tx_CW
7 - TX_alt_101010

14–45
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.8.6 Alarm Mask Configuration

The Alarm Mask Configuration page is activated from the Configuration page.

Figure 14-31. Alarm Mask Configuration Page

The Alarm Mask Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Tx FIFO A Masked/UnMasked
NOTE: Should always be Masked with IP as data interface.
G.703 BPV B Masked/UnMasked
NOTE: Should always be Masked with IP as data interface.
Tx AIS C Masked/UnMasked
NOTE: Should always be Masked with IP as data interface.
RX AGC D Masked/UnMasked
NOTE: Should always be Masked with IP as data interface.
Eb/No E Masked/UnMasked
Rx AIS F Masked/UnMasked
Buffer Slip G Masked/UnMasked
NOTE: Should always be Masked with IP as data interface.
External Reference H Masked/UnMasked
BUC I Masked/UnMasked
LNB J Masked/UnMasked

14–46
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.8.7 Block Up Converter (BUC) Configuration

The Block Up Converter (BUC) Configuration page is activated from the Configuration page.

Figure 14-32. Block Up Converter (BUC) Configuration Page

The Block Up Converter (BUC) Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

BUC Address A 1 to 15

BUC RF Output R Enabled/Disabled

BUC DC Power W Enabled/Disabled

BUC 10 MHz Reference P Enabled/Disabled

BUC Current Alarm Upper Limit (mA) H 500 to 4000

BUC Current Alarm Lower Limit (mA) C 0 to 3000

BUC LO Frequency (MHz) F 3000 to 65000, 0 to disable

14–47
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.8.8 Low Noise Block Converter (LNB) Configuration

The Low Noise Block Converter (LNB) Configuration page is activated from the Configuration
page.

Figure 14-33. Low Noise Block Converter (LNB) Configuration Page

The Low Noise Block Converter (LNB) Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
LNB DC Supply Voltage P 1 - Off
2 - 13 Volts
3 - 18 Volts
4 - 24 Volts
LNB 10MHz Reference R On/Off
LNB Current Alarm Upper Limit (mA) H In mA
LNB Current Alarm Lower Limit (mA) C In mA
LNB LO Frequency (MHz) F 3000 to 65000, 0 to disable

14–48
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.9 1:1 Redundancy Configuration Page

The 1:1 Redundancy Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page. Refer to
Appendix H. IP REDUNDANCY for detailed information on the use of the CDM-570/570L
Satellite Modem in redundant operations.

Figure 14-34. 1:1 Redundancy Configuration page

The 1:1 Redundancy Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
1:1 Redundancy R Toggles Redundancy state
NOTE: Only enable Redundancy when connected to a CRS
redundancy switch with another CDM-570(L).
1:1 Redundancy State [RO] If stand alone CDM-570(L) – displays Online.
If Redundant CDM-570(L) – displays Online or Offline
Traffic IP Address If stand alone CDM-570(L) – not used.
If Online Redundant CDM-570(L) – used to set Traffic IP
(read/write).
If Offline Redundant CDM-570(L) – displays Traffic IP (read
only).
Traffic Subnet Prefix Length If stand alone CDM-570(L) – not used.
If Online Redundant CDM-570(L) – used to set Traffic Subnet
(read/write).
If Offline Redundant CDM-570(L) – displays Traffic Traffic
Subnet (read only).
Management IP Address If stand alone CDM-570(L) – not used.
(Local Unit) If Online Redundant CDM-570(L) – used to set Local
Management IP (read only).
If Offline Redundant CDM-570(L) – displays Local Management
IP (read only).
Management Subnet Prefix If stand alone CDM-570(L) – not used.
Length (Local Unit) If Online Redundant CDM-570(L) – displays Local Management
Subnet (read only).
If Offline Redundant CDM-570(L) – displays Local Management
Subnet (read only).

14–49
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Management IP Address [RO] If stand alone CDM-570(L) – not used.
(Redundant Unit) If Online Redundant CDM-570(L) – displays Redundant
Management IP (read only).
If Offline Redundant CDM-570(L) – displays Redundant
Management IP (read only).
Management Subnet Prefix If stand alone CDM-570(L) – not used.
Length (Redundant Unit) If Online Redundant CDM-570(L) – displays Redundant
Management Subnet (read only).
If Offline Redundant CDM-570(L) – displays Redundant
Management Subnet (read only).

14.2.10 Operations and Maintenance Page

The Operations and Maintenance page is activated from the Main Menu page.

Figure 14-35. Operations and Maintenance page

14–50
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

The Operations and Maintenance page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Unit Uptime Time in days, hours, mins and secs since the last time the IP
[RO] Module was rebooted.
Unit Information I Displays unit current operational Software information.
IP Module Boot From B Determines which version of the IP Module software package
(includes Application, FPGA, and FFPGA) will be loaded upon
bootup. The possible options are:
0 – Latest: Boot the newest software package based upon date.
1 - Image1: Boot the software package loaded into the first slot in
permanent storage.
2 – Image2: Boot the software package loaded into the second slot
in permanent storage.
Base Modem Boot From A Determines which version of the Base modem firmware will be
loaded upon boot-up. The possible options are:
0 – Latest: Boot the newest software package based upon date.
1- Image1: Boot the software package loaded into the first slot in
permanent storage.
2 - Image2: Boot the software package loaded into the second slot
in permanent storage.
Upgrade To U Determines which installed software package that the IP Module or
base modem firmware will overwrite when upgrading with a new
software package. The possible options are:
0 - Oldest : Overwrite the oldest software package based upon date.
1 - Image1: Overwrite the software package loaded into the first slot
in permanent storage.
2 - Image2: Overwrite the software package loaded into the second
slot in permanent storage.
Codecast Multicast M Multicast address used by Vload to upgrade the modem firmware
Address and param file via streaming multicast. Must match the address
specified in Vload.
PARAM Image C Identifies the PARAM file that will be loaded on bootup. The options
are:
1 - Last saved Parameter file
2 -Factory – uses the internal, hard-coded factory default
parameters.
Statistics T Activates Statistics Menu page.
Event Log E Activates Event Log page.
Database Operations D Activates Database Operations page.
Reset R Allows user to reboot the modem (includes the IP modem and base
modem). It has the same logical effect of power-cycling the unit.
Diagnostics G Activates Diagnostics page.
M&C Interface F Used for base modem communications debugging

14–51
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.1 Unit Information Page

The Unit Information page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance page.

Figure 14-36. Unit Information page

The Unit Information page displays the following information:

Info Set Item Description
1 Current System time DAY MONTH DATE hh:mm:ss YEAR
Image # that the IP Module is By default displays the Latest, unless “IP Module Boot
currently booted from From” is set to Image #1 or Image #2
Image # that the base modem is By default displays Latest, unless “Base Modem Boot
2
currently booted from. From” is set to Image #1 or Image #2
PARAM file that the IP Module is Displays PARAM file from Flash or Factory Default if no
currently configured from parameter file is found in flash memory.
Currently Loaded IP Module and Displays Build Date, CEFD FW#, Revision #, and size of
Base Modem SW: each IP Module and Base Modem SW file:
• Boot • Boot file for the IP Module and the Base Modem.
• IP Bulk #1 • Bulk file contains all of the SW files for the IP
• IP Bulk #2 Module and Base Modem and there are two slots
• BaseBoot available.
• Base Bulk #1
• Base Bulk #2
3 Displays the date/time that the EVENTLOG file was last
EVENTLOG
updated.
PARAM Displays the date/time that the PARAM1 file was last
updated. Also shows what user interface was used to last
update the PARAM file.
• From CLI, displays ‘console’
• From Web, displays ‘http’
• From Telnet, displays the Telnet user login name
• From SNMP, displays ‘snmp’

14–52
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.2 Statistics Page

The Statistics Menu page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance page.

Figure 14-37. Statistics Menu

The Statistics Menu page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

IP Statistics R Displays Statistics for IP Routing and allows counters to be reset.
QoS Statistics Q Displays Statistics for QoS and allows counters to be reset.
Ethernet Statistics E Displays Statistics for the Ethernet Port and allows counters to
be reset.
WAN Statistics W Displays Statistics for the WAN (HDLC) Port and allows counters
to be reset.
Compression Statistics H Displays Statistics for Header & Payload Compression and
allows counters to be reset.
CPU Statistics U Displays CPU Usage % (percentage)
VLAN Statistics V Displays Statistics for the VLAN entries and allows counters to
be reset.
Clear all statistics C Globally resets all statistics counters.

All updates for Statistics information will occur once every 6 seconds.
IMPORTANT

14–53
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.2.1 IP Routing Statistics Page

The Statistics for IP Routing/EasyConnect page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The
Statistics for IP Routing/EasyConnect page displays counts of the number of packets routed in the
IP Module.

Figure 14-38. IP Statistics page

The Statistics for IP Routing/EasyConnect page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
From Ethernet - Total [RO] Ethernet Statistics Page, Rx Good Frames
To Ethernet - Total Ethernet Statistics Page, Tx Good Frames
To Ethernet - Unicasts Unicast packets to LAN
To Ethernet - Multicasts Multicast packets to LAN
To Ethernet - Broadcasts Broadcast packets to LAN
From Satellite - Total WAN Statistics Page, Rx HDLC Packet Count
To Sat - Total WAN Statistics Page, Tx HDLC Packet Count
To Sat - Unicasts Unicast packets to WAN
To Sat - Multicasts Multicast packets to WAN
To Sat - Broadcasts Broadcast packets to WAN
From Endstation - Total Packets sent from IP Module
To Endstation - Total Packets directed to IP Module
Received IGMP Packets Internet Group Management Packets received (used for
management of multicast traffic).
Received IP Options Packets Number of IP Options packets received.
Reset All Counters C Executing this menu option resets all gathered WAN,
Ethernet and IP Routing statistics to zero.
Filter/Drop Statistics F Activates Filter Statistics page.

14–54
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.2.1.1 Filter/Drop Statistics Page

The Filter/Drop Statistics page is activated from the Statistics for IP Routing/EasyConnect page.
The Filter/Drop Statistics page displays counts of the number of packets filtered or dropped in
the IP Module.

Figure 14-39. Filter/Drop Statistics page

14–55
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

The Filter/Drop Statistics page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Filtered – Boot [RO] Packets are filtered while booting.
1. Packet are Filtered due to a Multicast packet classified as
UNICAST packet.
Filtered – Flow Descriptor
2. Packets are filtered due to Off-line modem is receiving packet
from WAN port.
Filtered – Unknown Reason
Packets dropping due to reasons were not listed here.
Code
Packet are filtered due to improper establishing SAT-to-SAT traffic
Filtered – Flow Correlator (This counter generally will be seen on out bounding Hub modem
in point-to-multipoint setup)
Filtered – Management Path Not used currently.
Internal Error occurred during WAN scaling sub process in
Filtered – WAN Scaling
processing packet.
Filtered – Ping Ping packets were received but PING feature was disabled.
Packets are received while “Access List” control is enabled but IP
Filtered – Access Control
address does not match the access list database.
Internal Error occurred while processing Vipersat Multi-command
Filtered – Vipersat MCP
messages.
Internal Error occurred while processing Vipersat Uni-command
Filtered – Vipersat UCP
messages.
Filtered – Codeload Internal error occurred while processing Codeload messages.
A multicast packet is received but there is no application
Filtered – Multicast
associated with it.
Malformed packet is received. This may be due to internal or
Filtered – Bad Packet
external error.
Applies to Vipersat Remote only – when a packet is received
from the WAN and the Route Table contains a route to transmit
Filtered – Route
that packet to the WAN, the packet will be filtered to prevent a
routing loop.
Filtered – Vipersat Remote Packet filtered due to QoS Rule configured to filter.
Filtered – QoS Rule Packet filtered due to QoS Rule configured to filter.
Packet are filtered due to Vipersat loop
Filtered – Vipersat Loop (a modem configured as a Vipersat Remote Expansion unit and
default route set to 0.0.0.0/0).
Filtered due to packets received with less than 14 bytes of L2
Filtered – Bad Header Len
header.
Filtered – Bad Data Ptr Internal error occurred while accessing the packet data.
Filtered – MAC Split Err Not currently used.
Filtered – L3Type Err Not currently used.
Packet received with destination MAC as modem MAC and
Filtered – Local Destination destination IP is not modem IP while modem is operating in
bridge mode (Managed Switch)
Applies to Offline modem in 1:1 Redundancy
Packets will be received on the WAN port by the both Offline unit
Filtered – Redundancy Err and Online unit, only Online unit is allowed to forward the
packets. Indicates packets received by Offline unit from WAN
port that were filtered because unit is Offline.

14–56
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

This is the same as “Filtered Ping”, except this will update in
Filtered – ICMP Filter [RO]
Managed Switch mode.
Non-IP or ARP packets are targeted to End-station. (End-station
Filtered – Port Err
will not allow any non-IP packets).
In 1:1 Redundancy Managed Switch mode - a packet received
with modem destination MAC, but the IP does not match the
Filtered – Per port route rule traffic IP or management IP.
In Router mode - per port WAN filtered mode is ON.
Filtered – Total Total Filtered Packets
Dropped - Bad IP Header
Total Dropped Packets due to incorrect IP Header Checksum.
Checksum
IP length (as specified in packet header) was greater than
Dropped - Bad Buffer Length payload received in the Ethernet packet. This would indicate the
packet was truncated before arriving.
Total Dropped IP Version 6 Packets (IP Module only supports IP
Dropped - Bad IP Version
Version 4).
Total Dropped Packets due to Time To Live counter expired (TTL
Dropped - TTL Expired limits the number of hops, or seconds, before a packet reaches
its destination).
Total Dropped Packets due to no Route for the destination in the
IP Module Route Table. These are packets that are directed to
Dropped - No Route
the IP Module’s MAC address and the IP Module will reply to the
sender with a ICMP ‘Destination net unreachable’ message.
Total Dropped Packets due to no ARP entry in IP Module ARP
Table. For example, if a IP Module receives packets from the
Dropped - No ARP Entry satellite for a host that is not in the ARP table, the IP Module will
send an ARP request. If there is no response, the packets will be
dropped.
Total Dropped Multicast Packets received from the satellite due
Dropped - Filtered Multicast
to no SAT→LAN or
Multicast packet was dropped because, although route existed,
Dropped – Multicast Disable
IGMP is being used, and there is no client requesting forwarding
Group
of this traffic or due to a IGMP “leave group” message.
Total Dropped Multicast Packets received from the satellite due
Dropped – Managed Switch
to the ‘Managed Switch Multicast Option’ feature not being
Multicast Option
enabled in Managed Switch Mode.
Indicates that the router task is dropping packets due to being
Dropped – Router Queue Full full. Represents a graceful drop process when the processor
performance is being overdriven.
Dropped - Total Total Dropped Packets
Executing this menu option resets all gathered WAN, Ethernet
Reset All Counters C
and IP Routing statistics gathered to zero.

14–57
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.2.2 QoS Statistics Page

The QoS Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The QoS Statistics page
displays the statistics for the number of IP packets routed, based upon the defined QoS Rules, by
the IP Module.

Figure 14-40. QoS Statistics Page

NOTE: In DiffServ QoS Mode, statistics for the various DiffServ DSCP Classes will be in the
following Queues:
Queue01 – Expedited Forwarding
Queue02 – Class 1 Precedence
Queue03 – Class 2 Precedence
Queue04 – Class 3 Precedence
Queue05 – Class 4 Precedence
Queue06 – Class 5 Precedence
Queue07 – Class 6 Precedence
Queue08 – Class 7 Precedence
Queue09 – Assured Forwarding Class 1
Queue10 – Assured Forwarding Class 2
Queue11 – Assured Forwarding Class 3
Queue12 – Assured Forwarding Class 4

14–58
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.2.3 Ethernet Statistics Page

The Ethernet Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The Ethernet Statistics
page presents the total packets transmitted and received for the Ethernet Port of the IP Module.

Figure 14-41. Ethernet Statistics page

14–59
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

The Ethernet Statistics page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Tx Bytes [RO] Number of bytes transmitted by this Ethernet interface.
Number of good frames transmitted by this Ethernet
Tx Good Frames
interface.
Number of frames that are not transmitted because they
Tx Maximum Collision Count
encountered configured max collisions.
Number of frames dropped due to a late collision on the
Tx Late Collision Count
Ethernet.
Number of frames not transmitted or re-transmitted due to
Tx DMA Underrun Error Count
transmit DMA underrun.
Number of frames transmitted by device despite the fact
Tx Lost Carrier Sense Count
that it detected a de-assertion of carrier sense.
Number of frames deferred before transmission due to
Tx Deferred Count
activity on link.
Number of transmitted frames that encountered only one
Tx Single Collision Count
collision.
Number of transmitted frames that encountered more than
Tx Multiple Collision Count
one collision.
Total number of collisions encountered while attempting to
Tx Total Collision Count
transmit.
Rx Bytes Number of bytes received by this Ethernet interface.
Rx Good Frames Count of good frames received by the Ethernet device.
Rx CRC Error Frame Count Number of aligned frames discarded due to a CRC error.
Number of frames that are both misaligned and contain a
Rx Alignment Error Count
CRC error.
Count of good frames discarded due to unavailable
Rx Resource Error Count
resources.
Rx Collision Detect Error Count Number of frames encountered collisions during frame
(CDT) reception.
Rx Runt Frames Count Count of undersize frames received by the Ethernet device.
Tx Flow Control Pause Frames
Number of Flow Control frames transmitted by the device.
Transmitted
Rx Flow Control Pause Frames
Number of Flow Control frames received by the device.
Received
CLEAR C Resets all Ethernet Statistics

14–60
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.2.4 WAN Statistics

The WAN Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The WAN Statistics page
displays counts of the number of packets routed or dropped in the IP Module Satellite interface.

Figure 14-42. WAN Statistics page

14–61
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

The WAN Statistics page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
[RO] Count of received frames that failed packet processor CRC check.
WAN Rx Pkt Proc CRC Error Count Indicates that a Payload Compressed Packet was received that
could not be decompressed.
WAN Rx Abort/Octet Error Count Count of aborted frames and octet error frames.
Count of received frames that exceeded max frame length of 2K
WAN Rx Overrun Count
bytes in length (Or) overflowed the HDLC buffer.
Number of received frames that failed HDLC CRC check. Indicates
WAN HDLC CRC Error Count that a corrupted packet was received and is usually due to a marginal
satellite link.
The count of payload bytes that were received over satellite link
WAN Rx HDLC Payload Bytes
excluding any frame overhead.
The count of HDLC header bytes received over satellite link
WAN Rx HDLC Header Bytes
including control, HDLC address, Flow ID, and CRC.
WAN Rx HDLC Packet Count Number of packets received over satellite link.
Number of packets received that matched any of the 4 RX HDLC
WAN Rx HDLC Address Match
Addresses defined in the Satellite interface (not used with version
Packet Count
1.7.x and later).
Number of packets received that did not match any of the 4 RX
WAN Rx HDLC Address Filtered
HDLC Addresses defined in the Satellite interface (not used with
Packet Count
version 1.7.x and later).
Number of packets which the flow identifier has been corrupted,
WAN Rx Err Invalid Flow ID
does not fall into the range of acceptable values.
WAN Rx Err SAR Reassemble Number of packets unable to correctly reassemble a segmented packet.
Number of packets unable to correctly decompress the header
WAN Rx Err Hdr Decomp
information.
WAN Rx Err Mem Alignment Number of packets discarded (caused by memory corruption).
WAN Rx Err bad CRC Number of corrupted packets indicated by CRC check.
WAN TX Err - No Route
WAN TX Err - Pkt Start
WAN TX Err - Pkt Front Length
WAN TX Err - Pkt End Length Internal Traffic Statistics used for Factory Troubleshooting
WAN TX Err - Pkt Invalid Length
WAN TX Err - Pkt Dropped - Sat
overdriven
This counter keeps track of number of HDLC header bytes
WAN Tx HDLC Header Bytes
transmitted over satellite link.
WAN Tx HDLC Payload Bytes Number of payload bytes transmitted over satellite link.
WAN Tx HDLC Packet Count Count of packets transmitted over satellite link.
Percentage of current TX data rate being used for IP traffic (after
WAN Utilization
compression and framing)
Ethernet traffic destined to go over
Bandwidth required to forward Ethernet traffic before compression.
WAN (kbps)
Actual Satellite traffic (kbps) Current satellite bandwidth being used.
Displays percent of bandwidth being saved as a result of Header
Percentage of WAN Bandwidth saved
and/or Payload Compression, and optimized satellite framing.
Clear C Resets all WAN statistics.

14–62
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.2.5 Compression Statistics

The Compression Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The Compression
Statistics page displays counts of the number of bytes before and after for both Header and
Payload Compression. For Header Compression, the percentage of bandwidth savings is
displayed. For Payload Compression, the effective compression ratio is displayed.

Figure 14-43. Compression Statistics page

The Compression Statistics page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Queue01…08 [RO] Statistics are displayed in a table format showing:
Pre-Header Comp Bytes
Post-Header Comp Bytes
Header Comp % Savings
Pre-Payload Comp Bytes
Post-Payload Comp Bytes
Payload Compression Ratio
DefQue
Global All traffic that does not fall within a defined QoS Rule will be
indicated in the ‘Global’ (Default Rule Queue).
CLEAR C Allows a reset of the Statistics of a specific Queue.
ClrAll A Resets all Compression Statistics.
ClrDefQ D
Base [1] B Allows the user to view up to 8 different Queues per screen. To
allow editing on any of the 32 entries that can be defined, the
user can select a base address to control which 8 QoS Queues
are displayed. For example, if the user wants to view QoS
Queues 16-24, then a Base value of 16 should be defined.

Note: Although the QoS option is not required to use Header or Payload Compression, the
Compression Statistics are displayed by QoS Rule flow Queues. If QoS is not enabled, all the
Compression Statistics will fall within the Global Queue.

14–63
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.2.6 CPU Statistics

The CPU Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The CPU Statistics page
displays IP Module CPU Utilization as a percentage(%).

Figure 14-44. CPU Statistics page

14.2.10.2.7 VLAN Statistics

The VLAN Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The VLAN Statistics page
displays VLAN packets to and from the WAN (satellite) and to and from Ethernet (LAN) by
VLAN ID. It also displays VLAN packets to and from the Management VLAN of the IP Module.

Figure 14-45. VLAN Statistics page

14–64
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.3 Event Log Page

The Event Log page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance page.

Figure 14-46. Event Log page

The Event Log page allows the user to capture all IP Module events to a log. The Event Log Page
contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Logging Feature F Select to Enable/Disable Logging
E Select

Logging Level 1 – Errors Only

2 – Errors and Warnings
3 – All Information
V Select to view log. Will display most recent events. Press any key
to scroll through events or Escape to exit. All events will display
Type – Error, Warning, or Information
Date/Time – NOTE: During bootup, multiple Boot Events will be
View log created, but a Date/Time will only be seen when the bootup has
completed.
Category – Boot, Database, FTP logins, upgrade file transfers,
Ethernet Link status change.
Description – Event details
Clear log C Select to clear log contents.

14–65
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

NOTE: The full Event log file can be retrieved by FTP. Use Admin login, then type the
command ‘get eventlog’.
The entire Event log can then be viewed with a text viewer, as per the following example:

54 Information 05/21/2004 10:12:04 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c

1041 FTP FTP Connected - 'User: comtech' logged in

53 Information 05/21/2004 09:07:40 C:/Comtech/cimmib/cimMib.c

520 Database Set system clock to FRI MAY 21 09:07:40 2004

52 Information Unknown Unknown C:/Comtech/startup/usrAppInit.c

534 Boot Configuring router using PARAM file

51 Information Unknown Unknown C:/Comtech/startup/usrAppInit.c

364 Boot Detected Framer Module II.

50 Information 05/21/2004 08:57:42 C:/Comtech/cimmib/cimMib.c

520 Database Set system clock to FRI MAY 21 08:57:42 2004

49 Information Unknown Unknown C:/Comtech/startup/usrAppInit.c

534 Boot Configuring router using PARAM file

48 Information Unknown Unknown C:/Comtech/startup/usrAppInit.c

364 Boot Detected Framer Module II.

47 Information 05/21/2004 08:13:02 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c

180 FTP Disconnected FTP

46 Information 05/21/2004 07:58:06 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c

540 FTP FTP Transfer complete

45 Information 05/21/2004 07:58:04 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c

863 FTP Image has been saved to FLASH

44 Information 05/21/2004 07:57:40 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c

1041 FTP FTP Connected - 'User: comtech' logged in

43 Information 05/21/2004 06:55:14 C:/Comtech/Telnetd/Telnetd.c

421 Telnet Telnet disconnected

42 Information 05/21/2004 06:54:26 C:/Comtech/Telnetd/Telnetd.c

385 Telnet Connected host 10.6.6.94

41 Information 05/21/2004 06:38:02 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c

180 FTP Disconnected FTP

40 Information 05/21/2004 06:23:07 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c

540 FTP FTP Transfer complete

39 Information 05/21/2004 06:23:06 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c

863 FTP Image has been saved to FLASH

38 Information 05/21/2004 06:22:43 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c

1041 FTP FTP Connected - 'User: comtech' logged in

14–66
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.4 Database Operations Page

The Database Operations page is activated from Operations and Maintenance Page.

Figure 14-47. Database Operations page

The Database Operations option allows the user to view, save, or erase an existing user
configuration of the IP Module. An IP Module uses these types of configuration files to initialize
itself on power-up.
The User Configuration File allows the user to over-write the values defined in the Factory
Configuration file. This allows full customization of a IP Module without erasing a set of
parameters defined from the factory. The User configuration file can also be retrieved or
overwritten via FTP by specifying the filename ‘param1’.
The Database Operations page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Restore Factory Default R Restores the IP Module settings to “safe” values as
defined by the factory.
Load Parameters from P This option overwrites the current configuration of the IP
permanent storage Module with the configuration last saved to permanent
storage. It allows the user to perform an “Undo” type
operation if the IP Module is put into an undesirable state
by the user.
Automatically Save PARAM after A When enabled, this feature automatically will save any
CONFIG change configuration changes, including changes made from the
front panel.

14–67
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.2.10.5 Diagnostics Page

The Diagnostics Page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance page.

Figure 14-48. Diagnostics Page

Using Dump Packets Diagnostics Utilities

1. The Dump Packet Utilities will display a hexadecimal representation of each
IMPORTANT packet and should not be used when the IP Module is on a “live” network.
2. Selecting the menu option a second time terminates the dump operation.
Each selection toggles the value of the dump engine.

The Diagnostics Page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description
Dump Packets transmitted to T Toggles [Yes] and [No]
Satellite Interface Forces the IP Module to dump a hexadecimal representation of
each packet transmitted over the Satellite Interface.
Dump Packets received from R Toggles [Yes] and [No]
Satellite Interface Forces the IP Module to dump a hexadecimal representation of
each packet received from the Satellite Interface.
Dump Packets transmitted to U Toggles [Yes] and [No]
Ethernet Interface Forces the IP Module to dump a hexadecimal representation of
each packet transmitted to the Ethernet Interface.
Dump Packets received from V Toggles [Yes] and [No]
Ethernet Interface Forces the IP Module to dump a hexadecimal representation of
each packet received from the Ethernet Interface.
Dump Packets received by B Toggles [Yes] and [No]
Router Forces the IP Module to dump a hexadecimal representation of
each packet received by the routing engine.
Note: Does not apply when in Managed Switch Mode.
Dump Packets sent to G Toggles [Yes] and [No]
EndStation Executing this menu option forces the IP Module to dump a
hexadecimal representation of each packet received by and
destined for this modem. This traffic includes Pings, SNMP,
Telnet, HTTP, and FTP traffic types.

14–68
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

Dump Packets received from H Toggles [Yes] and [No]
EndStation Forces the IP Module to dump a hexadecimal representation of
each packet sourced from this modem and destined for some
other device. Allows user to see what type of packets this
modem is generating internally.
Ping P Enter the IP address in aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format, enter the
number of pings to be sent. Reports percentage of packet loss
and round trip time (RTT) in msec (min/avg/max).
Traceroute A Enter the IP address in aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format. Reports
min/avg/max RTT for each hop in path.
Command Line Debug D Enter the password to access the debug command line.
Prompt Note: This is reserved for Customer Service and engineering
use.

14–69
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
IP Module - CLI and Telnet Operation MN/CDM570L.IOM

14.3 Telnet Session – Logout Option

When connecting to the IP Module through a Telnet session, the menus present another option to
logout of the Telnet session. This logout option is in all the menus and, when selected, logs the
user out of the Telnet session, returning control of the CLI to the serial interface.

Figure 14-49. Logout via Telnet Session

The IP Module does not allow concurrent access to the menu via Telnet and the
Console port. If a user connects via Telnet, IP Module automatically disables the
Console port for the duration of the Telnet session. All menu pages allow a
IMPORTANT
Telnet logout to end a Telnet session. Also, the IP Module will automatically end
a Telnet session after a period of inactivity (configurable from 1 to 60 minutes).

14–70
Chapter 15. RAN OPTIMIZATION /
WAN ADAPTATION

15.1 Overview
The CDM-570/570L supports E1 RAN (Radio Access Network) Optimization for Point-to-Point
circuits. This chapter provides detailed information about this patent-pending technology, which
is designed to provide maximum savings while maintaining superior voice quality.

15.1.1 E1 RAN Optimization Components

Use of the E1 RAN Optimization feature requires the following components:
• E1 RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation Processor Board (CEFD P/N
IMPORTANT PL-0000599).
Note that equipping the CDM-570/570L with the E1 RAN Optimization / WAN
Adaptation Processor Board precludes equipping the CDM-570/570L with the
Reed-Solomon Board (CEFD P/N AS/10551). Accordingly, Reed-Solomon
coding is not available when the E1 RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation
Processor Board is installed.
• CDM-570/570L Firmware Version 1.7.0, which supports the E1 RAN
Optimization / WAN Adaptation feature.
• GSM backhaul traffic consisting of a combination of 8k & 16K voice TCH
(traffic channels) and 16 kbps, 32 kbps and 64kbps HDLC channels.
Operation of the voice channels is codec independent. The interface supports
the E1 framing format.
Note that, while the IP Module Ethernet Interface and the RAN Optimization
capability can coexist in a modem, the IP Module Ethernet Interface and RAN
Optimization cannot be operated concurrently.

15–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation MN/CDM570L.IOM

15.1.2 Radio Access Network (RAN)

In the cellular network, the RAN connects cell-site nodes with central-site nodes:
• For Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) / 2G, the Base Transceiver
Stations (BTS) connect to the Base Station Controllers (BSC) via the Abis interface. Voice,
data and signaling are transported over one or more E1s.
• For Universal Mobile Telecommunications Systems (UMTS) / 3G, the NodeB connects to
the Radio Network Controller (RNC) via the “lub” interface. Voice, data and signaling are
transported over one or more E1s using Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).
Figure 15-1 illustrates the typical RAN for 2G and 3G networks.

Figure 15-1. 2G / 3G Radio Access Network (RAN)

15–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation MN/CDM570L.IOM

15.1.3 RAN Inefficiency

The 2G/3G RAN design is not efficient for satellite backhaul. For example, in the GSM Abis
interface shown in Figure 15-2, the resource allocation is on a fixed basis (one or more E1s per
BTS), irrespective of the actual traffic. Within the E1, the Time Slots (TS) are dedicated to
signaling, voice and data per Transceiver (TRX).

Figure 15-2. Typical Abis Map

15.2 E1 RAN Optimization

Jointly developed by Comtech EF Data, CEFD sister division Comtech AHA Corp., and CEFD
subsidiary Memotec Inc., the RAN Optimization technology significantly reduces the Wide Area
Network (WAN) / satellite bandwidth required to carry an E1 bearer used for cellular backhaul.
RAN Optimization allows the transmit modem data rate to be reduced relative to the input
terrestrial data rate, thus allowing the transport of a user-selectable channel subset of bearer E1
using less bandwidth. In the receive direction, the data is restored to the E1 format for transport
over the G.703 E1 interface.
The process is designed to allow varying levels of optimization to accommodate the incoming
terrestrial data in the reduced modem data rate. Optimization performance depends on the traffic
profile and the difference between the terrestrial data rate (based on input timeslot selection) and
the transmit modem data rate. The optimization is performed in hardware for optimal
performance.

15–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation MN/CDM570L.IOM

The user has complete control over the desired level of optimization by selecting the time slots to
be optimized, and the transmit modem data rate. Depending on the traffic profile, typical
bandwidth reduction of 30-35% can be achieved with little or no impact to the voice quality.
Users have the option to reduce the WAN bandwidth by as much as 60% relative to the ingress
data rate – this allows the users to achieve desired bandwidth savings while maintaining desired
voice quality.

15.2.1 Process Overview

Figure 15-3. RAN Optimization (GSM Abis Interface)

On the transmit side, the RAN optimization process can be summarized as follows:
• The incoming 64 kbps Time Slots are de-multiplexed into Traffic Channels (TCH) ;
• TCH are inspected in real-time to identify Signaling, Voice, Data, and Idle;
• Idle TCH are removed;
• Silence frames are removed from the Voice channel;
• Signaling and Data TCH are compressed using lossless compression;
• O&M frames are compressed using lossless compression;
• Voice frames are compressed using lossless compression;
• Pre-emptive Bandwidth Management to maintain service quality;
• The optimized payload is sent to the modem for transmission.
On the receive side, this process is reversed, re-creating the E1 for transmission over the G.703
E1 interface.

15–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation MN/CDM570L.IOM

15.2.2 WAN Link Dimensioning and Pre-emptive Bandwidth Management

The RAN traffic varies over time – variations during the day that peak at certain time(s), and
longer term variation as user density/profile(s) changes. The WAN link can be dimensioned to
accommodate the peak traffic, or it can be dimensioned to meet a statistically derived value (e.g.
average traffic).
Dimensioning the WAN link for peak traffic may not be economically viable. However,
dimensioning the WAN link for average traffic has its challenges. Specifically: What happens
when the optimized traffic exceeds WAN capacity?
Typical of most other vendors’ RAN optimization solutions, Figure 15-4 shows the optimized
Abis traffic as a function of time, depending on the BTS traffic load. The red line is the pre-
defined WAN link capacity (assuming 35% target optimization). Each time the optimized Abis
traffic exceeds WAN capacity, packets are dropped and the voice quality degrades dramatically –
even leading to dropped calls or in the worst case, causing BTS drop.

Figure 15-4. Optimized Abis Traffic without Pre-emptive BW Management

The simplistic packet drop employed by most vendors in case of WAN congestion has potentially
disastrous effects on voice quality and call handling – the results can include clicks, blank calls,
and eventually call drops, especially if the BCCH channel of the TRX is impacted. In the worst
case, it may even lead to BTS drop.
To compensate, most other vendor solutions are forced to over-dimension the WAN link, which
leads to significant inefficiencies. This methodology should not be acceptable to mobile
operators. A good RAN optimization solution should be nearly transparent, and should provide
the same level of service to the mobile customers as when there is no RAN Optimization while
providing a significant reduction in the RAN transmission bandwidth.
As implemented by Comtech EF Data, the superior method of handling WAN congestion is to
perform pre-emptive and selective voice packet discard. Comtech EF Data’s RAN Optimization
solution employs a sophisticated bandwidth management capability to maintain Service Quality.
The signaling and O&M traffic is always protected from being dropped in case of WAN
congestion – this ensures that the BTS/NodeB stays connected and synchronized. The bandwidth

15–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation MN/CDM570L.IOM

manager smoothes peak traffic variation before the optimized RAN traffic reaches the available
WAN capacity – this mechanism maintains good voice quality while effectively reaching the
optimal target optimization rate.
Comtech EF Data’s patent pending algorithm on voice packet discard is designed to minimize the
impact on the voice quality. This results in superior voice quality and improved Service Quality
even at peak hour traffic load. Implementing a RAN optimization solution without such capability
serves little purpose.

Figure 15-5. Optimized Abis Traffic with Pre-emptive BW Management

15–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation MN/CDM570L.IOM

15.2.3 Performance Monitoring

The RAN Optimizer collects detailed usage and performance statistics that can be accessed via
the CDM-570/570L Web Server Interface’s Stats | Graphs page. Viewable by the minute, the
hour, or the day, these graphs provide the user with the information needed to monitor the link
performance, and to take appropriate action as needed.
For complete details on the pages shown here, and for more information about the modem’s Web
Server Interface, refer to Chapter 7. BASE MODEM WEB SERVER INTERFACE.

15.2.3.1 RAN Optimization (WAN Adaptation) Savings

The following graph shows the actual percentage of RAN Optimization (WAN Adaptation) savings:

15.2.3.2 WAN Utilization

The following graph displays:
• The ingress data rate (Terrestrial Data Rate) based on selected number of Time Slots;
• WAN or the Modem Data Rate (egress); and
• The instantaneous optimized RAN traffic rate.

15–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
RAN Optimization / WAN Adaptation MN/CDM570L.IOM

15.2.3.3 Link Congestion/Quality

The following graph displays the Link Quality Metric, a qualitative measure of the voice quality
predicted by a) the level of the compression and b) voice packet discard required to accommodate
the incoming traffic into the available WAN (satellite) bandwidth:

Note that ‘8’ on this graph indicates the highest quality, with no voice traffic discard.

15–8
 Appendix A. CABLE DRAWINGS

The EIA-530 standard pinout provided on the CDM-570/570L is becoming more popular in many applications. However, there are still
many occasions when – particularly with existing EIA-422/449 and V.35 users – a conversion must be made.

For these situations, Figures A-1 shows details for a EIA-530 to EIA-422/449 DCE conversion cable (Comtech EF Data part number
CA/WR12753-x), while Figure A-2 shows a EIA-530 to V.35 DCE conversion cable (Comtech EF Data part number CA/WR12685-x).

A–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix A MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure A-1. CDM-570/L EIA-530 to RS-422/449 DCE Conversion Cable (CEFD Dwg. No. CA/WR12753)

A–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix A MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure A-2. CDM-570/L EIA-530 to V.35 DCE Conversion Cable (CEFD Dwg. No. CA/WR12685)

A–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix A MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

A–4
Appendix B. Eb/N0 MEASUREMENT
Although the CDM-570/570L calculates and displays the value of receive Eb/N0 on the front
panel of the unit, it is sometimes useful to measure the value using a spectrum analyzer, if one is
available.
The idea is to accurately measure the value of (Co+No)/No, (Carrier density + Noise
density/Noise density). This is accomplished by tuning the center frequency of the Spectrum
analyzer to the signal of interest, and measuring the difference between the peak spectral density
of the signal (the flat part of the spectrum shown) and the noise density.
To make this measurement:
• Use a vertical scale of 1 or 2 dB/division.
• Set the Resolution Bandwidth of the Spectrum Analyzer to < 20% of the symbol rate.
• Use video filtering and/or video averaging to reduce the variance in the displayed trace to
a low enough level that the difference can be measured to within 0.2 dB.
• Place a marker on the flat part of the signal of interest, then use the MARKER DELTA
function to put a second marker on the noise to the side of the carrier. This value is
(Co+No)/No, in dB.
• Use this value of (Co+No)/No in the table on the following page to determine the Eb/No.
You will need to know the operating mode to read from the appropriate column.
• If the (Co+No)/No value measured does not correspond to an exact table entry,
interpolate using the two nearest values.
Note that the accuracy of this method degrades significantly at low values of (Co+No)/No
(approximately less than 6 dB).

B–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix B MN/CDM570L.IOM

Example: In the diagram that follows, the (Co+No)/No measured is 4.6 dB. If Rate 1/2 QPSK is
being used, this would correspond to an Eb/No of approximately 2.6 dB.

The exact relationship used to derive the table values is as follows:

(Co+No/No )/10)
Eb/N0 = 10 log10 (10 -1) - 10 log10 (FEC Code Rate) - 10 log10 (bits/symbol)
where:
• Eb/N0 and (Co+No)/No are expressed in dB
• Bits/symbol = 1 for BPSK
• Bits/symbol = 2 for QPSK
• Bits/symbol = 3 for 8-PSK/8-QAM
• Bits/symbol = 4 for 16-QAM
• Code Rate for ‘uncoded’ = 1
• Pay close attention to the sign of the middle term

B–2
 Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No Eb/No
(Co+No)
Uncoded Rate 1/2 Rate 21/44 Rate 5/16 Uncoded Rate 1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate 0.95 Rate 2/3 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate 0.95 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8
/No
BPSK BPSK BPSK BPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 8-PSK 8-PSK 8-PSK 8-PSK 16-QAM 16-QAM
Appendix B

1.4 - - - 0.8 - - - - - - - - - - -
1.6 - - - 1.5 - - - - - - - - - - -
1.8 - - - 2.1 - - - - - - - - - - -
2.0 - 0.7 0.9 2.7 - - - - - - - - - - -
2.2 - 1.2 1.4 3.2 - - - - - - - - - -
2.4 - 1.7 1.9 3.7 - - - - - - - - - - -
2.6 - 2.1 2.3 4.2 - - - - - - - - - - -
2.8 - 2.6 2.8 4.6 - - - - - - - - - - -
3.0 0.0 3.0 3.2 5.0 - - - - - - - - - - -
3.5 0.9 3.9 4.1 5.9 - 0.9 - - - - - - - - -
4.0 1.8 4.8 5.0 6.8 - 1.8 - - - - - - - - -
4.5 2.6 5.6 5.8 7.6 - 2.6 0.8 - - - - - - - -
5.0 3.3 6.3 6.5 8.4 - 3.3 1.5 0.9 - - - - - - -
5.5 4.1 7.1 7.3 9.1 1.1 4.1 2.3 1.7 1.3 - - - - - -
6.0 4.7 7.7 7.9 9.8 1.7 4.7 2.9 2.3 1.9 - - - - - -
6.5 5.4 8.4 8.6 10.4 2.4 5.4 3.6 3.0 2.6 - - - - - -
7.0 6.0 9.0 9.2 11.1 3.0 6.0 4.2 3.6 3.2 - - - - - -
7.5 6.6 9.6 9.8 11.7 3.6 6.6 4.8 4.2 3.8 - - - - - -
8.0 7.3 10.3 10.5 12.3 4.3 7.3 5.5 4.9 4.5 - - - - - -
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module

8.5 7.8 10.8 11.0 12.9 4.8 7.8 6.0 5.4 5.0 4.8 - - - - -
9.0 8.4 11.4 11.6 13.4 5.4 8.4 6.6 6.0 5.6 5.4 4.9 - - - -

B–3
9.5 9.0 12.0 12.2 14.0 6.0 9.0 7.2 6.6 6.2 6.0 5.5 4.8 4.5 - -
10.0 9.5 12.5 12.7 14.6 6.5 9.5 7.7 7.1 6.7 6.5 6.0 5.3 5.0 - -
10.5 10.1 13.1 13.3 15.1 7.1 10.1 8.3 7.7 7.3 7.1 6.6 5.9 5.6 5.3 -
11.0 10.6 13.6 13.8 15.7 7.6 10.6 8.8 8.2 7.8 7.6 7.1 6.4 6.1 5.8 5.2
11.5 11.2 14.2 14.4 16.2 8.2 11.2 9.4 8.8 8.4 8.2 7.7 7.0 6.7 6.4 5.8
12.0 11.7 14.7 14.9 16.7 8.7 11.7 9.9 9.3 8.9 8.7 8.2 7.5 7.2 6.9 6.3
12.5 12.2 15.2 15.4 17.3 9.2 12.2 10.4 9.8 9.4 9.2 8.7 8.0 7.7 7.4 6.8
13.0 12.8 15.8 16.0 17.8 9.8 12.8 11.0 10.4 10.0 9.8 9.3 8.6 8.3 8.0 7.4
13.5 13.3 16.3 16.5 18.3 10.3 13.3 11.5 10.9 10.5 10.3 9.8 9.1 8.8 8.5 7.9
14.0 13.8 16.8 17.0 18.8 10.8 13.8 12.0 11.4 11.0 10.8 10.3 9.6 9.3 9.0 8.4
14.5 14.3 17.3 17.5 19.4 11.3 14.3 12.5 11.9 11.5 11.3 10.8 10.1 9.8 9.5 8.9
15.0 14.9 17.9 18.1 19.9 11.9 14.9 13.1 12.5 12.1 11.9 11.4 10.7 10.4 10.1 9.5
15.5 15.4 18.4 18.6 20.4 12.4 15.4 13.6 13.0 12.6 12.4 11.9 11.2 10.9 10.6 10.0
16.0 15.9 18.9 19.1 20.9 12.9 15.9 14.1 13.5 13.1 12.9 12.4 11.7 11.4 11.1 10.5
16.5 16.4 19.4 19.6 21.4 13.4 16.4 14.6 14.0 13.6 13.4 12.9 12.2 11.9 11.6 11.0
17.0 16.9 19.9 20.1 21.9 13.9 16.9 15.1 14.5 14.1 13.9 13.4 12.7 12.4 12.1 11.5
17.5 17.4 20.4 20.6 22.4 14.4 17.4 15.6 15.0 14.6 14.4 13.9 13.2 12.9 12.6 12.0
18.0 17.9 20.9 21.1 23.0 14.9 17.9 16.1 15.5 15.1 14.9 14.4 13.7 13.4 13.1 12.5
18.5 18.4 21.4 21.6 23.5 15.4 18.4 16.6 16.0 15.6 15.4 14.9 14.2 13.9 13.6 13.0
19.0 18.9 21.9 22.1 24.0 15.9 18.9 17.1 16.5 16.1 15.9 15.4 14.7 14.4 14.1 13.5
19.5 19.5 22.5 22.7 24.5 16.5 19.5 17.7 17.1 16.7 16.5 16.0 15.3 15.0 14.7 14.1
20.0 20.0 23.0 23.2 25.0 17.0 20.0 18.2 17.6 17.2 17.0 16.5 15.8 15.5 15.2 14.6
Notes: IBS Framing: add 0.2 dB EDMAC Framing: rates below 2048 kbps add 0.2 dB, otherwise 0 Reed-Solomon: add an additional 0.4 dB to the values shown
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Revision 9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix B MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

B–4
 Appendix C. FAST ACTIVATION
PROCEDURE

C.1 FAST System Overview

The CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem is extremely flexible and powerful, and incorporates a large
number of optional features. In order to permit a lower initial cost, the modem may be purchased
with only the desired features enabled.
If, at a later date, a user wishes to upgrade the functionality of a modem, Comtech EF Data provides
Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST), which permits the purchase and installation of options
through special authorization codes loaded into the unit either via the front panel keypad or entered
remotely via the remote port located on the modem rear panel.
These unique access codes may be purchased during normal business hours from Comtech EF Data.

FAST System Theory

FAST facilitates on-location upgrade of the operating feature set without removing a modem
from the setup.
With FAST technology, operators have maximum flexibility for enabling functions as they are
required. FAST allows an operator to order a modem precisely tailored for the initial application.
When service requirements change, the operator can upgrade the topology of the modem to meet
those requirements within minutes. This accelerated upgrade can be accomplished because of FAST’s
extensive use of the programmable logic devices incorporated into Comtech EF Data products.

FAST Implementation
Comtech EF Data’s FAST system is factory-implemented in the modem. All FAST options are
available through the basic platform unit at the time of order – FAST allows immediate activation of
available options, after confirmation by Comtech EF Data, through the front panel keypad or via the
remote control interface.

FAST Accessible Options

Hardware options for basic modems can be ordered and installed either at the factory or in the
field. The operator can select options that can be activated easily in the field, depending on the
current hardware configuration of the modem. A unique access code enables configuration of the
available hardware.

C–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix C MN/CDM570L.IOM

Refer to Sect 1.3.12 in Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION for the lists of FAST and FAST-
accessible hardware options available for the CDM-570/570L.

C.2 Activation Procedure

C.2.1 Serial Number

Obtain the Modem serial number as follows:
a. From the SELECT: (main) menu, select UTILÆ FAST, then press ENTER.
b. The Modem motherboard Serial Number is displayed on the bottom line:
FAST:Cnfg View (H/W 0.03)
MainBoard S/N: 123456789
c. Record the Serial Number: ______________________________

C.2.2 View currently installed features

To view the currently installed features, proceed as follows:
a. From the SELECT: (main) menu, select UTIL Æ FAST Æ View, then press ENTER.
b. Use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to scroll through the Modem Options and note which are
‘Installed’ or ‘Not Installed’:
View Options: 09 (▲ ▼)
5000 kbps Not Installed
Any option identified as ‘Not Installed’ may be purchased as a FAST upgrade.
c. Contact a Comtech EF Data sales representative to order features. You will be asked to
provide the Modem Serial Number. Comtech EF Data Customer Support personnel will
verify the order and provide an invoice and instructions, including a 20-character
configuration code.

C.2.3 Enter Access Codes

Enter the access codes as follows:
a. Press CLEAR to return to the FAST menu:
FAST:Cnfg View (H/W 0.03)
MainBoard S/N: 123456789
b. Select Cnfg, then press ENTER. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to Edit
Code.
FAST Configuration:
Edit Code Demo Mode
c. Press ENTER.
Edit 20 digit FAST Code:
00000000000000000000 ENT

C–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix C MN/CDM570L.IOM

d. Enter the code carefully. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to each character.
Use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the character, then press ENTER. The modem will
respond with “Configured Successfully” if the new FAST option has been
accepted:
Configured Successfully
(ENTER or CLEAR)
If, on the other hand, the FAST code is rejected, the following menu will be displayed:
FAST Code Rejected!
(ENTER or CLEAR)

C.2.4 Enable / Disable Demo Mode

Control FAST Demo Mode as follows:
a. Press CLEAR to return to the FAST menu:
FAST:Cnfg View (H/W 0.03)
MainBoard S/N: 123456789
b. Select Cnfg, then press ENTER. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to Demo
Mode:
FAST Configuration:
Edit Code Demo Mode
c. Press ENTER.
FAST Demo Mode: Off On

IF THE DEMO MODE STATE (OFF/ON) IS CHANGED, OR IF DEMO MODE IS

ENABLED AND THE TIMER EXPIRES, THE MODEM FIRMWARE WILL AUTO-
REBOOT AFTER 5 SECONDS.
NOTE THAT VALIDATION OF AUTHORIZED FAST OPTIONS OCCURS ON AUTO-
IMPORTANT
REBOOT; IF AN INVALID CONFIGURATION IS FOUND, THE MODEM
CONFIGURATION WILL RESET TO DEFAULT VALUES.
604800 seconds remain
d. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to select Off or On. When On, the second
line will display the under of seconds remaining available for the free Demo Mode.
When enabled, Demo Mode allows access to ALL CDM-570/570L FAST options for
604800 seconds (7 full days). Demo Mode may be turned on and off an unlimited
number of time until the 604800 seconds have expired. The seconds count is only
decrement when the mode is On. When the Demo period expires the following menu is
displayed:
FAST Demo Mode: Off On
Demo Period Expired

C–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix C MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

C–4
 Appendix D. SERIAL REMOTE
CONTROL
D.1 Overview
This appendix describes the protocol and message command set for remote monitor and control
of the CDM-570/570L Modem.

The electrical interface is either an EIA-485 multi-drop bus (for the control of many devices) or an
EIA-232 connection (for the control of a single device), and data is transmitted in asynchronous serial
form, using ASCII characters. Control and status information is transmitted in packets, of variable
length, in accordance with the structure and protocol defined in later sections.

D.2 EIA-485
For applications where multiple devices are to be monitored and controlled, a full-duplex (or
4-wire) EIA-485 is preferred. Half-duplex (2-wire) EIA-485 is possible, but is not preferred.

In full-duplex EIA-485 communication there are two separate, isolated, independent, differential-
mode twisted pairs, each handling serial data in different directions. It is assumed that there is a
‘Controller’ device (a PC or dumb terminal), which transmits data, in a broadcast mode, via one
of the pairs. Many ‘Target’ devices are connected to this pair, which all simultaneously receive
data from the Controller. The Controller is the only device with a line-driver connected to this
pair – the Target devices only have line-receivers connected.

In the other direction, on the other pair, each Target has a Tri-Stateable line driver connected, and
the Controller has a line-receiver connected. All the line drivers are held in high-impedance mode
until one (and only one) Target transmits back to the Controller.

Each Target has a unique address, and each time the Controller transmits, in a framed ‘packet’ of
data, the address of the intended recipient Target is included. All of the Targets receive the
packet, but only one (the intended) will reply. The Target enables its output line driver, and
transmits its return data packet back to the Controller, in the other direction, on the physically
separate pair.

D–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

EIA-485 (full duplex) Summary:

Two differential pairs One pair for Controller-to-Target, one pair for Target-to-Controller.

Controller-to-Target pair One line driver (Controller), and all Targets have line receivers.

Target-to-Controller Pair One line receiver (Controller), and all Targets have Tri-State drivers.

D.3 EIA-232
This is a much simpler configuration in which the Controller device is connected directly to the
Target via a two-wire-plus-ground connection. Controller-to-Target data is carried, via EIA-232
electrical levels, on one conductor, and Target-to-Controller data is carried in the other direction
on the other conductor.

D.4 Basic Protocol

Whether in EIA-232 or EIA-485 mode, all data is transmitted as asynchronous serial characters,
suitable for transmission and reception by a UART. In this case, the asynchronous character
formats include 7O2, 7E2, and 8N1. The baud rate may vary between 1200 and 38,400 baud.
All data is transmitted in framed packets. The Controller is assumed to be a PC or ASCII dumb
terminal, which is in charge of the process of monitor and control. The Controller is the only
device that is permitted to initiate, at will, the transmission of data. Targets are only permitted to
transmit when they have been specifically instructed to do so by the Controller.
All bytes within a packet are printable ASCII characters, less than ASCII code 127. In this
context, the Carriage Return and Line Feed characters are considered printable.
All messages from Controller-to-Target require a response (with one exception). This will be either to
return data that has been requested by the Controller, or to acknowledge reception of an instruction to
change the configuration of the Target. The exception to this is when the Controller broadcasts a
message (such as Set time/date) using Address 0, when the Target is set to EIA-485 mode.

D–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

D.5 Packet Structure

Controller-to-Target
Start of Target Address Instruction Code Optional
End of Packet
Packet Address Delimiter Code Qualifier Arguments
< / = or ? Carriage Return
ASCII code 60 ASCII code 47 ASCII codes ASCII code 13
61 or 63

(1 character) (4 characters) (1 character) (3 characters) (1 character) (n characters) (1 character)

Example: <0135/TFQ=1949.2345{CR}
Target-to-Controller
Start of Target Address Instruction Code Optional
End of Packet
Packet Address Delimiter Code Qualifier Arguments
> / =, ?, !, or * Carriage Return,
ASCII code 62 ASCII code 47 ASCII codes Line Feed
61,63,33 or 42 ASCII codes
(From 0 to n 13,10
(1 character) (4 characters) (1 character) (3 characters) (1 character) characters) (2 characters)

Example: >0654/RSW=32{CR}{LF}

D.5.1 Start of Packet

Controller-to-Target: This is the character '<' (ASCII code 60).
Target-to-Controller: This is the character '>' (ASCII code 62).
Because this is used to provide a reliable indication of the start of packet, these two characters
may not appear anywhere else within the body of the message.

D.5.2 Target Address

Up to 9,999 devices can be uniquely addressed. In EIA-232 applications this value is set to 0. In
EIA-485 applications, the permissible range of values is 1 to 9999. It is programmed into a Target
unit using the front panel keypad.
The Controller sends a packet with the address of a Target – the destination of
the packet. When the Target responds, the address used is the same address,
to indicate to the Controller the source of the packet. The Controller does not
IMPORTANT have its own address.

D.5.3 Address Delimiter

This is the character ‘/’ (forward slash) (ASCII code 47).

D–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

D.5.4 Instruction Code

This is a three-character alphabetic sequence that identifies the subject of the message. Wherever
possible, the instruction codes have been chosen to have some significance. For Example: TFQ
for Transmit FreQuency; RMD for Receive MoDulation type, etc. This aids in the readability of
the message, should it be displayed in its raw ASCII form. Only upper case alphabetic characters
may be used (A-Z, ASCII codes 65 - 90).

D.5.5 Instruction Code Qualifier

This single character further qualifies the preceding instruction code. Code Qualifiers obey the
following rules:
1. From Controller-to-Target, the only permitted values are:

= The = code is used as the assignment operator, and is used to indicate that the
parameter defined by the preceding byte should be set to the value of the
(ASCII code 61
argument(s) that follow it. For Example: In a message from Controller-to-Target,
TFQ=0950.0000 would mean ‘set the Tx frequency to 950 MHz’

? The ? code is used as the query operator, and is used to indicate that the Target
should return the current value of the parameter defined by the preceding byte.
(ASCII code 63)
For Example: In a message from Controller-to-Target, TFQ? would mean
‘return the current value of the transmit frequency’.

2. From Target-to-Controller, the only permitted values are:

= The = code is used in two ways:

(ASCII code 61) First, if the Controller has sent a query code to a Target (for Example: TFQ?,
meaning ‘what is the Tx frequency?’), the Target would respond with
TFQ=xxxx.xxxx, where xxxx.xxxx represents the frequency in question.
Second, if the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular
value, and if the value sent in the argument is valid, then the Target will
acknowledge the message by replying with TFQ= (with no message arguments).

? The ? code is only used as follows:

(ASCII code 63) If the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value,
then, if the value sent in the argument is not valid, the Target will acknowledge
the message by replying, for example, with TFQ? (with no message arguments).
This indicates that there was an error in the message sent by the Controller.

! The ! code is only used as follows:

(ASCII code 33) If the Controller sends an instruction code which the Target does not recognize,
the Target will acknowledge the message by echoing the invalid instruction,
followed by the ! character. Example: XYZ!

* The * code is only used as follows:

(ASCII code 42) If the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value,
then, if the value sent in the argument is valid, BUT the modem will not permit
that particular parameter to be changed at that time, the Target will acknowledge
the message by replying, for example, with TFQ* (with no message arguments).

# The # code is only used as follows:

(ASCII code 35) If the Controller sends a correctly formatted command, BUT the modem is not in
remote mode, it will not allow reconfiguration, and will respond with TFQ#.

D–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

∼ The ∼ code is only used as follows:

(ASCII Code 126) If a message was sent via a local modem to a distant end device or ODU, the
message was transmitted transparently through the local modem. In the event of
the distant-end device not responding, the local modem would generate a
response. Example: 0001/RET~, indicating that it had finished waiting for a
response and was now ready for further comms.

+ The + code is only used as follows:

(ASCII Code 43) This is similar to the = code (acknowledgement), indicating that a command has
been accepted and processed, but in addition, indicates that some other
configuration parameter has also been modified.
Example: Suppose the user has selected Viterbi + Reed-Solomon, QPSK, Rate
1/2. Now, the user changes the modulation type from QPSK to 16-QAM by
sending TMD=4. In this case, Rate 1/2 is no longer a valid code rate, and so it
will be automatically changed to the nearest valid code rate (Rate 3/4). The
Target will therefore respond with TMD+.

^ The ^ code is only used as follows:

(ASCII Code 94) This indicates that the modem is in Remote mode, so serial remote control is not
possible. There are two exceptions to this:
• The LRS (local/remote status) command is still active, and may be used to
change the operating mode to local or to serial remote control.
• For the CDM-570L, the FPL (front panel lockout) command is active, and
may be used to configure the Front Panel Lockout to be “No lockout” or
“Active.”

D.5.6 Optional Message Arguments

Arguments are not required for all messages. Arguments are ASCII codes for the characters 0 to 9
(ASCII codes 48 to 57); period (ASCII code 46); and comma (ASCII code 44); plus miscellaneous
printable characters.

D.5.7 End of Packet

Controller-to-Target: This is the 'Carriage Return' character (ASCII code 13).
Target-to-Controller: This is the two-character sequence 'Carriage Return' (ASCII code 13), and
'Line Feed' (ASCII code 10).
Both indicate the valid termination of a packet.
 

D–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

D.6 Remote Commands and Queries

Index Notes: Column ‘C’ = Command; Column ‘Q’ = Query: Columns marked ‘X’ designate instruction code as
Command only, Query only, or Command/Query.
Where Instruction Code (Column ‘CODE’) reads XXXL = CDM-570L only.
Where Instruction Code (Column ‘CODE’) reads XXXW = WAN Adaptation Option only.
CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE
A E X X M S
ABA X X D-17 EBA X X D-17 MGC X X D-26 SNO X D-26
ACRW X D-31 EBN X D-13 MSK X X D-21 SSI X X D-23
ADJ X X D-15 EFM X X D-17 SWR X D-23
ALA X X D-29 EID X D-18 N
APP X X D-15 ERF X X D-17 NUE X D-21 T
AUP X X D-15 ESA X X D-17 NUS X D-22 TCK X X D-10
TCR X X D-9
F TDI X X D-10
B FLT X D-19 O TDR X X D-9
BADL X X D-27 FPL X X D-10 ODU X X D-22 TFQ X X D-10
BCEL X X D-27 FRB X D-20 OGCL X X D-25 TFT X X D-9
BCHL X X D-27 FRM X X D-8 TIM X X D-24
BCLL X X D-27 FRW X D-20 TMD X X D-9
BDCL X D-27 FSW X D-20 P TMP X D-24
BDVL X D-27 PLI X D-10 TPL X X D-10
BER X D-13 G TRFL X D-11
BFRL X X D-27 TSC X X D-11
BFS X D-15 H Q TSI X X D-11
BLOL X X D-28 TSR X D-11
BOEL X X D-28 I TST X X D-24
BOLL X D-28 ICHW X X D-31 R TTFL X D-11
BPAL X D-28 IEP X D-20 RBS X X D-13 TXO X X D-11
BPCL X X D-28 IMG X X D-20 RCB X D-22
BSVL X D-28 IPA X X D-20 RCR X X D-12 U
BUTL X D-29 ISP X D-21 RDI X X D-14
ITF X X D-8 RDR X X D-13 V
RDS X X D-13 VFW X D-24
C J REB X D-24
CAE X D-15 RED X D-24 W
CAS X D-15 K RFO X D-24 WUD X X D-24
CEX X X D-16 RFQ X X D-13
CID X X D-16 L RFT X X D-12 X
CLD X D-16 LBO X X D-21 RMD X X D12
CST X D-16 LCHL X X D-29 RNE X D-22
CTD X X D-16 LCLL X X D-29 RNS X D-23 Y
LDCL X D-29 RSI X X D-14
D LDVL X D-29 RSL X D-14
DAY X X D-16 LFRL X X D-30 RSR X D-14 Z
DCHW X X D-31 LLOL X X D-30 RSW X X D-14
DNIW X X D-31 LPCL X X D-30 RTS X X D-23
LRS X X D-21

D–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Section D.6.X Notes:

1. The remote commands and queries are arranged as subsections of this chapter as follows:
• Sect. D.6.1 Transmit (Tx) Commands and Queries
• Sect. D.6.2 Receive (Rx) Commands and Queries
• Sect. D.6.3 Unit Commands and Queries
• Sect. D.6.4 Bulk Commands and Queries
• Sect. D.6.5 BUC Commands and Queries (CDM-570L ONLY)
• Sect. D.6.6 LNB Commands and Queries (CDM-570L ONLY)
• Sect. D.6.7 WAN Adaptation Option Commands and Queries
2. A command/query that is unique to the CDM-570L is noted in the ‘Parameter Type’ column as (CDM-570L ONLY).
Similarly, a command/query that is unique to the CDM-570 is noted in the ‘Parameter Type’ column as (CDM-570 ONLY).
For commands and queries common to both the CDM-570/570L, any operational difference is noted accordingly in the ‘Description of
Arguments’ column.
3. The following codes are used in the ‘Response to Command’ column (see Sect. D.5.5 for further details):
= Message ok
? Received ok, but invalid arguments found
* Message ok, but not permitted in current mode
# Message ok, but unit is not in Remote mode
~ Time out of an EDMAC pass-through message
+ Warning. Command accepted, but other parameters were changed in addition

D–7
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

D.6.1 Transmit (Tx) Commands and Queries

Tx Priority System = ITF (Highest priority), FRM, TFT, TMD, TCR, and TDR (Lowest Priority), indicated by shading. Any change to a higher
priority parameter can override any of the parameters of lower priority.
Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Unit ITF= 1 byte, Command or Query. ITF= ITF? ITF =x
Interface Type value of 0 thru 8 Terrestrial interface type, where: ITF? (see Description of
0=EIA-422/EIA530 DCE ITF* Arguments)
1=V.35 DCE ITF#
2=EIA-232 (sync). ITF+
3= G.703 T1 AMI (forces Rx and Tx data rates to 1544 kbps)
4= G.703 T1 B8ZS (forces Rx and Tx data rates to 1544 kbps)
5= G.703 E1 Unbal AMI (forces Rx and Tx rates to 2048 kbps)
6= G.703 E1 Unbal HDB3 (forces Rx and Tx rates to 2048 kbps)
7= G.703 E1 Bal AMI (forces Rx and Tx rates to 2048 kbps)
8= G.703 E1 Bal HDB3 (forces Rx and Tx rates to 2048 kbps)
9 = IP Interface
A= WAN Adaptation Unbal AMI *
B= WAN Adaptation Unbal HDB3 *
C= WAN Adaptation Bal AMI *
D= WAN Adaptation Bal HDB3 *
* A-D require the compression coprocessor card to be installed in
the expansion slot. Data rates are limited to 1024kbps
All other codes invalid. Example: ITF=2 (V.35)
Note: When ITF is set to be G.703, Clock Extension Mode is
automatically set to be 0=None. Reply: ITF+
Unit Framing FRM= 1 byte, Command or Query. FRM= FRM? FRM=x
Mode value of 0 or 1 Unit operating mode, where: FRM? (see Description of
0=Unframed FRM* Arguments)
1= EDMAC Framing FRM#
2= EDMAC-2 Framing FRM+
Example: FRM=1 (which is framed)

D–8
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Tx FEC Type TFT= 1 byte, Command or Query. TFT= TFT? TFT=x
value of 0 thru 6 Tx FEC coding type, where: TFT? (see Description of
0=None (uncoded - no FEC) (Forces TCR=7 1/1) with differential TFT* Arguments)
encoding ON TFT#
1=Viterbi TFT+
2=Viterbi + Reed-Solomon
3=Reserved – do not use
4= Reserved – do not use
5=TCM + Reed-Solomon (Forces TCR=3 2/3)
6=Turbo
Example: TFT=1 (which is Viterbi coding)
Tx Modulation TMD= 1 byte, Command or Query. TMD= TMD? TMD=x
Type value of 0 thru 5 Tx Modulation type, where: TMD? (see Description of
0=BPSK TMD* Arguments)
1=QPSK TMD#
2=OQPSK TMD+
3=8PSK
4=16-QAM (Turbo or Viterbi + RS only)
5=8-QAM (Future option)
Depending on FEC type, not all of these selections will be valid.
Example: TMD=2 (which is OQPSK)
Tx FEC Code TCR= 1 byte, Command or Query. TCR= TCR? TCR=x
Rate value of 0 thru 7 Tx Code Rate, where: TCR? (see Description of
0 = Rate 5/16 (Turbo Only) TCR* Arguments)
1 = Rate 21/44 (Turbo Only) TCR#
2 = Rate 1/2 TCR+
3 = Rate 2/3 (8-PSK TCM or 8-QAM only)
4 = Rate 3/4
5 = Rate 7/8
6 = Rate 0.95 (Turbo Only)
7 = Rate 1/1 (Uncoded or No FEC)
Depending on FEC and Modulation type, not all of these selections
will be valid.
Example: TCR=4 (which is Rate 3/4)
Tx Data Rate TDR= 8 bytes Command or Query. TDR= TDR? TDR=xxxx.xxx
Tx Data rate, in kbps, between 2.4 kbps and 9.98 Mbps TDR? (see Description of
Resolution=1 bps. TDR* Arguments)
TDR#
Example: TDR=2047.999 (which is 2047.999 kbps)

D–9
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Front Panel FPL= 1 byte, Command or Query. FPL= FPL? FPL=x
Lockout value of 0 or 1 Control the state of front panel lockout, where: FPL? (see Description of
0=no lockout FPL* Arguments)
1=front panel lockout active FPL#
Disable the lockout by either FPL=0, or by setting into local mode using
LRS=0 (response is LRS+ meaning FPL is disabled at the same time)
Tx Power Level N/A 3 bytes Query only. N/A PLI? PLI=x.x
Increase Returns the increase in Tx power level, in dB (from the nominal setting) (see Description of
due to the action of AUPC. Range is 0.0 to 9.9 dB Arguments)
Responds x.x if AUPC is disabled.
Example: PLI=2.3
Tx Clock Source TCK= 1 byte, Command or Query. TCK= TCK? TCK=x
value of 0 thru 2 Tx Clock Source, where: TCK? (see Description of
0=Internal TCK* Arguments)
1=Tx Terrestrial TCK#
2= Loop-Timed
Example: TCK=0 (selects Internal)
Note: When TCK is changed from Internal to Non-Internal, Clock
Extension Mode will be automatically changed to 0=None if it was
1=TxLock. Reply: TCK+
Tx Data Invert TDI= 1 byte, Command or Query. TDI= TDI? TDI=x
value 0 or 1 Invert Transmit Data TDI? (see Description of
0=Normal TDI* Arguments)
1=Inverted TDI#
Example: TDI=1 (selects Inverted TX Data)
Tx Frequency TFQ= 9 bytes Command or Query. TFQ= TFQ? TFQ=xxxx.xxxx
Tx Frequency TFQ? (see Description of
CDM-570L: 950 to 1950 MHz TFQ* Arguments)
CDM-570: 50 to 90 and 100 - 180 MHz TFQ#
Resolution=100 Hz
Example: TFQ=0950.9872
Example: TFQ=0073.4528
Tx Power Level TPL= 4 bytes Command or Query. TPL= TPL? TPL=xx.x
(Command not valid in AUPC mode) TPL? (see Description of
TPL* Arguments)
Tx Output power level
TPL#
CDM-570L: 0 to -40 dBm (minus sign assumed).
CDM-570: 0 to -25 dBm (minus sign assumed).
Example: TPL=13.4

D–10
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Terminal Rx N/A 10 bytes Query only – CDM-570L only. N/A TRF? TRF=xxxxx.xxxx
Frequency Terminal Rx Frequency, where frequency = LNB LO ± RFQ (see Description of
Resolution=100 Hz Arguments)
Returns 00000.0000 if LNB LO is zero
Example: TRF=11650.2249
Tx Scrambler TSC= 1 byte, Command or Query. TSC= TSC? TSC=x
value of 0, 1 or 2 Tx Scrambler state, where: TSC? (see Description of
0=Off TSC* Arguments)
1=On (default scrambler type) TSC#
2 = On - IESS-315 (Turbo only)
Example: TSC=1 (Scrambler On)
Tx Spectrum TSI= 1 byte, Command or Query. TSI= TSI? TSI=x
Invert value of 0 or 1 Tx Spectrum Invert selection, where: TSI? (see Description of
0=Normal, TSI* Arguments)
1=Tx Spectrum Inverted TSI#
Example: TSI=0 (which is normal)
Tx Symbol Rate N/A 8 bytes Query only. N/A TSR? TSR=xxxx.xxx
Tx Symbol rate, in ksymbols/sec, between 4.8 ksps and 3.00 Msps (see Description of
Resolution = 1 sps. Arguments)
Example: TSR=2047.999 (which is 2047.999 ksymbols/sec)
Terminal Tx N/A 10 bytes Query only – CDM-570L only. N/A TTF? TTF=xxxxx.xxxx
Frequency Terminal Tx Frequency, where frequency = BUC LO ± TFQ (see Description of
Resolution=100 Hz Arguments)
Returns 00000.0000 if LNB LO is zero
Example: TTF=14250.9872
Tx Carrier State TXO= 1 byte, Command or Query. TXO= TXO? TXO=x
value 0 thru 4 Tx Carrier State, where: TXO? (see Description of
0=OFF due to front panel or remote control command TXO* Arguments)
1=ON TXO#
2=RTI (receive/transmit inhibit)
3=OFF due to ext H/W Tx Carrier Off command (not a valid
argument when used as a command)
4=OFF due to BUC warm up delay (not a valid argument in a command
format.)
Example: TXO=1 (Tx Carrier ON)

D–11
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

D.6.2 Receive (Rx) Commands and Queries

Rx Priority System = RFT (Highest priority), RMD, RCR, and RDR (Lowest Priority), indicated by shading. Any change to a higher priority
parameter can override any of the parameters of lower priority.
Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Rx FEC Type RFT= 1 byte, Command or Query. RFT= RFT? RFT=x
value of 0 thru 6 Rx FEC Type, where: RFT? (same format
0=None (uncoded – no FEC) with differential encoding ON RFT* as command argument)
1=Viterbi RFT#
2=Viterbi + Reed-Solomon RFT+
3= Reserved – do not use
4= Reserved – do not use
5=TCM + Reed-Solomon
6=Turbo
Example: RFT=1 (which is Viterbi only)
Rx Demod type RMD= 1 byte, Command or Query. RMD= RMD? RMD=x
value of 0 thru 5 Rx Demodulation, where: RMD? (see Description of
0=BPSK RMD* Arguments)
1=QPSK RMD#
2=OQPSK RMD+
3=8PSK
4=16QAM (Turbo or Viterbi + RS only)
5=8-QAM (Future option)
Depending on FEC type, not all of these selections will be valid.
All other codes are invalid.
Example: RMD=2 (selects OQPSK)
Rx FEC Code RCR= 1 byte, Command or Query. RCR= RCR? RCR=x
Rate value of 0 thru 7 Rx FEC Code Rate, where: RCR? (see Description of
0 = Rate 5/16 (Turbo Only) RCR* Arguments)
1 = Rate 21/44 (Turbo Only) RCR#
2 = Rate 1/2 RCR+
3 = Rate 2/3 (8-PSK TCM or 8-QAM only)
4 = Rate 3/4
5 = Rate 7/8
6 = Rate 0.95 (Turbo Only)
7 = Rate 1/1 (Uncoded or No FEC)
Depending on FEC and demodulation type, not all of these
selections will be valid.
Example: RCR=1 (selects Rate 3/4)

D–12
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Rx Data Rate RDR= 8 bytes Command or Query. RDR= RDR? RDR=xxxx.xxx
Rx Data Rate, in kbps, between 2.4 kbps to 9.98 Mbps. RDR? (see Description of
Resolution=1 bps RDR* Arguments)
RDR#
Example: RDR=2047.999
Rx BER N/A 5 bytes Query only. N/A BER? BER=a.bEc
Value of the estimated corrected BER is returned in the form a.b x 10
-c (see description
where: of arguments)
-c
a.b = value, L= exponent.
Returns 99999 if the demodulator is unlocked.
-3
Example: BER=4.8E3 (which is BER = 4.8 x 10 )
Rx Eb/No N/A 4 bytes Query only. N/A EBN? EBN=xxxx
The value of Eb/No, between 0 and 16 dB, is returned. (see Description of
Resolution 0.1 dB. Arguments)
Returns 99.9 if demod is unlocked.
For values greater than 16.0 dB, the reply will be: EBN=+016
Example: EBN=12.3 (which is Eb/No = 12.3 dB)
Rx Buffer Size RBS= 1 byte, Command or Query. RBS= RBS? RBS=x
value of 0 thru 9 Rx buffer size, where: RBS? (same format as command
0 = Buffer disabled (Clock mode = Rx satellite) RBS* argument)
1 = +/- 1024 bits RBS#
2 = +/- 2048 bits
3 = +/- 4096 bits
4 = +/- 8192 bits
5 = +/- 16384 bits
6 = +/- 32768 bits
7 = +/- 128 bits
8 = +/- 256 bits
9 = +/- 512 bits
Example: RBS=0
Rx Descrambler RDS= 1 byte, Command or Query. RDS= RDS? RDS=x
value of 0, 1 or 2 Rx Descrambler state, where: RDS? (see Description of
0=Off RDS* Arguments)
1=On (default descrambler type) RDS#
2 = On - IESS-315 (Turbo only)
Example: RDS=1 (Scrambler On)
Rx Frequency RFQ= 9 bytes Command or Query. RFQ= RFQ? RFQ=xxxx.xxxx
Rx Frequency RFQ? (see Description of
CDM-570L: 950 to 1950 MHz RFQ* Arguments)
CDM-570: 50 to 90 and 100 - 180 MHz RFQ#
Resolution=100 Hz
Example: RFQ=0950.9872
Example: RFQ=0073.4528

D–13
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Rx Spectrum RSI= 1 byte, Command or Query. RSI= RSI? RSI=x
Invert value of 0 or 1 Rx Spectrum Invert, where: RSI? (see Description of
0=Normal RSI* Arguments)
1=Rx Spectrum Invert RSI#
Example: RSI=0 (selects Normal)
Rx Signal Level N/A 4 bytes Query Only. N/A RSL? RSL=ccxx
Unit returns the value of the Rx signal level, in dBm, between –5 and – (see description
99 dBm, in the form ccxx, where: of arguments)
cc = code (GT=Greater Than; LT=Less Than, == is ‘equal to’)
xx = value (the ‘-‘ sign is implied)
Examples:
RSL=LT99 (Rx signal level is less than -99 dBm)
RSL===41 (Rx signal level is equal to -41 dBm)
Rx Symbol Rate N/A 8 bytes Query only. N/A RSR? RSR=xxxx.xxx
Rx Symbol rate, in ksymbols/sec, between 4.8 ksps and 3.00 Msps (see Description of
Resolution = 1 sps. Arguments)
Example: RSR=2047.999 (which is 2047.999 ksymbols/sec)
Rx Demod RSW= 3 bytes Command or Query. RSW= RSW? RSW=xxx
Acquisition Sweep Rx ± acquisition sweep range of demodulator, in kHz, ranging from ± 1 RSW? (see Description of
Width to ± 32 kHz (rates < 625 ksym/second) RSW* Arguments)
or ± 1 to ± 200 kHz (rates >= 625 ksym/second) CDM-570L only RSW#
Example: RSW=009 (selects ± 9 kHz)
 

   

D–14
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

D.6.3 Unit Commands and Queries

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Internal 10MHz ADJ= 4 bytes, numeric Command or Query. ADJ= ADJ? ADJ=sddd
Reference This command provides fine adjustment of the Internal 10MHz ADJ? (see Description of
Adjustment Reference on the modem, in the form sddd, where: ADJ* Arguments)
s = sign (+ or –) ADJ#
ddd = value, 0-999
AUPC APP= 6 bytes Command or Query (Command not valid in Manual mode). APP= APP? APP=abc.cd
Parameters Defines AUPC operating parameters, in the form abc.cd, where: APP? (see Description of
a=Defines action on max. power condition. APP* Arguments)
(0=do nothing, 1=generate Tx alarm) APP#
b=Defines action on remote demod unlock.
(0=go to nominal power, 1=go to max power)
c.c=Target Eb/No value, for remote demod, from 0.0 to 14.9 dB, where
numbers above 9.9 use hex representation for the 1 st character, ie
14.9 is coded as E.9.
d =Max increase in Tx Power permitted, from 0 to 9 dB
Example: APP=015.67 (Sets no alarm, max power, 5.6 dB Target and 7
dB power increase.)
AUPC Enable AUP= 1 byte, Command or Query. AUP= AUP? AUP=x
value of 0 or 1 AUPC mode enable/disable, where: AUP? (see Description of
0=Disabled AUP* Arguments)
1=Enabled AUP#
Example: AUP=1
Note: EDMAC framing must be selected for the AUPC feature to work.
Buffer Fill State N/A 2 bytes Query only. N/A BFS? BFS=xx
Value of the buffer fill state is returned, between 1 to 99%. (see description
Returns 00 if demodulator is unlocked. of arguments)
Example: BFS=33 (which is 33%)
Clear All Stored CAE= None Command only. CAE= N/A N/A
Events Forces the software to clear the software events log. CAE?
Note: This command takes no arguments. CAE*
CAE#
Example: CAE=
Clear All Stored CAS= None Command only. CAS= N/A N/A
Statistics Forces the software to clear the software statistics log. CAS?
CAS*
Note: This command takes no arguments.
CAS#
Example: CAS=

D–15
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
G.703 Clock CEX 2 byte Command or Query. CEX= CEX? CEX=ab
Extension G.703 Clock Extension in the form ab, where: CEX? (see Description of
a=G.703 Clock Extension Mode (0=None; 1=TxLock; 2=RxEnable) CEX* Arguments)
b=G.703 Clock Extension Interface (0=T1; 1=E1Bal; 2=E1Unbal) CEX#
Example: CEX=12 (Sets Tx Lock to E1 Unbalanced)
Notes:
1. Not all CEX modes are valid all the time.
2. For argument a:
• When Data Interface (ITF) is set to be G.703, Clock Extension
Mode is automatically set to be 0=None. Reply: ITF+
• When Tx Clock (TCK) is changed from Internal to Non-Internal,
Clock Extension Mode will be automatically changed to 0=None if it
was 1=TxLock. Reply: TCK+
Circuit ID String CID= 24 bytes Command or Query. CID= CID? CID=xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Sets or queries the user-defined Circuit ID string, which is a fixed length CID? xxxx
of 24 characters. CID* (see Description of
Valid characters include: CID# Arguments)
Space ( ) * + – , . / 0 9 and A thru Z
Configuration CLD= 1 byte Command only. CLD= N/A N/A
Load Causes the CDM570L to retrieve a previously stored modem CLD?
configuration from Configuration Memory location defined by the one- CLD*
byte argument (0 to 9). CLD#
Example: CLD=4 (retrieve modem configuration from location 4)
Configuration CST= 1 byte Command only. CST= N/A N/A
Save Causes the CDM570L to store the current modem configuration in CST?
Configuration Memory location defined by the one-byte argument (0 to 9). CST*
Example: CST=4 (store the current configuration in location 4) CST#
Countdown CTD= 3 bytes Command or Query. CTD= CTD? CTD=xxx
As a command, only takes the argument 000. Used to truncate the CTD? (see Description of
Warm-up delay period to zero, forcing the unit into ‘instant-on’ mode. CTD* Arguments)
As a query, returns the Warm-up Delay countdown, in seconds CTD#
remaining. Range is from 000 to 200 seconds.
CTD=000 terminates the warm-up delay.
Example: CTD? responds with CTD=067, meaning the unit will wait
another 67 seconds before it will enter an operational state.
RTC Date DAY= 6 bytes Command or Query. DAY= DAY? DAY=ddmmyy
A date in the form ddmmyy, where DAY? (see Description of
dd = day of the month (01 to 31), DAY* Arguments)
mm = month (01 to 12) DAY#
yy = year (00 to 99)
Example: DAY=240457 (April 24, 2057)

D–16
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Eb/No Alarm EBA= 4 bytes Command or Query. EBA= EBA? EBA=xx.x
Point Eb/No alarm point in dB, with a range between 0.1 and 16 dB. EBA? (see Description of
Resolution=0.1 dB EBA* Arguments)
Example: EBA=12.3 EBA#
EDMAC Framing EFM= 1 byte, Command or Query. EFM= EFM? EFM=x
Mode value of 0, 1 or 2 EDMAC mode, where: EFM? (see Description of
0 = EDMAC OFF (Framing is on, AUPC active) EFM* Arguments)
1 = EDMAC MASTER EFM#
2 = EDMAC SLAVE (Query Only)
Example: EFM=1 (EDMAC Enabled as Master)
External ERF= 1 byte, Command or Query. ERF= ERF? ERF =x
Reference value of 0 thru 5 External Reference Frequency, where: ERF? (see Description of
Frequency 0=Internal ERF * Arguments)
1=External 1 MHz ERF #
2=External 2 MHz
3=External 5 MHz
4=External 10 MHz
5=External 20 MHz
Example: ERF=0 (External reference not used - uses internal)
EDMAC Slave ESA= 4 bytes Command or Query. ESA= ESA? ESA=xxxx
Address Range EDMAC Slave Address Range - sets the range of addresses of distant- ESA? (see Description of
end units (modems or transceivers) for which this unit, as the Master, ESA* Arguments)
will forward messages. Only values which are integer multiples of ten ESA#
are permitted. (0010, 0020, 0030, 0040, etc.).
Example: ESA=0090
This command is only valid for an EDMAC master.
When used as a Query, it may be sent to an EDMAC slave, which will
respond with the appropriate address.

D–17
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Equipment ID N/A 11 bytes Query only. N/A EID? EID= abbbcdefghi
Unit returns information concerning the equipment identification, and the (see Description of
option field, in the form abbbcdefghi; where: Arguments)
a = Turbo option:
0 = None, 570 is the CDM-570
1 = Turbo 571 is the CDM-570L
bbb defines the modem model number:
CDM-570 = 570, CDM-570L = 571
c = Expansion slot:
0 = None
1 = Reed-Solomon codec installed
2 = WAd card installed
d = Data Rate Option:
0 = Base (512 kbps)
1 = up to 2048 kbps
2 = up to 5000 kbps
3 = up to 9980 kbps
e = Higher-order modulation:
0 = None
1 = 8-PSK/8-QAM
2 = 16QAM
3 = 8-PSK/8-QAM and 16QAM
f = IP Module:
0 = None
1 = Installed
g = BUC option:
0 = None
1 = 100 Watt
2 = 150 Watt
h = G.703 Clock Extension:
0 = None
1 = Installed
i = G.703 Line Interface
0 = None
1 = Installed
Example: EID=1571013111x means Turbo, CDM-570L, no RS codec, no
WAd card installed, up to 2048bps, 8-PSK/8-QAM and 16-QAM, IP Module
installed, 100 Watt BUC supply installed, G.703 Clock Extension option
installed

D–18
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Faults and N/A 6 bytes Query only. N/A FLT? FLT=abcdef (see
Status Unit returns the current highest-priority fault and status codes for the Unit (hardware), Description of Arguments
Tx Traffic, Rx Traffic and ODU in the form abcdef, where: for details)
a = Unit faults:
0 = No faults
1 = Power supply fault, +5 volts e=Change in fault status
2 = Power supply fault , +12 volts since last poll.
3 = Power supply fault, –5 volts
4 = Power supply fault, +23 volts
5 = Power supply fault, –12 volts
f=Change in unit
6 = Tx synthesizer lock configuration since last poll
7 = Rx 1st LO synthesizer lock
8 = Rx 2nd LO synthesizer Lock (see Description of
9 = Ref PLL lock
D = WAd HW Fault
Arguments)
E = IP Module
F = EEPROM checksum error
A, B, and C are TBD (for future expansion)
b = Tx Traffic status:
0 = Tx traffic OK
1 = No clock from terrestrial interface
3 = Tx FIFO slip
4 = G.703 Loss of Signal (only valid in Clock Extend Mode)
5 = Loss of External Reference
7 = AUPC upper limit reached
9 = AIS detected on incoming data
A = WAd E1 sync loss
B = Bipolar violation on G.703 interface
C = BUC Alarm (if attached)
2, 6, and 8 are TBD (for future expansion)
c = Rx Traffic status:
0 = Rx Traffic OK
1 = Demodulator unlocked
3 = AGC Alarm - signal out of range
5 = RS Frame sync alarm
6 = WAd Idle detected
7 = EDMAC Frame sync alarm
8 = WAd DFFL Overflow
9 = WAd Rx sync loss
A = Buffer Underflow
B = Buffer Overflow
C = WAd Buffer sync error
D = Eb/No alarm
E = LNB Alarm (if attached)
F = AIS detected on incoming data
2 and 4 are TBD (for future expansion)
d = ODU status:
0=No ODU faults
1=BUC PLL
3=BUC current
5=BUC voltage
7=LNB current
9=LNB voltage
B=BUC temperature
D=BUC checksum
2, 4, 6, 8, A, and C are TBD (for future expansion)

D–19
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Force Reboot FRB= None Command only. FRB= N/A N/A
Force a hard reset of the unit in 5 seconds. FRB?
FRB*
FRB#
Software N/A variable Query only. N/A FRW? FRW=x….x
Information Complete unit software information: (see Description of
Arguments)
Example: FRW=
Boot:
FW/10804-1-,1.1.1,03/30/04
Bulk1:
FW/10805AH,1.7.0,08/14/09
FW/10806-1AH,1.7.0,08/14/09
FW/10807-1L,1.7.0,08/14/09
FW/10808-1G,1.1.8,02/14/06
FW-0000270-,1.1.1,08/14/09 **see Note
Bulk2:
FW/10805AH,1.7.0,08/14/09 **Note: If the WAd card is installed, this will show information
FW/10806-1AH,1.7.0,08/14/09 specific to the WAd FPGA load. If the WAd card is not
FW/10807-1L,1.7.0,08/14/09 installed, Reed-Solomon FPGA information is provided here.
FW/10808-1G,1.1.8,02/14/06
FW-0000270-,1.1.1,08/14/09 **see Note
Force 1:1 Switch FSW= None Command only. FSW= N/A N/A
Forces the unit to toggle the Unit Fail relay to the ‘fail’ state for approx (message ok)
500ms. If the unit is a 1:1 pair, and it is currently the ‘On Line’ unit, this
will force a switchover, so the unit will then be in ‘Standby’ mode. The
command is always executed by the unit, regardless of whether it is
stand-alone, in a 1:1 pair, or part of a 1:N system. This command takes
no arguments.
Initialize Events IEP= None Command only. IEP= N/A N/A
Pointer Resets internal pointer to allow RNE? queries to start at the beginning IEP#
of the stored events log.
Software Image IMG= 1 byte, Command or Query. IMG= IMG? IMG=x
value of 1 or 2 Current Active software image, where: IMG? (see Description of
1=Bulk Image # 1 currently active IMG* Arguments)
2=Bulk Image # 2 currently active IMG#
Example: IMG=1 (which is Image #1 active)
IP Address IPA= 18 bytes, Command or Query. IPA= IPA? IPA= xx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy (see
numerical Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the 10/100 BaseT IPA? Description of Arguments)
Ethernet management port, in the form xx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy, where: IPA*
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address IPA#
yy is the network prefix (8-30)
Example: 010.006.030.001.24

D–20
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Initialize Statistics ISP= None Command only. ISP= N/A N/A
Pointer Resets internal pointer to allow RNS? queries to start at the beginning ISP#
of the statistics log.
T1 Line LBO= 1 byte, Command or Query. LBO= LBO? LBO=x
Build-Out value of 0 thru 4 Valid only for T1 interface, where LBO? (see Description of
0 = 0-133 feet LBO * Arguments)
1 = 133-266 feet LBO #
2 = 266-399 feet
3 = 399-533 feet
4 = 533-655 feet
Example: LBO=2
(In all other modes other thanT1, this is a don’t care.)
Local/Remote LRS= 1 byte, Command or Query. LRS= LRS? LRS=x
Status value of 0, 1 or 3 Local/Remote status, where: LRS? (see Description of
0=Local LRS* Arguments)
1=Serial Remote LRS#
3 = Ethernet Remote LRS+
Example: LRS=1 (which is Serial Remote)
Unit Alarm Mask MSK= 12 bytes Command or Query. MSK= MSK? MSK=abcdefghijkl
Alarm mask conditions, provides response of 0 (unmasked/active) or 1 MSK? (see Description of
(masked) for each parameter, in form abcdefghijkl, where: MSK* Arguments)
a =Tx FIFO MSK#
b=G.703 BPV
c=Tx-AIS
d=Rx AGC Alarm
e=Eb/No Alarm
f=Rx-AIS
g=Buffer slip
h=Ext Reference alarm
i=BUC alarm
j=LNB alarm
k=G.703 Loss of Signal alarm (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked)
l= WAd Rx Alarms
Note: For argument k, if G703 CEx FAST option is not installed or Tx
clock is not Internal, only 1=masked is allowed.
Example: MSK=1110011100
Number of N/A 3 bytes Query only. N/A NUE? NUE=xxx
Unread stored Unit returns the Number of stored Events, which remain Unread, in the (see Description of
Events form xxx. Arguments)
Note: This means unread over the remote control.
Example: NUE=126

D–21
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Number of N/A 3 bytes Query only. N/A NUS? NUS=xxx
Unread stored Unit returns the number of stored Statistics, which remain Unread, in the (see Description of
Statistics form xxx. Arguments)
Note: This means unread over the remote control.
Example: NUS=247
Outdoor Unit ODU= 1 byte, Command or Query – CDM-570 Only. ODU= ODU? ODU=x
Comms Enable value of 0 or 1 Enables or disables communications, via the FSK link, with a Comtech ODU? (see Description of
EF Data transceiver (ODU), where: ODU* Arguments)
0=Disabled ODU#
1=Enabled
Example: ODU=0 (selects Disabled)
ReCenter Buffer RCB= None Command only. RCB= N/A N/A
Forces the software to recenter the receive Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer. RCB?
Note: This command takes no arguments. RCB*
Example: RCB= RCB#
Retrieve next 5 N/A 75 bytes Query only. N/A RNE? RNE={CR}ABCddmmyyhh
unread Stored Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Events which have not yet been read mmss{CR}ABCddmmyyhh
Events over the remote control. Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub- mmss{CR}ABCddmmyyhh
body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body, where Sub-body= mmss{CR}ABCddmmyyhh
ABCddmmyyhhmmss, mmss
A being the fault/clear indicator. {CR}ABCddmmyyhhmmss
F=Fault (see description for details
C=Clear of arguments)
I=Info
B being the fault type where:
1=Unit
2=Rx Traffic
3=Tx Traffic
4=ODU
5= Power on/off, or log cleared
C is Fault Code numbers, as in FLT? or Info Code, which is:
0=Power Off
1=Power On
2=Log Cleared
3=Global Config Change
4=Redundancy Config Change
If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are
padded with zeros. If there are no new events, the response is RNE*.

D–22
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Retrieve next 5 N/A 130 bytes Query only. N/A RNS? RNS={CR}AA.ABB.BC.CD.
unread Stored Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Statistics, which have not yet been read Dddmmyyhhmmss{CR}AA.
Statistics over the remote control. Reply format: ABB.BC.CD.Dddmmyyhhm
{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub- mss{
body{CR}Sub-body, where Sub-body= CR}AA.ABB.BC.CD.Dddm
AA.ABB.BC.CD.Dddmmyyhhmmss, myyhhmmss{CR}AA.ABB.B
AA.A=Minimum Eb/No during sample period. C.CD.Dddmmyyhhmmss{C
BB.B=Average Eb/No during sample period. R}AA.ABB.BC.CD.Dddmmy
C.C=Max. Tx Power Level Increase during sample period. yhhmmss
D.D=Average Tx Power Level Increase during sample period. (see description for details
ddmmyyhhmmss = date/time stamp. of arguments)
If there are no new events, the unit replies with RNS*. If there are less
than 5 statistics to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with
zeros.
Request to Send RTS= 1 byte, Command or Query. RTS= RTS? RTS=x
value of 0 thru 3 Defines how RTS/CTS will operate at the main data interface RTS? (see Description of
• 0 = RTS/CTS Loop, No Action RTS* Arguments)
• RTS and CTS are looped, so that CTS echoes the state of RTS, but RTS#
RTS does not control the ON/OFF state of the carrier
• 1 = Loop, RTS Controls Tx O/P
• RTS and CTS are looped, so that CTS echoes the state of RTS, and
RTS controls the ON/OFF state of the carrier (in other words, the
modem will not bring up its TX carrier until RTS is asserted.)
• 2 = Ignore RTS, Assert CTS
• 3 = 1:N system in use. RTS/CTS ignored (Query only) RTS is
ignored, and CTS is asserted unconditionally.
Example: RTS=0 (RTS/CTS Loop, No Action).
Statistics Sample SSI= 1 byte, numerical Command or Query. SSI= SSI? SSI=x
Interval Sets sample interval for the Statistics Logging Function in the form SSI? (see description for details
SSI=x, where: SSI* of argument)
x= 0 to 9 in 10 minute steps. SSI#
Note: Setting this parameter to 0 disables the statistics logging function.
Example: SSI=3 means 30 minutes
Software Revision N/A 34-37 bytes Query only. N/A SWR? SWR=Boot:x.y.zz
Unit returns the value of the internal software revision installed in the Bulk1:x.y.zz Bulk2:x.y.zz
unit, in the form : (see description
Boot:x.y.z Bulk1:x.y.z Bulk2:x.y.z of arguments)
Or
Boot:x.y.zz Bulk1:x.y.zz Bulk2:x.y.zz

D–23
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
RTC Time TIM= 6 bytes Command or Query. TIM= TIM? TIM=hhmmss
A time in the form hhmmss, indicating the time from midnight, where: TIM? (see Description of
hh = hours (00 to 23) TIM* Arguments)
mm = minutes (00 to 59) TIM#
ss = seconds (00 to 59)
Example: TIM=231259 (23 hours:12 minutes:59 seconds)
Temperature N/A 3 bytes Query only. N/A TMP? TMP=sxx
Returns value of the unit internal temperature, in degrees C, in the form (see Description of
sxx, where: Arguments)
s = sign (+ or - character)
xx = value
Example: TMP=+26
Unit Test Mode TST= 1 byte, Command or Query. TST= TST? TST=x
value of 0 thru 6 CDM-570L Test Mode, where: TST? (see Description of
0= Normal Mode (no test) TST* Arguments)
1=IF Loopback TST#
2=Digital Loopback
3=I/O Loopback
4=RF Loopback
5=Tx CW
6=Tx Alternating 1,0 Pattern
Example: TST=1 (IF Loopback)
Viterbi Firmware VFW= 6 bytes Query only. VFW= VFW? VFW=xxxxxx
Version Used to query Viterbi chips firmware version. VFW?
Response format: VFW *
VFW=Q1900 for modem with Qual Comm. Q1900 Viterbi chip VFW #
VFW=aa.b.c for modem with Alteva Viterbi chip, where:
aa.b.c = the chip’s FPGA firmware version (see Description of
aa=major version Arguments)
b=minor version
c=revision
Example: VFW=01.0.1
Warm-up Delay WUD= 1 byte, Command or Query. WUD= WUD? WUD=x
value 0 or 1 Warm-up Delay for internal frequency reference (OCXO) WUD? (see Description of
0=Disabled (instant on – no delay for OCXO to reach temperature) WUD* Arguments)
1=Enabled (unit waits until OCXO reaches correct temperature) WUD#
Example: WUD=1 (selects Warm-up Delay)

D–24
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

D.6.4 Bulk Commands and Queries

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)

OGC Outdoor OGC= 50 Bytes Command or Query – CDM-570L only. OGC= OGC? OGC=aabcdfxxxhhhhiiiijjjjjkxx
Unit Global ODU Global Configuration of CDM-570L in the form OGC? xxxxlmnnnooopppppqxxxxxx
Configuration aabcdexxxxhhhhiiiijjjjjkxxxxxxlmnnnooopppppqxxxxxx, where: OGC* (see Description of
OGC# Arguments)
aa = BUC Address same as BAD
b = BUC FSK comms enable same as BCE
OGC?n Where n=0 to 9
c = BUC Power Control same as BPC
returns the OGC
d = BUC 10MHz Frequency same as BFR
portion of 1 of 10 stored
Reference enable same as BOE
configurations
e = BUC Tx Output Enable
xxxx = expansion bytes same as BCL
(see Description of
hhhh = BUC Low Alarm Limit same as BCH
Arguments)
iiii = BUC High Alarm Limit same as BLO
jjjjjk = BUC LO frequency, mix sign
xxxxxx = expansion bytes
l = LNB Power Control same as LPC
m = LNB 10MHz Frequency same as LFR
Reference enable same as LCL
nnn = LNB Low Alarm Limit same as LCH
ooo = LNB High Alarm Limit same as LLO
pppppq = LNB LO Frequency, mix
sign
xxxxxx = expansion bytes
Any unavailable parameters will be
filled with xxx.

D–25
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Global MGC= 115 bytes, with Command or Query. MGC= MGC? MGC=abcdddd.ddddefghhhh
Configuration numerical Global Configuration of CDM570L, in the form shown in the Response to Query MGC? .hhhijkk.klmnoppp.ppqqqqqq
entries, fixed column, where: MGC* qqAAAA.AAAABCDEEEE.EE
values and a = Unit Interface Type same as ITF MGC# EFGHIIIJJ.JKLLLLLLLLMNO
delimiters b = T1 Line build-out same as LBO OOOPQQQQQQQQQQQQR
c = Unit Framing mode same as FRM STTTTTTTT
dddd.dddd = Tx Frequency same as TFQ (see Description of
e = Tx FEC Type same as TFT Arguments)
f = Tx Modulation type same as TMD
g = Tx FEC Rate same as TCR
hhhh.hhh = Tx Data Rate same as TDR
i = Tx Spectrum Inversion same as TSI
j = Tx Scrambler State same as TSC
kk.k = Tx Power Level same as TPL
l = Tx Clock Source same as TCK MGC?n Where n=0 to 9
m = Tx Data Invert same as TDI Returns the MGC
n = Tx Carrier State same as TXO
o = AUPC Enable same as AUP
portion of 1 of 10 stored
ppp.pp = AUPC parameter setup same as APP configurations
q = Warm-up delay same as WUD (see Description of
rr = G.703 Clock Extension same as CEX Arguments)
sssss = expansion bytes
AAAA.AAAA = Rx Frequency same as RFQ
B = Rx FEC Type same as RFT
C = Rx Modulation Type same as RMD
D= Rx FEC Rate same as RCR
EEEE.EEE = Rx Data Rate same as RDR
F = Rx Spectrum Inversion same as RSI
G = Rx Descrambler state same as RDS
H = Rx Data Invert same as RDI
III = Rx Sweep Width same as RSW
JJ.J = Eb/No Alarm Point same as EBA
K = Rx Buffer Size same as RBS
LLLLLLLL = expansion bytes
M = External Reference Frequency same as ERF
N = EDMAC Framing Mode same as EFM
OOOO = EDMAC Slave Address same as ESA
P = Unit test Mode (Read only) same as TST
QQQQQQQQQQQQ = Unit Alarm Mask same as MSK
R=RTS/CTS Control same as RTS
S = Statistics Sampling Interval same as SSI
T = Attach BUC Alarm to Tx Alarm same as ABA
U = Attach LNB Alarm to Rx Alarm same as ALA
VVVVVV = expansion bytes
V = number of Tx channels for WAd
W = number of Rx channels for WAd
YYYY = expansion bytes

Fill unused expansion bytes with ‘x’

D–26
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

D.6.5 BUC Commands and Queries (CDM-570L ONLY)

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
BUC Address BAD= 2 byte, Command or Query. BAD = BAD? BAD=xx
value of 01 to 15 Indicates the BUC Address, in the form xx, where: BAD? (see Description of
xx = between 01 and 15. BAD * Arguments)
Example: BAD=03 BAD #
BUC Comms BCE= 1 byte, Command or Query. BCE= BCE? BCE=x
enable value of 0 or 1 Enables or disables communications, via the FSK link, with an BCE? (see Description of
externally connected Block Up Converter (BUC), where: BCE* Arguments)
0=Disabled BCE#
1=Enabled
Example: BCE=0 (Disabled)
BUC High Current BCH= 4 bytes Command or Query. BCH= BCH? BCH=xxxx
Limit BUC High Current Limit, in mA, the form xxxx, where: BCH? (see Description of
xxxx = between 500 and 4000 BCH* Arguments)
BCH#
Example: BCH=3100
BUC Low Current BCL= 4 bytes Command or Query. BCL= BCL? BCL=xxxx
Limit BUC Low Current Limit, in mA, the form xxxx, where: BCL? (see Description of
xxxx = between 0 and 3000 BCL* Arguments)
Example: BCL=0600 BCL#
BUC Current N/A 4 bytes Query only. N/A BDC? BDC=xxxx
BUC Current, in mA, in the form xxxx, where: (see Description of
xxxx = between 0 and 9999 Arguments)
If not available, response is 0000.
Example: BDC=3100
BUC Voltage N/A 4 bytes Query only. N/A BDV? BDV=xx.x
BUC Voltage, in the form xx.x, where: (see Description of
xx.x = between 0 and 64.0 Arguments)
If not available, response is 00.0.
Example: BDV=43.6 (BUC DC voltage is 43.6 volts)
BUC 10 MHz BFR= 1 byte, Command or Query. BFR= BFR? BFR=x
Reference value of 0 or 1 BUC 10 MHz frequency reference, where: BFR? (see Description of
0 = Disabled BFR* Arguments)
1 = Enabled BFR#
Example: BFR=0 (BUC 10MHz reference disabled)

D–27
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
BUC LO BLO= 6 bytes Command or Query. BLO= BLO? BLO=xxxxxs
Frequency BUC Tx LO frequency information in the form xxxxxs, where: BLO? (see Description of
xxxxx = LO frequency, in the range of 3000 to 65000 MHz. BLO* Arguments)
All 0’s (000000) disables the feature. BLO#
s = sign for the mix (+ or - character)
Terminal Frequency = BUC LO ± TFQ
Example: BLO = 12000+ (BUC LO is 12 GHz, low-side mix)
BUC Output BOE= 1 byte, Command or Query. BOE= BOE? BOE=x
Enable value of 0 or 1 BUC Output, where: BOE? (see Description of
0 = Off (output disabled) BOE* Arguments)
1 = On (output enabled) BOE#
Example: BOE=1 (BUC output is enabled)
BUC Output N/A 4 bytes Query only. N/A BOL? BOL=xx.x
Power Level BUC Output Power Level, in Watts, in the form xx.x. (see Description of
Returns 00.0 when FSK and BUC power are not enabled. Arguments)
Example: BOL=08.3 (BUC reports output power is 8.3 Watts)
BUC PLL Alarm N/A 1 byte, Query only. N/A BPA? BPA=x
value of 0 or 1 BUC PLL lock state, where: (see Description of
1=Unlocked Arguments)
0=Locked
If not available, response is 9.
Note: This command is only valid when the FSK and BUC power are
turned On.
Example: BPA=0 (BUC PLL is locked)
BUC Power BPC= 1 byte, Command or Query – CDM-570L only. BPC= BPC? BPC=x
Control value of 0 or 1 0=Disable BUC DC Power BPC? (see Description of
1=Enable BUC DC Power BPC* Arguments)
Example: BPC=0 (BUC DC power disabled) BPC#
BUC Software N/A 2 bytes Query only. N/A BSV? BSV=xx
Version Indicates the BUC software version, in the form xx. (see Description of
If not available, response is 00 Arguments)
Note: This command is only valid when the FSK and BUC power are
turned On.
Example: BSV=05 (Software version 05)
BUC Temperature N/A 3 bytes Query only. N/A BUT? BUT=sxx
BUC temperature is returned, in the form sxx, where: (see Description of
s = sign (+ or - character) Arguments)
xx = value
If not available, response is –99
Note: This query is only valid when the FSK and BUC power are turned On.
Example: BUT=-13 (BUC temperature is -13 degrees C)

D–28
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

D.6.6 LNB Commands and Queries (CDM-570L ONLY)

Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Attach LNB Alarm ALA= 1 byte, Command or Query. ALA= ALA? ALA=x
to Rx Alarm value of 0 or 1 Attach LNB Alarm to Rx Alarm, where: ALA? (see Description of
0 = No ALA# Arguments)
1 = Yes
Example: ALA=1 (Attach LNB Alarm to Rx Alarm)
LNB High current LCH= 3 bytes Command or Query. LCH= LCH? LCH=xxx
limit LNB upper alarm limit for current, in mA, in the form xxx, where: LCH? (see Description of
xxx = current value between 50 and 600 LCH* Arguments)
LCH#
Example: LCH=450
LNB Low current LCL= 3 bytes Command or Query. LCL= LCL? LCL=xxx
limit LNB lower alarm limit for current, in mA, in the form xxx, where: LCL? (see Description of
xxx = current value between 10 and 400 LCL* Arguments)
LCL#
Example: LCL=050
LNB Current N/A 3 bytes Query only. N/A LDC? LDC=xxx
Indicates the value of the LNB Current, in mA, in the form xxx, where: (see Description of
xxx = current value between 0 and 999 Arguments)
If not available, response is 000.
Example: LDC=210 (LNB DC current is 210 mA)
LNB Voltage N/A 4 bytes Query only. N/A LDV? LDV=xx.x
Value of LNB Voltage is returned, in the form xx.x, where: (see Description of
xx.x = voltage value between 0 and 30.0 Arguments)
If not available, response is 00.0.
Example: LDV=24.2 (LNB DC voltage is 24.2 volts)
LNB Frequency LFR= 1 byte, Command or Query. LFR= LFR? LFR=x
Reference enable value of 0 or 1 0=Disable LNB Reference LFR? (see Description of
1=Enable LNB Reference LFR* Arguments)
Example: LFR=0 (LNB 10 MHz reference off) LFR#
LNB LO LLO= 6 bytes Command or Query. LLO= LLO? LLO=xxxxxs
Frequency LNB Receive LO frequency information in the form xxxxxs, where: LLO? (see Description of
xxxxx = LO frequency, in the range of 3000 to 65000 MHz LLO* Arguments)
All 0’s (000000) disables the feature. LLO#
s is the sign for the mix (+ or - character)
Terminal Frequency = LNB LO ± RFQ
Example: LLO=06000- (LO is 6 GHz, high-side mix)

D–29
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
LNB Power LPC= 1 byte, Command or Query. LPC= LPC? LPC=x
Control value of 0 thru 3 LNB Power Control, where LPC? (see Description of
0=Off LPC* Arguments)
1=On, 13V LNB Voltage LPC#
2=On, 18V LNB Voltage
3=On, 24V LNB Voltage
Example: LPC=1 (LNB power is On, 13 volts)

D–30
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

D.6.7 WAN Adaptation Option Commands and Queries

Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
WAN Adaptation N/A 5 bytes Query only. N/A ACR? ACR=x.xxx
ratio (see Description of
Uncompressed the ratio will be 1.000. Arguments)
If compressed the value will be less than 1.
If the interface is not configured for WAN Adaptation, the value returned
will be xxxxx.
WAN Adaptation DCH= 1 byte Command or Query. DCH= DCH? DCH=x
Tx Channels Set the number of Tx Channels. DCH? (see Description of
X=0 thru G for 0 to 16 channels. DCH* Arguments)
DCH#
WAN Adaptation DNI= 33 bytes, each Command or Query. DNI= DNI? DNI=DDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Tx and Rx value may be 0 Format: DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJL, where DNI? DDJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJL
channel thru 9, A thru V D is the timeslot of each of the 16 Tx channels DNI* (see Description of
allocations or z J is the timeslot of each of the 16 Rx channels DNI# Arguments)
L= Insert loop: 0=off, 1=looped DNI+
The channel is determined by position in the string.
Each timeslot value may be: DNI?n Where n=0 to 9
0=timeslot 0 Returns the DNI
1=timeslot 1, etc… portion of 1 of 10 stored
A=timeslot 10, configurations
B=timeslot 11, … (see Description of
V=timeslot 31 Arguments)
Example: DNI=1230000000000000123456789ABCDEFG0
WAN Adaptation ICH= 1 byte Command or Query. ICH= ICH? ICH=x
Rx Channels Set the number of Rx Channels, where: ICH? (see Description of
X=0 thru G for 0 to 16 channels. ICH* Arguments)
ICH#

D–31
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix D MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

D–32
 Appendix E. CDM/CDD NMCS
Protocol – Rev 1.0

E.1 Revision History

Date Rev Author Comments
10/4/2004 Draft 1.0 Wallace Davis Created for Internal Distribution
3/1/2005 Draft 1.1 Bryan Wilcutt Modifications for implementation
6/27/2005 Rev 1.0 Bryan Wilcutt Released revision
11/10/2005 Rev 1.0 Harish Talanki Modifications

E.2 Introduction
This appendix defines the Remote Control-based interface used for the CDM/CDD family of
Comtech EF Data products. The primary interface is to be Telnet; however, other interfaces may
adapt to the CiM implementation, programmatically, via specific API calls.

E.3 Architecture
The Remote NMCS attaches to an external interface, such as Telnet, and processes basic text based
commands to the CiM database manager. The database manager is responsible for resolving GET
and SET actions to Local and Remote objects (see Figure E-1).

Figure E-1. Basic Architecture Layout

E–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.4 Command Set Introduction

The following sections outline the basic command set supported in this version of the CIM NMCS
protocol.

E.4.1 Telnet Interface

Telnet interface into the NMCS system must be on port 7023, which has been reserved for this
protocol by the IANA.
The login process requires a name and password, which are defined by the systems administrator of
the controlling equipment. This name and password is usually associated to the name and password
of an administrator account.

E.4.2 Basic Protocol

All bytes within a command are printable ASCII characters, less than ASCII code 127. In this
context, the Carriage Return (cr) and Line Feed (lf) characters are considered printable.
All messages from Controller-to-Target require a response as indicated. This will be either to
return data that has been requested by the Controller, or to acknowledge reception of an
instruction to change the configuration of the Target.

E.4.3 Command Structure

Controller-to-Target
Start of Target Address Instruction Row Index Code Optional
End of Packet
Packet Address De-limiter Code (Optional) Qualifier Arguments
< / 1 to 3 characters = or ? Carriage Return
ASCII code 60 ASCII code 47 contained within ASCII codes and Line Feed
[ and ] brackets. 61 or 63 ASCII code 13
and code 10
[ 0x0D 0x0A ]
(1 to 4
(1 character) characters) (1 character) (3 characters) (1 character) (n characters) (2 characters)

Example: <0135/TFQ=1949.2345{CR}
Example: <1/rte[1]=rt1|239.022.033.044.32|1|***************|0011|0|0|0|0|3
Target-to-Controller
Target Address Instruction Optional
Start of Packet Code Qualifier End of Packet
Address De-limiter Code Arguments
> / =, ?, !, *, # or ~ Carriage Return,
ASCII code 62 ASCII code 47 ASCII code 61, 63, Line Feed
33, 42, 35, 126 ASCII code 13,10

(1 character) (4 characters) (1 character) (3 characters) (1 character) (n characters) (2 characters)

Example: >0654/RSW=32{CR}{LF}
Example: <RTE[4]?>0001/rte[4]=rt4|239.022.033.044.32|1|***************|0011|0|0|0|0|3

E–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.4.3.1 Start Of Packet

Controller-to-Target: This is the character ‘<’ (ASCII code 60)

Target-to-Controller: This is the character ‘>’ (ASCII code 62)

Because this is used to provide a reliable indication of the start of packet, these two characters
may not appear anywhere else within the body of the message. For multi line text message, each
line should end with a new line character ‘\n’. The carriage return & new line [\r\n] combination
should present only at the end of the message.

E.4.3.2 Target Address

Up to 9,999 devices can be uniquely addressed. Even though the any number of devices can be
addressed, but they all should be associated with single IP Address.
• For a CDM-570, address of ‘1’ is being used to address both modulator and demodulator.
• For CDD-564, each demodulator is identified by unique address from 1 to 4 respectively
for all the four demodulators.
The address is not significant for commands Targeted system wide. But, it does has significance
when associated with demod specific commands like Frequency, Data Rate, etc.
The Controller sends a packet with the address of a Target - the destination of
the packet. When the Target responds, the address used is the same address,
to indicate to the Controller the source of the packet. The Controller does not
IMPORTANT have its own address.

E.4.3.3 Instruction Code

This is a three-character alphabetic sequence that identifies the subject of the message. Wherever
possible, the instruction codes have been chosen to have some significance.

For example, TFQ stands for Transmit Frequency, RMD is for Receive Modulation type, etc.

This aids in the readability of the message, should it be displayed in its raw ASCII form. Only
upper case alphabetic characters may be used (A-Z, ASCII codes 65 - 90).

E–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.4.3.4 Instruction Code Qualifier

This single character further qualifies the preceding instruction code. Code Qualifiers
obey the following rules:
1. From Controller to Target, the only permitted values are:
= The = code is used as the assignment operator, and is used to indicate
(ASCII code 61 that the parameter defined by the preceding byte should be set to the
value of the argument(s) that follow it.
For example, in a message from Controller to Target, TFQ=0950.0000
would mean ‘set the Transmit Frequency to 950 MHz.’
? The ? code is used as the query operator, and is used to indicate that
(ASCII code 63) the Target should return the current value of the parameter defined by
the preceding byte.
For example, TFQ? means ‘what is the current value of the Transmit
Frequency?’

2. From Target-to-Controller, the only permitted values are:

= The = code is used in two ways:

(ASCII code 61) First, if the Controller has sent a query code to a Target (for example
TFQ?, meaning ‘what’s the Transmit frequency?’), the Target would
respond with TFQ=xxxx.xxxx, where xxxx.xxxx represents the frequency
in question.
Second, if the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a
particular value, then, providing the value sent in the argument is valid,
the Target will acknowledge the message by replying with TFQ= (with no
message arguments).

! The ! code is only used as follows:

(ASCII code 33) If the Controller sends an instruction code that the Target does not
recognize, the Target will acknowledge the message by echoing the
invalid instruction, followed by the ! character with. Example: XYZ!

If the Controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, and, if the value sent
in the argument is valid, BUT the modem will not permit that particular parameter to be changed
at that time, then the Target will acknowledge the message by replying, for example, with TFQ!
(with no message arguments).

If the Controller sends an instruction code which the Target does not recognize, then the Target
will acknowledge the message by echoing the invalid instruction, followed by the ! character.
Example: XYZ!

Right now the CDM software is not organized to categorize various error codes, so it combines
various errors into a single code (!).

E–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.4.3.5 Message Arguments

Arguments are not required for all messages. Arguments include ASCII codes for the characters 0 to 9
(ASCII 48 to 57), period (ASCII 46), and | (ASCII 124), plus miscellaneous printable characters.

E.4.3.6 Table Support Qualifier

In order to support accessing information that is represented in a table, the following syntax is
supported.

E.4.3.6.1 Index
The desired row shall be encapsulated within ‘[‘ and ‘]’ brackets. This option is only applicable
for data that is represented as table.

For example:

Get a route table entry (will return the contents of the four route table entry):

<1/RTE[4]?

Get a the entry route table (will return the contents of the four route table entry):

$NumEntries = <0/RTN?

for($I=1, $I<$NumEntries, $I++)

{
entryInfo[$I] = <0/RTE[$I]?
}

To add a new route table entry:

$NumEntries = <0/RTN?
$NewRouteEntry = $NumEntries + 1

<1/RTE[$NewRouteEntry]=
rt4|239.011.033.022.32|1|192.168.001.221|00ab|1|0|1|4|3

To modify an existing route table entry:

<1/rte[1]=
rt4|239.011.033.022.32|1|192.168.001.221|00ab|1|0|1|4|3

E–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.4.3.6.2 Argument lists

In order to enforce atomic reads and writes and well as allow for checking related parameter for
validity, multi-argument lists will have the following format:
• Arguments are positioned in fixed length format (see specification for each argument)
• ‘|’ Is used to separate different argument values from each other.

E.4.3.7 End Of Packet

Controller-to-Target: This is the ‘Carriage Return’ character (ASCII code 13).

Target-to-Controller: This is the two-character sequence ‘Carriage Return’, ‘Line Feed’. (ASCII
code 13, and code 10.)

Both indicate the valid termination of a command.

E–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5 Remote Commands and Queries

Index Notes: Column ‘C’ = Command; Column ‘Q’ = Query; columns marked ‘X’ designate instruction code as Command only, Query
only, or Command/Query.
INSTR INSTR INSTR INSTR INSTR
C Q PAGE C Q PAGE C Q PAGE C Q PAGE C Q PAGE
CODE CODE CODE CODE CODE
A ESC X E-29 J R STV X X E-13
ACD X E-10 ESM X X E-15 RCG X E-25 SWC X X E-13
ACE X X E-10 ETM X E-15 K RED X E-23 SWM X X E-8
ACL X X E-10 ETT X E-29 RFD X E-22 SWR X E-21
ADP X X E-9 L RHE X X E-11
ADU X X E-9 LPS X E-22 ROP X X E-10
ARD X E-19 F ROU X X E-10 T
ARN X E-19 RSC X X E-28 TDE X X E-11
ARP X X E-19 G M RST X E-22 TET X X E-9
RTD X E-25 THE X X E-11
H N RTE X X E-24 TLE X X E-11
B HAD X X E-15 RTN X E-25 TPE X X E-12
BBI X X E-22 HRA X X E-9 O RWP X X E-10
BLI X X E-22 HRR X X E-8 RWU X X E-9
HRU X X E-8 P U
PFI X X E-22 S USI X X E-21
C I PRA X X E-9 SAT X X E-13 UUT X E-23
CCA X X E-22 ICV X X E-20 PRE X X E-10 SCG X E-14
IDT X E-28 SCS X E-22
IFT X E-27 SDM X X E-12 V
D IFW X E-21 Q SDN X X E-12
DDK X X E-12 IGE X X E-10 QSA X E-30 SIA X X E-12 W
DEK X X E-12 IGQ X X E-19 QSC X E-30 SPE X X E-11 WSC X X E-26
DRA X X E-19 IGT X E-20 QSD X E-18 SRC X X E-13
DRM X X E-11 IMR X X E-19 QSE X X E-14 SRT X E-26
DSR X X E-16 INM X X E-19 QSM X X E-16 SSC X X E-13 X
DTG X E-16 IPA X X E-15 QSN X E-18 SSL X X E-14
IPM X X E-15 QSR X X E-17 SSN X X E-14 Y
IPS X E-27 QST X E-30 STA X X E-13
E IRI X X E-20 QTL X X E-18 STB X X E-13 Z
EMO X X E-8 IRO X X E-20 STC X X E-13
ERT X E-29 IRQ X X E-20 STT X E-26

Unless otherwise specifically called out in the IP Commands and Queries section, the remaining commands are provided as part of the
base modem command set and are defined in Appendix D. SERIAL REMOTE CONTROL.

E–7
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5.1 IP Commands and Queries

E.5.1.1 Admin Commands and Queries

Command Arguments for Query

Response
Parameter (Instruction Command or (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Code and
Command
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)

System Working SWM= 1 byte, value of Command or Query, where: SWM= SWM? SWM =x
Mode 0 through 1 1=Router-Small Network SWM! (see description of
2=Router-Large Network arguments)
3=Router-Point to Point
4=Router-Vipersat
5=Managed Switch

Router-Vipersat mode needs the ViperSat option to be available on the

modem. Changing the address/working mode may reboot the modem.
Managed EMO= 1 byte, value Command or Query, where: EMO = EMO? EMO =x
Switch Multicast of 0 or 1 0=Disabled EMO! (see description of
Option 1= Enabled arguments)
Enables or disabled forwarding of multicast traffic while in Managed
Switch mode.

Valid only when in Managed Switch mode on 570.

Header HRR= 3 bytes Command or Query. HRR = HRR? HRR =xxx

Compression Header compression refresh rate, 1 to 600 HRR! (see description of
Refresh rate – Resolution=1 packet arguments)
UDP/RTP1 Refresh rate for UDP/RTP1 streams.

Example: HRR=50
Restrictions: 570 only
Header HRU= 3 bytes Command or Query. HRU = HRU? HRU =xxx
Compression Header compression refresh rate, 1 to 600 HRU! (see description of
Refresh rate – Resolution=1 packet arguments)
UDP
Refresh rate for UDP only stream.

Example: HRU =50

Restrictions: 570 only

E–8
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Response
Parameter (Instruction Command or (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Code and
Command
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)

Header HRA= 3 bytes Command or Query. HRA = HRA? HRA =xxx

Compression Header compression refresh rate, 1 to 600 HRA! (see description of
Refresh rate – Resolution=1 packet arguments)
All Others
Refresh rate for all other streams.

Example: HRU =50

Restrictions: 570 only
Payload PRA= 3 bytes Command or Query. PRA = PRA? PRA =xxx
Compression Payload compression refresh rate, 1 to 600 PRA! (see description of
Refresh rate Resolution=1 packet arguments)

Refresh rate for all other streams.

Example: PRU =50

Restrictions: 570 only
Telnet timeout TET= 2 bytes Command or Query. TET = TET? TET =xx
Telnet log in timeout, 1 to 60 TET! (see description of
Resolution=1 minute arguments)
Inactivity timeout on CLI menu screen.

Example: <1/TET=50
Administrator ADU= 11 bytes Command or Query. ADU = ADU? ADU =xxxxxxxxxxx
UserName No spaces Change the administrator username, where: ADU! (see description of
allowed. arguments)
Example: ADU=comtech

To get the new user name effective, ADP must be issued

Immediately after ADU. Then query ADU? to see the new.
Administrator ADP= 11 bytes Command or Query. ADP = ADP? ADP =xxxxxxxxxxx
Password No spaces Change the administrator password, where: ADP! (see description of
allowed. arguments)
Example: ADP=comtech
ReadWrite RWU= 11 bytes Command or Query. RWU = RWU? RWU =xxxxxxxxxxx
UserName No spaces Change the ReadWrite username, where: RWU! (see description of
allowed. arguments)
Example: RWU =comtech

To get the new user name effective, RWP must be issued

Immediately after RWU.

E–9
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Response
Parameter (Instruction Command or (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Code and
Command
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)

ReadWrite RWP= 11 bytes Command or Query. RWP = RWP? RWP =xxxxxxxxxxx

Password No spaces Change the ReadWrite password, where: RWP! (see description of
allowed. arguments)
Example: RWP =comtech
ReadOnly ROU= 11 bytes Command or Query. ROU = ROU? ROU =xxxxxxxxxx
UserName No spaces Change the ReadOnly username, where: ROU! (see description of
allowed. arguments)
Example: ROU =comtech

To get the new user name effective, ROP must be issued

Immediately after ROU.
ReadOnly ROP= 11 bytes Command or Query. ROP = ROP? ROP =xxxxxxxxxxx
Password No spaces Change the ReadOnly password, where: ROP! (see description of
allowed. arguments)
Example: ROP =comtech
Access Client ACL= 18 bytes, Command or Query. ACL = ACL? ACL= xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy
List numerical Used to set the Access list entry, which contains a subnet and mask. ACL! (see description of
Once the access list is enabled, only devices from the allowed ranges arguments)
are allowed to communicate with the modem.:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yy, where:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address, and
yy is the network prefix (0-31)
Returns 000.000.000.000/32 when a particular Access Client is not
configured.

Example: <1/ACL[1]=010.006.030.001.24
Access List ACD=x 1-byte Command only. ACD= N/A ACD=x [1..4]
Delete numerical 1…4 Delete the specified access list entry from the access list table. ACD! (see description of
<1/ACD=x, where x is value of 1…4 arguments)
IGMP IGE= 1 byte, value Command or Query, where: IGE = IGE? IGE =x
enable/disable of 0 or 1 0=Disabled IGE! (see description of
1= Enabled arguments)
Enables or disables the IGMP feature.
Access List ACE= 1 byte, value Command or Query, where: ACE = ACE? ACE =x
Enforcement of 0 or 1 0=Disabled ACE! (see description of
1= Enabled arguments)
Enables or disabled access list enforcement.
Ping Reply PRE= 1 byte, value Command or Query, where: PRE = PRE? PRE =x
Enabled of 0 or 1 0=Disabled PRE! (see description of
1= Enabled arguments)
Enables or disables ping reply. When disabled, the modem will not
respond to pings (network security feature)

E–10
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Response
Parameter (Instruction Command or (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Code and
Command
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)

Telnet Enabled TLE= 1 byte, value Command or Query, where: TLE = TLE? TLE =x
of 0 or 1 0=Disabled TLE! (see description of
1= Enabled arguments)
Enables or disables the telnet interface. When disabled, the user will not
be able to log in to the telnet interface.
SNMP Enabled SPE= 1 byte, value Command or Query, where: SPE = SPE? SPE =x
of 0 or 1 0=Disabled SPE! (see description of
1= Enabled arguments)
Enables or disables the SNMP interface. When disabled, the user will not
be able to use the SNMP interface.
Downlink Route DRM= 1 byte, 0 or 1 Command or Query, where: DRM= DRM? DRM=x
All Multicast 0=Disabled DRM! x – 0 or 1.
1=Enabled
Enable/Disable Downlink Route All Multicast option.
Transmit DES TDE= 1 byte, value Command or Query, where: TDE = TDE? TDE =x
enable/disable of 0, 1, 2 or 3 0=Disabled TDE! (see description of
1= Enabled (Managed Switch Only mode) arguments)
2= PerRoute (read-only when FAST feature is purchased in router mode)
3 = Unavailable (read-only when FAST feature not purchased)
Acts as command, only in Managed Switch mode. In router mode, it’s read-
only.
Enables or disables the Transmit 3xDES feature.

Restriction: Cannot enable if the 3xDES FAST feature has not been
purchased
TX Header THE= 1 byte, value Command or Query, where: THE = THE? THE =x
Compression of 0, 1, 2 or 3 0=Disabled THE! (see description of
enable/disable 1= Enabled (Managed Switch Only mode) arguments)
2 = PerRoute (read-only when FAST feature is purchased in router
mode)
3 = Unavailable (read-only when FAST feature not purchased)
Acts as command, only in Managed Switch mode. In router mode, it’s read-
only.
Enables or disables the Transmit 3xDES feature.

Restriction: Cannot enable if the 3xDES FAST feature has not been
purchased

E–11
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Response
Parameter (Instruction Command or (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Code and
Command
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)

RX Header RHE= 1 byte, value Command or Query, where: RHE = RHE? RHE =x
Compression of 0, 1, 2 or 3 0=Disabled RHE! (see description of
enable/disable 1= Enabled arguments)
Enables or disables the Transmit 3xDES feature.

Restriction: Cannot enable if the 3xDES FAST feature has not been
purchased
TX Payload TPE= 1 byte, value of Command or Query, where: TPE = TPE? TPE =x
Compression 0, 1, 2 or 3 0=Disabled TPE! (see description of
enable/disable 1= Enabled (Managed Switch Only mode) arguments)
2 = PerRoute (read-only when FAST feature is purchased in
router mode)
3 = Unavailable (read-only when FAST feature not purchased)
Acts as command, only in Managed Switch mode. In router mode, it’s
read-only.
Enables or disables the Transmit 3xDES feature.

Restriction: Cannot enable if the 3xDES FAST feature has not been
purchased
3xDES Encrypt DEK[1..8]= 48 bytes, Command or Query. DEK = DEK[1..8]? DEK= x [1..48]
Key numerical 3xDES encrypt key [192-Bit], where: DEK! (see description of
arguments)
Example: DEK[1]=
222222222222222244444444444444446666666666666666
All are Hexadecimal digits. [0…F], a total of 48 Hex digits.
3xDES Decrypt DDK[1..8]= 48 bytes, Command or Query. DDK = DDK[1..8]? DDK =x [1..48]
Key numerical 3xDES decrypt key, where: DDK! (see description of
arguments)
Example: DDK:0=
222222222222222244444444444444446666666666666666
All are Hexadecimal digits. [0…F], a total of 48 Hex digits.
SMTP Server IP SIA= 15 bytes, Command or Query. SIA = SIA? SIA = xx.xxx.xxx.xxx (see
Address numerical Used to set the IP address of the SMTP server where mail should be SIA! description of arguments)
sent, in the format:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address

Example: <1/SIA=010.006.030.001.
When not configured, it returns >0001/SIA=0.0.0.0

E–12
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Response
Parameter (Instruction Command or (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Code and
Command
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)

SMTP Domain SDM= 128 bytes, Command or Query. SDM = SDM? SDM =x [1..128]
Name characters, no SMTP Domain name of up to 128 characters. To delete the domain SDM! (see description of
spaces name, issue <1/SDM= arguments)
Empty string will delete the domain name.

Example: SMTP=somedomainname
SMTP SDN= 128 bytes, Command or Query. SDN = SDN? SDN =x [1..128]
Destination characters, SMTP Destination name of up to 128 characters. To delete the SDN! (see description of
Name destination name, issue <1/SDN= arguments)
Empty string will delete the domain name.

Example: <1/SMTP=somedestinationname
SNMP SRC= 255 bytes, Command or Query. SRC = SRC? SRC =x
Read characters, no SNMP read community string. Empty string is not allowed SRC! (see description of
Community spaces arguments)
Example: <1/SRC=public
SNMP SWC= 255 bytes, Command or Query. SWC = SWC? SWC =x
Write characters, no SNMP write community string. Empty string is not allowed SWC! (see description of
Community spaces arguments)
Example: <1/SWC =public
SNMP STC= 255 bytes, Command or Query. STC = STC? STC =x
Trap characters, no SNMP Trap community string. Empty string is not allowed STC! (see description of
Community spaces arguments)
Example: <1/STC =trapcomm
SNMP Trap STA= 15 bytes, Command or Query. STA = STA? STA = xx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Destination IP Numerical Used to set the IP address of the SNMP Trap destination IP Address STA! (see description of
Address where traps will be sent, in the format: arguments)
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address

Example: <1/STA=010.006.030.001
Returns >0001/STA=0.0.0.0 When not configured.
SNMP Trap STB= 15 bytes, Command or Query. STB = STB? STB = xx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Destination IP Numerical Used to set the IP address of the SNMP Trap destination IP Address STB! (see description of
Address-2 where traps will be sent, in the format: arguments)
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address

Example: 010.006.030.001
Returns >0001/STB=0.0.0.0 When not configured.
SNMP Trap STV= 1 byte, value of Command or Query. STV = STV? STV = x
Version 0 or 1 1=Snmpv1 STV! (see description of
2=Snmpv2 arguments)
Specifies the version of SNMP traps that should be sent.

E–13
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Response
Parameter (Instruction Command or (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Code and
Command
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)

SNMP Trap SAT= 1 byte, value of Command or Query SAT = SAT? SAT =x
Enable 1 or 2 where, SAT! (see description of
Authentication 2=Disabled arguments)
Traps 1= Enabled
Enables or disables sending SNMP authentication traps.
SNMP SSC= 128 bytes, Command or Query. SSC = STC? STC =x [1..128]
System Contact characters, SNMP System Contact string SSC! (see description of
arguments)
Example: <1/SSC=Joe Net Admin. If not configured it returns empty
string.
<1/SSC=
SNMP SSN= 128 bytes, Command or Query. SSN = SSN? SSN =x [1..128]
System Name characters, SNMP System Name string SSN! (see description of
arguments)
Example: <1/SSN=Remote1. If not configured it returns empty string.
<1/SSC=
SNMP SSL= 128 bytes, Command or Query. SSL = SSL? SSL =x [1..128]
System characters, SNMP System Location string SSL! (see description of
Location arguments)
Example: <1/SSL=Upstairs back right. If not configured it returns empty
string.
<1/SSL=
Enable/Disable QSE= 1 byte value Command or Query. QSE= QSE? QSE=x
QoS Feature 0 – Disable Setting this to ‘1’ enables the Quality of Service feature. QSE!
1 – Enable Setting to ‘0’ disables it.
System N/A String of Query only. SCG= SCG? SCG= string of variable
Configuration Variable byte Querying the SCG? dumps the system configuration. This can be used SCG! byte size.
Get size for updating the GUI parameters. See the Appendix section for more
information on individual field.

E–14
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5.2 Interface Commands and Queries

Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Ethernet MAC N/A 12 bytes Query only. ETM! ETM? ETM=xxxxxxxxxxxx
Returns the Ethernet MAC address, format: (see description of
arguments)
Example: ETM=0006B0000178
Ether speed ESM= 1 byte, value of Command or Query. ESM = ESM? ESM = x
mode 1..5 1=Auto ESM! (see description of
2=10 MB/sec Half Duplex arguments)
3=100 MB/sec Half Duplex
4=10 MB/sec Full Duplex
5=100 MB/sec Full Duplex
Specifies the speed and mode of Ethernet interface.
IP Address of IPA= 15 bytes length. Command or Query. IPA = IPA? IPA= xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (see
Ethernet Used to set the IP address and mask of the Ethernet interface, in the IPA! description of arguments)
interface format:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address

Example: 010.006.030.001

Note: To make the IPA= command effective, one needs to issue the
IPM command immediately following IPA command. IPM should be
issued even if there is no change in the subnet mask.

Changing the IP address will cause the telnet/socket connection to

break. So, the telnet/application should reconnect to the new IP
address after timeout.

For Reading also, IPA? is followed by IPM?

IP Address IPM= Value of Command or Query. IPM= IPM? IPM=yy
Mask of 8 – 32 Sets the IP Subnet mask for the interface IP address. IPM!
Ethernet yy is the subnet mask in bits [8..32]
Interface See the NOTE above for IPA.
HDLC Address HAD 4 bytes, Command or Query. HAD= HAD? HAD= xxxx
Numerical Sets the one of four HDLC address, where: HAD! (see description of
In small network mode value is 0x01-0xFE arguments)
In large network value is 0x0001-0x7FFE
To delete, set the value to 0xFFFF.

Example: <1/HAD[3]=AB will set the HDLC address to 0xAB

<1/HAD[2]=FFFF will Clear/Delete the HDLC Address.
In Point-to-Point or ViperSat mode the values are not used.

E–15
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5.3 QoS Commands and Queries

Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
QoS mode QSM= 1 byte, value of Command or Query. QSM = QSM? QSM =x
1, 2 or 3. QoS operating mode, where: QSM! (see description of
1=Priority/Max arguments)
2=Min/Max
3=DiffServ
Example: <1/QSM=2
DiffServ Rule DSR= 48 bytes, Command or Query. DSR= DSR? DSR =x [1..48]
numerical The value in this is broken into separate values: DSR!
Read/Get Format:
cccc|ddd ddd|mmmmm|MMMMM|p (m = Min value,
M = Max Value)
cccc – DiffServ class name
ddd ddd – DiffServ Code Point. The code point has 0, 1, X
mmmmm – Minimum bandwidth in kbps.
Range = 0..99999 (kbps)
MMMMM – Maximum bandwidth in kbps.
Range = 0..99999 (kbps)
p – priority is fixed and assigned by system.
User is allowed to modify Assured Class Rules 9, 10, 11, 12 ONLY,
while the QoS [QSM=3] is in DiffServ mode.
Write/Set Format:
Example: DSR[9]=00100|00400
Sets min bw to 100, max bw to 400.
To set DSR, the system has to be set in DiffServ mode by issuing
<1/QSM=3.
DiffServ Table N/A String of Query only. DTG= DTG? DTG=sssss…..ss
Get DiffServ Table Displays the complete Diffserv rules. Can be issued when QoS mode DTG!
is set in Diff Serv. There are 12-rows/rules. Each rule is separated by Display all 12 Diffserv
chr(13). rules.
>0001/DTG=chr(13)
EXFD|101 110|00000|99999|1chr(13)
CLS1|001 000|00000|99999|1chr(13)
CLS2|010 000|00000|99999|2chr(13)
CLS3|011 000|00000|99999|3chr(13)
CLS4|100 000|00000|99999|4chr(13)
CLS5|101 000|00000|99999|5chr(13)
CLS6|110 000|00000|99999|6chr(13)
CLS7|111 000|00000|99999|7chr(13)
ASF1|001 xx0|00011|01111|8chr(13)
ASF2|010 xx0|00022|02222|8chr(13)
ASF3|011 xx0|00000|99999|8chr(13) ASF4|100
xx0|00000|99999|8chr(13)chr(10)

E–16
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
QoS Rule QSR= QSR[0..32]= Command or Query. QSR = QSR[0..32]? QSR[0..32] =
Index-0 is the QSR=tt|p|sss.sss.sss.sss/ss|ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd/dd|AAAAA|BBBBB|CCCCC|DDD QSR! Index-0 is the See description.
default rule DD|mmmmm|MMMMM|w|f default rule Index-0 is the default rule
Where t = Protocol Type:
01 - UDP 02 - TCP 03-ICMP
04-RTP 05-VOCE 06-VDEO
07-RTPS
08-FTP 09-HTTP 10-TELN 11-SMTP
12-SNMP 13-SAP 14-ORCL
15-CTRX 16-SQL 17-IP 18 for N-IP
19-ALL [Valid only for default rule]
Where p =
PRI=1..8 (only applies in max/priority mode). In Min/Max mode priority for all
rules is fixed at 8. User should not be allowed to change priority in Min/Max
mode. Priority-9 is being used for default rule, and obtained from PARAM file.
Pri-9 cannot be used for configuring other rules.
Where s = Source IP
SIP=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yy [yy – subnet mask]. All ‘*’ signifies all IP address
range[***.***.***.***/**].
Where d = Destination IP
DIP=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yy [yy – subnet mask]. All ‘*’ signifies all IP address range,
like [***.***.***.***/**]
All ‘*’ signifies all port range of 00000 – 65535 for TCP/UDP.
All port numbers should in fixed length of 5-chars
Where A = TCP/UDP Source Port range
SPS=aaaaa [Source Port range Start]
Where B = [Source Port range Finish]
SPF=bbbbb
Where C = [Dest Port range Start]
DPS=ccccc
Where D = [Dest Port range Finish]
DPF=ddddd
Where m =
MINBW = mmmmm (meaningful in min.max mode). This is 0 in Max Priority
mode. The number should be mentioned with preceding zeros, to make it a fixed
length of 5-chars.
Where M =
MXB=MMMMM (meaningful in max/pri and min./max modes only). The number
should be mentioned with preceding zeros, to make it a fixed length of 5-chars.
W = WRED = 0-No 1-Yes
F = FILTER = 0-No 1-Yes

Example:
>0001/qsr[1]=05|5|***.***.***.***/**|***.***.***.***/**|*****|*****|*****|*****|00000|22222|0|1

Example: [Default rule]

Note: All QoS related commands can only be issued only when the system is in
QoS-Max/Priority or QoS-Min/Max mode. It may return QSR! while not in any of
these modes.

E–17
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Number of QoS N/A QSN=2 bytes Query only. QSN = QSN? QSN = xxx
Rule entries numerical Returns the number of active QoS rules. Does not count default rule. QSN? (see description of
arguments)
Note: This command should be issued whenever a new rule is
added/deleted.
Delete a QoS QSD= QSD =2bytes, Command only. QSD = N/A QSD = xx
Rule entry numerical Deletes the QoS rule entry at the specified index number QSD! (see description of
arguments)
rd
Example: QSD=3 (deletes the 3 QoS rule)
QoS Typical QTL= 1-Byte value Command or Query. QTL = QTL? QTL=x
System Latency 0 – 5 Seconds. Sets/Gets the QoS typical system latency QTL! X – A value of 0-5
At low datarates of up to 1Mbps this value can range from 0 – 5 Seconds.
Seconds..
At datarates above 1Mbps, the value range from 0 – 2 Seconds.

E–18
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5.4 Protocol Commands and Queries

Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
DHCP Relay IP DRA= 15 bytes, Command or Query. DRA = DRA? DRA = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Address numerical Used to set the IP address of the DHCP Server, in the format: DRA! (see description of
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where: arguments)
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address

Example: <1/DRA=010.006.030.001
Returns >0001/DRA=0.0.0.0 when not configured.
Static Arp table ARP= 256 bytes Command or Query. ARP = ARP[1..256]? ARP=x [1..256]
characters ARP Entry in format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx|mm:mm:mm:mm:mm:mm ARP! (see description of
Where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx = IP address. arguments)
mm:mm:mm:mm:mm:mm. = MAC Address.
Duplicate IP addresses are not allowed. They must also be locally
attached (on the same subnet as the Ethernet interface). Using a
different index with existing IP address may modify the existing ARP
entry, rather than creating new one.

Example: <1/arp[1]=010.020.030.040|00:11:ab:33:44:66
Returns >0001/ARP! When there is no ARP entry.
Number of ARP N/A 4 bytes, Query only. ARN = ARN? ARN=nnnn
entries numerical Returns the number of static arp entries. ARN! (see description of
arguments)
Note: This command should be issued whenever a new ARP Entry is
added/deleted.
Delete an ARP ARD= ARD=xxx.xxx.xx Command only. ARD = N/A ARD=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
entry x.xxx Delete the ARP entry associated with the specified IP Address. ARD! (see description of
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx IP address of ARP entry to delete. arguments)

Example: <1/ARD=192.168.001.100
IGMP Server: IGQ= IGQ=xxx Command or Query. IGQ= IGQ? IGQ=xxx
IGMP Query Where xxx is 1 Set the IGMP Query period in seconds while modem acting as IGMP IGQ! xxx – value of 1 to 600.
Period to 600 Server.
IGMP Server: IMR= IMR=xxx Command or Query. IMR= IMR? IMR=xxx
IGMP Max Resp. Where xxx is Set the Maximum response time for the IGMP Query in seconds. IMR!
Time value of 1 to Should always be 2 less than query period. The range is 1 to (IGQ – xxx - value of 1 to 598.
598 2). If IGQ is at 30, then IMR can be set from 1 through 28.
IGMP Server: INM= 2 bytes, Command or Query. INM = INM? INM =xxx
Number of Numerical 1..30 Number of missed responses before leaving the IGMP Group. INM! (see description of
Missed Configured from 1…30 arguments)
Responses
Example: INM=15

E–19
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
IGMP Client IRQ= 1 byte, 0 or 1 Command or Query, where: IRQ = IRQ? IRQ =xxx
Recognize 0=No IRQ! (see description of
Queries 1= Yes arguments)
Enable/Disable Recognizing IGMP Queries.

Example: IRQ=0
IGMP IRO= 1 byte, 0 or 1 Command or Query, where: IRO = IRO? IRO =xxx
Client Router 0=No IRO! (see description of
Alert Option for 1= Yes arguments)
V1 Enable/Disable Router Alert option for V1 Reports.

Example: IRO =0
IGMP Client: ICV 1 byte, 0 or 1 Command or Query, where: ICV = ICV? ICV =xxx
Version Set the IGMP Version for Unsolicited Reports. ICV! (see description of
0=V1 arguments)
1= V2
Recognize IGMP Queries

Example: ICV =0
IGMP Client: IRI= 2 bytes 0..25 Command or Query, where: IRI = IRI? IRI =xxx
Unsolicited Set the unsolicited Report Interval [Modem as Client] IRI! (see description of
Report Interval Range = 1..25 arguments)

Example: <1/IRI =14

IGMP View N/A String value Query only. IGT= IGT? IGT=sssssss
Table Display the IGMP table with different states. To see the entries, the IGT! Table of IP Addresses and
system should have the IGMP feature enabled, and should be their state information.
properly configured to forward IGMP packets. See WEB interface for
proper table format.

Note: Not yet supported in 1.5.3 Release. Will available in next

release.

E–20
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5.5 Operations and Maintenance Commands and Queries

Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Upgrade Slot USI= 1 bytes, value Command or Query. USI = USI? USI=x
of 0,1 or 2 Slot to upgrade new IP firmware where, USI! (see description of
0= Oldest arguments)
1=Image 1
2=Image 2

Example: UPS=0
Software N/A 34-37 bytes Query only. SWR! SWR? SWR=Boot:x.y.zz
Revision Unit returns the value of the internal software revision installed in the unit, Bulk1:x.y.zz Bulk2:x.y.zz
in the form : (see description
of arguments)
Example:
>0001/SWR=Boot:1.1.1 Bulk1:1.5.1u Bulk2:1.5.1P
IP Software N/A String Query only. IFW! IFW? IFW =x….x
Information Complete IP software information: (see description of
arguments)
Example: FRW=
System time is THU DEC 22 14:53:50 2005
Booted using image #1
Using configuration parameters from PARAM #1

Type Date Time Name Rev Len

460804
Boot 1/24/2006 15:26 FW/10873-1c 1.1.3
chr(13)
2607240
IP Bulk#1 12/27/2005 17:27 5.3 Pre 1.5.3
chr(13)
2604308
IP Bulk #2 12/14/2005 14:19 5.3 Pre 1.5.3
chr(13)
128000
EVENT LOG 02/01/2006 14:10 Eventlog 1.5.3
chr(13)
5160
PARAM 1/26/2006 18:29 Console 1.5.3
chr(13)
----
BaseBoot 03/30/2004 -- -- FW/10804-1- 1.1.1
chr(13)
----
BaseBulk #1 01/26/2006 -- -- W/10805T 1.5.1N
chr(13)
----
BaseBulk #2 01/04/2006 -- -- FW/10805R 1.5.1g chr(13)
chr(10)

E–21
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Boot From BLI= 1 byte, value of Command or Query. BLI = BLI? BLI =x
Software Image 0,1,2 Image which will be used the next time the system is booted, where: BLI! (see description of
0=Latest arguments)
1=Bulk Image # 1
2=Bulk Image # 2
Example: BLI=1 (which is Image #1 active)
Base Modem BBI= 1 byte value Command or Query. BBI= BBI? BBI=x
Boot From 0,1,2 The binary image, which will be used by the base modem, to boot BBI! (see description of
with. arguments)
Where
0 – Latest
1 – Image in Slot# 1
2 – Image in Slot#2.
Example: <1/BBI=0
Param file image PFI= 1 byte, value of Command or Query. PFI = PFI? PFI =x
to use 1 or 3 Image which will be updated the next time firmware is uploaded to the PFI! (see description of
system: arguments)
1=Param1
3=Factory Default
To restore the Factory Defaults, set PFI=3 and issue RST to reset the
box. This would bring up the box with factory default configuration.
Example: PFI =1 (using param image on flash)
Save System SCS= 1 byte value Command only SCS= N/A SCS=x
Configuration 1 – Save Setting SCS to ‘1’, will save all the active system configuration on to SCS! (see description of
Parameters config the Flash. arguments)
Reset Unit RST 1 byte value. Command only. RST= N/A RST=x
1 - reset the Setting the parameter to 1 resets the system. Telnet2 connection RST! (see description of
system. needs to be re-established. arguments)
Restore Factory RFD 1-Byte value Command only. RFD= N/A RFD=x
Defaults 1 - restore Setting this to ‘1’ will bring the modem back to factory defaults. This RFD! (see description of
may force unit reboot, depending on the mode of operation. arguments)
Load Params LPS= 1-Byte value Command only. LPS= N/A LPS=x
from permanent 1 – load Setting this to ‘1’ loads the system with parameters from permanent LPS! (see description of
storage parameters storage/flash. This may force unit reboot, depending on the mode of arguments)
operation.
Codecast CCA= Multicast IP Command or Query. CCA= CCA? CCA=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Multicast Address in Set the Code cast multicast address, through which the modem can CCA! (see description of
Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx receive the software updates via vLoad application. Only Multicast arguments)
format address in the range 224.xxx.xxx.xxx To 239.xxx.xxx.xxx are allowed.
There are some reserved multicast addresses which cannot be used.
This cannot be deleted.

E–22
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments for Query

Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Unit Up Time N/A String value Query only. N/A UUT? UUT=sssssss
Displays the unit up time in days, hours, minutes & seconds. String.
(see description of
Example: >0001/uut=0 days 0 hours 13 mins 15 secs arguments)

E.5.6 Redundancy Queries

Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Redundancy N/A 1 byte, value of Query only. N/A RED? RED=x
State 0 or 1 Unit returns the redundancy state of the unit, where (see description
0=Offline of arguments)
1=Online

Example: RED=1 (which is Online)

E–23
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5.7 Routing Commands and Queries

Command Query
Arguments for Response
Parameter (Instruction (Instruction
Command or Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and Code and
Response to Query Command
Qualifier) Qualifier)
Route Table RTE RTE[1..256]=variable Command or Query. RTE = RTE[1..256]? RTE[1..256] = xxx
sssssssssssss|ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd/DD|i|nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn|hhhh|t|p|c|k|S RTE! (see description of
s = Route Name up to 13 characters. It should be unique. Reusing of arguments)
route names with different index, will end up modifying the existing
route.
d = Destination IP Address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yy where
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is IP address and
yy – Subnet mask bits. To mean ‘Any IP Address’ indicate it by
***.***.***.***/** format.
D = Destination Subnet Mask Bits.
i = Interface 1 – Sat and 0 – Ethernet
n = Next Hop IP Address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format.
To be valid the next hop should be on the same subnet
as the router IP Address. This field will be all ‘*’ for a ‘SAT’
directed route. It means, for a route with valid HDLC address this
field will be ‘***************’.
h = HDLC Addr in 4-digit hexadecimal number. Valid
range is 0x00 to 0xFE in Router-Small Network mode.
And 0x0000 to 0x7FFE for Router-Large Network
mode. This field will be all ‘*’ for ‘ETH’ directed route.
It means, if the route has a valid next-hop, then this field is ‘****’
[meaning HDLC Address is not Used.]. HDLC Address is not used in
point-to-point mode, may default to ‘1’.
t = Header Compression 0 – No 1 – Yes.
p = Payload Compression 0 – No 1 – Yes.
c = DES Encryption 0 – No 1 – Yes.
k = DES Key to use 0 – Don’t use any key 1 – 8 use as
mentioned and 9 – Use Random key.
S = Multicast state 0-None 1=Eth-to-Sat 2=Sat-to-Eth
3=toBoth
When called using an existing index, the command is treated as a
“modify”. Only new routes can be added at the END of the list:

Example:
RTN?
RTN=3
<1/rte[3]=
rt3|239.111.102.222.32|0|192.168.001.022|00AB|0|0|1|5|3

E–24
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments Query

Response
Parameter (Instruction for Command (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and or Response Code and
Command
Qualifier) to Query Qualifier)
Route Table Sat Directed Route:
(Continued) >0001/RTE[1]=rt1|011.012.013.014/32|1|***.***.***.***|1111|0|0|0|0|0

Eth Directed Route:

>0001/RTE[4]=rt4|012.013.014.015/32|0|192.168.001.111|****|0|0|0|0|0

Note: To be able to set/get the route entries, the system should be in

the routing. It may return RTE!, if system is in Managed Switch mode.
Number of N/A RTN=3 bytes, Query only. RTN = RTN? RTN = xxxx
route entries numerical Returns the number of route entries in the route table. RTN! (see description of
arguments)
Note: This command should be issued whenever a new route is
added/deleted.

Delete route RTD= RTD=4 bytes, Command only. RTD = RTD! RTD = xx.xx
entry numerical Deletes the route entry at the specified index number, if configured.
Returns RTD!, if there is no route at the index. (see description of
arguments)
Route Table N/A N/A Query only. RCG! RCG? RCG=
Get Get the whole Routing Table of the modem. Each route entry is xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
separated by ‘\r’ [chr(13)] xxxxxxxxxxxxxx

The route table will be displayed only if system’s working mode is

“Router –Small, Router-Large, Router-PtP. If the system is in Managed
Switch mode, it may return RCG!

E–25
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5.8 Statistics Commands and Queries

E.5.8.1 WAN Stats

Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction
Description of Arguments Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Command Code and
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
WAN TX: N/A 10 bytes, Numerical Query only. STT! STT? Text display of all
Statistics Display all WAN Transmit Statistics. WAN/Satellite
Transmit Statistics.
WAN Tx Error – No Route [ 0]chr(13) \r =CR = 0x0D
WAN Tx Error – Packet Start [ 0]chr(13) \n = Newline = 0x0A
WAN Tx Error – Packet Front Length [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Tx Error – Packet End Length [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Tx Packet Invalid Length [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Tx Packet Dropped – Sat [ 0]chr(13)
Overdriven [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Tx HDLC Header Byte Count [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Tx HDLC Payload Count [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Tx HDLC Packet Count [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Tx Utilization [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Traffic Destined to WAN [ 0]chr(13)
Actual Satellite Traffic (kbps) [ 0]chr(13)chr(10)
Percentage of WAN Bandwidth Saved
WAN RX: N/A 10 bytes, Numerical Query only. SRT! SRT? Text display of all
Statistics Display all WAN Receive Statistics. WAN/Satellite
Transmit Statistics.
WAN Rx Bad Address Count [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Rx Pkt Proc CRC Errors [ 0]chr(13) \r =CR = 0x0D
WAN Rx Abort/Octet Errors [ 0]chr(13) \n = Newline = 0x0A
WAN Rx Overrun Errors [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Rx HDLC CRC Errors [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Rx HDLC Payload Byte Count [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Rx HDLC Header Byte Count [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Rx HDLC Packet Count [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Rx Invalid FlowID Errors [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Rx SAR Re-Assemble Errors [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Rx Header Decomp errors [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Rx Memory Alignment Errors [ 0]chr(13)
WAN Rx Bad CRC Errors [ 0]chr(13)chr(10)
WAN Stats WSC= 1Byte Numerical Command only. WSC= N/A WSC=
Clear Setting to ‘1’ clears all the WAN Statistics. Clears both Transmit & Clear WAN Stats.
Receive Stats.

E–26
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5.8.2 IP Stats
Command Arguments Query
Response
Parameter (Instruction for Command (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and or Response Code and
Command
Qualifier) to Query Qualifier)
IP Route Stats N/A 10 bytes, Query only. IPS! IPS? Text display of all IP
Numericals Display all IP Route packet statistics in text. Route Stats.
Total Packets From Ethernet [ 58]chr(13)
Total Packets To Ethernet [ 56]chr(13) \r =CR = 0x0D
Unicast Packets To Ethernet [ 56]chr(13) \n = Newline = 0x0A
Multicast Packets To Ethernet [ 0]chr(13)
Broadcast Packets To Ethernet [ 0]chr(13)
Total Packets From Satellite [ 0]chr(13)
Total Packets From Endstation [ 61]chr(13)
Total Packets To Endstation [ 58]chr(13)
IGMP Packets Received [ 0]chr(13)
IP Option Packets Received [ 0]chr(13)chr(10)
IP Filtered Stats N/A 10 bytes, Query only. IFT! IFT? Text display of all IP
Numerical Display all IP Route Filtered packet statistics in text Filtered stats.
Filtered – Boot [ 8]chr(13) \r =CR = 0x0D
Filtered – Flow Descriptor [ 0]chr(13)
\n = Newline = 0x0A
Filtered – Unknown Reason Code [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Flow Correlator [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Management Path [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – WAN Scaling [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Ping [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Access Control [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Vipersat MCP [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Vipersat UCP [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Vipersat Remote [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Codeload [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Multicast [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Bad Packet [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Route [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – QoS Rule [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Vipersat Loop [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Bad Header Loop [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Bad Data Ptr [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – MAC Split error [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – L3 Type Error [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Local Destination [ 0]chr(13)
Filtered – Redundancy Error [ 0]chr(13)
Filter – ICMP Filter [ 0]chr(13)
Filter – Port Error [ 0]chr(13)
Filter - Total [ 8]chr(13)chr(10)

E–27
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Command Arguments Query

Response
Parameter (Instruction for Command (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and or Response Code and
Command
Qualifier) to Query Qualifier)
IP Dropped N/A 10bytes Query only. IDT! IDT? Text display of all IP
Statistics numerical Display all the IP Route Dropped Packet Statistics in text. Dropped stats.
values
Dropped – Bad IP Header Checksum [ 0]chr(13) \r =CR = 0x0D
Dropped – Bad Buffer Length [ 0]chr(13) \n = Newline = 0x0A
Dropped – Bad IP Version [ 0]chr(13)
Dropped – TTL Expired [ 0]chr(13)
Dropped – No Route [ 0]chr(13)
Dropped – No ARP Entry [ 0]chr(13)
Dropped – Multicast [ 0]chr(13)
Dropped – Multicast Disabled Group [ 0]chr(13)
Dropped – Total [ 0]chr(13

Clear IP Route RSC= 1Byte number Set only. RSC= RSC? RSC!
Statistics 1 – Clear stats Setting this value to ‘1’ would clear all IP Route statistics. RSC!
Clears IP Route Stats, IP Filtered Stats, IP Dropped Stats.

E–28
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5.8.3 Ethernet Stats

Command Arguments for Query
Response
Parameter (Instruction Command or (Instruction
Description of Arguments to Response to Query
Type Code and Response to Code and
Command
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Ethernet Rx N/A 10 bytes, Query only. ERT! ERT? Text display of all
Statistics Numericals Display all the Ethernet Receive statistics in text. Ethernet Receive
statistics.
Ethernet Tx Bytes [ 0994]chr(13)
Ethernet Tx Good Frames [ 112]chr(13)
\r =CR = 0x0D
Ethernet Tx Max Collision Count [ 0]chr(13)
\n = Newline = 0x0A
Ethernet Tx Late Collision Count [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Tx DMA Underrun Errors [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Tx Lost Carrier Sense Count [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Tx Deferred Count [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Tx Single Collision Count [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Tx Multicast Collision Count [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Tx Total Collision Count [ 0]chr(13)chr(10)
Ethernet Rx N/A 10 bytes, Query only. ETT! ETT? Text display of all
Statistics Numericals Display all the Ethernet Transmit statistics in text. Ethernet Transmit
statistics.
Ethernet Rx Bytes [ 6786]chr(13)
Ethernet Rx Good Frames [ 91]chr(13)
\r =CR = 0x0D
Ethernet Rx CRC Error Frames [ 0]chr(13)
\n = Newline = 0x0A
Ethernet Rx Alignment Errors [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Rx Resource Errors [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Rx Collision Detect Errors [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Rx Runt Frames [ 0]chr(13)
Ethernet Rx Flow Control Pause Frames [ 0]chr(13)chr(10)
Clear Ethernet ESC=1 1byte number. Set only. ESC= ESC? ESC!
Stats 1 – Clear stats Setting this value to ‘1’ clears all the Ethernet Receive & Transmit ESC!
statistics.

E–29
 CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.5.8.4 Quality of Service (QoS) Stats

Command Arguments for Query
Parameter (Instruction Command or Response to (Instruction Response to
Description of Arguments
Type Code and Response to Command Code and Query
Qualifier) Query Qualifier)
Quality of N/A String of QoS Query only. QST! QST? QST=sssssssss…
Service Stats
Statistics Get Displays the QoS queue statistics of all active queues. String displaying
nnn|pp|aaaaaaaaaa|bbbbb|cccccccccc|dddddddddd|eeeeeeeeee|fffff QoS stats of all
|ggggg|hhhhh|iiii active queues.
n – QoS Rule Number
p – Protocol number [Refer to QSR] \r – CR – 0x0D
a – Sent Packets \n – Newline –
b – Pkts per Second 0x0A
c – Sent Bytes
d – Dropped Packets
e – Dropped Bytes
f – Current Transmit Rate [Kbps]
g – Average Transmit Rate [Kbps]
h – Maximum Transmit Rate [ Kbps]
I – Active Flow count associated with this QoS Queue.
>0001/QST=
0|19| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0chr(13)
1| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0chr(13)
Quality of QSC=xx xx – QoS rule Command only. QSC= N/A QSC=xx
Service Stats xx = QoS index for which QSC!
Clear rule index to clear stats. Clears the QoS statistics for a specified queue. The command can (see description of
be issued only on active/configured queue. To clear default queue argument)
stats use ‘0’.
<1/QSC=0 will clear default queue stats
<1/QSC=5 will clear stats of rule-5.
Clear All QoS QSA= QSA=x Command only. QSA= N/A QSA=x
Queue QSA!
Statistics 1 – Clear all Setting QSA=1 will clear all QoS queue statistics. Also clears the (see description of
stats default queue stats. argument)

E–30
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

E.6 PARAM Files

This section gives more detail about the possible values of various parameters in the PARAM file.

Parameter File Tag Values Associated with Parameter

Possible values are:

SYS_WORKING_MODE Router Mode
Managed Switch Mode

Enabled
EASYCON_MCAST_MODE
Disabled

HDR_REFRESH_UDP_RTP1 Decimal Value of 1…600

HDR_REFRESH_UDP Decimal Value of 1…600

HDR_REFRESH_ALL_OTHERS Decimal Value of 1…600

PAYLOAD_REFRESH Decimal Value of 1…600

TELNET_TIMEOUT Decimal Value of 1…60 Minutes

Possible values are:

Rule-Max/Pri Mode
QOSMODE
Rule-Min/Max Mode
DiffServ Mode

DYNBUF_LATENCY Decimal value of 200 to 5000 mSec.

Route table entries Rt#0 is the first entry and can go up to 256 entries.
Rt#0 …. Rt#nnn
[No need to read this from param file, use RTG]

ROUTE_HDLC_ADDR_SAVE Corresponding HDLC Addresses for EthernetÆSat entries. [No need to read this from param file, use RTG]

DHCP Server IP Address. Possible values are

DHCP_RELAY_IP_ADDR NOT-DEFINED – When the parameter not set.
10.20.30.40 – When a DHCP Server IP Address is set.

E–31
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Parameter File Tag Values Associated with Parameter

Enabled
REDUNDANCY_ACTIVE
Disabled

Possible values are:

Latest
BASE_BOOT_IMAGE
Image 1
Image 2

Oldest
UPGRADE_SLOT Image 1
Image 2

NOT-DEFINED when ip_addr is 0

BLINDLOAD_MCAST_ADDR
Valid multicast IP address like 239.4.5.6

NONE – When not set

ADMIN_PWD
Xxxx/yyy format with xxx-user name and yyy-password. Like comtech/comtech.

NONE – When not set

READWRITE_PWD
Xxxx/yyy format with xxx-user name and yyy-password. Like comtech/comtech.

NONE – When not set

READONLY_PWD
Xxxx/yyy format with xxx-user name and yyy-password. Like comtech/comtech.

NOT-DEFINED/NA – When not set

ACCESS_CLIENT
Valid IP address like 192.168.001.001/32

Enabled
ACCESS_ENFORCEMENT_ENABLE
Disabled

Enabled
PING_REPLY_ENABLE
Disabled

Enabled
TELNETD_ENABLE
Disabled

E–32
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Parameter File Tag Values Associated with Parameter

Enabled
SNMP_ENABLE
Disabled

Unavailable – If system does not has this FAST Feature available.

IGMP_ENABLE Enabled
Disabled

Enabled
GENERIC_DOWNLINK_MCAST
Disabled

Unavailable – If system does not has this FAST Feature available.

QOS_ENABLE Enabled
Disabled

Unavailable – If system does not has this FAST Feature available.

Per Route – If the system working mode is Router-Small, Router-Large, Router-PtoP
TRANS_DES_ENABLE
Enabled – If system working mode is Managed Switch
Disabled – If system working mode is Managed Switch

Unavailable – If system does not has this FAST Feature available.

Per Route – If the system working mode is Router-Small, Router-Large, Router-PtoP
TX_HDR_COMPRESSION_ENABLE
Enabled – If system working mode is Managed Switch
Disabled – If system working mode is Managed Switch

Unavailable – If system does not has this FAST Feature available.

RX_HDR_COMPRESSION_ENABLE Enabled
Disabled

Unavailable – If system does not has this FAST Feature available.

Per Route – If the system working mode is Router-Small, Router-Large, Router-PtoP
TX_PYLDCOMP_ENABLE
Enabled – If system working mode is Managed Switch
Disabled – If system working mode is Managed Switch

E–33
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Parameter File Tag Values Associated with Parameter

xxxxx….xx A 48 character length [192-Bit] 3xDES key. The key is formed with Hexadecimal digits from
ENCRYPT_KEY# [0…7] 0..9,A,B,C,D,E,F only. Like 2222222222222222 4444444444444444 6666666666666666. Notice there is a space
for every 16-Hexadecimal digits for readability.

xxxxx….xx A 48 character length [192-Bit] 3xDES key. The key is formed with Hexadecimal digits from
DECRYPT_KEY# [0…7] 0..9,A,B,C,D,E,F only. Like 2222222222222222 4444444444444444 6666666666666666. Notice there is a space
for every 16-Hexadecimal digits for readability.

SMTP_SERVER_IP_ADDRESS NOT-DEFINED – If the parameter is not set. Otherwise, IP address in the form 192.168.1.1

Empty string, when not set. In param file, there is nothing after = sign.
SMTP_DOMAIN
Otherwise, a string of up to 128 character. Generally in domain name format.

Empty string, when not set. In param file, there is nothing after = sign.
SMTP_DESTNAME
Otherwise, a string of up to 128 character.

SNMP_READ_COMMUNITY String of up to 20 characters. [Empty string is not allowed]. Like “public”

SNMP_WRITE_COMMUNITY String of up to 20 characters. [Empty string is not allowed]. Like “private”

SNMP_TRAP_COMMUNITY String of up to 20 characters. [Empty string is not allowed]. Like “public”

NOT-DEFINED – When the parameter is not set

SNMP_TRAP_DEST
IP address in string format like 11.12.13.14

NOT-DEFINED – When the parameter is not set

SNMP_TRAP_DEST_2
IP address in string format like 11.12.13.14

SNMPv1 – When SNMP version-1 trap generation is selected.

SNMP_TRAP_VERSION
SNMPv2 – When SNMP version-2 trap generation is selected.

UNKNOWN – When invalid value is set.

SNMP_TRAP_ENABLE_AUTHEN_TRAP Enabled – When set to send the Authentication Trap.
Disabled

Empty string, when not set. In param file, there is nothing after = sign.
SNMP_SYSCONTACT
Otherwise, a string of up to 128 character.

E–34
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Parameter File Tag Values Associated with Parameter

Empty string, when not set. In param file, there is nothing after = sign.
SNMP_SYSNAME
Otherwise, a string of up to 128 character.

Empty string, when not set. In param file, there is nothing after = sign.
SNMP_SYSLOCATION
Otherwise, a string of up to 128 character.

ETHER_MAC Ethernet MAC Address in the format 00-06-B0-xx-xx-xx. All are hexadecimal digits.

Possible Values are:

Auto
10 MB/sec Half Duplex
ETHER_SPEED_MODE
100 MB/sec Half Duplex
10 MB/sec Full Duplex
100 MB/sec Full Duplex

ETHER_IP_SNET IP Address in the format 192.168.1.50/24

Small Network Mode

HDLC_ADDR_MODE Large Network Mode
Point-To-Point Mode

If there are no QoS rules configured, (or) system is not in Max-Pri (or) Min-Max mode, then param file will not have
an entry for QoSC. Otherwise, the rules will be in the following format.
QOSC### = SrcIP/Mask DstIP/Mask PROT spm spM dpm dpM mxB mb PWF
QOSC#1 = ***/* ***/* RTP *** *** *** *** 22222 0 4 NY
QOSC#2 = 11.12.13.14/32 22.22.33.44/32 UDP 11111 22222 33333 44444 99999 0 0YN
QOSC
Where
spm – source port min; spM – source port Max; dpm – Destination port min; dpM – Destination port Max
mxB – Max bandwidth in kbps; mb – minimum bandwidth in kbps [Total aggregate min bandwidth of all the QoS
rules should be less than the Tx-Data rate of the system.]
P – Priority; W – WRED; F – Filter; [Y – Yes, N – No]

E–35
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Parameter File Tag Values Associated with Parameter

The default rule always exists in the system and in param file, but not meaningful if QoS mode is DiffServ. The
format is
QOSCDEFR
QOSC### = SrcIP/Mask DstIP/Mask PROT spm spM dpm dpM mxB mb PWF
QOSCDEFR#0 = ***/* ***/* ALL *** *** *** *** 99999 0 9 N N

The DiffServ rules are meaningful only when QoS mode is DiffServ. Otherwise, these parameters can be discarded.
The format is as follows. The first column is
DIFFSSV#0 … DIFFSSV#11
DIFFSSV#0 =0 99999
NOTE: Donor use this from PARAM file, instead use DTG? Command.

A decimal value of
IGMP_QRYP
1…600

A decimal value of
IGMP_MXRT
1…598

A decimal value of
IGMP_MRP
1…30

Possible string values are

IGMP_QUERIES Yes
No

Possible string values are

IGMP_ROUTERALERT_OPT Yes
No

Possible string values are

IGMP_VERSION2 V1
V2

A decimal value of
IGMP_URI
0…25

E–36
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Parameter File Tag Values Associated with Parameter

Static ARP entry if there are any, in the format

SARP#0 …. SARP#255 IP Addr Layer2 MAC Address [Hexadecimal digits]
10.20.30.40 00:11:33:AA:BB:CC

MGC_SAVE MGC Command response from the base modem. See the base modem document for more detail.

OGC_SAVE OGC Command response from the base modem. See the base modem document for more detail.

Enabled
LOGGING FEATURE
Disabled

Possible string values are:

Errors Only
LOGGING LEVEL
Errors and Warnings
All Information

HDLC addresses in hexadecimal format

aaaa bbbb cccc dddd
HDLCADDR_SAVE where
aaaa – First HDLC Address
bbbb – Second HDLC Address…etc

E–37
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix E MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

E–38
 Appendix F. IP QUICK-START
GUIDE

F.1 Quick-Start Guide Introduction

This appendix guides the user through the steps needed to configure a pair of CDM-570/570L
modems equipped with the optional IP Module Ethernet Interface (generically referred to through
the remainder of this appendix as the CDM-IP), as needed, in order to pass traffic within minutes
of initial installation and setup (i.e., starting from factory default settings). This appendix assumes
user familiarity with configuration of the base modem.

F.1.1 Equipment List

The following equipment is required:
Description Qty Comments
CDM-IP Modem 2 CDM-570/570L w/ IP Module, CDM-IP 550, and
CDM-IP 300L.
Note: User may need to provide equipment to convert
70 MHz IF to L-Band for a duplex connection
depending upon modems.
Layer 2 Ethernet Switch 2 Provided by User.
RJ-45 crossover Ethernet cables can be substituted to
directly connect PC to CDM-IP modem without the use
of a hub.
PC with network interface card 2 Provided by User.
(NIC) and a terminal emulation
program
Console cable (DB-9 to RJ-11) 1 Supplied by Comtech EF Data.
Ethernet cables (CAT5) 4 Provided by User.
IF cables 2 Provided by User (to interconnect Tx-Rx between both
CDM-IP modems).

F–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix F MN/CDM570L.IOM

F.1.2 Equipment Setup

Step Instructions

1 Connect each CDM-IP to the PC via the Ethernet Hub.

2 Connect the TX IF on CDM-IP 1 to RX IF of CDM-IP 2 and vice-versa.

3 Connect the DB-9 end of the console cable to the COM1 or COM2 port of the PC and
the RJ-11 end to the console port at the back of CDM-IP 1.

4 Connect CDM-IP 1 and CDM-IP 2 to suitable power supply and turn them ON.

F.1.3 Transmit and Receive IF Configuration

Step Instructions

1 Configure the transmit and receive IF parameters on CDM-IP 1 and CDM-IP 2 via the
front panel.
Note: The IF parameters can also be set via console menu, Telnet, web interface and
SNMP, but for this exercise, it is recommended that the front panel be used.

2 Set the TxPower to minimum level.

3 Before proceeding to next step, make sure that each CDM-IP is appropriately carrier-
locked to the other CDM-IP.

F.1.4 Serial console port Command Line Interface (CLI) Configuration

Step Instructions

1 Launch the terminal emulation program (e.g., HyperTerminal on Microsoft Windows).

2 Select the appropriate COM port (to which the DB-9 end of the console cable is
connected) and configure it for:
 38,400 bps
 8 data bits
 No parity
 1 stop bit
 No hardware flow control

3 Press Enter and to bring up the Main Menu.

F–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix F MN/CDM570L.IOM

F.1.5 Main Menu

Figure F-1. Main Menu

To use the Command Line Interface (CLI), select the appropriate submenu or the entry by typing
the character indicated at the right. Enter [x] to return to the previous menu.
Note: Any CDM-IP configuration changes need to be saved to permanent storage by typing [S]
at any menu screen, then typing [y] to save.

F.1.6 Restoring Factory Default Configuration

The following sections in this guide assume that the CDM-IP is still in factory default configuration
for IP. If this is not the case, the factory default configuration can be restored from the menu:
Step Instructions
1 From the Main Menu, select Operations and Maintenance submenu [O].

2 From the Operations and Maintenance menu, select Database Operations

submenu [D].

3 From the Database Operations menu, select Restore Factory Default option [R].

4 Confirm when prompted by typing ‘yes’ when the following prompt is displayed:
Are you sure you want to restore factory default settings?
WARNING: Choosing Yes will restore factory defaults and then
reboot..
This will erase any user configuration and restore the CDM-IP to factory default
configuration. Proceed to Section F.2 to perform the Managed Switch Mode
configuration, or to Section F.3 to perform the Router Mode configuration.

F–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix F MN/CDM570L.IOM

F.2 Managed Switch Point-to-Point System Configuration

The steps in this guide will lead to the following configuration:

Figure F-2. Managed Switch Point-to-Point System Configuration

F.2.1 PC Configuration

Step Instructions
1 PC 1: Set the IP address to 172.16.10.11;
Set mask to 255.255.255.0.
2 PC 2: Set the IP address to 172.16.10.12;
Set mask to 255.255.255.0.
3 Reboot the PCs (if required).

F.2.2 CDM-IP Configuration – Setting IP Address(es)

Step Instructions
1 From the Main Menu select Network Interface Configuration submenu [I].
2 From the Interface Configuration Menu select Ethernet Interface (fei0)
submenu [E].
3 Set Ethernet IP Address [I]:
Set CDM-IP 1 to 172.16.10.1
Set CDM-IP 2 to 172.16.10.2
4 Set Subnet Prefix Length [M] to 24
The other parameters can be left to their factory default settings.

F–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix F MN/CDM570L.IOM

At this point the basic configuration is over and you should be able to:

5 From PC1: Ping 172.16.10.1 (CDM-IP 1);

Ping 172.16.10.2 (CDM-IP 2);
Ping 172.16.10.12 (PC 2);
6 From PC2: Ping 172.16.10.2 (CDM-IP 2);
Ping 172.16.10.1 (CDM-IP 1);
Ping 172.16.10.11 (PC 1).

Do not enable IF Loopback (or link the TX to RX by a BNC cable or satellite link)
on a CDM-IP modem operating in Managed Switch Mode when connected to a
LAN. In this configuration, Managed Switch Mode will resend all layer 2
IMPORTANT
broadcast packets and cause a “broadcast storm” on the LAN.

F.3 Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration

The steps in this guide will lead to the following configuration:

Figure F-3. Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration

F.3.1 PC Configuration

Step Instructions
1 PC 1: Set the IP address to 172.17.10.11;
Set mask to 255.255.255.0;
Set PC Gateway to 172.17.10.1.
2 PC 2: Set the IP address to 172.16.10.11;
Set mask to 255.255.255.0;
Set PC Gateway to 172.16.10.1.

3 Reboot the PCs (if required).

F–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix F MN/CDM570L.IOM

F.3.2 Setting CDM-IP Modems to Router Mode Operation

Perform the following steps on CDM-IP 1:
Step Instructions

1 From the Main Menu, select Administration [A] submenu.

2 From the Administration menu, select CDM-IP Working Mode [C].
3 Confirm when prompted by typing ‘y’ when the following prompt is displayed:
Changing Modem working mode requires system Reboot.
Do you want to continue(Y/N)[Enter :No]
Select [3] for Router-Point to Point for IP SW version 1.6.x or earlier .
Select [4] Router-Point to Point for IP SW version 1.7.x or later.
4 Allow CDM-IP to reboot.

Both CDM-IP modems are now in Router-Point to Point Mode, which means that the CDM-IP
modems will be on independent IP subnets and will require adding static routes to pass traffic
between them.

F.3.3 Setting IP Address(es)

Step Instructions

1 From the Main Menu select Network Interface Configuration submenu [I].
2 From the Interface Configuration Menu select Ethernet Interface (fei0) submenu [E].
3 Set Ethernet IP Address [I].
CDM-IP 1 to 172.17.10.1
CDM-IP 2 to 172.16.10.1
4 Set Ethernet Subnet MaskSubnet Prefix Length [M] to 24.

F.3.4 Set Route Table entries

First, perform the following steps on CDM-IP 1:

Step Instructions

1 Select Route Table [R] submenu.

2 Enter 1 to configure the first route.
3 Enter a suitable name.
4 Set IP Address to 172.16.10.0
5 Set Number of Subnet Bits to 24.

6 For Interface to which route is destined to <E-Ethernet S-Satellite Enter : S>

select S.

F–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix F MN/CDM570L.IOM

7 CDM-IP 1 Route Table should display the following:

Route Name Dest IP/SNet Bits Next Hop MultiCast
State
Route001..[test 172.16.10.0/24 POINT-TO-POINT N/A
toSat]

Next, perform the following steps on CDM-IP 2:

Step Instructions
8 From Transmitter Configuration Main Menu submenu select Route Table [R]
submenu.

9 Enter 1 to configure the first route.

10 Enter a suitable name

11 Set IP Address to 172.17.10.0

12 Set Number of Subnet Bits to 24

13 For Interface to which route is destined to <E-Ethernet S-Satellite Enter : S>

select S

14 CDM-IP 2 Route Table should display the following:

Route Name Dest IP/SNet Bits Next Hop MultiCast State
Route001..[test 172.17.10.0/24 POINT-TO-POINT N/A
toSat]

At this point the basic configuration is over and you should be able to:
• Ping PC 1 from PC 2 and vice versa
• Ping CDM-IP 2 from PC 1 and vice versa
• Pass any other data between the 2 PCs

15 From PC1:
Ping 172.17.10.1 (CDM-IP 1)
Ping 172.16.10.1 (CDM-IP 2)
Ping 172.16.10.11 (PC 2)
16 From PC2:
Ping 172.16.10.1 (CDM-IP 2)
Ping 172.17.10.1 (CDM-IP 1)
Ping 172.17.10.11 (PC 1)

F–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix F MN/CDM570L.IOM

F.4 Troubleshooting IP Module

The CDM-IP comes with a variety of diagnostic tools to aid in identifying the traffic path going
into and out of the CDM-IP modem. This troubleshooting section shows how to use some of
these tools and also identifies several problem scenarios commonly encountered when first setting
up two CDM-IP modems. If following these troubleshooting steps fails to resolve the problem,
contact a Customer Support representative at:
Comtech EF Data
Attention: Customer Support Department
2114 West 7th Street
Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA
480.333.2200 (Main Comtech EF Data Number)
480.333.2433 (Network Product Customer Support Desk)
480.333.2161 FAX
Or, e-mail can be sent to the Customer Support Department at cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com.

F.4.1 Managed Switch Mode Troubleshooting

Use the following troubleshooting steps if unable to successfully send traffic in Managed Switch
Mode:

Managed Switch Mode Troubleshooting

Scenario Problem Action

1 No Ping response from a) Verify correct IP address/subnet on PC and

the locally connected CDM-IP.
PC to the CDM-IP
Ethernet port. b) Verify Ethernet connection – cables, L2 switch,.
ICMP response is PC, and CDM-IP should have Ethernet activity
‘Request timed out’. LED lit.
Note: A PC must be connected to the CDM-IP
using a hub, switch or a RJ45 crossover cable.
When the CDM-IP Ethernet port senses an
Ethernet connection, the CLI will display:
Ethernet Interface UP
If the connection is broken, the CLI will display:
Ethernet Interface DOWN

F–8
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix F MN/CDM570L.IOM

Scenario Problem Action

2 No Ping response from a) Verify both CDM-IP’s are in Managed Switch

the locally connected PC Mode.
to the remote CDM-IP or
b) Verify IF link between modems for proper settings
remote PC.
and carrier quality (RX signal level, Eb/N0, etc.). It
ICMP response is is possible that there is a spectrum inversion,
‘Request timed out’. particularly if you are using the CDM-IP with RF
converter equipment. If this is the case, the signal
level & Eb/N0 may be OK, but no data will be
received. To correct this, invert the TX and RX
Spectrum on one of the CDM-IPs.
c) Send a constant ping from the PC 1 ‘ping
172.16.10.2 –t’ to PC 2. In the CDM-IP1, go to
Operations and Maintenance/Diagnostics. Enable
‘Dump Packets transmitted to Satellite Interface’.
Verify that the Pings are being transmitted by
observing 1 packet on CLI every second. If not
displayed, re-verify PC 1 and CDM-IP 1 settings.
Disable ‘Dump Packets transmitted to Satellite
Interface’ by entering ‘T’.
d) Continue sending constant ping from the PC 1 to
PC 2. In the CDM-IP 2, go to Operations
Maintenance/Diagnostics. Enable ‘Dump Packets
received from Satellite Interface’. Verify that the
Pings are being received by observing 1 packet
on CLI every second. If not displayed, re-verify
PC 2 and CDM-IP 2 settings. Disable ‘Dump
Packets received from Satellite Interface’ by
entering ‘R’.
Note: All pings transmitted will require a reply to
be transmitted from the target host. Use
the Diagnostics ‘Dump Packets’ tools to
isolate where packets are lost in the
CDM-IP duplex paths. Also, always
disable ‘Dump Packets’ before sending
live traffic.

F–9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix F MN/CDM570L.IOM

F.4.2 Router Mode Troubleshooting

Use the following troubleshooting steps if unable to successfully send traffic in Router Mode.

Router Mode Troubleshooting

Scenario Problem Action

1 No Ping response from a) Verify correct IP address/subnet on PC and

the locally connected PC CDM-IP.
to the CDM-IP Ethernet
b) Verify Ethernet connection – cables, hub, etc.
port.
PC, hub, and CDM-IP should have Ethernet
ICMP response is activity LED lit.
‘Request timed out’.
Note: A PC must be connected to the CDM-IP
using a hub, switch or a RJ45 crossover cable.
When the CDM-IP Ethernet port senses an
Ethernet connection, the CLI will display:
Ethernet Interface UP
If the connection is broken, the CLI will display:
Ethernet Interface DOWN

2 No Ping response from a) Verify both CDM-IP’s are in Router-Point to Point

the locally connected PC Mode.
to the remote CDM-IP or
b) Verify PC’s Gateways are set to local CDM-IP
remote PC.
address.
ICMP response is
c) Verify IF link between modems for proper
‘Request timed out’.
settings and carrier quality (RX signal level,
Eb/N0, etc.). It is possible that there is a spectrum
inversion, particularly if you are using the CDM-
IP with RF converter equipment. If this is the
case, the signal level & Eb/N0 may be OK, but no
data will be received. To correct this, invert the
TX and RX Spectrum on one of the CDM-IPs.

3 No Ping response from a) Verify CDM-IP Route Tables are correct.

PC 1 to PC 2 or vice
versa.
ICMP response is ‘Reply
from 172.XXX.10.1 -
Destination net
unreachable’.

F–10
Appendix G. TYPICAL IP MODULE
OPERATIONAL SETUPS

G.1 Overview
The CDM-570/570L with the optional IP Module has several modes of operation. To assist the user
in determining the best mode of operation for the appropriate network topology and Ethernet traffic
environment, this appendix illustrates typical operational setup examples for the CDM-570/570L
w/IP Module.

G.2 Modem Compatibility

The CDM-570/570L with optional IP Module is compatible with other Comtech EF Data IP
modems (generically referred to through the remainder of this appendix as CDM-IPs), provided
the modems have similar operating modes and IP options.
The following is a list of compatible CDM-IP modems for CDM-570 CDM-IP Firmware Ver.
1.6.X or earlier ONLY:
Comtech EF Data
IP Module Version Additional Notes
IP Modem
Must have Framer II Module (PL/9956-1) and Version
CDM-IP 550 Version 1.3.3 or later
1.3.3 or later to support Data Compression IP option
Must have Framer II Module (PL/9956-1) and Version
CDM-IP 300L Version 1.3.3 or later
1.3.3 or later to support Data Compression IP option
CDD-564/L Version 1.6.X or later No restrictions
CDD-562L Version 1.6.X or later No restrictions

CDM-570/L CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.7.X and later is NOT compatible with CDM-IP
550 or CDM-IP 300 IP Firmware.
IMPORTANT CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.7.X is compatible ONLY with CDM-570/L modems or
CDD-564/562 demodulators that also have Firmware Ver. 1.7.X.

G–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix G MN/CDM570L.IOM

G.3 IP Module Working Modes

Two IP Module Working Modes are available: Managed Switch (formerly easyConnectTM) and
Router Mode. Operation differs based on the current operating firmware version. Examples of
the available working modes are provided later in this section.

G.3.1 Working Modes (CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.6.X and earlier)

Three HDLC Addressing Modes are available:
• Point-to-Point;
• Small Network;
• Large Network.
This section describes the functionality of these separate HDLC Modes in order to optimize
Comtech EF Data IP modems in the network, based upon Network Topology and Ethernet Traffic
requirements.
These modes allow the user to minimize the HDLC overhead transmitted over the satellite based
upon the size of their network:
• In Router/Point-to-Point Mode, no HDLC address is transmitted;
• Router/Small Network Mode transmits 1 byte;
• Router/Large Network Mode transmits 2 bytes as part of HDLC header for each
packet; non-IP traffic is not supported in Router Mode.
The Working Mode and HDLC Address Mode of the Comtech EF Data IP
modems must be identical to pass traffic between modems.
IMPORTANT Changing the Working Mode or HDLC address Mode of the IP modem requires
the IP Module to be rebooted. Before the user can select a different mode, the IP
Module will notify the user that changing the mode will require a reboot.

Working Mode
Network Topology Ethernet Traffic
HDLC Address Mode
Managed Switch Mode Point-to-Point only
IP v4 and/or non-IP
Point-to-Point Both sites on same LAN subnet
Router Mode Point-to-Point only
IP v4 only
Point-to-Point Both sites on different LAN subnet
Point-to-Point or Point-to-Multipoint
Router Mode IP v4 only
(up to 254 sites)
Small Network All sites on different LAN subnet
Point-to-Point or Point-to-Multipoint
Router Mode IP v4 only
(up to 32766 sites)
Large Network All sites on different LAN subnet

G–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix G MN/CDM570L.IOM

Feature Support – The IP Module also has several standard and optional features to further
optimize security, performance and efficiency. The following table defines how these features are
supported in the two working modes:
Feature Managed Switch Mode Router Mode
Point-to-Point, Small Network, Large
HDLC Address Mode Point-to-Point Only
Network (can be Point-to-Multipoint)
10 or 100BaseT 10 or 100 BaseT
10/100 BaseT Operation
Half or Full Duplex Half or Full Duplex
Access Lists None 4 Clients by IP or IP Subnet
Up to 8 Encrypt Decrypt Keys or
1 Encrypt Decrypt All traffic
3xDES Encryption random Traffic encrypted on a per route
encrypted when enabled
basis
Quality of Service Min/Max; Max/Priority; DiffServ Min/Max; Max/Priority; DiffServ
Yes – Layer 2 is always
compression. Applied to all
Header Compression Yes – applied on a per route basis
Layers 3, 4, and 5 traffic when
enabled
Yes - applied to all traffic when
Payload Compression Yes – applied on a per route basis
enabled
Select either all or no All or specific Multicast streams, Uplink
Multicast
Multicast, Uplink or Downlink or Downlink
IGMP No Yes
Remote upgrade by FTP Yes Yes

G–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix G MN/CDM570L.IOM

G.3.2 Working Modes (CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.7.X and later)

The Comtech Streamline Encapsulation method was developed to provide a low overhead method of
transporting any size packetized data. It provides superior performance on small packets and performs
well on large packets, with overhead performance approaching 1%. With respect to HDLC, Comtech
Streamline Encapsulation outperforms the longtime industry standard on all packet sizes.
The incorporation of Comtech Streamline Encapsulation results in the following operational changes
from Firmware Ver. 1.6.X and earlier:
• HDLC addressing modes have been removed;
• HDLC addresses have been removed to reduce overhead and deployment configuration
complexity;
• Rx Header Compression is now automatically determined from the Streamline Encapsulation
information – this removes the need to configure the Rx Header Decompression feature (these
options have been removed)
With Firmware Ver. 1.7.X and later, the Streamline Encapsulation working modes’ operation,
which have been centralized in the single Working Mode configuration parameter, are as
follows:
• Managed Switch – functions a managed switch with support for VLAN as well as
advanced features such as QoS, Header Compression and Payload Compression.
Primarily intended for operation in a point-to-point topology.
• Router-Hub – functions as the Hub side router in a Point-to-Multipoint network. Allows
Sat-to-sat packets to pass. No longer requires per-route HDLC addresses to be
configured.
• Router-Remote – functions as a Remote Router in a Point-to-Multipoint network.
Packets from the WAN are not allowed to be sent to the WAN. No longer requires HDLC
receive addresses to be configured.
• Router-Point to Point – functions a point to point router in point to point configurations.
• Vipersat Router – Hub – Hub router in a Vipersat Network
• Vipersat Router – Hub Expansion – Hub Expansion router in a Vipersat Network.
• Vipersat Router – Remote – Remote router in a Vipersat Network
• Vipersat Router – Remote Expansion – Remote Expansion Router in a Vipersat
Network.
Note: The Vipersat “Unit Role” and “Expansion Role” parameters are not read-only.

G–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix G MN/CDM570L.IOM

G.3.3 Managed Switch Working Mode

Managed Switch Working Mode is the default Working Mode for the IP Module. Managed
Switch only operates in Point-to-Point Mode, meaning that it is communicating with only one
other Comtech EF Data IP modem. This mode allows the modem to be setup with minimal
configuration (no specific routes need to be configured). In this mode, the IP Module is acting as
a “smart wire” over a satellite link between two Comtech EF Data IP modems. This allows the IP
Module to simultaneously forward IP traffic and non-IP traffic, such as IPX.

Figure G-1. Managed Switch Mode Diagram

Managed Switch Working Mode is the default Working Mode for the IP Module. Managed
Switch only operates in Point-to-Point Mode, meaning that it is communicating with only one
other Comtech EF Data IP modem. This mode allows the modem to be setup with minimal
configuration – no specific routes need to be configured.

In this mode, the IP Module is acting as a “smart wire” over a satellite link between two Comtech
EF Data IP modems. This allows the IP Module to simultaneously forward IP traffic and non-IP
traffic, such as IPX.

Figure G-1 shows a 256 kbps Point-to-Point duplex link in Managed Switch Mode. Note that
both sides of the link are on the same IP subnet - 10.10.0.0/16. There are no routes or HDLC
addresses to configure. When the system is powered-up, all packets from each subnet (local and
remote) will be sent over the satellite interface. Each Comtech EF Data IP Modem learns which
devices are attached to their local Ethernet interfaces and will only send packets over the satellite
that are not destined for the locally attached devices.

G–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix G MN/CDM570L.IOM

Managed Switch mode will automatically use Layer 2 Header Compression

(even if Header Compression option has not been purchased). Because of this,
some of the initial traffic sent between two devices will not be received over
IMPORTANT
the satellite until a full Header is transmitted.
For example, the default Header Compression Refresh Rate is 50 packets. If a
ping is sent over the satellite, then it will time out until the full Header packet is
sent.
The Header Compression Refresh Rate on the Administration Menu can be
reduced to minimize the amount of traffic lost when traffic is first sent between
two devices. Once communication between two devices has been established,
both CDM-IP modems will be able to receive all traffic, unless one CDM-IP is
power cycled or reset.

G.3.4 Router Working Mode – Point-to-Point

Figure G-2. Router Mode, Point-to-Point Diagram

Figure G-2 shows a 256 kbps Point-to-Point duplex link in Router Mode. Note that each side of
the link has different IP subnets – 10.10.0.0/16 and 10.20.0.0/16. Each CDM-IP modem has a
static route defined for the distant CDM-IP modem subnet. The Next Hop is automatically
defined as Point-to-Point, and there are no HDLC addresses to configure; all that is required to
send traffic between the PCs on each subnet is to define the local CDM-IP modem as the PC
default gateway. The CDM-IP modems will only pass traffic over the satellite link by the ToSat
routes configured in the Route Table.

G–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix G MN/CDM570L.IOM

G.3.5 Router Working Mode – Point-to-MultiPoint

Figure G-3. Router Mode, Point-to-Multipoint HDLC Diagram

This Router Point-to-Multipoint Mode with HDLC Addressing only applies to

CDM-570’s and CDD-564’s operating with IP SW version 1.6.7 or earlier.
IMPORTANT

Figure G-3 shows a Point-to-MultiPoint Configuration (also referred to as a “STAR Network”).

The Hub CDM-570 IP modem is transmitting a common 2.048 Mbps link to THREE remote
CDM-570 IP modems. All three Remote CDM-570 IP modems are transmitting a 256 kbps link
back to Hub CDD-564 IP Quad Demodulator.
Since this is a Point-to-MultiPoint configuration, HDLC addressing is used so that the traffic not
intended for a particular destination can be filtered. For unicast traffic, it is best to associate a
unique HDLC address for each site in the network. For this case, the Hub Site is HDLC 0x01,
Remote A is HDLC 0x02 Remote B is 0x03, and Remote C is 0x04. Each CDM-IP modem
would select the HDLC address associated with its site as a RX HDLC Address, so the Hub
CDD564 Demodulator 1, 2, and 3 would have 0x01 as the first RX HDLC Address, Remote A

G–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix G MN/CDM570L.IOM

CDM-570 would have 0x02, Remote B CDM-570 would have 0x03 and Remote C CDM-570
would have 0x04.
Hub CDM-IP 1 has static routes defined for each of the remote CDM-570 IP subnets with the
Next Hop HDLC address being the HDLC address associated with the remote site. All 3 remote
CDM-570 IP modems have default routes to the satellite with the next Hop being HDLC 0x01.
The Hub CDD-564 has a default route (ToEth) to Hub CDM-570 IP modem because all outbound
traffic will go through CDM-570 IP modem.
Additional remote sites can be added through a dedicated demodulator at the hub for each remote.

Figure G-4. Router Mode, Point-to-Multipoint Streamline Diagram

This Router Point-to-Multipoint Mode with Streamline Encapsulation only

applies to CDM-570’s and CDD-564’s operating with CDM-IP Firmware Ver. 1.7.X
IMPORTANT or later.

Figure G 4 shows a Router Mode, Point-To-Multipoint network using Streamline encapsulation.

This is functionally identical to the Point-To-Multipoint network using HDLC without having to
configure HDLC addressing on the CDM-570 IP modems.

G–8
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix G MN/CDM570L.IOM

The Working Mode of each modem needs to be set as follows:

• Hub CDM-570 – Router-Hub
• Hub CDD-564 – Router
• Remote CDM-570 – Router-Remote
The Route Table entries are as follows:
• Hub CDM-570 – One Route entry for each IP subnet at each remote site.
• Hub CDD-564 – An Ethernet default route with a Next Hop being the IP of the Hub
CDM-570
• Remote CDM-570 – A Satellite default route

G–9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix G MN/CDM570L.IOM

Notes:

G–10
 Appendix H. IP REDUNDANCY

H.1 Introduction
All CDM-570/570L modems can be configured for 1:1 IP Redundancy as a standard feature when
used with a Comtech EF Data CRS-180 70/140 MHz IF or CRS-170A L-Band 1:1 Redundancy
Switch:

CDM-570 Modem Type CRS Switch Model

CDM-570 (70-140 MHz IF) CRS-180
CDM-570L (L-Band) CRS-170A

This appendix describes CDM-570/570L IP 1:1 Redundancy configuration and operation using
either of these switches.

This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by Electrostatic

Discharge (ESD). Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or
CAUTION inserting Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs).

H.2 CRS-XXX 1:1 Redundancy Switch Functional Description

H.2.1 CRS-180 70/140 MHz 1:1 Redundancy Switch

The CRS-180 770/140 MHz 1:1 Redundancy Switch performs the transmit and receive coaxial
switching required for redundant modem operation. It switches both the Tx and Rx coaxial cables
simultaneously.
The user can select Unit Faults only, Unit Faults or Receive Traffic Faults, Unit Faults or
Transmit Traffic Faults, or all three for the switchover criteria with the two switches on top of
the unit. This selection provides a great deal of flexibility in the operation of the switch. Green
LEDs on the antenna side of the CRS-180 indicate which modem is online.
The control cable from each modem to the CRS-180 also includes +12V power to operate the
CRS-180. Power from both modems is diode OR’ed so that the switch remains active if power is
lost from one of the modems.
The CRS-180 provides IF redundancy. On the Tx side, it switches the Tx IF signal. The Rx IF
signal from the RF equipment is split in a power divider to continuously drive both the online and

H–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix H MN/CDM570L.IOM

offline demodulator. The offline demodulator can then maintain lock so that it is ready to quickly
assume online status for receive traffic when a switchover is required.
Refer to the CRS-180 70/140 MHz 1:1 Redundancy Switch Installation and Operation Manual for
more detailed information on the CRS-180 operation.

H.2.2 CRS-170A L-Band 1:1 Redundancy Switch

The CRS-170A L-Band 1:1 Redundancy Switch performs the transmit and receive coaxial
switching required for redundant modem operation with an outdoor BUC and LNB. It switches
all of the BUC and LNB interface signals that are multiplexed onto the transmit and receive
coaxial cables:
• Tx and Rx L-Band signals
• 10 MHz reference to BUC and LNB
• DC Power to BUC and LNB
• FSK signaling to the BUC
The user can select Unit Faults only, Unit Faults or Receive Traffic Faults, Unit Faults or
Transmit Traffic Faults, or all three for the switchover criteria. This selection provides a great
deal of flexibility in the operation of the switch. Green LEDs on the antenna side of the
CRS-170A indicate which modem is online.
The control cable from each CDM-570L modem to the CRS-170A also includes +12V power to
operate the CRS-170A. Power from both modems is diode OR’d so that the switch remains active
if power is lost from one of the modems.
The CRS-170A provides L-Band redundancy, but when switching occurs, it accommodates more
than just the L-Band signals. On the Tx side, it switches the Tx L-Band signal, the 10 MHz
reference to the BUC, DC power to the BUC, and FSK signaling to the BUC. On the Rx side, it
switches the 10 MHz reference to the LNB, and DC power to the LNB. The Rx L-Band signal
from the LNB is split in a power divider to continuously drive both the online and offline
demodulator. The offline demodulator can then maintain lock so that it is ready to quickly assume
online status for receive traffic when a switchover is required.
Refer to the CRS-170A L-Band 1:1 Redundancy Switch Installation and Operation Manual for
more detailed information on the CRS-170A operation.

H–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix H MN/CDM570L.IOM

H.3 CDM-570/570L 1:1 IP Data Switching Functional Description

When the CDM-570 modem is using a serial data interface (for example, RS.422 or V.35), the
CRS-180 (or CRS-170A) 1:1 Redundancy Switch is used in conjunction with a Comtech 1:1 Data
Switch module. When the CDM-570/570L modem is using the IP Module as the data interface,
there is no need for a 1:1 Data Switch module. As shown in Figure H-1, a standard Ethernet Hub
or Layer 2 Switch can be used (it is recommended to use a Layer 2 Switch).

Figure H-1. CDM-570 1:1 IP Redundancy

For CDM-570/570L IP 1:1 redundancy operation, both CDM-570/570L modems are assigned a
unique M&C IP address on the same subnet (in the diagram above, 172,18.10.21/24 and
172.18.10.22/24). A Traffic IP address on the subnet is also assigned (172.18.10.20/24).
Whichever modem is online, it will also assume the Traffic IP.

H–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix H MN/CDM570L.IOM

When there is a switchover to the backup modem, this modem will now assume the Traffic IP. It
will also broadcast a “gratuitous ARP” which will tell all local devices to now associate a new
MAC address for the Traffic IP 172.18.10.20. Each device will update their ARP tables and
traffic will resume virtually instantaneously.

Figure H-2. CDM-570 1:1 IP Redundancy Switchover

All configuration changes can only be made to the Online CDM-570/570L

and will require the user to do a “Save Parameters to permanent storage”
so that the configuration change is also applied to the Backup
CDM-570/570L.

H–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix H MN/CDM570L.IOM

H.4 CDM-570/570L 1:1 IP Redundancy Configuration

The following steps are required for setting up a CDM-570 IP 1:1 redundant system using either
a CRS-170A (for the CDM-570L) or a CRS-180 (for the CDM-570) 1:1 Redundancy Switch:
1. First, the two CDM-570/570Ls will need an Ethernet connection to each other through a
Layer 2 switch or hub (preferably an L2 switch).
2. Before connecting the CDM-570/570Ls to the 1:1 switch, you will first need to configure
the following on the CDM-570/570L IP Module settings:
• Administration Æ Redundancy Configuration Æ 1:1 Redundancy set
to DISABLED;
• Administration Æ Working Mode: Both modems need to be set to the same
Working Mode;
• Administration Æ Features: Both modems need to have the same IP Option
Feature set.
3. On both modems, enter a unique IP Address that is on the same subnet (Interface Æ
Ethernet Interface Æ IP Address). Verify that you can ping from one CDM-570/570L
to the other (Ops and Maintenance Æ Diagnostics Æ Ping).
4. On both modems, set Administration Æ Redundancy Configuration Æ 1:1
Redundancy set to ENABLED. Save Parameters to Permanent Storage and power down
both modems.
5. Connect the CDM-570/570Ls to the1:1 switch:
• Refer to Sect. H.4 for cabling with the CDM-570 IF Æ CRS-180;
• Refer to Sect. H.5 for cabling with the CDM-570L Æ CRS-170A.
6. While monitoring the Serial console CLI on both modems, observe the following after
powering on both modems at the same time (also observe the switch Online LEDs to see
which modem is the Online modem).

• Online modem CLI will display:

1:1 Redundancy (Auto Detected)

Redundancy: PARAM File Connection Established.

Redundancy: Sending PARAM File...

• Offline modem will display:

1:1 Redundancy (Auto Detected)

Redundancy: Received PARAM File...

Writing 5447 bytes to PARAM file on Flash

H–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix H MN/CDM570L.IOM

7. On the Online modem, select the Redundancy Configuration menu. Observe that the
correct IP Address/Mask is displayed for the Local and Redundant Unit. Then you will
need to set the Traffic IP Address/Mask (this also needs to be in the same subnet as the
Management IP addresses):

All configuration changes can only be made to the Online CDM-

570/570L and will require the user to do a “Save Parameters to
permanent storage” so that the configuration change is also applied to
the Backup CDM-570/570L.

H–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix H MN/CDM570L.IOM

H.5 Cabling With CDM-570 IF

Figure H-3 shows how to connect a pair of CDM-570 modems together with the CRS-180 70/140
MHz 1:1 Redundancy Switch. The table that is included here lists cable assemblies that may be
supplied with the CRS-180.

Quantity Part # Description

2 CA/WR9378-4 Control Cable, Universal, DB9 Male to Male, 4’
4 PL/0946-1 IF (Tx/Rx) Coax Cable, 50Ω Type ‘BNC’, 4’

Figure H-3. CDM-570 and CRS-180 Interconnect

It is essential to ensure that the control and IF connections, both Rx and Tx, are made correctly.
For example, the Tx IF from Unit ‘A’ connects to the Tx IF port ‘A’ on the CRS-180, and Unit
‘B’ connects to the Tx IF Port ‘B’, and the same for the Rx IF connections. Failure to observe this
requirement will result in system malfunction.

When connecting the Control cable between the CRS-180 and the modems,
ensure that screw locks on the ‘D’ type connectors are securely fastened. This
will prevent the accidental un-mating of the cable, particularly when a standby
IMPORTANT
unit is being removed or replaced.

H–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix H MN/CDM570L.IOM

H.6 Cabling With CDM-570L

Figure H-4 shows how to connect a pair of CDM-570L modems together with the CRS-170A
L-Band 1:1 Redundancy Switch. The table that is included here lists cable assemblies that may be
supplied with the CRS-170A.

Quantity Part # Description

2 CA/WR9378-4 Control Cable, Universal, DB9 Male to Male, 4’
4 CA/RF10453-4 RoHS-Compliant Cable – IF (Tx/Rx), 50Ω Type ‘N’, 4’

Figure H-4. CDM-570L and CRS-170A Interconnect

When connecting the Control cable between the CRS-170A and the modems,
ensure that screw locks on the ‘D’ type connectors are securely fastened. This
will prevent the accidental unmating of the cable, particularly when a standby
IMPORTANT
unit is being removed or replaced.

H–8
 Appendix J. GPS MODE

J.1 Overview
This appendix summarizes the CDM-570/570L software feature that permits a Furuno GP-320B
GPS receiver to be connected to a distant-end modem, and for the local end to query – via the
EDMAC channel – the output from the GPS receiver.
In order to do this, the local modem is set as MASTER, and the distant-end is set as SLAVE. The
Furuno GP-320B GPS receiver is then connected to the remote control serial port of the distant end
modem.
NOTE: If ‘standard’ EDMAC framing is used, the MASTER can be a CDM-550,
CDM-600/600L, or CDM-570/570L. However, if EDMAC-2 framing is used, both ends of the
link need to be CDM-570/570L.
Remote commands sent to the SLAVE modem are used to retrieve GPS data sentences. The
modem has a circular buffer to contain the most recent 1000 characters received from the GPS
receiver – about 2 to 3 seconds of data. The method of searching for the correct sentence is to
simply look for the first match in the buffer. This gives about two seconds’ delay time in the
worst case at the SLAVE end, plus any delay added by the EDMAC channel. When a query is
actively taking place, placing of new GPS data into the buffer is temporarily suspended.

J.2 Hardware Setup

Step Instructions

1 Ensure that the serial remote control type of the SLAVE modem is set to RS232.

Follow the Setup sequence of EDMAC described in Chapter 11. EDMAC CHANNEL. The
2 SLAVE Modem must be a CDM-570 or CDM-570L, and the MASTER modem can be any
modem compatible with the SLAVE modem.

Connect the GP-320B GPS receiver to the SLAVE modem’s serial port. The YELLOW wire in
the Furuno GPS cable (RDA) should be connected to pin 3 of the CDM-570L serial remote
3
control port (9-pin Type ‘D’ male – see Chapter 3. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS). Connect
the ground wire from the GPS to Pin 1.

Establish an RF link between the SLAVE and MASTER modems, and once satisfied that both
4 demods are locked, set up a serial communications session via the serial port of the MASTER
modem, and begin sending EDMAC messages to the distant-end SLAVE.

J–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix J MN/CDM570L.IOM

J.3 Remote Commands

Several remote commands are available to enable the GPS Mode and retrieve GPS information.
These commands are for the SLAVE modem ONLY, which means the address field must be the
address of the Slave unit (e.g., 0021).

• GPS – GPS Mode, Query and Command

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

Note: When the GPS mode is enabled, the slave modem’s serial’s Baud Rate is changed to 4800 to
receive data from GP-320B. To go back to normal serial operation mode, disable the GPS Mode.

• DTM? – Retrieve GPDTM data sentence

• GGA? – Retrieve GPGGA data sentence
• ZDA? – Retrieve GPZDA data sentence
• GLL? – Retrieve GPGLL data sentence
• VTG? – Retrieve GPVTG data sentence
• RMC? – Retrieve GPRMC data sentence

Example capture of the remote commands:

<0021/GPS? queries current GPS status

>0021/GPS=0[cr][lf] slave responds that GPS is disabled
<0021/GPS=1 slave is commanded to enable GPS
>0021/GPS=[cr][lf] slave confirms that GPS is enabled

<0021/DTM? slave is commanded to return GPDTM data sentence

>0021/DTM=$GPDTM,W84,,00.0000,N,00.0000,W,,W84*53[cr][lf]
<0021/GGA?
>0021/GGA=$GPGGA,222830,3325.4268,N,11158.2640,W,0,01,00.00,000293.6,M,-
026.2,M,,*7F[cr][lf]
<0021/ZDA?
>0021/ZDA=$GPZDA,223145,14,10,2005,+00,00*63[cr][lf]
<0021/GLL?
>0021/GLL=$GPGLL,3325.4268,N,11158.2640,W,222830,V,N*47[cr][lf]
<0021/VTG?
>0021/VTG=$GPVTG,,T,,M,,N,,K,N*2C[cr][lf]
<0021/RMC?
>0021/RMC=$GPRMC,222830,V,3325.4268,N,11158.2640,W,,,141005,011.8,E,N*12[cr][lf]
<0021/GPS=0 slave is commanded to disable GPS
>0021/GPS=[cr][lf] slave confirms that GPS is disabled
<0021/RMC? slave is commanded to return GPRMC data sentence
>0021/RMC*[cr][lf] slave responds that data is not available

For more information about using remote commands and queries, see Appendix D. REMOTE
CONTROL).

J–2
 Appendix K. CDM-570 ODU
(CSAT-5060, KST-2000A/B)
OPERATION

K.1 Introduction
The CDM-570 permits the user to configure, monitor, and control a Comtech EF Data RF
Transceiver (referred to throughout this appendix as an ODU – Outdoor Unit). The following
ODUs are compatible for operation with the CDM-570 Modem:
• CSAT-5060 series (5 to 25, 50 & 100 Watts) C-Band Transceivers;
• KST-2000A (LNA) Ku-Band Satellite Transceiver;
• KST-2000B (LNB) Ku-Band Satellite Transceiver.
The user can fully control and monitor the operation of an ODU in the following ways:
• By using ODU remote commands through Serial Remote or Telnet;
• By using the keypad and display via the front panel of a CDM-570 Modem;
• By using the CDM-570 Base Modem Web Server Interface;
• By using the SNMP Interface with CSAT-5060 or KST-2000A/B Transceiver MIB.

K.2 ODU Remote Control Address Setup

The Outdoor Unit (ODU) connected to a CDM-570 Modem through FSK can be remotely
monitored and controlled by using ODU remote commands through Serial Remote or Telnet. The
address of the ODU is set up as follows:
• For local-end ODUs:
o Use Modem’s RC address + 1 for Standalone unit or Online unit in a 1:1 Redundancy
System;
o Use Modem’s RC address + 2 for Offline unit in a 1:1 Redundancy System.

K–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

• For distant-end ODUs in an EDMAC setup:

o Use EDMAC Slave Address (ESA) Range +4 for Standalone unit or Online unit in a
1:1 Redundancy System;
o Use EDMAC Slave Address (ESA) Range +5 for Offline unit in a 1:1 Redundancy
System.

K.3 ODU Operations via the CDM-570 Front Panel

The user can configure, monitor, and control ODU operation via the CDM-570 front panel, using
the keypad and display. Nested menus are used, which display all available options, and prompt
the user to carry out a required action.

LED Vacuum Fluorescent

Indicators Keypad Display (VFD)

Figure K-1. CDM-570 Front Panel View

Figure K-1 identifies the key features of the CDM-570 front panel; their purpose is summarized
0

as follows:

Feature Description

LED Used to indicate the operational status of the

Indicators CDM-570 Modem.

Used to select and navigate the available

Keypad CDM-570 menu functions as displayed on the
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD).

Used to fully control and monitor operation of

the CDM-570 Modem. Consisting of two lines
Vacuum
with a width of 24 characters each, nested
Fluorescent
menus displayed on the VFD provide all
Display (VFD)
available options and prompt the user to carry
out out a required action via the keypad.

For in-depth explanations of the function and operation of these features, refer to Chapter 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION.

K–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure K-2 identifies the basic CDM-570 front panel menu hierarchy that pertains specifically to
the operation of a CSAT-5060, KST-2000A or KST-2000B ODU. In this particular figure, the
menu branch dedicated to ODU operations is shown in bold.

Figure K-2. CDM-570 ODU Operation Principal Menu Tree

Note: The ODU menu branch is accessible from the CDM-570 front panel menu only when the
presence of an ODU is detected. Also note that, as this appendix deals with strictly with ODU
operations, Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION provides a complete overview for any
CDM-570 menu operations or selections not defined in this appendix.

Where menu operations differ based on the ODU product recognized by the CDM-570 (i.e., menu
function tailored to the CSAT-5060 or KST-2000A/B ODUs), refer to the appropriate appendix
subsection specified in this figure for the remainder of the complete principal menu tree.

K–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.3.1 SELECT: (Main) Menu

SELECT: Config Test Info
Monitor Save/Ld Util ODU
The following table identifies the commands comprising the CDM-570 main menu, and the
content section in this manual where explicit information may be referenced, either in this
appendix or in Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION:

Menu Branch
Description
(For more info, see...)
Config
Permits the user to fully configure the modem.
(Chapter Sect. 5.3.1)
Permits the user to monitor the alarm status of the unit, to view
Monitor
the log of stored events, and to display the Receive Parameters
(Chapter Sect. 5.3.2)
screen.
Test Permits the user to invoke one of several test modes (loopbacks,
(Chapter Sect. 5.3.3) for example).
Info (Information) Permits the user to view information on the unit,
(Chapter Sect. 5.3.4) without having to go into configuration screens.
Save/Load Permits the user to save and to retrieve up to 10 different modem
(Chapter Sect. 5.3.5) configurations.
(Utility) Permits the user to perform miscellaneous functions,
Util
such as setting the Real-time clock, adjusting the display
(Chapter Sect. 5.3.6)
brightness, etc.
ODU
(Outdoor Unit) Permits the user to monitor and control a
(Appendix K.3.2:
Comtech EF Data RF Transceiver (CSAT-5060 or
K.3.2.1 for CSAT-5060
KST-2000A/B), if connected.
K.3.2.2 for KST-2000A/B)

K.3.2 (SELECT:) ODU

Transceiver Control:
Disable Enable (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Disable or Enable using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

Disable This menu item turns OFF the FSK link to the ODU

Enable This menu item turns ON the FSK link to the ODU

Once the FSK link to the ODU is enabled, the CDM-570 senses the active ODU model and
automatically adjusts the front panel menu displays specific for that product. Sections K.3.2.1
and K.3.2.2 address front panel operation functionality as it is appears in the presence of
CSAT-5060 or KST2000A/B Transceivers; Figure K-3 and Figure K-4 depict the model-
specific menu trees.

K–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.3.2.1 (SELECT:) ODU Æ CSAT-5060 Transceiver Menu Tree

Figure K-3. (SELECT:) ODU Æ CSAT-5060 Transceiver Menu Tree

K–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.3.2.1.1 (SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable

Select ODU System Type:
Standalone 1:1 (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Standalone or 1:1 using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
Standalone should be selected when the Modem is linked via the Rx IF cable to a single
Comtech EF Data CSAT-5060 ODU.
1:1 should be selected when the Modem is linked to a redundant CSAT-5060 system via
connection between the Rx IF and the ODU Redundancy Controller Box.

When the following menu selections are made:

ODU Æ Enable Æ Standalone
IMPORTANT ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1 Æ CSAT#1
ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1 Æ CSAT#2
The user is directed to a common ODU SELECT submenu branch:
ODU SELECT: Config Info
Monitor Alarms (◄ ►,ENT)
For clarity, this common submenu branch is defined in detail in Section 3.2.1.1.1.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Standalone

ODU SELECT: Config Info
Monitor Alarms (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Config, Info, Monitor, or Alarms using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. The
selections for this common submenu branch are defined in detail in Section 3.2.1.1.1.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1

Monitor/Control: CSAT#1
CSAT#2 Red-Box (◄ ►,ENT)
For Monitor/Control of a redundant CSAT-5060 system, select CSAT#1, CSAT#2, or Red-Box
using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1 Æ CSAT#1 or CSAT#2

ODU SELECT: Config Info
Monitor Alarms (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Config, Info, Monitor, or Alarms using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. The
selections for this common submenu branch are defined in detail in Section 3.2.1.1.1.

K–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1 Æ Red-Box

Redundancy Box: Online
Mode Switches Voltages
Select Online, Mode, Switches, or Voltages using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1 Æ Red-Box Æ Online

Online Unit:
CSAT#1 CSAT#2 (◄ ►,ENT)
This display indicates the ODU currently online. The cursor will be flashing under
CSAT#1 or CSAT#2. If the user desires to change the Online unit, use the ◄ ►
arrow keys to move the cursor position to the desired unit, then press ENTER.
NOTE: If the ODU Redundancy system is in AUTO mode, a ‘forced switch-over’
can only occurs if the currently Offline unit is fault-free.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1 Æ Red-Box Æ Mode

Operating Mode:
Manual Auto (◄ ►,ENT)
This display indicates the current operating mode of the 1:1 ODU system. The
cursor will be flashing under Manual or Auto. If the user desires to change the
operating mode of the 1:1 system, use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor
position to the desired operating mode, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1 Æ Red-Box Æ Switches

Waveguide Switch Status:
Tx=OK Rx=OK (ENT or CLR)
This read-only display provides status for both the Tx and Rx Waveguide Transfer
Switches. If either Switch is reporting an ambiguity from the commanded position,
“OK” will change to “FT” to indicate a switch fault.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1 Æ Red-Box Æ Voltages

Redundancy Box Voltages:
5V= 5.0 12V=12.0 (ENT)
Provided to assist in trouble-shooting system problems, this read-only display
monitors the voltages inside the Redundancy Controller Box.

K–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.3.2.1.1.1 COMMON ‘ODU SELECT’ SUBMENU

ODU Æ Enable Æ Standalone Æ
ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1 Æ CSAT#1 Æ
ODU Æ Enable Æ 1:1 Æ CSAT#2 Æ
ODU SELECT: Config Info
Monitor Alarms (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Config, Info, Monitor, or Alarms using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

K.3.2.1.1.1.1 ODU SELECT: Config

ODU CONFIG: Transmitter
Receiver Misc (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Transmitter (Transmitter configuration submenu), Receiver (Receiver configuration
submenu), or Misc (Miscellaneous configuration submenu) using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Transmitter

ODU TX: Frequency Atten
Amplifier Mute Slope ◄ ►
Select which ODU Transmitter parameter is to be modified – Frequency, Atten, Amplifier,
Mute, or Slope – using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Transmitter Æ Frequency

ODU Tx Frequency:
5912.5 MHz (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the transmit frequency by first selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when
done.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Transmitter Æ Atten (Attenuation)

ODU Tx Attenuation:
15.00 dB (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the transmit attenuation by first selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when
done.

K–8
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Transmitter Æ Amplifier

ODU Tx Amp State:
On Off (◄ ►,ENT)
Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Transmitter ÆMute

ODU Tx Mute State:
Muted Unmuted (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Muted or Unmuted using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Transmitter ÆSlope

ODU Tx Slope Mode:
Manual Calibrated (◄ ►)
Select Manual or Calibrated using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If Manual mode is selected:
ODU Tx Slope:
0.0 (▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the transmit slope setting using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press
ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Receiver

ODU RX: Frequency Atten
Mute Slope (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Frequency, Atten, Mute, or Slope using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Receiver Æ Frequency

ODU Rx Frequency:
5912.5 MHz (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the receiver frequency by first selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER
when done.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Receiver Æ Atten (Attenuation)

ODU Rx Attenuation:
15.00 dB (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the receiver attenuation by first selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when
done.

K–9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Receiver Æ Mute

ODU Rx Mute State:
Muted Unmuted (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Muted or Unmuted using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Receiver Æ Slope

ODU Rx Slope Mode:
Manual Calibrated (◄ ►)
Select Manual or Calibrated using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If Manual mode is selected:
ODU Rx Slope:
0.0 (▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the receive slope setting using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when done.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc

MISC: Cold-Start AFR LNA
XRef Ref-Adjust RTC (◄ ►)
Select Cold-Start, AFR, LNA, XRef, Ref-Adjust, or RTC using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then
press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc Æ Cold-Start

Cold-Start State:
Enabled Disabled (◄ ►)
Select Enabled or Disabled using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc Æ AFR (Auto Fault Recovery)

Auto Fault Recovery:
Enabled Disabled (◄ ►)
Select Enabled or Disabled using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc Æ LNA

LNA: State Curr-Window
Cal Fault-Logic (◄ ►,ENT)
Select State, Curr-Window, Cal, or Fault-Logic using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER.

K–10
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc Æ LNA Æ State

ODU LNA State:
On Off (◄ ►,ENT)
Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. This controls
whether or not the CSAT will provide LNA POWER via the Receive RF Cable.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc Æ LNA Æ Curr-Window

LNA Current Window:
99 % (▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the Current Window setting using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER. The
value will scroll between 20% and 50% to define the allowable LNA current change
before declaring a fault. Selecting 99% disables the LNA Current Window function.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc Æ LNA Æ Cal (Calibrate)

Calibrate LNA Current?
Cal Exit (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Cal or Exit using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. This provides a
means to calibrate the LNA current for use with the Current-Window function
described previously.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc Æ LNA Æ Fault-Logic

LNA: State Curr-Window
Cal Fault-Logic (◄ ►,ENT)
Select State, Curr-Window, Cal, or Fault-Logic using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then
press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc Æ XRef (External Reference)

ExternalRef Fault Logic:
Summary No-Summary (◄ ►)
Select Summary or No-Summary using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
NOTE: The CSAT will automatically lock to an external 5 or 10 MHz reference
independent of the state of this selection. This selection determines whether or not the
Summary Fault Relay is activated if the CSAT loses lock with the external reference.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc Æ Ref-Adjust

Internal Ref Adjustment:
087 (▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the Internal 10MHz Reference setting using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press
ENTER. The value will scroll between 000 and 255.

K–11
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

NOTE: The Internal Reference is adjusted in the factory to be very accurate with the
default setting of 087. This parameter is made available to compensate for the long-
term frequency drift of the oscillator.

ODU SELECT: Config Æ Misc Æ RTC (Real-Time Clock)

Sync ODU RTC to Lcl RTC:
Yes No (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Yes or No using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. Selecting Yes will
cause the CSAT RTC (Real Time Clock) to synchronize with the Modem RTC.

K.3.2.1.1.1.2 ODU SELECT: Info

INFO: Model Transmitter
Receiver LNA Misc (◄ ►)
This menu provides the user with access to read-only information displays on the ODU as
configured for operation. Select Model, Transmitter, Receiver, LNA, or Misc using the ◄ ►
arrow keys, then press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Info Æ Model

CSAT-5060/010 V2.09
SERIAL # 00225 (ENT)
Per the example shown, this read-only display provides the model and serial number for the
ODU in use. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

ODU SELECT: Info Æ Transmitter

Tx: ON 5845.0MHz 10.00dB
AMP:ON Unmuted Sl:0.0
Per the example shown, this read-only display provides information on the CSAT transmitter
status: Tx operating state (ON or OFF), Tx Frequency, Tx Attenuation, Amplifier state (ON or
OFF), Tx Mute state (Muted or Unmuted), and Tx Slope adjustment. Press ENTER or CLEAR
to return to the previous menu.

ODU SELECT: Info Æ Receiver

Rx: ON 3570.0MHz 10.00dB
Unmuted Sl:0.0
Per the example shown, this read-only display provides information on the CSAT receiver status:
Rx operating state (ON or OFF), Rx Frequency, Rx Attenuation, Rx Mute state (Muted or
Unmuted), and Rx Slope adjustment. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

K–12
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

ODU SELECT: Info Æ LNA

LNA: On Window: 99%
Fault Logic: No-Summary
Per the example shown, this read-only display provides the current state of the LNA functions:
the LNA operating status (ON or OFF), the Current Window, and Fault-Logic settings.
(Summary or No-Summary). Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

ODU SELECT: Info Æ Misc

Cold Start: Off
Auto Fault Recovery: On
Per the example shown, this read-only display provides the current state of the Cold Start and
Auto Fault Recovery functions – ON or OFF. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the
previous menu.

K.3.2.1.1.1.3 ODU SELECT: Monitor

ODU MONITOR: Tx Rx Misc
Pwr-Supp1 Pwr-Supp2 (◄ ►)
This menu provides the user with access to real-time, read-only information displays on the ODU
currently in operation. Select Tx, Rx, Misc, Pwr-Supp1, or Pwr-Supp2 using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Monitor Æ Tx

TX: SynTune=04.8 Pwr=040
IFLO = 10.7 Temp = 27 oC
Per the example shown, this read-only display provides the Tx Synthesizer and IFLO tuning
voltages, the RF Output Power in dBm and the Transmitter temperature. Press ENTER or
CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

ODU SELECT: Monitor Æ Rx

RX: Synth Tune = 03.1
IFLO = 10.9 Temp = 28 oC
Per the example shown, this read-only display provides the Rx Synthesizer and IFLO tuning
voltages and the Receiver temperature. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous
menu.

ODU SELECT: Monitor Æ Misc

MISC: Ref Tune = 03.0
LNA=000.0mA FAN=568.0mA
Per the example shown, this read-only display provides the Internal Reference Oscillator
tuning voltages, the LNA Current in milliamps and the Fan Current in milliamps. Press
ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

K–13
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

ODU SELECT: Monitor Æ Pwr-Supp1

PS: 24V=23.8 20V=22.6
12V=13.0 10V=10.1
Per the example shown, this read-only display provides a monitor for four of the six internal
power supplies. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

ODU SELECT: Monitor Æ Pwr-Supp2

PS: +5V=5.5 -5V=-4.9

Per the example shown, this read-only display provides a monitor for the remaining two
internal power supplies. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

K.3.2.1.1.1.4 ODU SELECT: Alarms

ALARMS: Current Stored
(◄ ►,ENT)
Select Current or Stored using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

ODU SELECT: Alarms Æ Current

TX = OK RX = OK
PWR SUP = OK MISC = OK
Selecting Current provides a read-only summary of the current CSAT status. If any of the
items display “FT,” then that feature is faulted, and the user should view the Stored Events
Log for details.

ODU SELECT: Alarms Æ Stored

Stored Events: View
Clear All (◄ ►,ENT)
Select View or Clear All using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If View is selected:
LOG 02:11/13/99 10:42:47
OK- REF LOCK (▲ ▼)
Per the example shown, use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to sequentially view the individual
entries in the Stored Events Log, then press CLEAR to return to the previous menu.
If Clear All is selected:
PRESS ENT TO
CLEAR THE EVENTS LOG
Press ENTER to clear the Stored Events Log; otherwise, press CLEAR to exit and
return to the previous menu.

K–14
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.3.2.2 (SELECT:) ODU ÆKST-2000A/B Transceiver Menu Tree

Figure K-4. (SELECT:) ODU Æ KST-2000A/B Transceiver Menu Tree

K–15
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.3.2.2.1 (SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable

KST SELECT: Config Info
Status (◄ ►,ENT)

Select Config, Info, or Status using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

K.3.2.2.1.1 (SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config (Configuration)

KST CONFIG: Transmitter
Receiver Misc (◄ ►,ENT)

Select Transmitter (Transmitter configuration submenu), Receiver (Receiver configuration

submenu), or Misc (Miscellaneous configuration submenu) using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then
press ENTER.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config ÆTransmitter

KST TX: Frequency Atten
Output HPA (◄ ►,ENT)
This menu item is used to select which ODU Transmitter parameter is to be modified. Select
Frequency, Atten, Output, or HPA using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config ÆTransmitter Æ Frequency

ODU Tx Frequency:
14500.0 MHz (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the transmit frequency by first selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then change the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when
done.
The frequency limits of the KST-2000A are known and the frequency values are
constrained accordingly.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config ÆTransmitter Æ Atten

(Attenuation)
ODU Tx Attenuation:
15 dB (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the transmit attenuation by first selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then change the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when
done.

K–16
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config ÆTransmitter Æ Output

KST Tx Output:
Off On Warm (◄ ►,ENT)
Select OFF, ON, or WARM using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
• WARM is OFF, if COLD.
• WARM is ON, if warm and NO FAULTS.
• If FAULTS are present, stays WARM and OFF indefinitely.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config ÆTransmitter Æ HPA

HPA: State Fault-Logic
(◄ ►,ENT)

Select State or Fault-Logic using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If State is selected:
KST HPA State:
On Off (◄ ►,ENT)

Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

Note: If the HPA power is Off it cannot report errors, answer messages, provide
serial numbers, etc.
If Fault-Logic is selected:
HPA Fault Logic: Summary
No-Summary (◄ ►,ENT)
This controls whether or not HPA fault will activate the SUMMARY FAULT
RELAY. Select Summary or No-Summary using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config Æ Receiver

KST RX: Frequency Atten
LNA (◄ ►,ENT) (Displayed when the ODU is a KST-2000A unit)

KST RX: Frequency Atten

(Displayed when the ODU is a KST-2000B unit)
LNB (◄ ►,ENT)
This menu item is used to select which ODU Receiver parameter is to be modified. Select
Frequency, Atten, or LNA/LNB using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

K–17
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config Æ Receiver Æ Frequency

ODU Rx Frequency:
10950.0 MHz (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the receive frequency by first selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then change the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when
done.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config ÆReceiver Æ Atten (Attenuation)

ODU Rx Attenuation:
15 dB (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the receive attenuation by first selecting the digit to be edited using the ◄ ► arrow
keys, then change the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press ENTER when
done.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config Æ Receiver Æ LNA

LNA: State Fault-Logic
Calibrate (◄ ►,ENT)
Displayed when the ODU is a KST-2000A unit. Select State, Fault-Logic, or Calibrate
using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If State is selected:
ODU LNA State:
On Off (◄ ►,ENT)
Select ON or OFF using the ◄ ► keys, then press ENTER. This controls
whether or not the ODU will provide LNA POWER via the Receive RF Cable.
If Fault-Logic is selected:
LNA Fault Logic: Summary
No-Summary (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Summary or No-Summary using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER. This controls whether or not LNA fault will activate the SUMMARY
FAULT RELAY.
If Calibrate is selected:
Calibrate LNA Current?
Cal Exit (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Cal or Exit using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. Calibration
allows the system to determine nominal LNA power consumption. This need
only be performed at initial installation.

K–18
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config Æ Receiver Æ LNB

LNB: State Fault-Logic
Calibrate Band (◄ ►,ENT)
Displayed when the ODU is a KST-2000B unit. Select State, Fault-Logic, Calibrate, or
Band using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
The State, Fault-Logic, and Calibrate commands operate identically to those
used for the LNA (KST-2000A) unit. Additionally, when Band is selected:
LNB Rx Band:
A B C (◄ ►,ENT)
Select A, B, or C, using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. This menu is
to set LNB Receive Frequency Band, and it is availability ONLY for use with the
KST-2000B unit.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ Enable Æ Config ÆMisc (Miscellaneous)

KST MISC: AGC Ref-Adjust
(◄ ►,ENT)
Select AGC or Ref-Adjust using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If AGC is selected:
AGC MODE:
Off On Burst (◄ ►,ENT)
Select OFF, ON or BURST, using the ◄ ► keys, then press ENTER.
Internal Ref Adjustment:
087 (▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the INT 10MHz REF setting using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys – the value will
scroll between 000 and 255 – then press ENTER.
Note: The INT REF is adjusted in the factory to be very accurate with the default
setting of 028. This parameter is made available to compensate for the long-term
frequency drift of the oscillator.

K–19
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.3.2.2.1.2 (SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE Æ INFO (Information)

INFO:TX RX HPA LNA Equip
Assembly+SN FW (◄ ►,ENT)
This menu provides the user with access to read-only information displays on the ODU as
configured for operation. Select TX, RX, HPA, LNA, Equip, Assembly+SN, or FW using the
◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE Æ INFO Æ TX (TRANSMITTER)

TX: ON 14500.0MHz 19dB
AGC: OFF
Per the example shown, read-only information on the KST-2000A transmitter status is displayed:
Tx operating state (ON or OFF), Tx Frequency, Tx Attenuation, and AGC state (ON or OFF).
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE Æ INFO Æ RX (RECEIVER)

RX: ON 10950.0MHz 15dB
Ref-Adjust: 228
Per the example shown, read-only information on the KST-2000A receiver status is displayed:
Rx operating state (ON or OFF), Rx Frequency, Rx Attenuation, and Internal Reference
adjustment. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE Æ INFO Æ HPA

HPA: On
Fault Logic: No Summary
Per the example shown, read-only information on the current configuration of the HPA
functions is displayed: HPA (ON or OFF) and Fault Logic (Summary or No Summary).
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE Æ INFO Æ LNA

LNA: On
Fault Logic: No Summary
Per the example shown, read-only information on the current configuration of the LNA
functions is displayed: LNA (ON or OFF) and Fault Logic (Summary or No Summary).
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE Æ INFO Æ Equip (Equipment)

EQUIP-TYPE: KST-2000A
HPA-TYPE: CEFD-SSPA
Per the example shown, read-only information on the currently installed ODU is displayed.
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

K–20
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

(SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE Æ INFO Æ Assembly+SN

ASSEMBLY INFO: M&C
AS:11565-4 SN:001370891
Note: The blinking cursor is on the M&C. Use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to view additional
assembly and S/N information for the Up Converter, Down Converter, and HPA. Press
ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

(SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE Æ INFO Æ FW (Firmware)

FIRMWARE INFO: M&C
FW:10303-1D VER:01.01.05
Note: The blinking cursor is on the M&C. Use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to view additional
firmware information for the Up Converter, Down Converter, and HPA. Press ENTER or
CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

K–21
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.3.2.2.1.3 (SELECT:) ODU Æ ENABLE ÆSTATUS

STATUS:PS:OK RF:OK UC:OK
LNA:OK AG:OK HP:OK DC:OK
This menu provides the user with access to continually-updated, read-only operational summary
information, as per the following tables:
Detailed Status Display
Feature Abbreviation Designates
Available? (Y/N)
PS Power Supplies Y
RF Reference Y
UC Up Converter Y
LNA Low Noise Amplifier N
AG AGC Status Y
HP HPA Status Y
DC Down Converter Y

Summary Status
Designates
Abbreviation
OK OK – No Fault
FT Fault
NA Not Applicable

By using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then pressing ENTER, the user may view more detailed status
information, as shown per the following examples:

P/Supplies: 7V:OK 17V:OK

-7V:OK 12V:OK

REF:WARM 72M:OK RANGE:NA

SRC:INT XLK:NA PHASE:NA

UPCONV STATUS: OVRTMP:OK

SSYN:OK KSYN:OK PRG:OK

AGC STATUS: EIP:OK

LOOP:OK IIP:OK

HPA: OVERTMP:OK 9.75V:OK

-5V:OK BIAS:OK PRG:OK

DNCONV STATUS: OVRTMP:OK

LSYN:OK KSYN:OK PRG:OK

Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

K–22
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.4 ODU Operations via the CDM-570 Base Modem Web Server Interface
K.4.1 Web Server Interface Overview
The CDM-570 Satellite Modem’s embedded Web Server application provides the user with an
easy to use interface to configure and monitor all aspects of the CSAT-5060 or KST12000A/B
Transceivers (ODUs). For a complete overview of the features for this interface, refer to Chapter
7. BASE MODEM WEB SERVER INTERFACE.

K.4.1.1 ODU-Accessible Web Server Home Page

Once a Web browser is opened and a valid IP address has been entered, the CDM-570 Satellite
Modem Web Server Interface “splash” page is displayed:

The options available through the CDM-570 Base Modem Web Server Interface are illustrated via
the following menu tree – operations not specific to ODU operations appear dimmed and are
explicitly defined in Chapter 7. BASE MODEM WEB SERVER INTERFACE:

Home Admin Config Mdm Stats ODU Maint

Unit
Home Access Modem Modem Status Config
Info

Contact Remote Modem Utilities Modem Logs Status

Support AUPC Utilities

K–23
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.4.1.2 ODU (Outdoor Unit) pages

The hyperlinks available under the ‘ODU (Outdoor Unit)’ tab provide the user with the means to
control and monitor the CSAT-5060 or KST-2000A/B Outdoor Unit that is connected via FSK to the
CDM-570. These pages are accessible only when an ODU is configured for operation with the
CDM-570.
All ODU pages can be viewed by all three levels of user login. However, only a user with
Administrative or Read/Write privileges can submit changes to the ‘ODU | Config’ and ‘ODU |
Utilities’ pages.

ODU Comms must be enabled in order for the user to be able to fully
access the ‘ODU | Config’, ‘ODU | Status’, and ‘ODU | Utilities’ pages.
IMPORTANT

If access to the ODU pages is attempted and communications parameters have not been properly
established on the CDM-570 end, the following error page is displayed:

As indicated, the user must first enable ODU Comms via the ‘Config Mdm | Modem Utilities
page (see Section 7.2.3.2). For situations where other communications issues arise, e.g., a
problem exists with communication between t he installed ODU and the CDM-570, the following
error message is displayed:

Refer to the pertinent ODU Installation and Operation Manual to troubleshoot the issue, or
contact Comtech EF Data Sales and Customer Support via the means outlined on the ‘Home |
Support’ page (see Sect 7.2.1.3).

K–24
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.4.1.2.1 ODU | Config Page

When properly configured to operate with either the CSAT-5060 or the KST-2000A/B ODU, the
‘ODU | Config’ page displays allows the user to configure the operating parameters specific to the
active unit.

K.4.1.2.1.1 ODU | Config Page (CSAT-5060)

Figure K-5. ODU | Config page (CSAT-5060)

Figure K-5 shows the ‘ODU | Config’ page as it appears with the CSAT-5060 configured as the
ODU. The user can use this page to configure the primary Transmit and Receive Parameters of a
CSAT-5060 ODU.

ODU Selection
If redundant ODUs are used, the page can be toggled between the Online and Offline units by
selecting CSAT #1 or CSAT #2, then clicking Select ODU. A message identifies the active unit
as ‘ONLINE’ in the right-hand side of the box.

Up Converter Parameters
• Frequency: Enter a value in MHz
• Attenuation: Enter a value in dB
• Slope Mode: From the drop-down menu, select Manual or Calibrated
• Slope Adjust (Manual Mode Only): Select the desired setting from the drop-down
menu
• Mute: From the drop-down menu, select Enabled or Disabled
• Gain Offset (1:1 Redundancy Only): Select the desired setting from the drop-down
menu

K–25
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

• Amplifier: From the drop-down menu, select On or Off

Down Converter Parameters

• Frequency: Enter a value in MHz
• Attenuation: Enter a value in dB
• Slope Mode: From the drop-down menu, select Manual or Calibrated
• Slope Adjust (Manual Mode Only): Select the desired setting from the drop-down
menu
• Mute: From the drop-down menu, select Enabled or Disabled
• Gain Offset (1:1 Redundancy Only): Select the desired setting from the drop-down
menu

Unit Parameters
• Mute Mode: From the drop-down menu, select Muted after freq change or Unmuted
after freq change
• Auto Fault Recovery, Cold Start, and Ext Reference Fault Logic: From the drop-
down menus, select Enabled or Disabled
• Reference Oscillator Adjust: Enter a value from 0-255

LNA Parameters
• Current Alarm Window: Enter a value of 20-50, or 99 to disable this feature
• Current Source: From the drop-down menu, select Enabled or Disabled
• Fault Logic: From the drop-down menu, select Summary or No Summary

ODU Circuit Identification

Enter an ODU Circuit Identification name of up to 24 alphanumeric characters.

Once the desired settings have been made on this page, the user should then click [Submit] as
needed in order to save those changes.

K–26
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.4.1.2.1.2 ODU | Config Page (KST-2000A/B)

Figure K-6. ODU | Config page (KST-2000A/B)

Figure K-6 shows the ‘ODU | Config’ page with the KST-2000A/B configured as the ODU. The
user can use this page to configure the primary Transmit and Receive Parameters of a
KST-2000A/B ODU.

Up Converter Parameters
• Frequency: Enter a value in MHz
• Attenuation: Enter a value in dB
• Output: From the drop-down menu, select On or Off

Down Converter Parameters

• Frequency: Enter a value in MHz
• Attenuation: Enter a value in dB
• Rx Band (For KST-2000B Only): From the drop-down menu, select band A (10950 to
11700 MHz), band B (11700 to 12200 MHz), or band C (12250 to 12750 MHz).

HPA Parameters
• HPA Power Enable: From the drop-down menu, select On or Off
• HPA Fault Logic: From the drop-down menu, select Summary or No Summary

LNA Parameters
• LNA Power Enable: From the drop-down menu, select On or Off
• LNA Fault Logic: From the drop-down menu, select Summary or No Summary

K–27
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

Unit Parameters
• AGC (Automatic Gain Control): From the drop-down menu, select On or Off
• Reference Oscillator Adjust: Enter a value from 0-255
• Circuit ID: Enter a Circuit Identification name of up to 24 alphanumeric characters
• Lock Mode: From the drop-down menu, select On or Off
Once the desired settings have been made on this page, the user should then click [Submit] as
needed in order to save those changes.

K.4.1.2.2 ODU | Status Page

Note: The appearance of the ‘ODU | Status’ page changes depending on which type of ODU had
been configured for operation with the CDM-570. These pages provide the user with read-only
status windows pertaining to the current operating condition for either the CSAT-5060 or the
KST-2000A/B ODUs.

K.4.1.2.2.1 ODU | Status Page (CSAT-5060)

Figure K-7. ODU | Status page (CSAT-5060)

Figure K-7 shows the ‘ODU | Status’ page as it appears with the CSAT-5060 configured as the
ODU.
This page provides the user with a read-only status window pertaining to the ODU’s Maintenance
Parameters; Alarms; and the number of Unread Events in the Events Log.

ODU Selection
If redundant ODUs are used, the CSAT-5060 ‘ODU | Status’ page can be toggled between the
Online and Offline units by selecting CSAT #1 or CSAT #2, then clicking [Select ODU]. A
message identifies the currently active unit as ‘ONLINE’ in the right-hand side of the box.

K–28
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.4.1.2.2.2 ODU | Status Page (KST-2000A/B)

Figure K-8. ODU | Status page (KST-2000A/B)

Figure K-8 shows the ‘ODU | Status’ page as it appears with the KST-2000A/B configured as the
ODU. The message bar at top identifies the ODU Type and HPA Type.
The KST-2000A/B ‘ODU | Status’ page provides the user with a read-only status window that
summarizes the fault status of the KST-2000A/B ODU:
• Common Equipment
• Reference
• AGC
• LNA
• HPA
• Up Converter
• Down Converter

K–29
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.4.1.2.3 ODU | Utilities Page

Note: The appearance of the ‘ODU | Utilities’ page changes depending on which type of ODU
had been configured for operation with the CDM-570. This page is used to configure various
ODU utility functions.

K.4.1.2.3.1 ODU | Utilities Page (CSAT-5060)

Figure K-9. ODU | Utilities page (CSAT-5060)

Figure K-9 shows the ‘ODU | Utilities’ page as it appears with the CSAT-5060 configured as the
ODU.

ODU Selection
If redundant ODUs are used, the CSAT-5060 ‘ODU | Utilities’ page can be toggled between the
Online and Offline units by selecting CSAT #1 or CSAT #2 in the ODU Selection: box, then
clicking [Select ODU]. A message identifies the currently active unit as ‘ONLINE’ in the right-
hand side of the box.

Force 1:1 Switch

If redundant ODUs are used, and the selected unit is currently the Online unit, this will force a
switchover so the unit will then be in ‘Standby’ mode. The command is only valid for the Online
unit in a 1:1 pair.

K–30
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

Re-Calibrate LNA Current

Click to recalibrate the LNA Current.

Redundancy Box Mode

Select Automatic or Manual, then click [Submit] as needed to save those changes.

ODU Date and Time

• The user may enter a date using international format in the form DD/MM/YY
(where DD = day [01 to 31], MM = month [01 to 12], and YY = year [00 to 99]).
• The user may enter a time using HH:MM:SS format
(where HH = hour [00 to 23], MM = minutes [00 to 59], and SS = seconds [00 to 59]).
Once the desired date and time have been entered in this section, the user should then click
[Enter Date/Time] as needed to save these changes.

ODU Stored Events

This window provides a visual record of the ODU stored events in a scrollable window.
• Read Next Five Events: Click to buffer the next group of five stored events into the
Events window.
• Clear Stored Events: Click to wipe clean the stored events log.
• Initialize Events Pointer: Click to Selecting this button to reset the log’s internal
pointer.
• Unread Events: Displays the total number of unread stored events in the Events
window. As stored event groups are displayed, this number adjusts downward
accordingly.
Once the desired settings have been entered, the user should then click [Submit] as needed to
execute update of this section.

K–31
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix K MN/CDM570L.IOM

K.4.1.2.3.2 ODU | Utilities Page (KST-2000A/B)

Figure K-10. ODU | Utilities page (KST-2000A/B)

Figure K-10 shows the ‘ODU | Utilities’ page, as it appears with the KST-2000A/B configured as
the ODU. The message bar at top identifies the ODU Type and HPA Type.
The KST-2000A/B ‘ODU | Utilities’ page provides the user with a read-only status window that
identifies the configured ODU chassis’ installed component assembly numbers and serial
numbers, and firmware numbers and versions.

K–32
 Appendix L. CDM-570L ODU
(BUC, LNB) OPERATION

L.1 Introduction
The user can fully configure, monitor, and control an ODU (Outdoor Unit) – the mnemonic for a
BUC (Block Up Converter) or LNB (Low-Noise Block Down Converter) – from the CDM-570L
in the following ways:
• By using ODU remote commands through Serial Remote or Telnet;
• By using the keypad and display via the front panel of a CDM-570L Modem;
• By using the CDM-570L Base Modem Web Server Interface;
• By using the SNMP Interface with the CDM-570L BUC or LNB MIB.

L.2 ODU Remote Control Address Setup

The ODU connected to a CDM-570L Modem through FSK can be remotely monitored and
controlled by using ODU remote commands through Serial Remote or Telnet. The address of the
ODU is set up as follows:
• For local-end ODUs:
o Use Modem’s RC address + 1 for Standalone unit or Online unit in a 1:1 Redundancy
System;
o Use Modem’s RC address + 2 for Offline unit in a 1:1 Redundancy System.
• For distant-end ODUs in an EDMAC setup:
o Use EDMAC Slave Address (ESA) Range + 4 for Standalone unit or Online unit in a
1:1 Redundancy System;
o Use EDMAC Slave Address (ESA) Range + 5 for Offline unit in a 1:1 Redundancy
System.

L–1
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.3 ODU Operations via the CDM-570L Front Panel

LED Vacuum Fluorescent

Indicators Keypad Display (VFD)

Figure L-1. CDM-570L Front Panel View

The user can configure, monitor and control BUC/LNB operation via the CDM-570L front panel,
using the keypad and display. Nested menus are used, which display all available options, and
prompt the user to carry out a required action.

Figure L-1 identifies the key features of the CDM-570L front panel; their purpose is summarized
0

as follows:

Feature Description

LED Used to indicate the operational status of the

Indicators CDM-570L Modem.

Used to select and navigate the available

Keypad CDM-570L menu functions as displayed on
the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD).

Used to fully control and monitor operation of

the CDM-570L Modem. Consisting of two
Vacuum
lines with a width of 24 characters each,
Fluorescent
nested menus displayed on the VFD provide
Display (VFD)
all available options and prompt the user to
carry out a required action via the keypad.

For in-depth explanations of the function and operation of these features, refer to Chapter 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATION.

L–2
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

Figure L-2 identifies the CDM-570L front panel menu hierarchies that pertain specifically to the
configuration, monitor and control of a BUC or LNB. In this particular figure, menu branches that
incorporate ODU operations are shown in bold; menu content that is dedicated to ODU operations
is additionally italicized.

Figure L-2. CDM-570L ODU Operation Principal Menu Tree

Note: The ODU menu branches depicted are accessible from the CDM-570L front panel menu
only when the presence of an ODU is detected. Also note that, as this appendix deals strictly with
ODU operations, Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL OPERATION provides a complete overview for
any CDM-570L menu operations or selections not explicitly defined in this appendix.

L–3
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.3.1 SELECT: (Main) Menu

SELECT: Config Test Info
Monitor Save/Ld Util ODU
The following table identifies the menu branch, its content section in this appendix, and the
functional description of each branch that incorporates or is dedicated to ODU-specific
operations:

Menu Branch Description

(Appendix Sect.)

Config (L.3.2) (Configuration) Permits the user to configure the ODU.

Permits the user to monitor the current status of the ODU and view the log of stored
Monitor (L.3.3)
events for the ODU.

(Outdoor Unit) Permits the user to monitor and control a Comtech EF Data RF
ODU (L.3.4)
Transceiver, if connected.

Select Config, Monitor, or ODU using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

L.3.2 (SELECT:) Config (Configuration)

CONFIG: Rem All Tx Rx CEx
Frame Intfc Ref Mask ODU
For ODU operations, select Mask or ODU using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

L.3.2.1 (SELECT:) CONFIG Æ Mask

Alarm Mask: Transmit
Receive Ref BUC LNB (◄►)
For ODU operations, select BUC or LNB using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

L.3.2.1.1 (SELECT:) CONFIG ÆAlarm Mask: BUC

BUC Alarm:
Active Masked (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Active or Masked using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. If the user
selects Masked, no alarm will be generated.

L.3.2.1.2 (SELECT:) CONFIG ÆAlarm Mask: LNB

LNB Alarm:
Active Masked (◄ ►,ENT)
Select Active or Masked using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. If the user
selects Masked, no alarm will be generated.

L–4
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.3.2.2 (SELECT:) Config ÆODU

ODU (Outdoor Unit):
BUC LNB (◄ ►,ENTER)

The ODU (Outdoor Unit) configuration menu permits the user to choose between controlling and
monitoring either a BUC (Block Upconverter) or an LNB (Low-Noise Block Downconverter).
Select BUC or LNB using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

L.3.2.2.1 (SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) ÆBUC

BUC: M&C-FSK DC-Power
10MHz Alarm LO Mix (◄ ►)
Select M&C-FSK, DC-Power, 10MHz, Alarm, LO, or Mix using the ◄ ► arrow keys,
then press ENTER.

If an FSK-capable BUC is employed, provides access to a further set of

M&C-FSK
menus that define the FSK setup, and use it for control and monitor.

If a BUC supply is installed, permits the user to turn DC power ON or

DC-Power
OFF.
Permits the user to turn the 10MHz frequency reference for the BUC ON
10MHz
or OFF.
Permits the user to define the upper and lower limits for a current
Alarm ‘window’. If the measured BUC current falls outside this window, an
alarm is generated.
Permits the user to define the LO frequency used in the BUC. This is
LO then used in the display of RF frequency in the CONFIG: Tx Æ Freq
menu.
Permits the user to define the sense of the frequency translation –
Mix
either high-side mix or low-side mix.

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ BUC: M&C-FSK

BUC M&C(FSK): FSK-Comms
Address Tx-On/Off (◄ ►)
Select Comms, Address, or Tx-On/Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If FSK-Comms is selected:
BUC M&C FSK Comms:
On Off (◄ ►,ENTER)
This menu turns the FSK between the modem and BUC either ON or OFF if an
FSK-capable BUC is employed. Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then
press ENTER.

L–5
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

If Address is selected:
BUC FSK Address: 01
(▲ ▼,ENTER)
This menu permits the user to enter the logical address of the BUC. The valid range is
from 01 to 15. Edit the value of the address using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press
ENTER.
If Tx-On/Off is selected:
BUC RF Output:
On Off (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ BUC: DC-Power

BUC DC Power:
On Off (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ BUC: 10MHz

BUC 10MHz Reference:
On Off (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ BUC: Alarm

Set BUC Current Alarm:
Upper Lower (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select Upper or Lower using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If Upper is selected:
BUC Current Alarm Upper
Limit:1200mA (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the BUC Current Alarm Upper limit by first selecting the digit to be edited using
the ◄ ► arrow keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys.
Press ENTER when done. The range of current is 500 to 4000 mA.
If Lower is selected:
BUC Current Alarm Lower
Limit:1200mA (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the BUC Current Alarm Lower limit by first selecting the digit to be edited using
the ◄ ► arrow keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys.
Press ENTER when done. The range of current is 0 to 3000 mA.

L–6
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ BUC: LO

BUC LO Frequency:
12000 MHz (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENTER)
Edit the value of the BUC LO frequency by first selecting the digit to be edited using the
◄ ► arrow keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press
ENTER when done. The valid range is from 3000 to 65000 MHz.
Note: This value is used to display the RF frequency of the modem/BUC combination. If
the default value of 00000 is entered here, then no RF frequency will be displayed on the
CONFIG: Tx Æ Freq menu.

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ BUC: Mix

BUC Frequency Mix:
High-Side Low-Side (◄ ►)
Select High-Side or Low-Side using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

L.3.2.2.2 (SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ LNB

LNB: DC-Voltage 10MHz
Alarm LO Mix (◄ ►, ENT)
Select DC-Voltage, 10MHz, Alarm, LO, or Mix using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER.

Selects Power OFF, 13, 18, or 24 volts as the LNB power supply
DC-Voltage
output voltage.

Permits the user to turn the 10MHz frequency reference for the BUC
10MHz
ON or OFF.
Permits the user to define the upper and lower limits for a current
Alarm ‘window’. If the measured LNB current falls outside this window, an
alarm is generated.
Permits the user to define the LO frequency used in the LNB. This is
LO then used in the display of RF frequency in the CONFIG RX, RX
FREQUENCY menu.
Permits the user to define the sense of the frequency translation –
Mix
either high-side mix or low-side mix.

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ LNB: DC-Voltage

LNB DC Supply Voltage:
13 volts (◄ ►,ENTER)
Edit the value of the LNB supply voltage using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER
when done. The choices are 13 volts, 18 volts, 24 volts, or Power OFF.

L–7
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ LNB: 0MHz

LNB 10MHz Reference:
On Off (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ LNB: Alarm

Set LNB Current Alarm:
Upper Lower (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select Upper or Lower using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

If Upper is selected:
LNB Current Alarm Upper
Limit: 200mA (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the LNB Current Alarm Upper limit by first selecting the digit to be edited using
the ◄ ► arrow keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys.
Press ENTER when done. The range of current is 50 to 600 mA.

If Lower is selected:
LNB Current Alarm Lower
Limit: 050mA (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENT)
Edit the LNB Current Alarm Lower limit by first selecting the digit to be edited using
the ◄ ► arrow keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys.
Press ENTER when done. The range of current is 10 to 400 mA.

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ LNB: LO

LNB LO Frequency:
12000 MHz (◄ ►,▲ ▼,ENTER)
Edit the value of the LNB LO frequency by first selecting the digit to be edited using the
◄ ► arrow keys, then changing the value of the digit using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Press
ENTER when done. The valid range is from 3000 to 65000 MHz.
Note: This value is used to display the RF frequency of the modem/BUC combination. If
a value of 00000 is entered here (the default), then no RF frequency will be displayed on
the CONFIG: Tx Æ Freq menu.

(SELECT:) Config Æ ODU (Outdoor Unit) Æ LNB: Mix

LNB Frequency Mix:
High-Side Low-Side (◄ ►)
Select High-Side or Low-Side using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

L–8
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.3.3 (SELECT:) Monitor

MONITOR:Alarms Stats
Event-Log Parameters
For ODU operation, select Alarms or Parameters using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

L.3.3.1 MONITOR: Alarms

Live Alarms:Unit Receive
Transmit ODU (◄ ►,ENTER)

The CDM-570L uses a system of Fault Prioritization. In each category of fault, only
the highest priority fault is displayed. For instance, if the demodulator is unlocked,
IMPORTANT
it is irrelevant if there are other receive faults present. If the demodulator then
locks, but there is a fault of a lower priority present, this will then be displayed.
This also holds true for the faults reported via the remote control. This system
cuts down significantly on unwanted and irrelevant fault reporting.

A comprehensive listing of prioritized ODU faults is as follows:

LISTING OF PRIORITIZED FAULTS

ODU Status 1) BUC PLL lock fault
2) BUC current out of limits
3) BUC voltage out of limits
4) LNB current out of limits
5) LNB voltage out of limits
6) BUC temperature alarm
7) BUC software checksum error

For ODU live alarms, select ODU using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) Monitor Æ Live Alarms: ODU

ODU Alarms: BUC Current
Out of Limits (ENT)
This read-only screen indicates if there are any ODU Alarms. If not, it displays ‘None’.
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

L.3.3.2 MONITOR: Parameters

PARAMETERS: Rx-Params
WAd-Params AUPC ODU
For ODU operation, select ODU using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

L–9
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.3.3.2.1 MONITOR: Parameters Æ ODU

Outdoor Unit Monitor:
BUC LNB (◄ ►,ENTER)
Select BUC or LNB using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.

(SELECT:) Monitor ÆOutdoor Unit Monitor Æ BUC

BUC:DC=47.8V,3.25A SW=05
T=+38C PLL=Flt Pwr=02.1W
The following read-only parameters are displayed:

(DC Power) If a BUC supply is installed, menu displays measured BUC

DC
supply voltage and load current, measured at the Tx-IF connector.
(Temperature) If BUC FSK is enabled, menu displays BUC ambient
T
temperature in °C.
If BUC FSK is enabled, menu displays the M&C software version of the
SW
BUC.
If BUC FSK is enabled, menu displays the fault status of the BUC PLL
PLL
synthesizers.
(Output) If BUC FSK is enabled, menu displays the output power as
Pwr
measured by the BUC power monitor.

Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

(SELECT:) Monitor ÆOutdoor Unit Monitor ÆLNB

LNB Voltage: 13.1 volts
LNB Current: 235 mA(ENT)
The LNB Voltage and Current read-only parameters are displayed. Press ENTER or
CLEAR to return to the previous menu.

L–10
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.4 ODU Operations via the CDM-570L Base Modem Web Server Interface

L.4.1 Base Modem Web Server Interface Overview

The CDM-570L Satellite Modem’s embedded Web Server application provides the user with an
easy to use interface to configure and monitor all aspects of a BUC or LNB. For a complete
overview of the features for this interface, refer to Chapter 7. BASE MODEM WEB SERVER
INTERFACE.

L.4.1.1 ODU-Accessible Base Modem Web Server Home Page

Once a Web browser is
opened and a valid IP
address has been entered,
the CDM-570L Satellite
Base Modem Web Server
Interface “splash” page is
displayed:

The options available through the CDM-570L Base Modem Web Server Interface are illustrated via
the following menu tree – operations not specific to ODU operations appear dimmed and are
explicitly defined in Chapter 7. BASE MODEM WEB SERVER INTERFACE:

Home Admin Config Mdm Stats Maint

Home Access Modem Modem Status Unit Info
Contact Remote Modem Utilities Modem Logs
Support AUPC
Timeslot Selection
BUC
LNB

L–11
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.4.2 ODU (BUC, LNB) Pages

L.4.2.1 Config Mdm | BUC (Block Upconverter)

Figure L-3. Config Mdm | BUC page

Use the ‘Config Mdm | BUC’ page (Figure L-3) to configure Block Upconverter parameters, and
display the BUC status for L-Band operation:

BUC Configuration
• BUC Power Enable, 10 MHz Ref Enable, and Output Power Enable may be turned
ON or OFF.
• The user may assign BUC Low and High Current Limit values ranging from 0 to 4000 mA.
• The user may assign the Tx Lockout Frequency and designate the value as a HIGH (+)
or LOW (-) limit.
• The user may assign a BUC Address of 0 to 15.
Once the desired configuration settings have been made on this page, click [Submit BUC
Controls] as needed to save those changes.

BUC Status
The parameters shown here are read-only and cannot be changed.

L–12
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.4.2.2 Config Mdm | LNB (Low-Noise Block Downconverter)

Figure L-4. Config Mdm | LNB page

Use the ‘Config Mdm | LNB’ page (Figure L-4) to configure Low-Noise Block Downconverter
parameters, and display the LNB status for L-Band operation.

LNB Control
• LNB DC Power and LNB Reference Enable may be turned ON or OFF.
• The user may assign LNB Low and High Current Threshold values ranging from 0 to
500 mA.
• The user may assign the Rx Lockout Frequency and designate the value as a HIGH (+)
or LOW (-) limit.

Once the desired configuration settings have been made on this page, click [Submit LNB
Controls] as needed to save those changes.

LNB Status
The parameters shown here are read-only and cannot be changed.

L–13
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.5 ODU Operations via the CDM-570L IP Module Web Server Interface

L.5.1 IP Module Web Server Interface Overview

As it is with the CDM-570L Base Modem Web Server Interface, the optional IP Module’s
embedded Web Server application provides the user with an easy to use interface to configure
and monitor all aspects of a BUC or LNB. For a complete overview of the features for this
interface, refer to Sect 13.6. IP Module Web Server Interface.

L.5.1.1 ODU-Accessible IP Module Web Server Home Page

Once a Web browser is opened and a
valid IP address has been entered, the
CDM-570L Satellite Base Modem
Web Server Interface “splash” page
is displayed:

The options available through the CDM-570L IP Module Web Server Interface are illustrated via
the following menu tree – operations not specific to ODU operations appear dimmed and are
explicitly defined in Section 13.6. IP Module Web Server Interface:

Home Admin Modem IP Stats Maint

Home Summary Modem Interface Ethernet Unit Info

Contact Mode Utilities Routes Routers Operations

Support Access Status Multicast QoS*1 Save

Logoff Features Logs QoS Mode WAN Reboot

Remote BUC Qos Compression

Encryption LNB ARP

VLAN

IGMP

Redundancy

L–14
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.5.2 ODU (BUC, LNB) Pages

L.5.2.1 Modem | BUC (Block Upconverter)

Figure L-5. Modem | BUC page

Use the ‘Modem | BUC’ page (Figure L-5) to configure Block Upconverter parameters, and display
the BUC status for L-Band operation:

BUC Configuration
• Using the drop-down menus, BUC RF Output, 10 MHz Reference, and DC Power
Control may be set to Enable or Disable.
• Using the drop-down menu, the user may select a BUC Address of 1 to 15.
• The user may assign the LO (Lockout) Frequency and designate the value as a HIGH
(+) or LOW (-) limit.
• The user may assign BUC Current Alarm Upper and Lower Limit values ranging from 0
to 4000 mA.

BUC Status
Using the drop-down menu, the BUC PLL Alarm may be set to Locked, Unlocked, or N/A. The
remaining parameters shown here are read-only and cannot be changed.
Once the desired configuration settings have been made on this page, click [Submit] as needed to
save those changes.

L–15
CDM-570/570L Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module Revision 9
Appendix L MN/CDM570L.IOM

L.5.2.2 Modem | LNB (Low-Noise Block Downconverter)

Figure L-6. Modem | LNB page

Use the ‘Modem | LNB’ page (Figure L-6) to configure Low-Noise Block Downconverter
parameters, and display the LNB status for L-Band operation:
• Using the drop-down menu, the LNB DC Supply Voltage may be set to Off, 13_Volts,
18_Volts, or 24_Volts.
• Using the drop-down menu, the LNB 10 MHz Reference may be set to On or Off.
• The user may assign LNB Current Alarm Upper and Lower Limit values ranging from 0 to
600 mA.
• The user may assign the LNB LO (Lockout) Frequency and designate the value as a
HIGH (+) or LOW (-) limit.
The LNB Voltage and LNB Current parameters displayed here are read-only and cannot be
changed.
Once the desired configuration settings have been made on this page, click [Submit] as needed to
save those changes.

L–16
 METRIC CONVERSIONS

Units of Length

Unit Centimeter Inch Foot Yard Mile Meter Kilometer Millimeter

1 centimeter — 0.3937 0.03281 0.01094 6.214 x 10-6 0.01 — —

1 inch 2.540 — 0.08333 0.2778 1.578 x 10-5 0.254 — 25.4

1 foot 30.480 12.0 — 0.3333 1.893 x 10-4 0.3048 — —

1 yard 91.44 36.0 3.0 — 5.679 x 10-4 0.9144 — —

1 meter 100.0 39.37 3.281 1.094 6.214 x 10-4 — — —

1 mile 1.609 x 105 6.336 x 104 5.280 x 103 1.760 x 103 — 1.609 x 103 1.609 —

1 mm — 0.03937 — — — — — —

1 kilometer — — — — 0.621 — — —

Temperature Conversions

Temperature ° Fahrenheit ° Centigrade Formulas

Water freezes 32 0 ° C = (F - 32) * 0.555

Water boils 212 100 ° F = (C * 1.8) + 32

Absolute 0 -459.69 -273.16

Units of Weight

Ounce Ounce Pound Pound

Unit Gram Kilogram
Avoirdupois Troy Avoirdupois Troy

1 gram — 0.03527 0.03215 0.002205 0.002679 0.001

1 oz. avoir. 28.35 — 0.9115 0.0625 0.07595 0.02835

1 oz. troy 31.10 1.097 — 0.06857 0.08333 0.03110

1 lb. avoir. 453.6 16.0 14.58 — 1.215 0.4536

1 lb. Troy 373.2 13.17 12.0 0.8229 — 0.3732

1 kilogram 1.0 x 103 35.27 32.15 2.205 2.679 —

2114 WEST 7TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA 85281 USA
480 • 333 • 2200 PHONE
480 • 333 • 2161 FAX